Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbitt Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its
most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$142
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,500
|
|
Units sold
|
2,300
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$22
|
|
Direct labor
|
$57
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$82,500
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$41,400
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach?
A) $55,200
B) $82,500
C) $137,700
D) $123,900
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbitt Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its
most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$142
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,500
|
|
Units sold
|
2,300
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$22
|
|
Direct labor
|
$57
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$82,500
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$41,400
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach?
A) $137,700
B) $55,200
C) $41,400
D) $82,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbitt Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its
most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$142
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,500
|
|
Units sold
|
2,300
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$22
|
|
Direct labor
|
$57
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$82,500
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$41,400
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $4,900
B) $11,500
C) $6,600
D) ($11,100)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbitt Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its
most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$142
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,500
|
|
Units sold
|
2,300
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$22
|
|
Direct labor
|
$57
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$82,500
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$41,400
|
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
A) ($11,100)
B) $11,500
C) $6,600
D) $4,900
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Feasal Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$108
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,700
|
|
Units sold
|
7,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$26
|
|
Direct labor
|
$38
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$184,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$90,000
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $71
B) $67
C) $95
D) $91
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Feasal Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$108
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,700
|
|
Units sold
|
7,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$26
|
|
Direct labor
|
$38
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$184,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$90,000
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
A) $71
B) $67
C) $95
D) $91
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Feasal Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$108
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,700
|
|
Units sold
|
7,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$26
|
|
Direct labor
|
$38
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$184,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$90,000
|
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
A) $2,700
B) $7,500
C) $4,800
D) ($10,700)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Feheln Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$114
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,300
|
|
Units sold
|
7,200
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$30
|
|
Direct labor
|
$53
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$8
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$73,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$57,600
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $94
B) $86
C) $96
D) $104
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Feheln Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$114
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,300
|
|
Units sold
|
7,200
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$30
|
|
Direct labor
|
$53
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$8
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$73,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$57,600
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
A) $104
B) $94
C) $96
D) $86
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Feheln Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$114
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,300
|
|
Units sold
|
7,200
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$30
|
|
Direct labor
|
$53
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$8
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$73,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$57,600
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $1,000
B) $14,400
C) $13,400
D) $4,800
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jamil Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$71
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
400
|
|
Units produced
|
8,100
|
|
Units sold
|
8,200
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$20
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$64,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$139,400
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $49
B) $41
C) $53
D) $45
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jamil Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$71
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
400
|
|
Units produced
|
8,100
|
|
Units sold
|
8,200
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$20
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$64,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$139,400
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
A) $45
B) $53
C) $41
D) $49
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Delphi Company has developed a new product that will be marketed for the first time during the next fiscal year. Although the Marketing Department estimates that 35,000 units could be sold at $36 per unit, Delphi”s management has allocated only enough manufacturing capacity to produce a maximum of 25,000 units of the new product annually. The fixed expenses associated with the new product are budgeted at $450,000 for the year. The variable expenses of the new product are $16 per unit.
Required:
a. How many units of the new product must Delphi sell during the next fiscal year in order to break even on the product?
b. What is the profit Delphi would earn on the new product if all of the manufacturing capacity allocated by management is used and the product is sold for $36 per unit?
c. What is the degree of operating leverage for the new product if 25,000 units are sold for $36 per unit?
d. The Marketing Department would like more manufacturing capacity to be devoted to the new product. What would be the percentage increase in net operating income for the new product if its unit sales could be expanded by 10% without any increase in fixed expenses and without any change in the unit selling price and unit variable expense?
e. Delphi”s management has stipulated that the new product must earn a profit of at least $125,000 in the next fiscal year. What unit selling price would achieve this target profit if all of the manufacturing capacity allocated by management is usedand all of the output can be sold at that selling price?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Parkins Company produces and sells a single product. The company”s income statement for the most recent month is given below:
|
Sales (6,000 units at $40 per unit)
|
|
$240,000
|
|
Less manufacturing costs:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$48,000
|
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
60,000
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
12,000
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
30,000
|
150,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
90,000
|
|
Less selling and other expenses:
|
|
|
|
Variable selling and other expenses
|
24,000
|
|
|
Fixed selling and other expenses
|
42,000
|
66,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
|
$ 24,000
|
There are no beginning or ending inventories.
Required:
a. Compute the company”s monthly break even point in units of product.
b. What would the company”s monthly net operating income be if sales increased by 25% and there is no change in total fixed expenses?
c. What dollar sales must the company achieve in order to earn a net operating income of $50,000 per month?
d. The company has decided to automate a portion of its operations. The change will reduce direct labor costs per unit by 40 percent, but it will double the costs for fixed factory overhead. Compute the new break even point in units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Penury Company offers two products. At present, the following represents the usual results of a month”s operations:
|
|
Product K
|
Product L
|
|
|
|
|
Per
|
|
Per
|
|
|
|
Amount
|
Unit
|
Amount
|
Unit
|
Combined
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$120,000
|
$1.20
|
$80,000
|
$0.80
|
Amount
|
|
Variable expenses
|
60,000
|
0.60
|
60,000
|
0.60
|
$200,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 60,000
|
$0.60
|
$20,000
|
$0.20
|
120,000
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
|
|
|
|
80,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
|
|
|
|
50,000
|
Required:
a. Find the break even point in terms of dollars.
b. Find the margin of safety in terms of dollars.
c. The company is considering decreasing product K”s unit sales to 80,000 and increasing product L”s unit sales to 180,000, leaving unchanged the selling price per unit, variable expense per unit, and total fixed expenses. Would you advise adopting this plan?
d. Refer to (c) above. Under the new plan, find the break even point in terms of dollars.
e. Under the new plan in (c) above, find the margin of safety in terms of dollars.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The inventory value shown on the balance sheet is generally higher under absorption costing than under variable costing.
2. Under variable costing, inventoriable product costs consist of direct materials, direct labor, variable manufacturing overhead and variable selling and administration expenses.
3. Under variable costing, an increase in the fixed factory overhead will have no effect on the unit product cost.
4. Under the absorption costing method, a portion of fixed manufacturing overhead cost is allocated to each unit of product.
5. Under variable costing, it is possible to defer a portion of the fixed manufacturing overhead costs of the current period to future periods through the inventory account.
6. Under absorption costing, a portion of fixed manufacturing overhead cost is released from inventory when sales volume exceeds production volume.
7. Contribution margin and gross margin mean the same thing.
8. When reconciling variable costing and absorption costing net operating income, fixed manufacturing overhead costs deferred in inventory under absorption costing should be deducted from variable costing net operating income to arrive at the absorption costing net operating income.
9. If production equals sales for the period, absorption costing and variable costing will produce the same net operating income under LIFO.
10. When the number of units in inventories decrease between the beginning and end of the period, absorption costing net operating income will typically be greater than variable costing net operating income.
11. When viewed over the long term, accumulated net operating income will be the same for variable and absorption costing if there are no ending inventories at the end of the term.
12. Under absorption costing, the profit for a period is not affected by changes in inventory.
13. When using absorption costing, a company may be able to show a profit even if it is operating below the breakeven point.
14. Variable costing is more compatible with cost volume profit analysis than is absorption costing.
15. Just In Time (JIT) methods generally increase the difference between absorption and variable costing net operating income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following costs at a manufacturing company would be treated as a product cost under both absorption costing and variable costing?
| |
|
Variable
|
| |
Variable
|
selling and
|
| |
overhead
|
administrative
|
|
A)
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
B)
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
C)
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
D)
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,900
|
|
Units sold
|
2,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$27
|
|
Direct labor
|
$20
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$72,500
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$2,500
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $57
B) $53
C) $78
D) $82
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$85
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
5,000
|
|
Units sold
|
4,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$19
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$10
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$110,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$69,000
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach?
A) $179,000
B) $110,000
C) $115,000
D) $225,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$78
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
5,300
|
|
Units sold
|
4,900
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$31
|
|
Direct labor
|
$14
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$68,900
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$58,800
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach?
A) $152,200
B) $83,300
C) $68,900
D) $58,800
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data pertain to last year”s operations at Tredder Corporation, a company that produces a single product:
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
20,000
|
|
Units sold
|
19,000
|
|
Selling Price per unit
|
$100.00
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$12.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
$25.00
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3.00
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$2.00
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$500,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$600,000
|
What was the variable costing net operating income last year?
A) $12,000
B) $57,000
C) $2,000
D) $27,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$102
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
8,700
|
|
Units sold
|
8,300
|
|
Unit in ending inventory
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$29
|
|
Direct labor
|
$31
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$269,700
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$8,300
|
The total contribution margin for the month under the variable costing approach is:
A) $282,200
B) $74,700
C) $332,000
D) $12,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$123
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
5,900
|
|
Units sold
|
5,700
|
|
Unit in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$40
|
|
Direct labor
|
$32
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$135,700
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$108,300
|
The total gross margin for the month under the absorption costing approach is:
A) $245,100
B) $162,100
C) $142,500
D) $5,700
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$86
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
3,500
|
|
Units sold
|
3,400
|
|
Unit in ending inventory
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$37
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$10
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$24,500
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$27,200
|
The total gross margin for the month under the absorption costing approach is:
A) $81,200
B) $74,800
C) $64,600
D) $13,600
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$85
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,900
|
|
Units sold
|
2,700
|
|
Unit in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$22
|
|
Direct labor
|
$13
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$46,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$51,300
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $8,100
B) $15,700
C) $18,900
D) $3,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$103
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
1,700
|
|
Units sold
|
1,600
|
|
Unit in ending inventory
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$46
|
|
Direct labor
|
$14
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$4
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$11,900
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$22,400
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $7,300
B) $14,400
C) $13,700
D) $700
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$103
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
1,700
|
|
Units sold
|
1,400
|
|
Unit in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$39
|
|
Direct labor
|
$32
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$6,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$8,400
|
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
A) $14,200
B) ($8,900)
C) $1,200
D) $15,400
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$122
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
8,600
|
|
Units sold
|
8,500
|
|
Unit in ending inventory
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$34
|
|
Direct labor
|
$37
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$7
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$292,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$34,000
|
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
A) $17,000
B) $3,400
C) $5,800
D) $13,600
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cutterski Corporation manufactures a propeller. Shown below is Cutterski’s cost structure:
|
|
Variable
|
Total fixed
|
|
|
cost per
|
cost for the
|
|
|
propeller
|
year
|
|
Manufacturing cost
|
$114
|
$810,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$20
|
$243,000
|
In its first year of operations, Cutterski produced 60,000 propellers but only sold 54,000.
What is the total cost that would be assigned to Cutterski”s finished goods inventory at the end of the first year of operations under the variable costing method?
A) $765,000
B) $684,000
C) $804,000
D) $912,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cutterski Corporation manufactures a propeller. Shown below is Cutterski’s cost structure:
|
|
Variable
|
Total fixed
|
|
|
cost per
|
cost for the
|
|
|
propeller
|
year
|
|
Manufacturing cost
|
$114
|
$810,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$20
|
$243,000
|
In its first year of operations, Cutterski produced 60,000 propellers but only sold 54,000.
Which costing method (variable or absorption) will generate a higher net operating income in Cutterski”s first year of operations and by how much?
A) variable by $81,000
B) variable by $108,000
C) absorption by $81,000
D) absorption by $108,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$129
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,300
|
|
Units sold
|
6,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$11
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$88,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$97,600
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $87
B) $101
C) $112
D) $98
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$129
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,300
|
|
Units sold
|
6,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$11
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$88,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$97,600
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
A) $101
B) $98
C) $87
D) $112
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following budgeted income statement was prepared by Fullton Corporation:
|
Sales (100 units at $100 a unit)
|
|
$10,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
$1,500
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
1,400
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
1,000
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
500
|
4,400
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
5,600
|
|
Selling expenses:
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
600
|
|
|
Fixed
|
1,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses:
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
500
|
|
|
Fixed
|
1,000
|
3,100
|
|
Net operating income
|
|
$ 2,500
|
What would the net operating income be if sales increase by 25%?
A) $3,125
B) $3,750
C) $4,000
D) $5,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following budgeted income statement was prepared by Fullton Corporation:
|
Sales (100 units at $100 a unit)
|
|
$10,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
$1,500
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
1,400
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
1,000
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
500
|
4,400
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
5,600
|
|
Selling expenses:
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
600
|
|
|
Fixed
|
1,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses:
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
500
|
|
|
Fixed
|
1,000
|
3,100
|
|
Net operating income
|
|
$ 2,500
|
What would be the sales at the break even point if fixed factory overhead increases by $1,700?
A) $6,700
B) $8,400
C) $8,666
D) $9,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Barnes Corporation manufactures skateboards and is in the process of preparing next year’s budget. The pro forma income statement for the current year is presented below.
|
Sales (100 units at $100 a unit)
|
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
$250,000
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
150,000
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
75,000
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
100,000
|
575,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
925,000
|
|
Selling expenses:
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
200,000
|
|
|
Fixed
|
250,000
|
450,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
|
$ 475,000
|
The break even point (rounded to the nearest dollar) for Barnes Corporation for the current year is
A. $146,341.
B. $636,364.
C. $729,730.
D. $181,818.
E. $658,537.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Barnes Corporation manufactures skateboards and is in the process of preparing next year’s budget. The pro forma income statement for the current year is presented below.
|
Sales (100 units at $100 a unit)
|
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
$250,000
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
150,000
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
75,000
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
100,000
|
575,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
925,000
|
|
Selling expenses:
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
200,000
|
|
|
Fixed
|
250,000
|
450,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
|
$ 475,000
|
For the coming year, the management of Barnes Corporation anticipates a 10 percent increase in sales, a 12 percent increase in variable costs, and a $45,000 increase in fixed expenses.
The break even point for next year would be
A. $729,027.
B. $862,103.
C. $214,018.
D. $474,000.
E. $700,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Holger Incorporated, which produces and sells a single product, has provided the following
data:
|
Sales
|
2,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$60 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$40 per unit
|
|
Fixed expense
|
$20,000
|
Consider each of the following questions independently.
If the dollar contribution margin per unit is increased by 10% and if total fixed expense is decreased by 20%, net operating income is expected to:
A) increase by $2,000
B) increase by $12,000
C) increase by $8,000
D) increase by $16,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Holger Incorporated, which produces and sells a single product, has provided the following
data:
|
Sales
|
2,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$60 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$40 per unit
|
|
Fixed expense
|
$20,000
|
Consider each of the following questions independently.
If the sales volume decreases by 25% and the variable expense per unit increases by 15%, net operating income is expected to:
A) decrease by $19,000
B) decrease by $1,000
C) increase by $1,750
D) decrease by $15,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Holger Incorporated, which produces and sells a single product, has provided the following
data:
|
Sales
|
2,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$60 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$40 per unit
|
|
Fixed expense
|
$20,000
|
Consider each of the following questions independently.
If the company”s fixed expenses increased by $8,000, how many units must be sold to reach a target net operating income of $36,000:
A) 1,400 units
B) 2,200 units
C) 2,400 units
D) 3,200 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Holger Incorporated, which produces and sells a single product, has provided the following
data:
|
Sales
|
2,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$60 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$40 per unit
|
|
Fixed expense
|
$20,000
|
Consider each of the following questions independently.
If the company”s sales volume in units decreases by 30%, and if it desires a targeted net operating income of $29,000, then the selling price should be:
A) $58.85
B) $60.75
C) $64.50
D) $75.00
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given the following data:
|
|
Total
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales
|
$30,000
|
$10
|
|
Less variable expenses
|
18,000
|
6
|
|
Contribution margin
|
12,000
|
$ 4
|
|
Less fixed expenses
|
9,000
|
|
|
Net operating income
|
$ 3,000
|
|
If sales decrease by 500 units, by how much would fixed expenses have to be reduced to maintain current net operating income?
A) $5,000
B) $3,000
C) $1,500
D) $2,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given the following data:
|
|
Total
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales
|
$30,000
|
$10
|
|
Less variable expenses
|
18,000
|
6
|
|
Contribution margin
|
12,000
|
$ 4
|
|
Less fixed expenses
|
9,000
|
|
|
Net operating income
|
$ 3,000
|
|
The company has an opportunity to secure a special order of 800 units if it is willing to drop the selling price on these units to $9. In addition to the usual variable expenses, the costs of securing the special order would be $1,000. The company”s regular sales would not be affected by the special order. If the special order is accepted, the company”s overall net operating income will:
A) increase $2,400
B) increase $1,400
C) increase $2,200
D) decrease $2,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Junior Bodway, Inc., has provided the following budgeted data:
|
Sales
|
10,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$50 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$30 per unit
|
|
Fixed expense
|
$180,000
|
|
Sales
|
10,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$50 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$30 per unit
|
What is the company”s break even point in sales dollars?
A) $450,000
B) $180,000
C) $300,000
D) $500,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Junior Bodway, Inc., has provided the following budgeted data:
|
Sales
|
10,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$50 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$30 per unit
|
|
Fixed expense
|
$180,000
|
|
Sales
|
10,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$50 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$30 per unit
|
How many units would the company have to sell in order to have a net operating income of $40,000?
A) 20,000 units
B) 9,000 units
C) 11,000 units
D) 7,333 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Junior Bodway, Inc., has provided the following budgeted data:
|
Sales
|
10,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$50 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$30 per unit
|
|
Fixed expense
|
$180,000
|
|
Sales
|
10,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$50 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$30 per unit
|
At the budgeted sales level of 10,000 units, what is the company”s degree of operating leverage?
A) 10.0
B) 6.0
C) 22.5
D) 5.0
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pricher Corporation”s income statement for last year appears below:
|
Sales
|
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$500,000
|
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
150,000
|
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
50,000
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
600,000
|
|
|
Gross margin
|
$500,000
|
1,300,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses:
|
150,000
|
700,000
|
|
Variable
|
100,000
|
|
|
Fixed
|
300,000
|
400,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
|
$ 300,000
|
The break even point last year was:
A) $1,500,000
B) $2,571,429
C) $1,250,000
D) $900,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pricher Corporation”s income statement for last year appears below:
|
Sales
|
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$500,000
|
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
150,000
|
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
50,000
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
600,000
|
|
|
Gross margin
|
$500,000
|
1,300,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses:
|
150,000
|
700,000
|
|
Variable
|
100,000
|
|
|
Fixed
|
300,000
|
400,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
|
$ 300,000
|
The degree of operating leverage last year was:
A) 0.33
B) 2.33
C) 4.00
D) 3.33
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pricher Corporation”s income statement for last year appears below:
|
Sales
|
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$500,000
|
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
150,000
|
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
50,000
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
600,000
|
|
|
Gross margin
|
$500,000
|
1,300,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses:
|
150,000
|
700,000
|
|
Variable
|
100,000
|
|
|
Fixed
|
300,000
|
400,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
|
$ 300,000
|
If fixed selling and administrative expenses increase by $60,000 and sales remain at the $2,000,000 level, what is the margin of safety in sales dollars:
A) $300,000
B) $200,000
C) $500,000
D) $400,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Highjinks Inc. has provided the following budgeted data:
|
Sales
|
20,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$100 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$70 per unit
|
|
Fixed expense
|
$450,000
|
How many units would the company have to sell in order to have a net operating income equal to 5% of total sales dollars?
A) 18,000 units
B) 20,000 units
C) 15,333 units
D) 14,286 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Douglas Corporation produces and sells two models of vacuum cleaners, Standard and Deluxe. Company records show the following data relating to these two products:
|
|
Standard
|
Deluxe
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$140
|
$155
|
|
Variable production costs per unit
|
$110
|
$116
|
|
Variable selling and admin. expense per unit
|
$15
|
$12
|
|
Expected monthly sales in units
|
600
|
1,200
|
The company”s total monthly fixed expense is $15,000.
The break even in sales dollars for the expected sales mix is closest to:
A) $140,000
B) $85,000
C) $107,000
D) $98,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Douglas Corporation produces and sells two models of vacuum cleaners, Standard and Deluxe. Company records show the following data relating to these two products:
|
|
Standard
|
Deluxe
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$140
|
$155
|
|
Variable production costs per unit
|
$110
|
$116
|
|
Variable selling and admin. expense per unit
|
$15
|
$12
|
|
Expected monthly sales in units
|
600
|
1,200
|
The company”s total monthly fixed expense is $15,000.
If the expected monthly sales in units were divided equally between the two models (900 Standard and 900 Deluxe), the break even level of sales would be:
A) the same as with the expected sales mix.
B) higher than with the expected sales mix.
C) lower than with the expected sales mix.
D) cannot be determined with the available data.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Candice Corporation has decided to introduce a new product. The product can be manufactured using either a capital intensive or labor intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality or sales of the product. The estimated manufacturing costs of the two methods are as follows:
|
|
Capital
|
Labor
|
|
|
intensive
|
intensive
|
|
Variable manufacturing cost per unit
|
$14.00
|
$17.60
|
|
Fixed manufacturing cost per year
|
$2,440,000
|
$1,320,000
|
The company”s market research department has recommended an introductory selling price of $30 per unit for the new product. The annual fixed selling and administrative expenses of the new product are $500,000. The variable selling and administrative expenses are $2 per unit regardless of how the new product is manufactured.
Required:
a. Calculate the break even point in units if Candice Corporation uses the:
1. capital intensive manufacturing method.
2. labor intensive manufacturing method.
b. Determine the unit sales volume at which the net operating income is the same for the two manufacturing methods.
c. Assuming sales of 250,000 units, what is the degree of operating leverage if the company uses the:
1. capital intensive manufacturing method.
2. labor intensive manufacturing method.
d. What is your recommendation to management concerning which manufacturing method should be used?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Obtain an annual report Throughout this course, you will be asked to relate the material being studied to actual financial statements. After you complete this course, you will be able to use an organization’s financial statements to make decisions and informed judgments about that organization. The purpose of this assignment is to provide the experience of obtaining a company’s annual report. You may wish to refer to the financial statements in the report during the rest of the course.
Required:
a. Obtain the most recently issued annual report of a publicly owned manufacturing or merchandising corporation of your choice. Do not select a bank, insurance company, financial institution, or public utility. It would be appropriate to select a firm that you know something about or have an interest in. If you don’t know the name or title of a specific individual to contact, address your request to the Shareholder Relations Department. Company addresses are available from several sources, including the following reference books in the library:
Standard & Poor’s Register of Corporations, Directors and Executives,
Vol. 1–Corporations.
Moody’s Handbook of Common Stocks.
Standard & Poor’s Corporation Stock Market Encyclopedia.
Moody’s Industrial Manual.
b. Alternatively, you may be able to obtain an annual report by using information about annual report ordering. By using Intel as your firm name, for example, you will discover that the most recent financial statements can be downloaded into Microsoft Excel files for subsequent manipulation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Read and outline an article The accounting profession is frequently in the news, not always in the most positive light. The purpose of this assignment is to increase your awareness of an issue facing the profession.
Required:
Find, read, outline, and prepare to discuss a brief article from a general audience or business audience publication about accounting and/or the accounting profession.
The article should have been published within the past eight months and should relate to accounting or the accounting profession in general; it should not be about some technical accounting issue. The appropriate topical headings to use in the Business Periodicals Index or the computer based retrieval system to which you have access are accountants, accounting, and/or accounting (specific topic).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify information used in making an informed decision Charlie and Maribelle Brown have owned and operated a retail furniture store for more than 30 years. They have employed an independent CPA during this time to prepare various sales tax, payroll tax, and income tax returns, as well as financial statements for themselves and the bank from which they have borrowed money from time to time. They are considering selling the store but are uncertain about how to establish an asking price.
Required:
What type of information is likely to be included in the material prepared by the CPA that may help the Browns establish an asking price for the store?
Auditor independence Using the search engine you are most comfortable with, identify at least five sources on the general topic of auditor independence. Write a brief memo to provide an update on the current status of the auditor independence tandard setting process. The Business in Practice box on page 12 should serve as the starting point for this exercise. Note: You might find it useful to contrast the opinions expressed by any of the Big 4 accounting firms to those expressed by non accounting professionals.
Find financial information From the set of financial statements acquired for E1.1, determine the following:
a. Who is the chief financial officer?
b. What are the names of the directors?
c. Which firm conducted the audit? Have the auditors reviewed the entire report?
d. What are the names of the financial statements provided?
e. How many pages of explanatory notes accompany the financial statements?
f. In addition to the financial statements, are there other reports? If so, what are they?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–15). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a. Accumulated depreciation
|
p. Earnings per share of common
|
|
b. Balance sheet
|
stock
|
|
c. Accrued liabilities
|
q. Paid in capital
|
|
d. Current assets
|
r. Common stock
|
|
e. Current liabilities
|
s. Additional paid in capital
|
|
f. Merchandise inventory
|
t. Retained earnings
|
|
g. Revenues
|
u. Dividends
|
|
h. Expenses
|
v. Par value
|
|
i. Gains
|
w. Going concern concept
|
|
j. Losses
|
x. Matching concept
|
|
k. Net sales
|
y. Accrual concept
|
|
l. Cost of goods sold
|
z. Opportunity cost
|
|
m. Gross profit
|
|
|
n. Income from operations
|
|
|
o. Net income
|
|
1. The difference between the total amount invested by the owners and the par value or stated value of the stock issued.
2. Outflows or using up of assets or incurrence of liabilities during a period from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or carrying out other activities that constitute the entity’s major operations.
3. The financial statement that is a list of the entity’s assets, liabilities, and owners’ equity at a point in time.
4. A document distributed to stockholders that contains the financial statements for the fiscal year of the reporting firm with the report of the external auditor’s examination of the financial statements.
5. A distribution of earnings to the owners of a corporation.
6. An arbitrary value assigned to a share of stock when the corporation is organized.
7. Net income available to the common stockholders divided by the average number of shares of common stock outstanding during the period.
8. Items held by an entity for sale to potential customers in the normal course of business.
9. Inflows of cash or increases in other assets, or settlement of liabilities during a period from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or other activities that constitute the entity’s major operations.
10. Cash and those assets likely to be converted to cash or used to benefit the entity within one year of the balance sheet date.
11. Cumulative net income that has not been distributed to the owners of a corporation as dividends.
12. The difference between gross profit and operating expenses. Also referred to as operating income and earnings from operations.
13. Increases in net assets from incidental transactions and other events affecting an entity during a period except those that result from revenues or investments by owners.
14. A presumption that the entity will continue in existence for the indefinite future.
15. Net sales less cost of goods sold.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify accounts by category and financial statement(s) Listed here are a number of financial statement captions. Indicate in the spaces to the right of each caption the category of each item and the financial statement(s) on which the item can usually be found. Use the following abbreviations:
|
Category
|
Financial Statement
|
|
Asset
|
A
|
Balance sheet
|
BS
|
|
Liability
|
L
|
Income statement
|
IS
|
|
Owners’ equity
|
OE
|
|
|
|
Revenue
|
R
|
|
|
|
Expense
|
E
|
|
|
|
Gain
|
G
|
|
|
|
Loss
|
LS
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Accounts payable
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Common stock
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Net sales
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Income tax expense
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Short term investments
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Gain on sale of land
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Retained earnings
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Dividends payable
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Short term debt
|
_________
|
_________
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify accounts by category and financial statement(s) Listed here are a number of financial statement captions. Indicate in the spaces to the right of each caption the category of each item and the financial statement(s) on which the item can usually be found. Use the following abbreviations:
|
Category
|
Financial Statement
|
|
Asset
|
A
|
Balance sheet
|
BS
|
|
Liability
|
L
|
Income statement
|
IS
|
|
Owners’ equity
|
OE
|
|
|
|
Revenue
|
R
|
|
|
|
Expense
|
E
|
|
|
|
Gain
|
G
|
|
|
|
Loss
|
LS
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Long term debt
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Equipment
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Loss on sale of short term
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
investments
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Net income
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Other accrued liabilities
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Dividends paid
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Additional paid in capital
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Interest income
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
Selling expenses
|
_________
|
_________
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding financial statement relationships The information presented here represents selected data from the December 31, 2010, balance sheets and income statements for the year then ended for three firms:
|
|
Firm A
|
Firm B
|
Firm C
|
|
Total assets, 12/31/10
|
?
|
$435,000
|
$155,000
|
|
Total liabilities, 12/31/10
|
$80,000
|
?
|
75,000
|
|
Paid in capital, 12/31/10
|
55,000
|
59,000
|
45,000
|
|
Retained earnings, 12/31/10
|
?
|
186,000
|
?
|
|
Net income for 2010
|
68,000
|
110,000
|
25,500
|
|
Dividends declared and paid during 2010
|
12,000
|
?
|
16,500
|
|
Retained earnings, 1/1/10
|
50,000
|
124,000
|
?
|
Required:
Calculate the missing amounts for each firm.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate retained earnings From the following data, calculate the retained earnings balance as of December 31, 2010:
|
Retained earnings, December 31, 2009
|
$311,800
|
|
Cost of equipment purchased during 2010
|
32,400
|
|
Net loss for the year ended December 31, 2010.
|
4,700
|
|
Dividends declared and paid in 2010
|
18,500
|
|
Decrease in cash balance from January 1, 2010, to December 31, 2010
|
13,600
|
|
Decrease in long term debt in 2010
|
14,800
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate retained earnings From the following data, calculate the retained earnings balance as of December 31, 2009:
|
Retained earnings, December 31, 2010
|
$841,200
|
|
Decrease in total liabilities during 2010
|
183,200
|
|
Gain on the sale of buildings during 2010
|
64,400
|
|
Dividends declared and paid in 2010
|
18,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of common stock in 2010
|
197,600
|
|
Net income for the year ended December 31, 2010
|
90,400
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate cash available upon liquidation of business Kimber Co. is in the process of liquidating and going out of business. The firm’s accountant has provided the following balance sheet and additional information:
|
Assets
|
|
Cash
|
$ 18,400
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
62,600
|
|
|
Merchandise inventory.
|
114,700
|
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
$195,700
|
|
Land
|
$51,000
|
|
|
Buildings & equipment.
|
343,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(195,000)
|
|
|
Total land, buildings, & equipment
|
|
199,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$394,700
|
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 46,700
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
58,500
|
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
|
$105,200
|
|
Long term debt
|
|
64,800
|
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Common stock, no par R
|
$110,000
|
|
|
retained earnings
|
114,700
|
|
|
Total owners’ equity
|
|
224,700
|
|
Total liabilities and owners’ equity
|
|
$394,700
|
It is estimated that all but 12% of the accounts receivable can be collected, and that the merchandise inventory can be disposed of in a liquidation sale for 85% of its cost. Buildings and equipment can be sold at $40,000 above book value (the difference between original cost and accumulated depreciation shown on the balance sheet), and the land can be sold at its current appraisal value of $65,000. In addition to the liabilities included in the balance sheet, $2,400 is owed to employees for their work since the last pay period, and interest of $5,250 has accrued on notes payable and long term debt.
Required:
a. Calculate the amount of cash that will be available to the stockholders if the accounts receivable are collected, the other assets are sold as described, and all liabilities and other claims are paid in full.
b. Briefly explain why the amount of cash available to stockholders (computed in part a ) is different from the amount of total owners’ equity shown in the balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding and analyzing financial statement relationships—sales / service organization Pope’s Garage had the following accounts and amounts in its financial statements on December 31, 2010. Assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year then ended.
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 33,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
12,000
|
|
Land
|
27,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
90,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
59,000
|
|
Cash
|
9,000
|
|
Equipment.
|
71,000
|
|
Supplies
|
6,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
23,000
|
|
Service revenue.
|
20,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
4,000
|
|
Common stock
|
10,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
12,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation.
|
45,000
|
|
Long term debt
|
40,000
|
|
Supplies expense
|
14,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
31,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
140,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the total current assets at December 31, 2010.
b. Calculate the total liabilities and owners’ equity at December 31, 2010.
c. Calculate the earnings from operations (operating income) for the year ended December 31, 2010.
d. Calculate the net income (or loss) for the year ended December 31, 2010.
e. What was the average income tax rate for Pope’s Garage for 2010?
f. If $16,000 of dividends had been declared and paid during the year, what was the January 1, 2010, balance of retained earnings?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding and analyzing financial statement relationships— merchandising organization Gary’s TV had the following accounts and amounts in its financial statements on December 31, 2010. Assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year then ended.
|
Interest expense
|
$ 36,000
|
|
Paid in capital
|
80,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation.
|
24,000
|
|
Notes payable (long term)
|
280,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
72,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
840,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
192,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
12,000
|
|
Land
|
128,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
900,000
|
|
Cash
|
144,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,760,000
|
|
Equipment.
|
72,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
240,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
92,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
2,480,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the difference between current assets and current liabilities for Gary’s TV at December 31, 2010.
b. Calculate the total assets at December 31, 2010.
c. Calculate the earnings from operations (operating income) for the year ended December 31, 2010.
d. Calculate the net income (or loss) for the year ended December 31, 2010.
e. What was the average income tax rate for Gary’s TV for 2010?
f. If $256,000 of dividends had been declared and paid during the year, what was the January 1, 2010, balance of retained earnings?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of changes in owners’ equity; analyze results The following information was obtained from the records of Breanna, Inc.:
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation.
|
52,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
128,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
8,000
|
|
Cash
|
65,000
|
|
Sales
|
200,000
|
|
Equipment.
|
120,000
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
34,000
|
|
Common stock (9,000 shares)
|
90,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
15,000
|
|
Retained earnings, 1/1/10.
|
23,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
6,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
37,000
|
|
Long term debt
|
40,000
|
|
Dividends declared and paid during 2010
|
12,000
|
Except as otherwise indicated, assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year ended December 31, 2010. There were no changes in paid in capital during the year.
Required:
a. Prepare an income statement and statement of changes in owners’ equity for the year ended December 31, 2010, and a balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for Breanna, Inc.
Based on the financial statements that you have prepared for part a, answer the questions in parts b–e. Provide brief explanations for each of your answers and state any assumptions you believe are necessary to ensure that your answers are correct.
b. What is the company’s average income tax rate?
c. What interest rate is charged on long term debt?
d. What is the par value per share of common stock?
e. What is the company’s dividend policy (i.e., what proportion of the company’s earnings are used for dividends)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of changes in owners’ equity; analyze results The following information was obtained from the records of Shae, Inc.:
|
Merchandise inventory
|
$264,000
|
|
Notes payable (long term)
|
300,000
|
|
Sales
|
900,000
|
|
Buildings and equipment.
|
504,000
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
72,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
120,000
|
|
Common stock (42,000 shares)
|
210,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
84,000
|
|
Cash
|
192,000
|
|
Retained earnings, 1/1/10
|
129,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities.
|
18,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
540,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation.
|
216,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
48,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
90,000
|
|
Dividends declared and paid during 2010
|
39,000
|
Except as otherwise indicated, assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year ended December 31, 2010. There were no changes in paid in capital during the year.
Required:
a. Prepare an income statement and statement of changes in owners’ equity for the year ended December 31, 2010, and a balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for Shae, Inc.
Based on the financial statements that you have prepared for part a, answer the questions in parts b–e. Provide brief explanations for each of your answers and state any assumptions you believe are necessary to ensure that your answers are correct.
b. What is the company’s average income tax rate?
c. What interest rate is charged on long term debt?
d. What is the par value per share of common stock?
e. What is the company’s dividend policy (i.e., what proportion of the company’s earnings is used for dividends)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—quantitative; analyze results Kenisha Morgan owns and operates Morgan’s Furniture Emporium, Inc. The balance sheet totals for assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity at August 1, 2010, are as indicated. Described here are several transactions entered into by the company throughout the month of August.
Required:
a. Indicate the amount and effect (+ or −) of each transaction on total assets, total liabilities, and total owner’s equity, and then compute the new totals for each category. The first transaction is provided as an illustration.
|
|
|
|
Owner’s
|
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Equity
|
|
August 1, 2010, totals
|
$700,000
|
$550,000
|
$150,000
|
|
August 3, borrowed $24,000 in cash from the bank
|
+24,000
|
+ 24,000
|
|
|
New totals
|
$724,000
|
$574,000
|
$150,000
|
|
August 7, bought merchandise inventory valued at
|
|
|
|
|
$38,000 on account
|
_________
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
New totals
|
|
|
|
|
August 10, paid $14,000 cash for operating expenses
|
_________
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
New totals
|
|
|
|
|
August 14, received $100,000 in cash from sales of
|
|
|
|
|
merchandise that had cost $66,000.
|
_________
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
New totals
|
|
|
|
|
August 17, paid $28,000 owed on accounts payable
|
_________
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
New totals
|
|
|
|
|
August 21, collected $34,000 of accounts receivable
|
_________
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
New totals
|
|
|
|
|
August 24, repaid $20,000 to the bank plus $400 interest
|
_________
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
New totals
|
|
|
|
|
August 29, paid Kenisha Morgan a cash dividend of $10,000
|
_________
|
_________
|
_________
|
|
New totals
|
|
|
|
b. What was the amount of net income (or loss) during August? How much were total revenues and total expenses during August?
c. What were the net changes during the month of August in total assets, total liabilities, and total owner’s equity?
d. Explain to Kenisha Morgan which transactions caused the net change in her owner’s equity during August.
e. Explain why dividend payments are not an expense, but interest is an expense.
f. Explain why the money borrowed from the bank increased assets but did not increase net income.
g. Explain why paying off accounts payable and collecting accounts receivable do not affect net income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Complete the balance sheet using cash flow data Following is a partially completed balance sheet for Epsico, Inc., at December 31, 2010, together with comparative data for the year ended December 31, 2009. From the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2010, you determine the following:
Net income for the year ended December 31, 2010, was $26.
Dividends paid during the year ended December 31, 2010, were $8.
Cash increased $8 during the year ended December 31, 2010.
The cost of new equipment acquired during 2010 was $15; no equipment was disposed of.
There were no transactions affecting the land account during 2010, but it is estimated that the fair market value of the land at December 31, 2010, is $42.
Required:
Complete the balance sheet at December 31, 2010.
|
|
EPSICO, INC.
|
|
|
|
|
Balance Sheets
|
|
|
|
|
December 31, 2010 and 2009
|
|
|
|
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
Cash
|
$
|
30
|
Note payable
|
49
|
40
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
126
|
120
|
Accounts payable
|
123
|
110
|
|
Inventory
|
241
|
230
|
|
|
|
|
Total current assets
|
$
|
380
|
Total current liabilities
|
172
|
150
|
|
|
|
|
Long term debt
|
80
|
|
Land
|
$
|
$ 25
|
Total liabilities
|
$
|
230
|
|
Equipment
|
375
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated
|
|
Common stock
|
200
|
200
|
|
depreciation
|
(180)
|
(160)
|
Retained earnings
|
190
|
|
Total land & equipment
|
$
|
$240
|
Total owners’ equity
|
$
|
390
|
|
|
|
|
Total liabilities and
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$
|
620
|
owners’ equity
|
$
|
620
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding income statement relationships—Levi Strauss & Co. Following are selected data from the November 30, 2008, and November 25, 2007, consolidated balance sheets and income statements for the years then ended for Levi Strauss & Co. and Subsidiaries. All amounts are reported in thousands.
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Net revenues
|
4,400,914
|
$
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
?
|
2,318,883
|
|
Gross profit
|
2,139,802
|
2,042,046
|
|
Selling, general, administrative, and other operating
|
|
expenses, net
|
?
|
1,401,005
|
|
Operating income
|
?
|
?
|
|
Interest expense and other expenses, net
|
156,903
|
265,415
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
368,169
|
?
|
|
Income tax expense (benefit)
|
?
|
(84,759)
|
|
Net income
|
229,285
|
$ 460,385
|
|
As at November 30 and 25, respectively:
|
|
Total assets
|
2,776,875
|
$ ?
|
|
Total liabilities
|
3,125,800
|
3,244,575
|
|
Total stockholders’ deficit
|
?
|
(393,909)
|
Required:
Calculate the missing amounts for each year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a personal balance sheet and projected income statement; explain financial statement relationships.
a. Prepare a personal balance sheet for yourself as of today. Work at identifying your assets and liabilities; use rough estimates for amounts.
b. Prepare a projected income statement for yourself for the current semester. Work at identifying your revenues and expenses, again using rough estimates for amounts.
c. Explain how your projected income statement for the semester is likely to impact your financial position (i.e., balance sheet) at the end of the semester. (Note: You are not required to prepare a projected balance sheet.)
d. Identify the major sources (and uses) of cash that you are expecting to receive (and spend) this semester. (Note: You are not required to prepare a projected statement of cash flows.)
e. Give three possible explanations why a full time college student might incur a substantial net loss during the fall semester of her junior year, yet have more cash at the end of the semester than she had at the beginning.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mark Corporation produces two models of calculators. The Business model sells for $60, and the Math model sells for $40. The variable expenses are given below:
|
|
Business
|
Math
|
|
|
Model
|
Model
|
|
Variable production costs per unit
|
$15
|
$16
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expenses per unit
|
$9
|
$6
|
The fixed expenses are $75,000 per month. The expected monthly sales of each model are: Business, 1,000 units; Math, 500 units.
The break even point for the expected sales mix is (round to nearest whole unit):
A) 833 of each
B) 1,667 Business and 833 Math
C) 1,667 of each
D) 833 Business and 1,667 Math
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following budgeted income statement was prepared by Fullton Corporation:
|
Sales (100 units at $100 a unit)
|
|
$10,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
$1,500
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
1,400
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
1,000
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
500
|
4,400
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
5,600
|
|
Selling expenses:
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
600
|
|
|
Fixed
|
1,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses:
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
500
|
|
|
Fixed
|
1,000
|
3,100
|
|
Net operating income
|
|
$ 2,500
|
How many units would have to be sold to break even?
A) 50
B) 58
C) 68
D) 75
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Cash payments for interest:
|
($12)
|
|
Retirement of common stock:
|
($32)
|
|
Cash payments to merchandise suppliers:
|
($85)
|
|
Purchase of land:
|
($8)
|
|
Sale of equipment:
|
$30
|
|
Payments of dividends:
|
($37)
|
|
Cash payment for salaries:
|
($35)
|
|
Cash collection from customers:
|
$260
|
|
Purchase of equipment:
|
($40)
|
Cash Flow Analysis Cash flows from operating activities are
a. $91
b. $128
c. $140
d. $175
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Cash payments for interest:
|
($12)
|
|
Retirement of common stock:
|
($32)
|
|
Cash payments to merchandise suppliers:
|
($85)
|
|
Purchase of land:
|
($8)
|
|
Sale of equipment:
|
$30
|
|
Payments of dividends:
|
($37)
|
|
Cash payment for salaries:
|
($35)
|
|
Cash collection from customers:
|
$260
|
|
Purchase of equipment:
|
($40)
|
Cash Flow Analysis Cash flows from investing activities are
a. $(67)
b. $(48)
c. $(18)
d. $(10)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Cash payments for interest:
|
($12)
|
|
Retirement of common stock:
|
($32)
|
|
Cash payments to merchandise suppliers:
|
($85)
|
|
Purchase of land:
|
($8)
|
|
Sale of equipment:
|
$30
|
|
Payments of dividends:
|
($37)
|
|
Cash payment for salaries:
|
($35)
|
|
Cash collection from customers:
|
$260
|
|
Purchase of equipment:
|
($40)
|
Cash Flow Analysis Cash flows from financing activities are
a. $(81)
b. $(69)
c. $(49)
d. $(37)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Retained Earnings Take a look at the balance sheet for Starbucks. On it, retained earnings are about $2.2 billion. How do you interpret this amount? Does it mean that Starbucks has $2.2 billion in cash available to spend?
Price Ratios Peninsular Research has a client who has inquired about the valuation method best suited for comparison of companies in an industry that has the following characteristics:
Principal competitors within the industry are located in the United States, France, Japan, and Brazil.
The industry is currently operating at a cyclical low, with many firms reporting losses. The industry is subject to rapid technological change.
John Jones, CFA, recommends that the client consider the price earnings ratio, price book value ratio, and price sales ratio. Determine which one of the three valuation ratios is most appropriate for comparing companies in this industry. Support your answer with two reasons that make that ratio superior to either of the other two ratios.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income Statements Given the following information for Smashville, Inc., construct an income statement for the year:
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
$149,000
|
|
Investment income:
|
$1,900
|
|
Net sales:
|
$294,000
|
|
Operating expense:
|
$62,000
|
|
Interest expense:
|
$6,200
|
|
Dividends:
|
$4,300
|
|
Tax rate:
|
35%
|
What are retained earnings for the year?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance Sheets Given the following information for Smashville, Inc., construct a balance sheet:
|
Current liabilities:
|
$31,000
|
|
Cash:
|
$18,000
|
|
Long term debt:
|
$96,000
|
|
Other assets:
|
$36,000
|
|
Fixed assets:
|
$140,000
|
|
Other liabilities:
|
$11,000
|
|
Investments:
|
$29,000
|
|
Operating assets:
|
$64,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating EFN The most recent financial statements for Bradley, Inc., are shown here (assuming no income taxes):
|
Income Statement
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Sales
|
$4,800
|
Assets
|
$14,200
|
Debt
|
$9,900
|
|
Costs
|
3,180
|
|
|
Equity
|
4,300
|
|
Net income
|
$1,620
|
Total
|
$14,200
|
Total
|
$14,200
|
Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Debt and equity are not. No dividends are paid. Next year’s sales are projected to be $5,616. What is the external financing needed?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Flow Statement Given the following information for Hetrich, Inc., calculate the operating cash flow, investment cash flow, financing cash flow, and net cash flow:
|
Net income:
|
$140
|
|
Depreciation:
|
$49
|
|
Issuance of new stock:
|
$14
|
|
Repurchase of debt:
|
$18
|
|
Sale of property:
|
$19
|
|
Purchase of equipment:
|
$62
|
|
Dividend payments:
|
$9
|
|
Interest payments:
|
$26
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
EFN The most recent financial statements for Martin, Inc., are shown here:
|
Income Statement
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Sales
|
$27,500
|
Assets
|
$105,000
|
Debt
|
$43,000
|
|
Costs
|
19,450
|
|
|
Equity
|
62,000
|
|
Taxable income
|
$8,050
|
Total
|
$105,000
|
Total
|
$105,000
|
|
Taxes (34%)
|
2,737
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
$5,313
|
|
|
|
|
Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Debt and equity are not. A dividend of $1,050 was paid, and Martin wishes to maintain a constant payout ratio. Next year’s sales are projected to be $31,000. What is the external financing needed?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Mann Company belongs to a risk class for which the appropriate discount rate is 10 percent. Mann currently has 100,000 outstanding shares selling at $100 each. The firm is contemplating the declaration of a $5 dividend at the end of the fiscal year that just began. Answer the following questions based on the Miller and Modigliani model, which is discussed in the text.
a. What will be the price of the stock on the ex dividend date if the dividend is declared?
b. What will be the price of the stock at the end of the year if the dividend is not declared?
c. If Mann makes $2 million of new investments at the beginning of the period, earns net income of $1 million, and pays the dividend at the end of the year, how many shares of new stock must the firm issue to meet its funding needs?
d. Is it realistic to use the MM model in the real world to value stock? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The net income of Novis Corporation, which has 10,000 outstanding shares and a 100 percent payout policy, is $32,000. The expected value of the firm one year hence is $1,545,600. The appropriate discount rate for Novis is 12 percent.
a. What is the current value of the firm?
b. What is the ex dividend price of Novis’s stock if the board follows its current policy?
c. At the dividend declaration meeting, several board members claimed that the dividend is too meager and is probably depressing Novis’s price. They proposed that Novis sell enough new shares to finance a $4.25 dividend.
i. Comment on the claim that the low dividend is depressing the stock price. Support your argument with calculations.
ii. If the proposal is adopted, at what price will the new shares sell and how many will be sold?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Taxes, Issuances Costs, and Dividends
National Business Machine Co. (NBM) has $2 million of extra cash. NBM has two choices to make use of this cash. One alternative is to invest the cash in financial assets. The resulted investment income will be paid out as a special dividend at the end of three years. In this case, the firm can invest in Treasury bills yielding 7 percent, or an 11 percent preferred stock. Only 30 percent of the dividends from investing in preferred stock would be subject to corporate taxes. Another alternative is to pay out the cash as dividends and let the shareholders invest on their own in Treasury bills with the same yield. The corporate tax rate is 35 percent, and the individual tax rate is 31 percent. Should the cash be paid today or in three years? Which of the two options generates the highest after tax income for the shareholders?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In their 1970 paper on dividends and taxes, Elton and Gruber reported that the exdividend– date drop in a stock’s price as a percentage of the dividend should equal the ratio of 1 minus the ordinary income tax rate to 1 minus the capital gains rate; that is,
Pe – pb/D =1 To/1 Tc
where
Pe _ The ex dividend stock price
Pb _ The stock price before it trades ex dividend
D _ The amount of the dividend
To _ The tax rate on ordinary income
Tc _ The effective tax rate on capital gains
Note: As we pointed out in the text, effective tax rate of capital gains is less than the actual tax rate, because their realization may be postponed. Indeed, because investors could postpone their realizations indefinitely, the effective rate could be zero.
a. If To = Tc = 0, how much will the stock’s price fall?
b. If To ≠ 0 and Tc = 0, how much will it fall?
c. Explain the results you found in (a) and (b).
d. Do the results of Elton and Gruber’s study imply that firms will maximize shareholder wealth by not paying dividends?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After completing its capital spending for the year, Carlson Manufacturing has $1,000 extra cash. Carlson’s managers must choose between investing the cash in Treasury bonds that yield 8 percent or paying the cash out to investors who would invest in the bonds themselves.
a. If the corporate tax rate is 35 percent, what tax rate on ordinary income would make the investors equally willing to receive the dividend and to let Carlson invest the money?
b. Is the answer to part (a) reasonable? Why or why not?
c. Suppose the only investment choice is stock that yields 12 percent. What personal tax rate will make the stockholders indifferent to the outcome of Carlson’s dividend decision?
d. Is this a compelling argument for a low dividend payout ratio? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose the Du Pont Company currently has outstanding series 4.50, nonconvertible preferred stock that pays an annual dividend of $4.50. Du Pont has also issued 11 percent bonds that will mature in 10 years. The stock and bonds have about the same risk.
a. The current price of the 4.50 preferred stock is 50 1⁄2. What is its dividend yield?
b. The bonds were sold at par. What is their yield to maturity?
c. As a financial consultant, you want to know the after tax yields for each of these investments. The corporate tax rate is 34 percent and the personal tax rate is 28 percent. Compute the after tax yields on Du Pont’s preferred stock and its bonds for each of the following groups:
i. General Motors’s tax exempt pension.
ii. General Motors Corporation.
d. Which group do you believe owns the most Du Pont stock?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Your aunt is in a high tax bracket and would like to minimize the tax burden of her investment portfolio. She is willing to buy and sell in order to maximize her after tax returns and she has asked for your advice. What would you suggest she do?
A Resolution of Real World Factors?
2. In the May 4, 1981, issue of Fortune, an article entitled “Fresh Evidence That Dividends Don’t Matter” stated, “All told, 115 companies of the 500 [largest industrial corporations] raised their payout every year during the period [1970–1989]. Investors in this . . . group would have fared somewhat better than investors in the 500 as a whole: the median total [annual compound] return of the 115 was 10.7% during the decade versus 9.4% for the 500.” Is this evidence that investors prefer dividends to capital gains? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Super Sonics Entertainment is considering borrowing money at 11 percent and purchasing a machine that costs $350,000. The machine will be depreciated over five years by the straight line method and will be worthless in five years. Super Sonics can lease the machine with the year end payments of $94,200. The corporate tax rate is 35 percent. Should Super Sonics buy or lease?
2. Maxwell, Inc., is entering negotiations for the lease of equipment that has a $200,000 purchase price. Maxwell’s effective tax rate is zero. Maxwell will be negotiating the lease with Mercer Leasing Corp. The term of the lease is five years. Mercer Leasing Corp. is in the 35 percent tax bracket. There are no transaction costs to the lease. Each firm can borrow at 10 percent. What is the negotiating range of the lease?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
High electricity costs have made Farmer Corporation’s chicken plucking machine economically worthless. There are only two machines available to replace it. The International Plucking Machine (IPM) model is available only on a lease basis. The annual, end of year payments are $2,100 for five years. This machine will save Farmer $6,000 per year through reductions in electricity costs in each of the five years. As an alternative, Farmer can purchase a more energy efficient machine from Basic Machine Corporation (BMC) for $15,000. This machine will save $9,000 per year in electricity costs. A local bank has offered to finance the machine with a $15,000 loan. The interest rate on the loan will be 10 percent on the remaining balance and five annual principal payments of $3,000. Farmer has a target debt to asset ratio of 67 percent. Farmer is in the 34 percent tax bracket. After five years, both machines are worthless. Only straight line depreciation is allowed for chicken plucking machines. The savings that Farmer will enjoy are known with certainty, because Farmer has a long term chicken purchase agreement with State Food Products, Inc., and a four year backlog of orders.
a. Should Farmer lease the IPM machine or purchase the more efficient BMC machine?
b. Does your answer depend on the form of financing for direct purchase?
c. How much debt is displaced by this lease?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wolfson Corporation has decided to purchase a new machine that costs $3 million. The machine will be worthless after three years. Only straight line method is allowed by the IRS for this type of machine. Wolfson is in the 35 percent tax bracket. The Sur Bank has offered Wolfson a three year loan for $3 million. The repayment schedule is three yearly principal repayments of $1 million and an interest charge of 12 percent on the outstanding balance of the loan at the beginning of each year. Twelve percent is the marketwide rate of interest. Both principal repayments and interest are due at the end of each year.
Cal Leasing Corporation offers to lease the same machine to Wolfson. Lease payments of $1.2 million per year are due at the end of each of the three years of the lease.
a. Should Wolfson lease the machine or buy it with bank financing?
b. What is the annual lease payment that will make Wolfson indifferent to whether it leases the machine or purchases it?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–10). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a. Accounting
|
p. Generally accepted accounting principles
|
|
b. Entity
|
q. Internal auditing
|
|
c. Financial accounting
|
r. Securities and Exchange Commission
|
|
d. Bookkeeping
|
s. Financial Accounting Foundation
|
|
e. Certified Public Accountant
|
t. Financial Accounting Standards Board
|
|
f. Managerial accounting
|
u. Statements of Financial Accounting Standards
|
|
g. Cost accounting
|
v. Cost Accounting Standards Board
|
|
h. Certified Management Accountant
|
w. Governmental Accounting Standards Board
|
|
i. Auditing
|
x. Accrual accounting
|
|
j. Public accounting
|
y. Integrity
|
|
k. Certified Internal Auditor
|
z. Objectivity
|
|
l. Generally accepted auditing standards
|
|
|
m. Cash flows
|
|
|
n. Controller
|
|
|
o. Independence
|
|
|
a. Accounting
|
|
1. The process of identifying, measuring, and communicating economic information about an organization for the purpose of making decisions or informed judgments.
2. Accounting that recognizes revenues and expenses as they occur, even though cash receipts from revenues and cash disbursements related to expenses may occur before or after the event that causes revenue or expense recognition.
3. The process of examining the financial statements of an entity by an independent third party with the objective of expressing an opinion about the fairness of the presentation of the entity’s financial position, results of operations, changes in financial position, and cash flows.
4. Procedures that are used to keep track of an entity’s financial transactions and to accumulate the results of its operations.
5. Pronouncements of the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) that constitute generally accepted accounting principles.
6. Accounting that is concerned with the use of economic and financial information to plan and control the activities of an entity and to support the management decision making process.
7. An organization, individual, or group of organizations or individuals for which accounting services are performed.
8. A unit of the federal government that is responsible for establishing regulations and ensuring that full disclosure is made to investors about large companies and their securities traded in interstate commerce.
9. Pronouncements of the Financial Accounting Standards Board and its predecessors that constitute appropriate accounting for various business transactions (principles used for reporting financial position and results of operations to investors and creditors).
10. The personal characteristic of honesty, including being forthright in dealings and communications with others.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dude Skis wants to create an entirely new line of skis that can be used separately to ski uphill, and then lock together into a single monoski for downhill use. It is called the Chump Ski. The company projects incremental revenues from the new line of skis of $1,000,000, as well as incremental labor costs of $200,000, incremental material costs of $400,000, overhead that is directly traceable to the new product of $120,000, and a general manufacturing overhead allocation of $80,000. The existing production equipment can accommodate the new product with no changes. The calculation of the margin on the Chump Ski line is:
|
Contribution Margin Calculation
|
Gross Margin Calculation
|
|
Revenue
|
$800,000
|
$800,000
|
|
Expenses Materials
|
400,000
|
400,000
|
|
Labor
|
200,000
|
200,000
|
|
Traceable overhead
|
120,000
|
120,000
|
|
General overhead
|
|
80,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
720,000
|
800,000
|
|
Margin
|
$80,000
|
$0
|
|
Margin percentage
|
10%
|
0%
|
The contribution margin reveals a positive outcome of $80,000, while the gross margin calculation (which includes the general overhead allocation) shows no profit at all. If management only saw the gross margin calculation, it might elect to avoid rolling out the Chump Ski line, whereas the contribution margin might be sufficiently positive to encourage an alternative course of action.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dude Skis plans to acquire an automated graphics lamination machine, which it will use to laminate graphics onto its high end skis. It plans to eliminate three direct labor positions and add one maintenance technician as a result of this change. The lamination machine costs $100,000 and will be depreciated over five years. The fully burdened cost of all three direct labor positions is $90,000, while the fully burdened cost of the new maintenance technician is $55,000. Dude’s cost accountant constructs the following table to summarize the situation:
|
Direct cost additions
|
|
|
Annual machine depreciation
|
+$20,000
|
|
Maintenance technician
|
+55,000
|
|
Direct cost deductions
|
|
|
Direct labor positions
|
90,000
|
|
Net change in direct costs
|
$15,000
|
The table reveals that Dude should install the machine, since there will be a net decline in direct costs. Additional factors to consider might be any history of machine breakdowns that could lead to the rehire of the laid off workers, as well as the risk that the machine’s manufacturer will go out of business and can therefore no longer support the machine. These are qualita tive risk factors.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dude Skis closely tracks the direct cost of its skis, and does so by comparing actual variable costs per unit to budgeted costs. The following report shows its direct cost analysis for January production of its low cost line of children’s introductory skis. Actual unit production = 2,703 ski pairs
|
Variable Cost Item
|
Actual Cost per Unit
|
Budgeted Cost per Unit
|
Variance per Unit
|
|
Wood core
|
$42.50
|
$41.75
|
$0.75
|
|
Fiberglas wrap
|
38.84
|
37.52
|
1.32
|
|
Edging
|
4.11
|
4.03
|
0.08
|
|
Tip and tail caps
|
0.39
|
0.42
|
+0.03
|
|
Lamination
|
4.72
|
4.73
|
+0.01
|
|
Totals
|
$90.56
|
$88.45
|
$2.11
|
The report does not include direct labor, since Dude’s management does not feel that labor costs vary sufficiently with production volumes to warrant being included in the report.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dude Skis sells to Stuffy Skis, which is a high end retailer of the most expensive all mountain skis, as well as Warehouse Sports, which retails the lowest cost skis through many outlets to beginner skiers. The skis that Dude sells to Stuffy have thehighest margins, and Stuffy requires little administrative support. Warehouse buys in massive volume, but only buys low margin items, and returns 20% of its purchases under various pretexts in order to clear out its inventory at the end of the season. Dude’s management wants to know how much it earns from each customer, and whether it should drop either one. Dude’s cost accountant constructs the following table:
|
Stuffy Customer
|
Warehouse Customer
|
|
Revenue
|
$520,000
|
$2,780,000
|
|
Direct costs Materials
|
210,000
|
1,390,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
100,000
|
550,000
|
|
Customer service cost
|
0
|
130,000
|
|
Sales returns cost
|
0
|
600,000
|
|
Total direct costs
|
310,000
|
2,670,000
|
|
Contribution margin ($)
|
$210,000
|
$110,000
|
|
Contribution margin (%)
|
40%
|
4%
|
In the table, there is no customer service cost at all for Stuffy Skis, since no customer service positions would be eliminated if Dude were to drop Stuffy as a customer. On the other hand, there are four customer service employees assigned to the Warehouse Sports account who would be laid off if Dude were to drop that account.
The analysis reveals that Stuffy Skis produces far more contribution margin than Warehouse Sports, despite much lower revenues. However, this does not mean that Dude should eliminate Warehouse as a customer, since it still produces $110,000 of contribution margin. If Dude has a considerable amount of overhead to cover, it may be quite necessary to continue dealing with Warehouse Sports in order to retain the associated amount of contribution margin.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dude Skis is conducting its annual budgeting process, and the cost accountant is called upon to create a profit volume table that shows the amount of profit before taxes that Dude is likely to earn at different unit volume sales levels. The company currently produces 50,000 pairs of skis per year, and this figure is unlikely to decline. He learns that the company can produce an additional 10,000 pairs of skis without incurring any additional overhead costs. However, if the company expands production by an additional 20,000 pairs, it will incur an additional $750,000 in annual overhead expenses, and will likelyalso have to reduce its prices by 10% in order to achieve that volume level. Based on this information, he constructs the following table:
|
Number of Skis Sold
|
|
Number of ski pairs
|
50,000
|
60,000
|
70,000
|
|
Direct cost per pair of skis
|
$210
|
$210
|
$210
|
|
Net sales price per pair sold
|
380
|
380
|
342
|
|
Total revenue
|
19,000,000
|
22,800,000
|
23,940,000
|
|
Total direct cost
|
10,500,000
|
12,600,000
|
14,700,000
|
|
Total period cost
|
8,000,000
|
8,000,000
|
8,750,000
|
|
Profit
|
$500,000
|
2,200,000
|
$490,000
|
|
Profit %
|
3%
|
10%
|
2%
|
The analysis reveals that Dude should certainly make every effort to increase its sales by an additional 10,000 units, since this will result in a significant improvement in its profitability. However, expanding by yet another 10,000 units may be a bad idea, since the company must accept lower per unit prices as well as more overhead. In fact, the additional growth by 20,000 units, when coupled with an increased need for working capital and reduced profitability, may put the company in serious operating difficulties.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
To continue with the preceding example, the management of Dude Skis is concerned about the working capital impact of expanding the business by 20,000 pairs of skis, and so it asks the cost accountant for a revised analysis that includes projected working capital costs for the baseline scenario of 50,000 units, and for the highest volume scenario of 70,000 units. The following table presents this information:
|
Number of Skis Sold
|
|
Number of ski pairs
|
50,000
|
70,000
|
|
Total revenue
|
$19,000,000
|
$23,940,000
|
|
Profit
|
500,000
|
490,000
|
|
|
|
|
Working capital components
|
|
|
|
+ Accounts receivable
|
+$1,600,000
|
+$2,400,000
|
|
+ Inventory
|
+3,200,000
|
+4,000,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
1,100,000
|
1,300,000
|
|
Total working capital
|
$3,700,000
|
$5,100,000
|
The working capital assumptions in the table are that the same proportions of inventory and accounts payable will carry forward from the 50,000 unit activity level to the 70,000 unit activity level. However, the accounts receivable investment is assumed to increase, since the company will be making many of the incremental sales to a new group of retailers who are assumed to pay slower than the current group of retailers.
The working capital analysis reveals that Dude Skis would have to invest an extra $1,400,000 in its business in order to grow to a 70,000 unit level, while earning a somewhat lower profit. Clearly, the company should avoid this expansion, though the 60,000 unit sales level noted in the preceding example has a much better payoff, and should be considered.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dude Skis currently has a small plastic injection molding operation in house, from which it molds the tip and tail guards for its skis. A local plastic injection molding firm visits Dude Skis and offers to produce these items for $0.41 per set. Manage ment asks the cost accountant to determine whether this will result in improved profits for the company, using the assumption that the company would sell its injection molding machine if the supplier’s offer is accepted.
According to Dude’s cost records, the cost of a set of tip and tail guards is $0.56, which is comprised of the following items:
|
Cost Items
|
Direct Costs
|
Overhead
|
|
Resin
|
$0.25
|
|
|
Color
|
0.02
|
|
|
Scrap
|
0.01
|
|
|
Injection molder depreciation
|
0.03
|
|
|
Injection molder maintenance
|
0.02
|
|
|
Injection molding labor
|
0.05
|
|
|
Injection molding labor benefits
|
0.01
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
|
$0.12
|
|
Administrative overhead
|
|
0.5
|
|
Total
|
$0.39
|
$0.17
|
In the preceding table, the injection molder depreciation cost of $0.03 per unit would not have been included if the company had chosen to keep the machine. However, since it plans to sell the machine if it accepts the supplier’s offer, the depreciation is directly related to the decision, and so is a direct cost.
The costs comprising the overhead allocations will not decline if the company outsources this component, so the overhead is not a direct cost.
The table reveals that the direct costs associated with the analysis are lower than the supplier’s offered price, so the company should reject the outsourcing option and continue to produce the tip and tail guards in house. This decision is also reasonable from a risk management perspective, since Dude Skis would otherwise be permanently eliminating its capability to produce the part in house, which could potentially leave it at the mercy of any price increases later imposed by the supplier.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dude Skis has received an inquiry from a Japanese ski manufacturer that wants to outsource a production run of 5,000 skis. The total revenue from the proposed deal is $1,000,000 and Dude’s direct cost is projected to be $800,000, which is based on the $700,000 of materials and $100,000 of labor required to manufacture the skis. Initially, it therefore appears that Dude can earn $200,000 on the deal.
However, Dude’s production equipment is fully utilized during its single shift of operation, so this order will require employing a second shift that is paid a 10% shift differential, as well as an on site supervisor and maintenance technician. There will also be an assumed 10% scrap rate caused by having a less well trained work force on that shift. These additional costs are:
|
Cost Item
|
Amount
|
|
Overtime
|
$10,000
|
|
Scrap
|
70,000
|
|
Supervisor
|
65,000
|
|
Maintenance technician
|
45,000
|
|
Total
|
$190,000
|
Given that these additional costs leave a paltry $10,000 profit, Dude should either reject the inquiry or negotiate a higher price. The increased costs caused by the production being outside of Dude’s normal operating range caused the deal (as proposed) to fail.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dude Skis is considering an expansion of is prototype skiing platform for disabled skiers. It constructed 100 units as a pilot project, and sold them easily at a price of $2,000 and a direct cost of $750 each. Initial forecasts indicate that Dude could sell 5,000 units per year. Thus, the initial analysis indicates that Dude could earn a contribution margin of $6,250,000 on this new opportunity.
The trouble is that the direct costing analysis is based on the costs incurred during a pilot project. Launching a fully equipped and properly managed product line will introduce an additional $1,000,000 per year of depreciation costs, as well as $4,000,000 of overhead costs that are directly related to the product. Consequently, the new product will be more likely to earn $1,250,000 per year than the $6,250,000 that was initially indicated.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lowry Locomotion produces toy cars. Its engineering manager is considering installing an automated packaging machine on one production line located in its Chicago facility that makes toy fire trucks. Doing so will require an investment in new machinery that will add $50,000 of depreciation to overhead, and will eliminate $1.50 per unit of direct labor. The company currently allocates overhead based on the amount of direct labor consumed.
After the installation is complete, the total amount of overhead has increased from $450,000 to $500,000, while the total amount of direct labor consumed by a toy fire truck has declined from $6.00 to $4.50. The total direct labor used throughout the Chicago facility has declined from $400,000 to $350,000. The calculation of its overhead allo cation before and after the installation of automated equipment is:
|
Overhead Per Dollar of Direct Labor Calculation
|
|
Before automation
|
$450,000 overhead / $400,000 labor = $1.13 per $ of direct labor
|
|
After automation
|
$500,000 overhead / $350,000 labor = $1.43 per $ of direct labor
|
Before automation, the toy fire truck consumed $6.00 of direct labor, so the amount of overhead assigned to each truck was $6.78 ($6.00 direct labor x $1.13 overhead allocation). After automation, the toy fire truck consumes $4.50 of direct labor, so the amount of overhead assigned to each truck declines to $6.44 ($4.50 direct labor x $1.43 overhead allocation). Consequently, the method of overhead allocation drives down the full cost of the fire truck.
After automation, the entire Chicago facility still uses $350,000 of direct labor, of which $250,000 is used on anoth er production line that manufactures toy racing cars. Prior to the automation, the racing car line had a total overhead allocation of $282,500 ($250,000 direct labor x $1.13 overhead allocation). Following automation, the racing car line still uses the same amount of labor, but its overhead allocation has increased to $357,500 ($250,000 direct labor x $1.43 overhead allocation).
Thus, the overhead allocation to the fire truck has declined, because its allocation base has declined, while the addition al overhead has now shifted to the racing car product, simply because its allocation base did not decline. The shift in al location between the two product lines is so extreme that the racing car line is now absorbing an additional $75,000 of overhead, even though the total amount of overhead only increased by $50,000; this is because the racing car line has proportionally more of the allocation base than it did before the automation project was completed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lowry Locomotion’s cost accountant has not installed an ABC system before, and is overcome with zeal to create a highly detailed system with many cost pools and associated activity drivers. His first iteration of the implementation plan calls for data collection in the following areas:
Purchasing. Track the number of purchase orders issued, reminder contacts made to suppliers, and supplier visits.
Manufacturing. Track the number of machine minutes per batch, the number of machine setups, and the amount of time spent on rework.
Engineering. Track the time spent on production line layouts, engineering change orders, and research and devel opment.
Marketing. Track the time spent on designing new ad campaigns, the number of ad placements, and the time spent on target costing projects.
In short, the cost accountant wants to track everything about everyone. The best estimate of the cost of tracking the time usage of the 300 affected employees is one hour per week, at an average cost per hour of $30. The total data collection cost is therefore $468,000 (300 employees x $30/hour x 52 weeks). After learning of the projected data entry cost, the president prevails upon the cost accountant to begin with a pilot project that only encompasses the purchase order activity in the purchasing department. Since the purchasing department already tracks the number of purchase orders created, there is no additional data entry cost at all.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lowry Locomotion’s Chicago facility has several thousand customers, most of which are retail stores and distributors. The company experiences a wide range of customer support issues with each customer, with some demanding rapid restocking intervals, cooperative marketing reimbursements, and early payment discounts. After conducting an ABC analysis that is focused on the cost of customers, Lowry arrives at the following results:
|
Customer Levels
|
Number of Customers
|
Profits Earned
|
Cumulative Profits
|
Revenue Earned
|
Cumulative Revenue
|
|
Top 10%
|
197
|
$800,000
|
$800,000
|
$3,200,000
|
$3,200,000
|
|
Next 40%
|
507
|
400,000
|
1,200,000
|
2,600,000
|
5,800,000
|
|
Next 40%
|
483
|
200,000
|
1,400,000
|
4,000,000
|
9,800,000
|
|
Low 10%
|
204
|
150,000
|
1,250,000
|
1,500,000
|
11,300,000
|
The analysis shows that Lowry should drop the 204 customers in its lowest 10th percentile, since it is losing money on them, even though it will give up $1,500,000 of revenues by doing so. This will also allow Lowry to spend more time focusing on the customers in its highest percentile, who are generating one half of the company’s profits. Also, eliminating the bottom percentile of customers will create additional production capacity, which Lowry may be able to use to bring in more profitable business.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lowry Locomotive’s Memphis facility has three distribution channels, which are Internet sales, distributors, and catalog sales. Sales through the Internet are at full retail price, but comprise only a small proportion of total sales. Distributors buy in large quantities, but also receive a 35% discount from the retail price. The catalog sales are at full retail price and have large sales volume, but the cost of creating and mailing the catalogs has increased recently. The marketing manager commissions an ABC study to examine the full cost of each channel. The results are shown in the following table:
|
Revenue
|
Variable Costs
|
Contribution Margin
|
Overhead Allocation
|
Net Profit
|
|
Catalog
|
$1,500,000
|
$900,000
|
$600,000
|
$575,000
|
$25,000
|
|
Distributors
|
3,250,000
|
2,600,000
|
650,000
|
365,000
|
285,000
|
|
Internet
|
250,000
|
150,000
|
100,000
|
60,000
|
40,000
|
|
Totals
|
$5,000,000
|
$3,475,000
|
$1,350,000
|
$1,000,000
|
$350,000
|
The analysis reveals that the overhead allocated to the catalog channel is so large that its net profitability has declined to near zero. In fact, the Internet channel absorbs so much less overhead that it now generates more profit than the catalog channel, despite having six times less revenue.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lowry Locomotion conducts a targeted ABC analysis of its customer service function, and concludes that it costs $10 every time a customer calls with a complaint. The cost pool is comprised of the cost of 10 customer service representatives, as well as the cost of the facility in which they are located, depreciation on their cubicles, and a fixed monthly charge for their 10 telephone lines. The entire annual cost of this cost pool is $425,000.
Lowry receives 42,500 calls per year. Management elects to reduce the cost of customer service by reducing a variety of issues about which customers are calling. After three months, the company has reduced the number of calls by 3,800, or 9 percent of the total number of calls. However, costs have not declined at all. Upon further investigation, Lowry’s manage ment realizes that it has to reduce costs by 10 percent to eliminate one customer service employee, along with the cost of the phone line associated with that position. The cost of cubicle depreciation will not decline, since it is not practical to eliminate a single cubicle. Further, the cost of facility rent will not be eliminated under any circumstances, since the company has committed to a five year lease.
Lowry eliminates another 450 customer calls, which drops the total number of calls by 10 percent, and is able to lay off one worker and eliminate one phone line. Management now realizes that it only reduces overhead costs when it reduces customer calls in increments of 4,250 calls.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Margin Calculations Use the following income statement for Paul Bunyan Lumber Co. to calculate gross and operating margins.
|
Paul Bunyan Lumber 2008 Income Statement
|
|
Net sales
|
$8,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
6,400
|
|
Gross profit
|
$1,600
|
|
Operating expenses
|
400
|
|
Operating income
|
$1,200
|
|
Other income
|
80
|
|
Net interest expense
|
120
|
|
Pretax income
|
$1,160
|
|
Income tax
|
464
|
|
Net income
|
$696
|
|
Earnings per share
|
$3.48
|
|
Recent share price
|
$76.56
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Return Calculations Use the following balance sheet for Paul Bunyan Lumber Co. along with the income statement in the previous question to calculate return on assets and return on equity.
|
Paul Bunyan Lumber 2008 Balance Sheet
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$400
|
|
Operating assets
|
400
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
3,160
|
|
Other assets
|
216
|
|
Total assets
|
$4,176
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$720
|
|
Long term debt
|
612
|
|
Other liabilities
|
60
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$1,392
|
|
Paid in capital
|
$600
|
|
Retained earnings
|
2,184
|
|
Total shareholder equity
|
$2,784
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$4,176
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance Sheet Assets White Company assets as of December 31, 2007:
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$150
|
|
Operating assets
|
$1,190
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
$1,460
|
|
Total assets
|
$2,800
|
White Co. experienced the following events in 2008:
Old equipment that cost $120 and that was fully depreciated was scrapped Depreciation expense was $125
Cash payments for new equipment were $200
Based on the information above, what was White Co.’s net amount of property, plant, and equipment at the end of 2008?
a. $1,415
b. $1,535
c. $1,655
d. $1,660
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Net income:
|
$16
|
|
Depreciation/amortization:
|
$4
|
|
Repurchase of outstanding common stock:
|
$10
|
|
Issuance of new debt:
|
$18
|
|
Sale of property:
|
$12
|
|
Purchase of equipment:
|
$14
|
|
Dividend payments:
|
$4
|
Cash Flow Analysis Operating cash flow is
a. $20
b. $16
c. $12
d. $30
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Net income:
|
$16
|
|
Depreciation/amortization:
|
$4
|
|
Repurchase of outstanding common stock:
|
$10
|
|
Issuance of new debt:
|
$18
|
|
Sale of property:
|
$12
|
|
Purchase of equipment:
|
$14
|
|
Dividend payments:
|
$4
|
Cash Flow Analysis Investing cash flow is
a. $2
b. $(2)
c. $12
d. $(12)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Net income:
|
$16
|
|
Depreciation/amortization:
|
$4
|
|
Repurchase of outstanding common stock:
|
$10
|
|
Issuance of new debt:
|
$18
|
|
Sale of property:
|
$12
|
|
Purchase of equipment:
|
$14
|
|
Dividend payments:
|
$4
|
Cash Flow Analysis Financing cash flow is
a. $8
b. $(8)
c. $4
d. $(4)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The production manager of Colossal Furniture, Mr. Mammoth, will receive a bonus if the company records a profit of $10,000 in November. The company uses a hybrid accounting system for its production of high chairs for oversized infants. Mr. Mammoth has control over the percentage of completion for units in process in the process costing portion of the cost accounting system.
The actual percentage of completion for units in process is 42%, but Mr. Mammoth calculates that if he authorizes a change to 45% completion, this will cause a higher allocation of costs to work in process, and thereby increases profits just enough to earn him the bonus.
The cost accounting manager is not aware of the bonus situation, and does not complain about what appears to be a minor increase in the percentage of completion. Mr. Mammoth receives his bonus.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The internal audit staff of Colossal Furniture recommends to senior management that the percentage of completion used in its process costing calculation be fixed at 50%, thereby eliminating the type of manipulation described in the preceding example.
In December, the production manager (still Mr. Mammoth, despite his earlier manipulations) can earn yet another bonus if the company records a profit of $20,000. Near the end of the month, it appears that the company will be $5,000 short of its profit goal. To meet his target, Mr. Mammoth releases a large amount of work into the production area on December 31. No work is actually performed on any of these new projects, but because they are now categorized as work in process, the cost accountant must apply the standard percentage of completion to them.
The cost accountant allocates $5,000 of conversion costs to the new work in process items, which shifts these costs into the balance sheet as assets, thereby reducing the cost of goods sold by $5,000. Mr. Mammoth again earns his bonus.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A hybrid costing system is not:
a. An operation costing system
b. Used when there are modifications beyond a common processing point
c. Used in a pure process costing environment
d. An amalgam of process and job costing systems
2. Process costing treats an entire production process as:
a. A single job
b. A large number of separate jobs
c. A single work center
d. A large number of work centers
3. The largest problem with process costing is:
a. Assigning costs to products in an efficient manner
b. Assigning costs where individual products cannot be differentiated
c. Using an estimated percentage of completion
d. Assigning costs to identical products
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
California Chardonnay Corporation operates several wineries that press their own grapes. During this process, there is a split off point that produces an abundant amount of grape seed oil. The company may then sell the grape seed oil to various cooking oil manufacturers, or it may engage in several straining operations to further refine the grape seed oil into a more pure form that it can then sell to cosmetics manufacturers as the primary ingredient in skin moisturizers; alternatively, the company can then add a stabilizer to the purified oil and sell it to a shaving cream manufacturer as a face shaving lubricant.
California Chardonnay has two split off points – one where the grape seed oil is separated, and another where the purified oil is split off for sale as a skin moisturizer ingredient.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Henderson Industrial manufactures plastic cartons for local dairies. The historical amount of spoilage that it experiences is 1% of all production. Each spoiled carton consumes plastic resin having a cost of $0.25. Henderson’s cost accountant includes the cost of this resin in the carton bill of materials. The line items in the bill of materials are:
|
Line Item
|
Cost
|
|
Resin
|
$0.2500
|
|
Plastic cap
|
0.0200
|
|
Label
|
0.0150
|
|
Spoilage
|
0.0025
|
|
Total cost
|
$0.2875
|
The spoilage line item in the bill of materials is calculated as:
1% Probability of occurrence x $0.25 cost per unit
Henderson then multiplies the total cost in the bill of materials by the number of units produced in the period to calculate its cost of goods sold, thereby incorporating the cost of spoilage into its cost of goods.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
To continue with the preceding example, Henderson Industrial decides to stop recording normal spoilage in its bills of material, and instead records the actual cost of spoilage in a manufacturing overhead cost pool. It calculates this cost by adding up the number of spoiled cartons and multiplying by the component cost of each one. In May, the calculation is:
1,500 spoiled cartons x $0.25/unit resin cost = $375
Henderson’s cost accountant includes this cost in the manufacturing overhead cost pool, which is comprised of the following costs in May:
|
Manufacturing Overhead Line Item
|
Amount
|
|
Manufacturing supervisor salaries
|
$140,000
|
|
Building rent
|
50,000
|
|
Utilities
|
15,000
|
|
Spoilage
|
375
|
|
Total
|
$205,375
|
During May, Henderson manufactured 10,000,000 cartons. The amount of the overhead cost pool allocated to each carton is:
$205,375 / 10,000,000 cartons = $0.021 per carton
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Quest Clothiers, makers of rugged outdoor wear, experiences abnormal spoilage when it uses substandard thread on some of its outerwear, resulting in burst seams. The cost of the spoilage is $20,000, which it records as follows:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Abnormal spoilage expense
|
20000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
20000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
To continue with the preceding example, Quest Clothiers sells a group of garments that were subject to abnormal spoilage, in the amount of $2,000. Quest rarely experiences abnormal spoilage, and so prefers to account for the sale as a one time event, electing to net it against the cost of spoilage with the following entry:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
2000
|
|
|
Abnormal spoilage expense
|
|
2000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Micron Metallic runs a large metal stamping machine that creates parts for washing machines. In the June reporting period, it recorded $80,000 of scrap from its stamping operations. Since this amount usually represents about 5% of Micron’s cost of goods sold, which is a material amount, the controller always records scrap in a separate account. At the end of each month, a scrap hauler takes away the scrap metal and pays Micron based on the weight of the metal removed. The June payment from the scrap hauler is $800, which the controller records with the following entry:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
800
|
|
|
Scrap expense
|
|
800
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Snyder Corporation manufactures small, compact global positioning satellites. All of the personnel involved in their production are so highly qualified that the company will retain them even if production levels decline. The product requires a great deal of research and development expenditures, as well as prolonged quality testing. The cost breakdown for a satellite is:
|
Variable Costs
|
Overhead Costs
|
|
Components
|
$125,000
|
|
|
Assembly staff
|
|
$400,000
|
|
Quality control staff
|
|
150,000
|
|
Research staff
|
|
200,000
|
|
Building overhead
|
|
75,000
|
|
Manufacturing supervision
|
|
50,000
|
|
Total
|
$125,000
|
$875,000
|
The totally variable cost of a single satellite is only $125,000, so Snyder could theoretically make money by pricing its satellites in short term pricing situations for any amount over $125,000. However, it would soon go out of business if it were to do so for an extended period of time, since the company must also pay for a significant amount of overhead costs. IfSnyder hopes to be in business for any length of time, it will need to use the long term cost per satellite of $1 million as the minimum threshold for setting prices (not including a profit margin).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Horton Corporation currently has four products that it is processing through its paint shop, which is its bottleneck operation. The paint shop is available for use 24 hours a day, which is 1,440 minutes per day. However, it requires substantial downtime for cleaning, so the paint shop is really only available for 1,200 minutes per day. The following production schedule shows the jobs that are scheduled to run through the paint shop during the next month, in descending order by throughput per minute.
|
Product Description
|
Throughput per Minute of Bottleneck
|
Required Bottleneck Usage
|
Scheduled Production in Units
|
Bottleneck Usage (minutes)
|
Throughput per Product
|
|
Three tone widget
|
$36
|
3
|
150
|
450
|
$16,200
|
|
Two tone widget
|
25
|
2
|
125
|
250
|
6,250
|
|
Black widget
|
18
|
1
|
200
|
200
|
3,600
|
|
Blue widget
|
5
|
1
|
300
|
300
|
1,500
|
|
Total
|
|
|
775
|
1,200
|
$27,550
|
The table shows that the paint shop bottleneck is fully utilized, and that the minimum amount of throughput per minute scheduled through it is three hundred minutes of time to paint blue widgets, at $5 of throughput per minute.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What is considered an acceptable method for allocating overhead?
a. The number of units of the basis of allocation is very small
b. The number of units of the basis of allocation is very large
c. There should be as many cost pools as possible
d. You should alter the allocation method every month
2. What costs should not be considered when setting a long term price?
a. Variable costs
b. Allocated manufacturing overhead
c. Salesperson commissions
d. A fair profit margin
3. From a profit maximization perspective, the sales manager should give priority to selling products:
a. That the company is selling at a discount
b. That have a large amount of throughput
c. That have a large gross margin
d. That will become obsolete soon
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SkiPS is a maker of global positioning systems (GPS) for skiers, which they use to log how many vertical feet they ski each day. SkiPS conducts a marketing survey to decide upon the features it needs to include in its next generation of GPS device, and finds that skiers want a device they can strap to their arm or leg, and which does not require recharging during a multi day vacation.
The survey indicates that skiers are willing to pay no more than $150 for the device, while the first review of costs indicates that it will cost $160 to manufacture. At a mandated gross margin percentage of 40%, this means that the device must attain a target cost of $90 ($150 price x (1 – 40% gross margin). Thus, the design team must reduce costs from $160 to $90.
The team decides that the GPS unit requires no display screen at all, since users can plug the device into a computer to download information. This eliminates the LCD display and one computer chip. It also prolongs the battery life, since the unit no longer has to provide power to the display. The team also finds that a new microprocessor requires less power; given these reduced power requirements, the team can now use a smaller battery.
Finally, the team finds that the high impact plastic case is over engineered, and can withstand a hard impact with a much thinner shell. After the team incorporates all of these changes, it has reached the $90 cost target. SkiPS can now market a new device at a price point that allows it to earn a generous gross profit.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Milagro Corporation is developing a new espresso machine that only works with its specially developed strain of coffee bean. Milagro conducts market research and concludes that the product cannot sell for more than $200. At the company’s required gross margin of 40%, this means that the target cost of the product is $120. Management sets a maximum design duration of six months, with milestone reviews at one month intervals. The results of the month end milestone reviews are:
|
Review Date
|
Cost Goal
|
Actual Cost Estimate
|
Actual Cost Variance from Goal
|
Allowance Variance From Cost Goal
|
|
Jan. 31
|
$120
|
$150
|
25%
|
30%
|
|
Feb. 28
|
120
|
143
|
19%
|
20%
|
|
Mar. 31
|
120
|
138
|
15%
|
15%
|
|
Apr. 30
|
120
|
134
|
12%
|
10%
|
|
May 31
|
120
|
Cancelled
|
|
5%
|
|
June 30
|
120
|
Cancelled
|
|
0%
|
As the table reveals, the Milagro project team was able to stay ahead of the cost target at the end of the first two months, but then was barely able to meet the allowable variance in the third month, and finally fell behind in the fourth month. Manage ment then cancelled the project, saving itself the cost of continuing the project team for several more months when it was becoming obvious that the team would not be able to achieve the target cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Active Exercise Machines is designing a new treadmill for the home exercise market, and is having trouble pricing the laminated rubber conveyor belt. Since Active is creating a treadmill in a non standard length, the conveyor belt supplier will incur a setup cost, and must spread this cost over the projected number of treadmills to be produced. Since the setup cost is significant, the cost per unit will decline dramatically if Active orders more conveyor belts. The cost is $95 per unit if Active only orders 5,000 belts, and drops to $50 if Active orders 10,000 belts. Since the total cost of the treadmill is projected to be $500, this difference represents 9% of the total cost, which is significant enough to bring to the attention of management. Consequently, the cost accountant presents management with two projected costs for the treadmill – one at a unit volume of 5,000, and another at a unit volume of 10,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which activities are elements of value engineering?
a. Reducing durability
b. Reducing product features
c. Reducing the number of parts
d. All of the above
2. Why is there a milestone review in target costing?
a. To review the expenses incurred by the target costing team
b. To see if product prices have changed since the project began
c. To examine changes in product technology
d. To compare the designed cost of a product to its target cost
3. The role of a cost accountant on a target costing team does not include:
a. Compiling the cost of the product
b. Evaluating the performance of the team
c. Cost variance analysis
d. Obtaining cost information from suppliers
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Entwhistle Electric makes compact batteries for a variety of mobile applications. It was recently purchased by Razor Holdings, which also owns Green Lawn Care, maker of low emission lawn mowers. The reason for Razor’s purchase of Entwhistle was to give Green an assured supply of batteries for Green’s new line of all electric lawn mowers. Razor’s corporate planning staff mandates that Entwhistle set a transfer price for batteries shipped to Green that equals its cost, and also requires that Entwhistle fulfill all of Green’s needs before it can sell to any other customers. Green’s orders are highly seasonal, so Entwhistle finds that it cannot fulfill orders from its other customers at all during the high point of Green’s production season. Also, because the transfer price is set at cost, Entwhistle’s management finds that it no longer has a reason to drive down its costs, and so its production efficiencies stagnate.
After a year, Razor’s corporate staff realizes that Entwhistle has lost 80% of its previous customer base, and is now essential ly relying upon its sales to Green to stay operational. Entwhistle’s profit margin has vanished, since it can only sell at cost, and its original management team, faced with a contracting business, have all left to work for competitors.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Entwhistle Electric creates five tons per year of black plastic shavings as part of its production of battery casings. Since there is no market for black plastic scrap, the company has traditionally thrown it into the trash. The annual trash haulage and environmental disposal fees associated with this scrap are about $1,000.
Entwhistle’s fellow corporate subsidiary, Green Lawn Care, learns of the black plastic scrap situation, and offers to buy it from Entwhistle for a token $10 a ton, as well as haul it away for free. Green can melt down this scrap and use it in the black plastic trim on its electric lawn mowers.
Entwhistle agrees to the deal, not only because of the minor $50 in annual revenues, but also because of the eliminated disposal fees and the mitigated risk of having any environmental issues related to the scrap.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Razor Holdings adopts a transfer pricing policy under which each of its subsidiaries can add a 30% margin to the additional costs transferred to buying subsidiaries. In the following scenario, its Lead Supply subsidiary sends lead components to Entwhistle Electric, which incorporates the lead into its batteries. Entwhistle sends the batteries to Green Lawn Care, which includes the batteries in its electric lawn shears.
|
Lead Supply
|
Entwhistle Electric
|
Green Lawn Care
|
|
Transferred cost
|
$0
|
$5.85
|
13.98
|
|
Additional cost
|
4.50
|
6.25
|
15.00
|
|
30% markup
|
1.35
|
1.88
|
4.50
|
|
Transfer price
|
$5.85
|
$13.98
|
$33.48
|
Unfortunately, the market price for electric lawn shears is $30, so the Green Lawn Care subsidiary will only earn a profit of $1.02, or 3%, on each sale. However, the company as a whole will earn a profit of $4.25 ($1.35 for Lead Supply + $1.88 for Entwhistle + $1.02 for Green), or 14%.
Thus, Green Lawn Care likely questions why it is bothering to sell electric lawn shears, while corporate management is somewhat more pleased with the overall result.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of Dude Skis wants to know how much it will cost to increase production of its Drag Knuckle Skis from 5,000 units to 8,000 units, so that it can sell the additional 3,000 skis for a wholesale price (in aggregate) of $900,000. The most obvious direct cost is the cost of the wood core and graphite laminate used in the skis, at a cost of $150 per pair of skis. In addition, the company will require three additional staff whose labor cost will be $25 per pair of skis. Finally, the company must lease a lamination machine for $30,000, which it can then return to the lessor after the production run is complete.
For the purposes of this specific production increase decision, then, the associated direct costs are:
|
Incremental revenue
|
$900,000
|
|
Cost of materials ($150 x 3,000 units)
|
450,000
|
|
Cost of labor ($25 x 3,000 units)
|
75,000
|
|
Cost of lamination machine
|
30,000
|
|
Total of all direct costs
|
555,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$355,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturer of tiling grout has supplied the following data:
|
Kilograms produced and sold
|
300,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$1,950,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
$960,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
$266,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
$360,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
$232,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$132,000
|
The company”s break-even in unit sales is closest to:
A) 43,774
B) 237,143
C) 76,615
D) 80,606
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturer of tiling grout has supplied the following data:
|
Kilograms produced and sold
|
300,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$1,950,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
$960,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
$266,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
$360,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
$232,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$132,000
|
The company”s contribution margin ratio is closest to:
A) 67.7%
B) 74.2%
C) 32.3%
D) 25.8%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kerensky Corporation, a wholesale company, has provided the following data:
|
Sales per period
|
1,000 units
|
|
Selling price .
|
$35 per unit
|
|
Variable production cost
|
$15 per unit
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$5,000 plus 5% of selling price
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$3,000 plus 10% of selling price
|
The contribution margin ratio is closest to:
A) 57%
B) 58%
C) 42%
D) 62%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kerensky Corporation, a wholesale company, has provided the following data:
|
Sales per period
|
1,000 units
|
|
Selling price .
|
$35 per unit
|
|
Variable production cost
|
$15 per unit
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$5,000 plus 5% of selling price
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$3,000 plus 10% of selling price
|
The margin of safety percentage is closest to:
A) 46%
B) 60%
C) 42%
D) 62%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kerensky Corporation, a wholesale company, has provided the following data:
|
Sales per period
|
1,000 units
|
|
Selling price .
|
$35 per unit
|
|
Variable production cost
|
$15 per unit
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$5,000 plus 5% of selling price
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$3,000 plus 10% of selling price
|
The number of units needed to achieve a target net operating income of $20,000 is closest to:
A) 1,404 units
B) 542 units
C) 1,898 units
D) 1,361 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mark Corporation produces two models of calculators. The Business model sells for $60, and
the Math model sells for $40. The variable expenses are given below:
|
|
Business
|
Math
|
|
|
Model
|
Model
|
|
Variable production costs per unit
|
$15
|
$16
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expenses per unit
|
$9
|
$6
|
The fixed expenses are $75,000 per month. The expected monthly sales of each model are:
Business, 1,000 units; Math, 500 units.
The contribution margin ratio for the Business model is:
A) 40 percent
B) 75 percent
C) 85 percent
D) 60 percent
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kelvin Corporation’s president asks the cost accountant to create an analysis of whether the company should drop its oldest product line, which is a series of mercury-based glass thermometers that are primarily sold into the elementary school market for chemistry classes for an average price of $5.25 each. The cost accountant investigates and finds the following costs on a per-unit basis:
|
Cost Item
|
Total Cost
|
Relevant Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$2.25
|
$2.25
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.75
|
0.75
|
|
Variable overhead
|
1.00
|
1.00
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
1.50
|
—
|
|
Total
|
$5.50
|
$4.00
|
The company intends to shut down the entire production line for these glass thermometers, so the variable overhead element of the cost will be eliminated if the product line is stopped. However, the fixed overhead cost is related to the cost of the entire facility in which the company operates, and these costs will not go away if the company drops the product line. Thus, though the total cost of a thermometer is $5.50, the cost relevant to this product elimination decision is $4.00. The $4.00 cost is less than the price being charged to customers, so the company will fare better if it retains the product line and uses its gross margins to help pay for fixed overhead.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
This example contains several journal entries used to account for transactions in a perpetual inventory system. Mulligan Imports records a purchase of $1,000 of golf clubs that are stored in inventory:
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Inventory
|
1,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
1,000
|
Mulligan records $250 of inbound freight cost associated with the delivery of golf clubs:
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Inventory
|
250
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
250
|
Mulligan records the sale of golf clubs from inventory for $2,000, for which the associated inventory cost is $1,200:
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,000
|
|
|
Revenue
|
|
2,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,200
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
1,200
|
Mulligan records a downward inventory adjustment of $500, caused by inventory theft, and detected during a cycle count:
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Inventory shrinkage expense
|
500
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
500
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mulligan Imports decides to use the FIFO method for the month of January. During that month, it records the following transactions:
|
Quantity Change
|
Actual Unit Cost
|
Actual Total Cost
|
|
Beginning inventory (Layer 1)
|
+100
|
$210
|
$21,000
|
|
Sale
|
-75
|
|
|
|
Purchase (Layer 2)
|
+150
|
280
|
42,000
|
|
Sale
|
-100
|
|
|
|
Purchase (Layer 3)
|
+50
|
300
|
15,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
=125
|
|
|
The cost of goods sold in units is calculated as:
100 Beginning inventory + 200 Purchased – 125 Ending inventory = 175 Units
Mulligan’s cost accountant uses the information in the preceding table to calculate the cost of goods sold for January, as well as the cost of the inventory balance as of the end of January.
|
Units
|
Units Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
FIFO layer 1
|
100
|
$210
|
$21,000
|
|
FIFO layer 2
|
75
|
280
|
21,000
|
|
Total cost of goods sold
|
175
|
|
$42,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
|
|
|
|
FIFO layer 2
|
75
|
280
|
$21,000
|
|
FIFO layer 3
|
50
|
300
|
15,000
|
|
Total ending inventory
|
125
|
|
$36,000
|
Thus, the first FIFO layer, which was the beginning inventory layer, is completely used up during the month, as well as half of Layer 2, leaving half of Layer 2 and all of Layer 3 to be the sole components of the ending inventory.
Note that the $42,000 cost of goods sold and $36,000 ending inventory equals the $78,000 combined total of beginning inventory and purchases during the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mulligan Imports decides to use the LIFO method for the month of March. The following table shows the various purchasing transactions for the company’s Golf Elite clubs. The quantity purchased on March 1 actually reflects the inventory beginning balance.
|
Date Purchased
|
Quantity Purchased
|
Cost per Unit
|
Units Sold
|
Cost of Layer 1
|
Cost of Layer 2
|
Total Cost
|
|
1-Mar
|
150
|
$210
|
95
|
(55 x $210)
|
$11,550
|
|
7-Mar
|
100
|
235
|
110
|
(45 x $210)
|
9,450
|
|
11-Mar
|
200
|
250
|
180
|
(45 x $210)
|
20 x $250)
|
14,450
|
|
17-Mar
|
125
|
240
|
125
|
(45 x $210)
|
20 x $250)
|
14,450
|
|
25-Mar
|
80
|
260
|
120
|
(25 x $210)
|
5,250
|
The following bullet points describe the transactions noted in the preceding table:
March 1. Mulligan has a beginning inventory balance of 150 units, and sells 95 of these units between March 1 and March 7. This leaves one inventory layer of 55 units at a cost of $210 each.
March 7. Mulligan buys 100 additional units on March 7, and sells 110 units between March 7 and March 11. Under LIFO, we assume that the latest purchase was sold first, so there is still just one inventory layer, which has now been reduced to 45 units.
March 11. Mulligan buys 200 additional units on March 11, and sells 180 units between March 11 and March 17, which creates a new inventory layer that is comprised of 20 units at a cost of $250. This new layer appears in the ta-ble in the “Cost of Layer #2” column.
March 17. Mulligan buys 125 additional units on March 17, and sells 125 units between March 17 and March 25, so there is no change in the inventory layers.
March 25. Mulligan buys 80 additional units on March 25, and sells 120 units between March 25 and the end of the month. Sales exceed purchases during this period, so the second inventory layer is eliminated, as well as part of the first layer. The result is an ending inventory balance of $5,250, which is derived from 25 units of ending inventory, multiplied by the $210 cost in the first layer that existed at the beginning of the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mulligan Imports sells golf clubs for an average of $200, and which cost it $140. This is a cost-to-retail percentage of 70%. Mulligan’s beginning inventory has a cost of $1,000,000, it paid $1,800,000 for purchases during the month, and it had sales of $2,400,000. The calculation of its ending inventory is:
|
Beginning inventory
|
$1,000,000
|
(at cost)
|
|
Purchases
|
1,800,000
|
(at cost)
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
= 2,800,000
|
|
|
Sales
|
-1,680,000
|
(Sales of $2,400,000 x 70%)
|
|
Ending inventory
|
= $1,120,000
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mulligan Imports has a small golf shaft production line, which manufactures a titanium shaft and an aluminum shaft. Considerable machining is required for both shafts, so Mulligan concludes that it should allocate overhead to these products based on the total hours of machine time used. In May, production of the titanium shaft requires 5,400 hours of machine time, while the aluminum shaft needs 2,600 hours. Thus, 67.5% of the overhead cost pool is allocated to the titanium shafts and 32.5% to the aluminum shafts.
In May, Mulligan accumulates $100,000 of costs in its overhead cost pool, and allocates it between the two product lines with the following journal entry:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Finished goods – Titanium shafts
|
67,500
|
|
|
Finished goods – Aluminum shafts
|
32,500
|
|
|
Overhead cost pool
|
|
100,000
|
This entry clears out the balance in the overhead cost pool, readying it to accumulate overhead costs in the next reporting period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mulligan Imports resells five major brands of golf clubs, which are noted in the following table. At the end of its reporting year, Mulligan calculates the lower of its cost or net realizable value in the following table:
|
Product Line
|
Quantity on Hand
|
Unit Cost
|
Inventory at Cost
|
Market Per Unit
|
Lower of Cost or Market
|
|
Free Swing
|
1,000
|
$190
|
$190,000
|
$230
|
$190,000
|
|
Golf Elite
|
750
|
140
|
105,000
|
170
|
105,000
|
|
Hi-Flight
|
200
|
135
|
27,000
|
120
|
24,000
|
|
Iridescent
|
1,200
|
280
|
336,000
|
160
|
192,000
|
|
Titanium
|
800
|
200
|
160,000
|
215
|
160,000
|
Based on the table, the market value is lower than cost on the Hi-Flight and Iridescent product lines. Consequently, Mulligan recognizes a loss on the Hi-Flight product line of $3,000 ($27,000 – $24,000), as well as a loss of $144,000 ($336,000 – $192,000) on the Iridescent product line.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Twill Machinery orders $10,000 of sheet metal, which arrives and is stored in the warehouse. Twill records this transaction with the following entry:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Raw materials inventory
|
10,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
10,000
|
Twill’s production scheduling staff creates job number 1200, which is designated to accumulate the costs associated with a laying press for an antique book bindery. The production scheduling staff authorizes the issuance of a pick list to the warehouse, which is used to pick items from stock for the construction of job 1200. The pick list includes the following items:
|
Item
|
Cost
|
|
Sheet metal
|
$1,500
|
|
Hardboard platen
|
450
|
|
Press bed
|
280
|
|
Adjustment wheel
|
150
|
|
Total cost
|
$2,380
|
Twill uses the following entry to record the transfer of raw materials to work in process for job 1200. Note that only a portion of the sheet metal is moved to work in process; the rest of the purchased amount remains in the warehouse, to be used on some other job.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Work in process (Job 1200)
|
23,80
|
|
|
Raw materials inventory
|
|
23,80
|
During production of the laying press, Twill experiences $300 of abnormal scrap, which it charges directly to the cost of goods sold (not to Job 1200), on the grounds that it must recognize the expense at once. The entry is:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
300
|
|
|
Work in process (Job 1200)
|
|
300
|
At the end of the month, $5,000 of normal scrap costs have accumulated in the waste overhead cost pool, which accumulates the costs of normal scrap and spoilage (see the Waste Accounting chapter). The cost accountant determines that 10% of this amount, or $500, should be allocated to Job 1200. The entry is:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Work in process (Job 1200)
|
500
|
|
|
Waste cost pool
|
|
500
|
Twill completes work on the laying press and shifts all related material costs to the finished goods inventory account. The entry is:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Finished goods (Job 1200)
|
2580
|
|
|
Work in process (Job 1200)
|
|
2580
|
Please note that these entries do not yet include labor costs or an allocation for manufacturing overhead; these topics are addressed in the following sections.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is a continuation of the preceding example, where Twill Machinery is building a laying press for an antique book bindery. Twill pays its employees at the end of each month, and records the following payroll entry for its production department:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Work in process (Job 1200)
|
8,000
|
|
|
Work in process (Job 1201)
|
16,000
|
2580
|
|
Work in process (Job 1202)
|
41,000
|
Credit
|
|
Overhead cost pool
|
35,000
|
|
|
Wages payable
|
|
100,000
|
At the end of the month, Twill allocates the indirect labor in the overhead cost pool to the various open jobs. Of the $35,000 of labor in the overhead cost pool, Twill allocates $4,000 to Job 1200 with the following entry:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Work in process (Job 1200)
|
4000
|
|
|
Overhead cost pool
|
|
4000
|
Twill completes work on the laying press and shifts all related labor costs to the finished goods inventory account. The entry is:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Finished goods (Job 1200)
|
12000
|
|
|
Work in process (Job 1200)
|
|
12000
|
This final entry comes from the $8,000 of direct labor that was initially charged against Job 1200, and the $4,000 of indirect labor that was allocated to it.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is a continuation of the preceding example, where Twill Machinery is building a laying press for an antique book bindery. During the most recent reporting period, Twill incurred the following costs, all of which it records in an overhead cost pool:
|
Expense Type
|
Amount
|
|
Production facility rent
|
$60,000
|
|
Equipment repair costs
|
15,000
|
|
Building repair costs
|
9,000
|
|
Production supplies
|
3,000
|
|
Total
|
$87,000
|
Twill allocates overhead costs to jobs based on their use of production equipment. Job 1200 accounted for 12% of total equipment usage during the month, so Twill allocates 12% of the $87,000 in the cost pool to Job 1200 with the following entry:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Work in process (Job 1200)
|
10440
|
|
|
Overhead cost pool
|
|
10440
|
Twill completes work on the laying press and shifts all related overhead costs to the finished goods inventory account. The entry is:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Finished goods (Job 1200)
|
10440
|
|
|
Work in process (Job 1200)
|
|
10440
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Twill Manufacturing decides to revise its cost allocation method to the standard costing system. In the past three months, the company incurred the following amounts of manufacturing overhead:
|
Month 1
|
$71,000
|
|
Month 2
|
82,000
|
|
Month 3
|
87,000
|
|
Average monthly overhead
|
$80,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The manufacturing facility usually experiences 2,000 hours of machine usage per month, so Twill adopts a standard overhead allocation rate of $40 per hour of machine usage, which it derives as follows:
$80,000 Average monthly overhead / 2,000 Hours of machine usage = $40/hour allocation rate
During the most recent month, Job 1200 incurred $10,440 of actual overhead costs (see the preceding example). In that month, it used 240 hours of machine time, which at a standard application rate of $40/hour, results in an overhead allocation of $9,600. Thus, the use of a standard overhead rate that is based on an historical average amount of costs incurred results in an $840 reduction in the amount of overhead charged to Job 1200.
In Month 3, the standard $40/hour rate is charged to 2,000 of machine time used, for a total allocation of $80,000. This leaves $7,000 of actual overhead costs remaining in the overhead cost pool (since $87,000 of actual overhead costs were incurred in Month 3). Rather than go through the effort of allocating this residual to any accounts or jobs, the cost accountant elects to charge it directly to the cost of goods sold with the following entry:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
7000
|
|
|
Overhead cost pool
|
|
7000
|
The net effect of this adjustment is that Twill records $7,000 more expense in the current month than might otherwise have been the case. If it had instead elected to use the allocation of actual overhead costs, the costs would have remained in the inventory account as an asset until the jobs were billed to customers.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. You should not dispose of the difference between standard and actual overhead costs by:
a. Charging it to the cost of goods sold
b. Retaining it in an overhead cost pool for the next reporting period
c. Charging it to jobs
d. Allocating the variance to the inventory and cost of goods sold accounts
2. You should close a job record promptly in order to:
a. Keep from charging additional expenses to it
b. Encourage its use for fraudulent reporting
c. Prevent overhead from being charged to it
d. Both a. and c.
3. Direct labor may be fraudulently recorded in overhead in order to:
a. Defer its recognition as an expense
b. Accelerate its recognition as an expense
c. Record it as a liability
d. Record it as an equity line item
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Puller Corporation uses process costing to calculate the cost of its ubiquitous plastic door knobs, which are identical in all respects, and cost $0.25 each. Puller stores its plastic door knobs in an unfinished state and waits for customer orders before applying additional finishing operations.
The final finishing operation can involve either a chrome lamination operation, a spray on mahogany finish, or rolling in a tumbler that simulates distressed furniture. Each of these operations results in a different cost. The cost of additional finishing in chrome is $0.15, the mahogany finish is $0.05, and the tumbler operation is $0.12. Thus, the additional costs are signifi cantly different from each other, and will be completed in small batches, depending upon the size of customer orders.
Based on the variety of possible outcomes and the smaller size of production runs for finishing operations, Puller elects to keep its process costing system for the initial creation of plastic door knobs, but to switch to a job costing system to calculate finishing costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company that makes organic fertilizer has supplied the following data:
|
Bags produced and sold
|
240,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$1,896,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
$804,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
$520,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
$180,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
$270,000
|
|
Net operating income.
|
$122,000
|
The company”s margin of safety in units is closest to:
A) 140,000
B) 202,238
C) 125,714
D) 32,105
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data was provided by Truxton Corporation:
|
Sales
|
10,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$30 per unit
|
|
Contribution margin ratio
|
30%
|
|
Margin of safety percentage
|
40%
|
The variable expense per unit is:
A) $21
B) $9
C) $12
D) $18
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data was provided by Truxton Corporation:
|
Sales
|
10,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$30 per unit
|
|
Contribution margin ratio
|
30%
|
|
Margin of safety percentage
|
40%
|
The break-even level in sales dollars is:
A) $180,000
B) $90,000
C) $210,000
D) $54,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data was provided by Truxton Corporation:
|
Sales
|
10,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$30 per unit
|
|
Contribution margin ratio
|
30%
|
|
Margin of safety percentage
|
40%
|
Net operating income at sales of 10,000 units is:
A) $0
B) $36,000
C) $90,000
D) $300,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturer of cedar shingles has supplied the following data:
|
Bundles of cedar shakes produced and sold
|
280,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$2,072,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
$1,134,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
$436,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
$238,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
$164,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$100,000
|
The company”s break-even in unit sales is closest to:
A) 130,149
B) 81,081
C) 25,038
D) 240,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturer of cedar shingles has supplied the following data:
|
Bundles of cedar shakes produced and sold
|
280,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$2,072,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
$1,134,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
$436,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
$238,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
$164,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$100,000
|
The company”s contribution margin ratio is closest to:
A) 66.2%
B) 73.0%
C) 27.0%
D) 33.8%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturer of cedar shingles has supplied the following data:
|
Bundles of cedar shakes produced and sold
|
280,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$2,072,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
$1,134,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
$436,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
$238,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
$164,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$100,000
|
The company”s degree of operating leverage is closest to:
A) 2.80
B) 7.00
C) 2.29
D) 20.72
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sunnripe Company manufactures and sells two types of beach towels, standard and deluxe. Sunnripe expects the following operating results next year for each type of towel:
|
|
Standard
|
Deluxe
|
|
Sales
|
$450,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Variable expenses (total)
|
$360,000
|
$20,000
|
Sunnripe expects to have a total of $57,600 in fixed expenses next year. What is Sunnripe”s break-even point next year in sales dollars?
A) $72,000
B) $144,000
C) $192,000
D) $240,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Birney Company has prepared the following budget data:
|
Sales
|
150,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$25 per unit
|
|
Variable expenses
|
$15 per unit
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expenses
|
$800,000
|
|
Fixed selling and admin. expenses
|
$700,000
|
An advertising agency claims that an aggressive advertising campaign would enable the company to increase its unit sales by 20%. What is the maximum amount that the company can pay for advertising and obtain a net operating income of $200,000?
A) $100,000
B) $200,000
C) $300,000
D) $550,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A cement manufacturer has supplied the following data:
|
Tons of cement produced and sold
|
220,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$924,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
$297,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
$280,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
$165,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
$82,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$100,000
|
If the company increases its unit sales volume by 5% without increasing its fixed expenses, then total net operating income should be closest to:
A) $5,000
B) $123,100
C) $105,000
D) $102,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A tile manufacturer has supplied the following data:
|
Boxes of tiles produced and sold
|
580,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$2,842,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
1,653,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
784,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
145,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
128,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$132,000
|
What is the company”s unit contribution margin?
A) $0.23
B) $4.90
C) $3.10
D) $1.80
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A tile manufacturer has supplied the following data:
|
Boxes of tiles produced and sold
|
580,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$2,842,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
1,653,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
784,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
145,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
128,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$132,000
|
The company”s contribution margin ratio is closest to:
A) 29.4%
B) 4.7%
C) 63.3%
D) 36.7%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A tile manufacturer has supplied the following data:
|
Boxes of tiles produced and sold
|
580,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$2,842,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
1,653,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
784,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
145,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
128,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$132,000
|
If the company increases its unit sales volume by 5% without increasing its fixed expenses, then total net operating income should be closest to:
A) $6,600
B) $184,200
C) $134,422
D) $138,600
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Drake Company”s income statement for the most recent year appears below:
|
Sales (26,000 units)
|
$650,000
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
442,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
208,000
|
|
Less: Fixed expenses
|
234,000
|
|
Net operating loss
|
$ (26,000)
|
The unit contribution margin is:
A) $17.00
B) $8.00
C) $1.00
D) $9.00
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Drake Company”s income statement for the most recent year appears below:
|
Sales (26,000 units)
|
$650,000
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
442,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
208,000
|
|
Less: Fixed expenses
|
234,000
|
|
Net operating loss
|
$ (26,000)
|
The break-even point in sales dollars is:
A) $731,250
B) $676,000
C) $675,000
D) $720,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Drake Company”s income statement for the most recent year appears below:
|
Sales (26,000 units)
|
$650,000
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
442,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
208,000
|
|
Less: Fixed expenses
|
234,000
|
|
Net operating loss
|
$ (26,000)
|
If the company desires a net operating income of $20,000, the number of units needed to be sold is:
A) 28,500
B) 31,000
C) 31,750
D) 26,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Drake Company”s income statement for the most recent year appears below:
|
Sales (26,000 units)
|
$650,000
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
442,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
208,000
|
|
Less: Fixed expenses
|
234,000
|
|
Net operating loss
|
$ (26,000)
|
The sales manager is convinced that a $60,000 expenditure on advertising will increase unit sales by fifty percent without any other increase in fixed expenses. If the sales manager is correct, the company”s net operating income would increase by:
A) $44,000
B) $34,000
C) $30,000
D) $49,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Roberts Company bases its budget on the following data:
|
Sales
|
3,600 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$50 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$15 per unit
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
$40,530
|
If the company wants to increase its total contribution margin by 40%, it will need to increase its sales by about:
A) $48,840
B) $72,000
C) $50,400
D) $34,188
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Roberts Company bases its budget on the following data:
|
Sales
|
3,600 units
|
|
Selling price
|
$50 per unit
|
|
Variable expense
|
$15 per unit
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
$40,530
|
If the company wants its margin of safety to equal $40,000, it will need to sell about:
A) 1,158 units
B) 1,958 units
C) 2,300 units
D) 800 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturer of premium wire strippers has supplied the following data:
|
Units produced and sold
|
560,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$4,704,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
2,436,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
1,200,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
616,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
272,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$180,000
|
The company”s unit contribution margin is closest to:
A) $2.95
B) $5.45
C) $7.30
D) $4.05
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Normand Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning
the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
400
|
|
Materials costs
|
700
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$8,700
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
$3,700
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
70%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
10%
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
6,400
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
5,600
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month
|
$92,200
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,500
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
80%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
25%
|
Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:
A) $45.66
B) $52.86
C) $47.94
D) $48.14
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ozdemir Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
200
|
|
Materials costs
|
$1,800
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$600
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
55%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
10%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
5,000
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
4,500
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$74,800
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month
|
$128,800
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
700
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
85%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
70%
|
Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you co puted. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $16.36
B) $14.38
C) $16.62
D) $15.01
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The information below was obtained from the records of Bapst Company for the month of May. The company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system.
| |
|
Labor and Overhead
|
| |
Units
|
Percent Complete
|
|
Work in process inventory, May 1
|
3,000
|
30%
|
|
|
Started into production
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, May 31
|
4,000
|
40%
|
|
All materials are added at the beginning of the manufacturing process.
The equivalent units for material for the month are:
A) 21,600 units
B) 22,500 units
C) 16,000 units
D) 20,000 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The information below was obtained from the records of Bapst Company for the month of May. The company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system.
| |
|
Labor and Overhead
|
| |
Units
|
Percent Complete
|
|
Work in process inventory, May 1
|
3,000
|
30%
|
|
|
Started into production
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, May 31
|
4,000
|
40%
|
|
All materials are added at the beginning of the manufacturing process.
The equivalent units for labor and overhead for the month are:
A) 17,600 units
B) 18,500 units
C) 19,700 units
D) 21,600 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Marlan Manufacturing produces a product that passes through two processing departments. The units from the Molding Department are completed in the Assembly Department. The activity in the Assembly Department for the current month is presented below. Marlan uses the FIFO method in its process costing system.
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory (materials 0%
|
|
|
complete; conversion 25% complete)
|
8,000
|
|
Units transferred in from the Molding Department during the
|
|
|
month
|
42,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred to finished goods
|
38,000
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory (materials 0%
|
|
|
complete; conversion 40% complete)
|
12,000
|
The equivalent units (with respect to the Molding Department”s costs) transferred from
the Molding Department to the Assembly during the month were:
A) 30,000 units
B) 38,000 units
C) 40,800 units
D) 42,000 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Marlan Manufacturing produces a product that passes through two processing departments. The units from the Molding Department are completed in the Assembly Department. The activity in the Assembly Department for the current month is presented below. Marlan uses the FIFO method in its process costing system.
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory (materials 0%
|
|
|
complete; conversion 25% complete)
|
8,000
|
|
Units transferred in from the Molding Department during the
|
|
|
month
|
42,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred to finished goods
|
38,000
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory (materials 0%
|
|
|
complete; conversion 40% complete)
|
12,000
|
The equivalent units for materials for the Assembly Department during the month
were:
A) 30,000 units
B) 38,000 units
C) 40,800 units
D) 42,000 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Anchor Inc. uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for a recent month.
|
Work in process, beginning:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
800
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion……….
|
10%
|
|
Costs in the beginning inventory:
|
|
|
Materials cost …………………………………………………..
|
$1,296
|
|
Conversion cost ………………………………………………..
|
$2,416
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
16,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred out …………………………
|
16,500
|
|
Costs added to production during the month:
|
|
|
Materials cost ……………………………………………………..
|
$47,076
|
|
Conversion cost …………………………………………………..
|
$497,213
|
|
Work in process, ending:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
300
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion
|
70%
|
Required:
Prepare a production report for the department using the weighted-average method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ayres Inc. uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for a recent month.
|
Work in process, beginning:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
300
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion
|
60%
|
|
Costs in the beginning inventory:
|
|
|
Materials cost
|
$1,314
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$6,102
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
22,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred out
|
21,800
|
|
Costs added to production during the month:
|
|
|
Materials cost
|
$164,436
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$728,058
|
|
Work in process, ending:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
500
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion
|
10%
|
Required:
Prepare a production report for the department using the weighted-average method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bae Inc. uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for a recent month.
|
Work in process, beginning:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
100
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
70%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion
|
90%
|
|
Costs in the beginning inventory:
|
|
|
Materials cost
|
$182
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$3,429
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
10,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred out
|
9,700
|
|
Costs added to production during the month:
|
|
|
Materials cost
|
$27,986
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$373,815
|
|
Work in process, ending:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
400
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
90%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion
|
70%
|
Required:
Using the weighted-average method:
a. Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.
b. Determine the cost per equivalent unit for materials and conversion costs.
c. Determine the cost of units transferred out of the department during the month.
d. Determine the cost of ending work in process inventory in the department.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Callet Inc. uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The
following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for
a recent month.
|
Work in process, beginning:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
500
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
90%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion
|
70%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
23,000
|
|
Work in process, ending:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
400
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
80%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion
|
90%
|
Required:
Using the weighted-average method, determine the equivalent units of production for
materials and conversion costs by compiling the “Quantity Schedule and Equivalent
Units” portion of the production report.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dachuna Inc. uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for a recent month.
|
Work in process, beginning:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
500
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion……………
|
70%
|
|
Costs in the beginning inventory:
|
|
|
Materials cost
|
$1,020
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$8,925
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
10,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred out
|
9,600
|
|
Costs added to production during the month:
|
|
|
Materials cost
|
$31,488
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$259,548
|
|
Work in process, ending:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
900
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion
|
90%
|
Required:
Prepare a production report for the department using the FIFO method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Edwards Inc. uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for a recent month.
|
Work in process, beginning:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
100
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
50%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion……………
|
90%
|
|
Costs in the beginning inventory:
|
|
|
Materials cost
|
$260
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$3,366
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
20,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred out
|
19,800
|
|
Costs added to production during the month:
|
|
|
Materials cost
|
$99,650
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$745,329
|
|
Work in process, ending:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
300
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Stage of completion with respect to conversion
|
20%
|
Required:
Using the FIFO method:
a. Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.
b. Determine the cost per equivalent unit for materials and conversion costs.
c. Determine the cost of units transferred out of the department during the month.
d. Determine the cost of ending work in process inventory in the department.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
As the level of activity increases, how will a mixed cost in total and per unit behave?
| |
In Total
|
Per Unit
|
|
A)
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
|
B)
|
Increase
|
Increase
|
|
C)
|
Increase
|
No effect
|
|
D)
|
Decrease
|
Increase
|
|
E)
|
Decrease
|
No effect
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
When the activity level is expected to decline within the relevant range, what effects would be anticipated with respect to each of the following?
| |
Fixed costs
|
Variable
|
| |
per unit
|
costs per unit
|
|
A)
|
Increase
|
Increase
|
|
B)
|
Increase
|
No change
|
|
C)
|
No change
|
No change
|
|
D)
|
No change
|
Increase
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data have been collected for four different cost items.
| |
Cost at 100
|
Cost at 140
|
|
Cost Item
|
units
|
units
|
|
W
|
$8,000
|
$10,560
|
|
X
|
$5,000
|
$5,000
|
|
Y
|
$6,500
|
$9,100
|
|
Z
|
$6,700
|
$8,580
|
Which of the following classifications of these cost items by cost behavior is correct?
| |
Cost W
|
Cost X
|
Cost Y
|
Cost Z
|
|
A)
|
variable
|
fixed
|
mixed
|
variable
|
|
B)
|
mixed
|
fixed
|
variable
|
mixed
|
|
C)
|
variable
|
fixed
|
variable
|
variable
|
|
D)
|
mixed
|
fixed
|
mixed
|
mixed
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. To estimate what the profit will be at various levels of activity, a manager can simply take the number of units to be sold over the break-even point and multiply that number by the unit contribution margin.
2. Incremental analysis is generally the simplest and most direct approach to decision making.
3. To facilitate decision-making, fixed expenses should be expressed on a per-unit basis.
4. One assumption in CVP analysis is that inventories do not change.
5. On a CVP graph for a profitable company, the total expense line will be steeper than the total revenue line.
6. If sales volume increases, and all other factors remain unchanged, the contribution margin ratio will decrease.
7. The break-even point for a capital intensive, automated company will tend to be higher than for a less capital intensive company while the margin of safety will tend to be lower.
8. An increase in the number of units sold will decrease a company”s break-even point.
9. Assuming that the unit contribution margin is positive, a 10% decrease in selling price will increase the break-even point in terms of unit sales more than will a 10% increase in the variable expense.
10. The break-even point is the point where total contribution margin equals total variable expenses.
11. The break-even point can usually be determined by simply adding together all of the expenses from the income statement.
12. Two companies with the same margin of safety in dollars will also have the same total contribution margin.
13. If a company has high operating leverage, then profits will be very sensitive to changes in sales.
14. Operating leverage will decrease as the company”s margin of safety increases.
15. The overall contribution margin ratio for a company producing three products may be obtained by adding the contribution margin ratios for the three products and dividing the total by three.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the middle of the year, the price of Lake Corporation”s major raw material increased by 8%. How would this increase affect the company”s break-even point and margin of safety?
|
|
Break-even point
|
Margin of safety
|
|
A)
|
Increase
|
Increase
|
|
B)
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
|
C)
|
Decrease
|
Decrease
|
|
D)
|
Decrease
|
Increase
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information relates to Zinc Corporation for last year:
|
Sales
|
$500,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$25,000
|
|
Degree of operating leverage
|
5
|
Sales at Zinc are expected to be $600,000 next year. Assuming no change in cost structure, this means that net operating income for next year should be:
A) $30,000
B) $45,000
C) $50,000
D) $125,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Barnes Corporation expected to sell 150,000 games during the month of November. The following budgeted data are based on that level of sales:
|
Revenue (150,000 games)
|
$2,400,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
1,425,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead expenses
|
250,000
|
|
Fixed selling & administrative expenses
|
500,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
225,000
|
Barnes” actual sales during November were 180,000 games. What should the actual net operating income during November have been?
A) $450,000
B) $270,000
C) $420,000
D) $510,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Darth Company sells three products. Sales and contribution margin ratios for the three products follow:
|
|
Product
|
|
|
X
|
Y
|
Z
|
|
Sales in dollars
|
$20,000
|
$40,000
|
$100,000
|
|
contribution margin ratio
|
45%
|
40%
|
15%
|
Given these data, the contribution margin ratio for the company as a whole would be:
A) 25%
B) 75%
C) 33.3%
D) it is impossible to determine from the given data
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Joos Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
600
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$7,300
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$2,300
|
|
Conversion costs
|
50%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
10%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
9,400
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
8,600
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$196,300
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$315,800
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,400
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
70%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
40%
|
The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:
A) $31.81
B) $34.73
C) $34.48
D) $36.47
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harward Company”s Staining department recorded the following activity in June:
|
|
|
Labor and
|
|
|
Number of
|
Overhead Percent
|
|
|
Units
|
Completed
|
|
Work in process inventory, June 1
|
8,000
|
35%
|
|
Started into production during June
|
50,000
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, June 30
|
12,000
|
55%
|
All materials are added at the beginning of the process in the Staining Department. The equivalent units for labor and overhead for June, using the FIFO method, were:
A) 46,000 units
B) 49,800 units
C) 43,200 units
D) 52,600 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harward Company”s Staining department recorded the following activity in June:
|
|
|
Labor and
|
|
|
Number of
|
Overhead Percent
|
|
|
Units
|
Completed
|
|
Work in process inventory, June 1
|
8,000
|
35%
|
|
Started into production during June
|
50,000
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, June 30
|
12,000
|
55%
|
All materials are added at the beginning of the process in the Staining Department. The equivalent units for labor and overhead for June, using the weighted-average method, were:
A) 52,600 units
B) 62,000 units
C) 50,000 units
D) 46,000 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harward Company”s Staining department recorded the following activity in June:
|
|
|
Labor and
|
|
|
Number of
|
Overhead Percent
|
|
|
Units
|
Completed
|
|
Work in process inventory, June 1
|
8,000
|
35%
|
|
Started into production during June
|
50,000
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, June 30
|
12,000
|
55%
|
All materials are added at the beginning of the process in the Staining Department.
The equivalent units for materials for June, using the FIFO method, were:
A) 46,000 units
B) 42,000 units
C) 58,000 units
D) 50,000 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harward Company”s Staining department recorded the following activity in June:
|
|
|
Labor and
|
|
|
Number of
|
Overhead Percent
|
|
|
Units
|
Completed
|
|
Work in process inventory, June 1
|
8,000
|
35%
|
|
Started into production during June
|
50,000
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, June 30
|
12,000
|
55%
|
All materials are added at the beginning of the process in the Staining Department. The equivalent units for materials for June, using the weighted-average method, were:
A) 58,000 units
B) 52,600 units
C) 46,000 units
D) 60,000 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity in Saggers Company”s Assembly Department for the month of March follows:
|
|
|
Percent Complete
|
|
|
|
|
Labor &
|
|
|
Units
|
Materials
|
Overhead
|
|
Work in process inventory, March 1
|
6,000
|
60%
|
45%
|
|
Started into production during March
|
65,000
|
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, March 31
|
4,000
|
35%
|
20%
|
The equivalent units for labor and overhead for March, using the weighted-average method, are:
A) 69,600 units
B) 67,800 units
C) 71,000 units
D) 69,000 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity in Saggers Company”s Assembly Department for the month of March follows:
|
|
|
Percent Complete
|
|
|
|
|
Labor &
|
|
|
Units
|
Materials
|
Overhead
|
|
Work in process inventory, March 1
|
6,000
|
60%
|
45%
|
|
Started into production during March
|
65,000
|
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, March 31
|
4,000
|
35%
|
20%
|
The equivalent units for materials for March, using the weighted-average method, are:
A) 69,000 units
B) 65,000 units
C) 68,400 units
D) 67,000 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity in Saggers Company”s Assembly Department for the month of March follows:
|
|
|
Percent Complete
|
|
|
|
|
Labor &
|
|
|
Units
|
Materials
|
Overhead
|
|
Work in process inventory, March 1
|
6,000
|
60%
|
45%
|
|
Started into production during March
|
65,000
|
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, March 31
|
4,000
|
35%
|
20%
|
The equivalent units for labor and overhead for March, using the FIFO method, are:
A) 63,100 units
B) 65,000 units
C) 62,500 units
D) 65,100 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity in Saggers Company”s Assembly Department for the month of March follows:
|
|
|
Percent Complete
|
|
|
|
|
Labor &
|
|
|
Units
|
Materials
|
Overhead
|
|
Work in process inventory, March 1
|
6,000
|
60%
|
45%
|
|
Started into production during March
|
65,000
|
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, March 31
|
4,000
|
35%
|
20%
|
The equivalent units for materials for March, using the FIFO method, are:
A) 64,800 units
B) 59,800 units
C) 66,000 units
D) 67,200 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Levitt Company uses a process costing system. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Levitt”s production quantity schedule for November is reproduced below.
|
|
Units
|
|
Work-in-process on November 1 (conversion 60% complete)
|
1,000
|
|
Units started during November
|
5,000
|
|
Total units to account for
|
6,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred out from beginning inventory
|
1,000
|
|
Units started and completed during November
|
3,000
|
|
Work-in-process on November 30 (conversion 20% complete)
|
2,000
|
|
Total units accounted for
|
6,000
|
Using the FIFO method, the equivalent units for direct materials for November are:
A) 5,000 units
B) 6,000 units
C) 4,400 units
D) 3,800 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Levitt Company uses a process costing system. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Levitt”s production quantity schedule for November is reproduced below.
|
|
Units
|
|
Work-in-process on November 1 (conversion 60% complete)
|
1,000
|
|
Units started during November
|
5,000
|
|
Total units to account for
|
6,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred out from beginning inventory
|
1,000
|
|
Units started and completed during November
|
3,000
|
|
Work-in-process on November 30 (conversion 20% complete)
|
2,000
|
|
Total units accounted for
|
6,000
|
Using the FIFO method, the equivalent units for conversion costs for November are:
A) 3,400 units
B) 3,800 units
C) 4,000 units
D) 4,400 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Levitt Company uses a process costing system. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Levitt”s production quantity schedule for November is reproduced below.
|
|
Units
|
|
Work-in-process on November 1 (conversion 60% complete)
|
1,000
|
|
Units started during November
|
5,000
|
|
Total units to account for
|
6,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred out from beginning inventory
|
1,000
|
|
Units started and completed during November
|
3,000
|
|
Work-in-process on November 30 (conversion 20% complete)
|
2,000
|
|
Total units accounted for
|
6,000
|
Using the weighted-average method, the equivalent units for direct materials for November are:
A) 3,400 units
B) 4,400 units
C) 5,000 units
D) 6,000 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Qu Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
900
|
|
Materials costs
|
$9,800
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$9,200
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
55%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
30%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
8,400
|
|
Materials costs added during the month
|
$130,400
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
$220,600
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
2,200
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
65%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
25%
|
Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
How many units were started AND completed during the month in the first processing department?
A) 8,400
B) 7,100
C) 6,200
D) 9,300
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Qu Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
900
|
|
Materials costs
|
$9,800
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$9,200
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
55%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
30%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
8,400
|
|
Materials costs added during the month
|
$130,400
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
$220,600
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
2,200
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
65%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
25%
|
Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:
A) $29.89
B) $34.07
C) $31.07
D) $31.38
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mullins Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
700
|
|
Materials costs
|
$11,500
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$22,200
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
75%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
65%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
8,600
|
|
Materials costs added during the month
|
7,800
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
$159,300
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,500
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
65%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
50%
|
Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $20.42
B) $21.90
C) $19.31
D) $17.13
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mullins Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
700
|
|
Materials costs
|
$11,500
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$22,200
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
75%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
65%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
8,600
|
|
Materials costs added during the month
|
7,800
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
$159,300
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,500
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
65%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
50%
|
Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month
is closest to:
A) $48.79
B) $45.20
C) $44.68
D) $43.05
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mullins Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
700
|
|
Materials costs
|
$11,500
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$22,200
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
75%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
65%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
8,600
|
|
Materials costs added during the month
|
7,800
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
$159,300
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,500
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
65%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
50%
|
Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $62.36
B) $76.27
C) $66.10
D) $58.23
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mullins Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
700
|
|
Materials costs
|
$11,500
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$22,200
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
75%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
65%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
8,600
|
|
Materials costs added during the month
|
7,800
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
$159,300
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,500
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
65%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
50%
|
Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to:
A) $490,382
B) $579,948
C) $507,800
D) $541,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Puri Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the
first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
400
|
|
Materials costs
|
$4,800
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$3,300
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
85%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
45%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
5,800
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
5,100
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$69,500
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month
|
$82,300
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,100
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
55%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
45%
|
Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:
A) $15.20
B) $18.33
C) $15.96
D) $16.14
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Normand Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning
the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
400
|
|
Materials costs
|
700
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$8,700
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
$3,700
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
70%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
10%
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
6,400
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
5,600
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month
|
$92,200
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,500
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
80%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
25%
|
Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
What are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department?
A) 4,900
B) 1,200
C) 6,310
D) 7,100
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Crisper, Inc. plans to sell 80,000 bags of potato chips in June, and each of these bags requires five potatoes. Pertinent data includes:
|
|
Bags of potato chips
|
Potatoes
|
|
Actual June 1 inventory
|
15,000 bags
|
27,000 potatoes
|
|
Desired June 30 inventory
|
18,000 bags
|
23,000 potatoes
|
What number of units of raw material should Crisper plan to purchase?
- 381,000
- 389,000
- 411,000
- 419,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fil and Breed are 50% partners in F&B Cars, a used-car dealership. F&B maintains an average used-car inventory worth $150,000. On January 5, National Bank obtained a $30,000 judgment against Fil and Fil’s child on a loan that Fil had cosigned and on which Fil’s child had defaulted. National sued F&B to be allowed to attach $30,000 worth of cars as part of Fil’s interest in F&B’s inventory. Will National prevail in it suit?
- No, because the judgment was not against the partnership.
- No, because attachment of the cars would dissolve the partnership by operation of law.
- Yes, because National had a valid judgment against Fil.
- Yes, because Fil’s interest in the partnership inventory is an asset owned by Fil.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table contains Emerald Corp.’s quarterly revenues, in thousands, for the past three years. During that time, there were no major changes to Emerald’s selling strategies and total capital investment.
|
Year
|
1st Qtr.
|
2nd Qtr.
|
3rd Qtr.
|
4th Qtr.
|
|
Year 1
|
500
|
500
|
550
|
750
|
|
Year 2
|
525
|
550
|
600
|
800
|
|
Year 3
|
550
|
525
|
625
|
850
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table presents the long-term liabilities and stockholders’ equity of Information Control Corp of one year ago.
|
Long-term debt
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Preferred stock
|
30,000,000
|
|
Common stock
|
100,000,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
20,000,000
|
During the past year, Information Control issued $10 million of new common stock. The firm generated $5 million of net income and paid $3 million of dividends. Construct today’s balance sheet reflecting the changes that occurred at Information Control Corp. during the year. The Income Statement
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Flying Lion Corporation reported the following data on the income statement of one of its divisions. Flying Lion Corporation has other profitable divisions.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Net sales
|
$800,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
560,000
|
320,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
75,000
|
56,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
300,000
|
200,000
|
|
Tax rate (%)
|
30
|
30
|
a. Prepare an income statement for each year.
b. Determine the operating cash flow during each year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Stancil Corporation provided the following current information.
|
Proceeds from short-term borrowing
|
$6,000
|
|
Proceeds from long-term borrowing
|
20,000
|
|
Proceeds from the sale of common stock
|
1,000
|
|
Purchases of fixed assets
|
1,000
|
|
Purchases of inventories
|
4,000
|
|
Payment of dividends
|
22,000
|
Determine the cash flow for the Stancil Corporation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ritter Corporation’s accountants prepared the following financial statements for year-end 20X2.
|
RITTER CORPORATION
|
|
Income Statement 20X2
|
|
Revenue
|
$400
|
|
Expenses
|
250
|
|
Depreciation
|
50
|
|
Net income
|
$100
|
|
Dividends
|
$ 50
|
|
RITTER CORPORATION
|
|
Balance Sheets December 31
|
|
Asset
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current assets
|
$150
|
$100
|
|
Net fixed assets
|
200
|
100
|
|
Total assets
|
$350
|
$200
|
|
Liabilities and Equity
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$ 75
|
$ 50
|
|
Long-term debt
|
75
|
0
|
|
Stockholder’s equity
|
200
|
150
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$350
|
$200
|
a. Determine the change in net working capital in 20X2.
b. Determine the cash flow during the year 20X2.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corporate Investment Decision Making
1. a. Briefly explain why from the shareholders’ perspective it is desirable for corporations to maximize NPV.
b. What assumptions are necessary for this argument to be correct?
2. Consider a one-year world with perfect capital markets in which the interest rate is 10 percent. Suppose a firm has $12 million in cash. The firm invests $7 million today, and $5 million is paid to shareholders. The NPV of the firm’s investment is $3 million. All shareholders are identical.
a. How much cash will the firm receive next year from its investment?
b. Suppose shareholders plan to spend $10 million today.
(i) How can they do this?
(ii) How much money will they have available to spend next year if they follow your plan?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Domingo Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,500
|
50%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$1,700
|
20%
|
A total of 6,800 units were started and 6,100 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$158,700
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$120,400
|
The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 75% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?
A) 7,200
B) 6,925
C) 6,100
D) 825
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Haffner Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
500
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$7,800
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$9,100
|
|
Conversion costs
|
85%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
55%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
7,000
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
6,100
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$102,700
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$184,400
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
500
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,400
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
50%
|
What are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department?
A) 840
B) 6,940
C) 7,500
D) 6,100
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Haffner Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
500
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$7,800
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$9,100
|
|
Conversion costs
|
85%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
55%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
7,000
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
6,100
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$102,700
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$184,400
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
500
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,400
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
50%
|
What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?
A) 6,100
B) 700
C) 6,800
D) 7,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Haffner Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
500
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$7,800
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$9,100
|
|
Conversion costs
|
85%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
55%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
7,000
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
6,100
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$102,700
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$184,400
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
500
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,400
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
50%
|
The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $15.92
B) $14.80
C) $13.69
D) $14.73
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Haffner Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
500
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$7,800
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$9,100
|
|
Conversion costs
|
85%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
55%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
7,000
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
6,100
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$102,700
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$184,400
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
500
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,400
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
50%
|
The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:
A) $28.46
B) $25.80
C) $29.88
D) $27.12
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Haffner Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
500
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$7,800
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$9,100
|
|
Conversion costs
|
85%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
55%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
7,000
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
6,100
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$102,700
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$184,400
|
|
Conversion costs added during the month .
|
500
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,400
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
60%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
50%
|
The cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $40.53
B) $47.04
C) $44.38
D) $49.84
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kurtulus Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
600
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$7,000
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$2,300
|
|
Conversion costs
|
55%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
25%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
6,500
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
5,700
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$110,100
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$83,200
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,400
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
70%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
55%
|
The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to:
A) $202,600
B) $193,300
C) $175,247
D) $218,290
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lucas Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
900
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$9,600
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$7,700
|
|
Conversion costs
|
60%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
45%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
8,100
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
6,900
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$115,800
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$120,500
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
2,100
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
75%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
20%
|
What are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing
department?
A) 9,000
B) 1,575
C) 6,900
D) 8,475
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lucas Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
900
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$9,600
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$7,700
|
|
Conversion costs
|
60%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
45%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
8,100
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
6,900
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$115,800
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$120,500
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
2,100
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
75%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
20%
|
The cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $28.18
B) $36.75
C) $32.31
D) $34.25
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inacio Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
800
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$12,900
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$5,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
75%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
20%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
9,500
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
8,400
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$172,000
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$240,200
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,900
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
90%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
30%
|
What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?
A) 8,400
B) 8,970
C) 570
D) 10,300
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inacio Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
800
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$12,900
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$5,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
75%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
20%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
9,500
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
8,400
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$172,000
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$240,200
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,900
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
90%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
30%
|
The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $17.01
B) $17.95
C) $16.70
D) $18.29
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Joos Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:
|
Beginning work in process inventory:
|
600
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
$7,300
|
|
Materials costs .
|
$2,300
|
|
Conversion costs
|
50%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
10%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
9,400
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
8,600
|
|
Units transferred to the next department during the month
|
$196,300
|
|
Materials costs added during the month .
|
$315,800
|
|
Ending work in process inventory:
|
|
|
Units in ending work in process inventory
|
1,400
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to materials
|
70%
|
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
40%
|
The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $19.63
B) $21.25
C) $20.36
D) $20.49
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Esty Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,800
|
50%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$6,500
|
30%
|
A total of 7,700 units were started and 6,600 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$85,300
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$168,000
|
The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 10% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $10.76
B) $10.04
C) $10.72
D) $11.49
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$12,700
|
85%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$10,900
|
30%
|
A total of 9,800 units were started and 8,800 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$175,600
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$420,900
|
The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to:
A) $620,100
B) $646,832
C) $542,106
D) $596,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$12,700
|
85%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$10,900
|
30%
|
A total of 9,800 units were started and 8,800 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$175,600
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$420,900
|
The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
The cost of ending work in process inventory in the first processing department according to the company”s cost system is closest to:
A) $77,994
B) $73,308
C) $104,725
D) $89,016
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gunes Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$10,600
|
65%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$12,800
|
30%
|
A total of 8,500 units were started and 7,400 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$142,100
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$359,500
|
The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
What are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department?
A) 7,400
B) 9,300
C) 8,350
D) 950
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gunes Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$10,600
|
65%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$12,800
|
30%
|
A total of 8,500 units were started and 7,400 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$142,100
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$359,500
|
The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?
A) 9,300
B) 8,065
C) 7,400
D) 665
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gunes Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$10,600
|
65%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$12,800
|
30%
|
A total of 8,500 units were started and 7,400 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$142,100
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$359,500
|
The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:
A) $40.03
B) $46.16
C) $44.58
D) $48.47
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gunes Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$10,600
|
65%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$12,800
|
30%
|
A total of 8,500 units were started and 7,400 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$142,100
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$359,500
|
The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
The cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $64.45
B) $56.45
C) $68.32
D) $70.95
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gunes Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$10,600
|
65%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$12,800
|
30%
|
A total of 8,500 units were started and 7,400 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$142,100
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$359,500
|
The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
The cost of ending work in process inventory in the first processing department according to the company”s cost system is closest to:
A) $61,227
B) $48,071
C) $42,859
D) $122,453
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Domingo Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,500
|
50%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$1,700
|
20%
|
A total of 6,800 units were started and 6,100 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$158,700
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$120,400
|
The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 75% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.
How many units are in ending work in process inventory in the first processing department at the end of the month?
A) 700
B) 900
C) 6,400
D) 1,100
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bake Co.’s trial balance included the following at December 31, 2003:
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 80,000
|
|
Bonds payable, due 2004
|
300,000
|
|
Discount on bonds payable
|
15,000
|
|
Deferred income tax liability
|
25,000
|
The deferred income tax liability is not related to an asset for financial accounting purposes and is expected to reverse in 2004. What amount should be included in the current liability section of Bake’s December 31, 2003 balance sheet?
- $365,000
- $390,000
- $395,000
- $420,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Main, a pharmaceutical company, leased office space from Ash. Main took possession and began to use the building on July 1, 2000. Rent was due the first day of each month. Monthly lease payments escalated over the 5-year period of the lease as follows:
|
Period
|
Lease payment
|
|
July 1, 2000 – September 30, 2000
|
$0 – rent abatement during move-in, construction
|
|
October, 1, 2000 – June 30, 2001
|
17,500
|
|
July 1, 2001 – June 30, 2002
|
19,000
|
|
July 1, 2002 – June 30, 2003
|
20,500
|
|
July 1, 2003 – June 30, 2004
|
23,000
|
|
July 1, 2004 – June 30, 2005
|
24,500
|
What amount would Main show as deferred rent expense at December 31, 2003?
- $50,658
- $52,580
- $68,575
- $71,550
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The controller of Peabody, Inc. has been asked to present an analysis of accounts receivable collections at the upcoming staff meeting. The following information is used:
|
|
12/31, year 2
|
12/31, year 1
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$100,000
|
$130,000
|
|
Allowance, doubtful accounts
|
(20,000)
|
(40,000)
|
|
Sales
|
400,000
|
200,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
350,000
|
170,000
|
What is the receivables turnover ratio as of December 31, year 2?
- 5.0
- 4.7
- 3.5
- 0.6
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Securities Act of 1933 provides an exemption from registration for
|
|
Bonds issued by a municipality for governmental purposes
|
Securities issued by a not-for-profit charitable organization
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Thorn purchased a used entertainment system from Sound Corp. The sales contract stated that the entertainment system was being sold “as is.” Under the Sales Article of the UCC, which of the following statements is(are) correct regarding the seller’s warranty of title and against infringement?
- I. Including the term “as is” in the sales contract is adequate communication that the seller is conveying the entertainment system without warranty of title and against infringement.
- II. The seller’s warranty of title and against infringement may be disclaimed at any time after the contract is formed.
- a. I only.
- b. II only.
- c. Both I and II.
- d. Neither I nor II.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On April 1, Roe borrowed $100,000 from Jet to pay Roe’s business expenses. On June 15, Roe gave Jet a signed security agreement and financing statement covering Roe’s inventory. Jet immediately filed the financing statement. On July 1, Roe filed for bankruptcy. Under the federal Bankruptcy Code, can Roe’s trustee in bankruptcy set aside Jet’s security interest in Roe’s inventory?
- Yes, because a security agreement may only cover goods actually purchased with the borrowed funds.
- Yes, because Roe giving the security interest to Jet created a voidable preference.
- No, because the security interest was perfected before Roe filed for bankruptcy.
- No, because the loan proceeds were used for Roe’s business.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rock Crab, Inc. purchases the following assets during the year:
|
Computer
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Computer desk
|
1,000
|
|
Office furniture
|
4,000
|
|
Delivery van
|
25,000
|
What should be reported as the cost basis for MACRS five-year property?
- $ 3,000
- $25,000
- $28,000
- $33,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Under the uniform capitalization rules applicable to taxpayers with property acquired for resale, which of the following costs should be capitalized with respect to inventory if no exceptions have been met?
|
|
Repackaging costs
|
Off-site storage costs
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Card Bicycle Co. has prepared production and raw materials budgets for next year. At the end of this year, the finished product inventory is expected to include 2,000 bicycles, and raw material inventory is expected to include 3,000 bicycle tires. Each finished bicycle requires two tires. The marketing department provided the following data from the sales budget for the first quarter:
|
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
|
Expected bicycle sales (units)
|
12,000
|
16,000
|
18,000
|
The company inventory policy is to have finished product inventory equal to 20% of the following month’s sales requirements, and raw material equal to 10% of the following month’s production requirements. In the January budget for raw materials, how many tires are expected to be purchased?
- 24,200
- 26,120
- 26,600
- 26,680
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Berry, Drake, and Flanigan are partners in a general partnership. The partners made capital contributions as follows: Berry, $150,000; Drake, $100,000; and Flanigan, $50,000. Drake made a loan of $50,000 to the partnership. The partnership agreement specifies that Flanigan will receive a 50% share of profits, and Drake and Berry each will receive a 25% share of profits. Under the Revised Uniform Partnership Act and in the absence of any partnership agreement to the contrary, which of the following statements is correct regarding the sharing of losses?
- The partners will share equally in any partnership losses.
- The partners will share in losses on a pro rata basis according to the capital contributions.
- The partners will share in losses on a pro rata basis according to the capital contributions and loans made to the partnership.
- The partners will share in losses according to the allocation of profits specified in the partnership agreement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the cost of ending inventory given the following factors?
|
Beginning inventory
|
$
|
5,000
|
|
Total production costs
|
|
60,000
|
|
Costs of goods sold
|
|
55,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
40,000
|
- $ 5,000
- $10,000
- $45,000
- $50,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Iyer Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Forming Department, started the month with 14,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 20% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $3,360. An additional 92,000 units were started into production during the month and 95,000 units were completed and transferred to the next processing department. There were 11,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Forming Department that were 10% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $92,367 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month on the Forming Department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $1.004
B) $0.990
C) $1.200
D) $0.903
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Qimper Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Cutting Department for the month of March appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
6,600
|
70%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during March
|
54,000
|
|
|
Completed and transferred to the next department
|
|
|
|
March
|
58,600
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
2,000
|
40%
|
According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $38,069 at the beginning of March. Additional conversion costs of $444,047 were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for March on the Cutting Department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $7.956
B) $8.223
C) $8.106
D) $8.240
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Quis Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data
for the Cutting Department for the month of March appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
9,600
|
70%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during March
|
47,000
|
|
|
Completed and transferred to the next department
|
|
|
|
March
|
49,600
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
7,000
|
90%
|
According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $26,880 at the beginning of March. Additional conversion costs of $190,130 were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for March on the Cutting Department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $3.866
B) $3.834
C) $4.045
D) $4.000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Walden Company has a process costing system and uses the FIFO method. All materials are introduced at the beginning of the process in Department One. The following information is available for the month of January for Department One:
|
|
Units
|
|
Work in process, January 1 (conversion 40% complete)
|
500
|
|
Started in January
|
2,000
|
|
Transferred to Department Two during January
|
2,100
|
|
Work in process, January 31 (conversion 25% complete)
|
400
|
What are the equivalent units for the month of January?
|
|
Materials
|
Conversion Cost
|
|
A)
|
2,500
|
2,200
|
|
B)
|
2,500
|
1,900
|
|
C)
|
2,000
|
2,200
|
|
D)
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gabel Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The Grinding Department started the month with 10,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. An additional 85,000 units were transferred in from the prior department during the month to begin processing in the Grinding Department. During the month 81,000 units were completed in the Grinding Department and transferred to the next processing department. There were 14,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Grinding Department that were 90% complete with respect to conversion costs. What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Grinding Department for the month?
A) 86,600
B) 93,600
C) 81,000
D) 89,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Oreilley Company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Brazing Department for the month of November appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
5,300
|
30%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during
|
|
|
|
November
|
30,000
|
|
|
Completed and transferred to the next department
|
|
|
|
during November
|
32,500
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory .
|
2,800
|
70%
|
What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Brazing Department for
November?
A) 34,460
B) 32,500
C) 27,500
D) 32,870
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tanner Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Curing Department for the month of March appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
8,200
|
80%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during March
|
52,000
|
|
|
Completed and transferred to the next department
|
|
|
|
during March
|
54,200
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory .
|
6,000
|
50%
|
According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $7,872 at the beginning of March. The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for March was $1.10. How much conversion cost would be assigned to the units completed and transferred out of the department during March?
A) $52,404
B) $59,620
C) $60,276
D) $57,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tanguy Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Curing Department for the month of March appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
2,500
|
70%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during March
|
44,000
|
|
|
Completed and transferred to the next department
|
|
|
|
during March
|
38,500
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory .
|
8,000
|
10%
|
According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $7,350 at the beginning of March. The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for March was $4.10. How much conversion cost would be assigned to the units completed and transferred out of the department during March?
A) $150,675
B) $180,400
C) $158,025
D) $157,850
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Annenbaum Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,700
|
65%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$6,800
|
45%
|
A total of 6,500 units were started and 5,900 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$125,500
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$207,000
|
The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?
A) 6,250
B) 5,900
C) 350
D) 6,900
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Annenbaum Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,700
|
65%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$6,800
|
45%
|
A total of 6,500 units were started and 5,900 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$125,500
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$207,000
|
The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $19.01
B) $19.61
C) $20.50
D) $18.19
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Annenbaum Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,700
|
65%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$6,800
|
45%
|
A total of 6,500 units were started and 5,900 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$125,500
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$207,000
|
The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:
A) $30.99
B) $35.92
C) $33.12
D) $34.21
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Annenbaum Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,700
|
65%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$6,800
|
45%
|
A total of 6,500 units were started and 5,900 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$125,500
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$207,000
|
The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.The cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $58.47
B) $50.00
C) $57.99
D) $54.71
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Annenbaum Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,700
|
65%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$6,800
|
45%
|
A total of 6,500 units were started and 5,900 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$125,500
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$207,000
|
The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to:
A) $332,500
B) $345,000
C) $322,777
D) $377,485
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bistrol Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$15,700
|
75%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$7,700
|
20%
|
A total of 8,400 units were started and 7,500 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$186,300
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$329,800
|
The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. How many units are in ending work in process inventory in the first processing department at the end of the month?
A) 7,600
B) 900
C) 1,700
D) 900
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bistrol Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$15,700
|
75%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$7,700
|
20%
|
A total of 8,400 units were started and 7,500 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$186,300
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$329,800
|
The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:
A) $21.44
B) $21.96
C) $20.25
D) $23.25
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bistrol Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$15,700
|
75%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$7,700
|
20%
|
A total of 8,400 units were started and 7,500 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$186,300
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$329,800
|
The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:
A) $41.59
B) $38.71
C) $39.61
D) $36.68
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bistrol Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$15,700
|
75%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$7,700
|
20%
|
A total of 8,400 units were started and 7,500 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$186,300
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$329,800
|
The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to:
A) $516,100
B) $471,435
C) $539,500
D) $578,294
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carpenter Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 600 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,200
|
60%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$8,500
|
55%
|
A total of 7,800 units were started and 7,100 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$95,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$169,200
|
The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. How many units are in ending work in process inventory in the first processing department at the end of the month?
A) 1,300
B) 900
C) 7,200
D) 700
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carpenter Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 600 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,200
|
60%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$8,500
|
55%
|
A total of 7,800 units were started and 7,100 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$95,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$169,200
|
The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?
A) 910
B) 8,010
C) 7,100
D) 8,400
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Esty Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
|
Percent
|
|
|
Cost
|
Complete
|
|
Materials costs
|
$5,800
|
50%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$6,500
|
30%
|
A total of 7,700 units were started and 6,600 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
Materials costs
|
$85,300
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$168,000
|
The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 10% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?
A) 6,790
B) 8,500
C) 6,600
D) 190
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following journal entries would be used to record direct labor costs in a company having two processing departments (Department A and Department B)?
|
A) Work in Process
|
XXX
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
XXX
|
|
B) Salaries and Wages Expense
|
XXX
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
XXX
|
|
C) Work in Process-Department A
|
XXX
|
|
Work in Process-Department B
|
XXX
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
XXX
|
|
D) Salaries and Wages Payable
|
XXX
|
|
Work in Process
|
XXX
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Darvin Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Welding Department, started the month with 20,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 10% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $7,000. An additional 63,000 units were started into production during the month. There were 10,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Welding Department that were 10% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $237,600 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $3.255
B) $3.771
C) $3.500
D) $3.305
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dedra Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Welding Department, started the month with 10,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 50% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $37,500. An additional 98,000 units were started into production during the= month. There were 17,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Welding Department that were 80% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $727,080 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $6.322
B) $7.419
C) $7.500
D) $7.310
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Luster Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Operating data for the first processing department for the month of June appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
13,000
|
40%
|
|
Started into production during June
|
98,000
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
11,000
|
30%
|
According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $39,364 at the beginning of June. Additional conversion costs of $721,035 were incurred in the department during the month. What was the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $6.615
B) $7.358
C) $7.361
D) $7.570
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lumdal Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Operating data for the first processing department for the month of June appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
10,000
|
90%
|
|
Started into production during June
|
75,000
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
17,000
|
40%
|
According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $77,490 at the beginning of June. Additional conversion costs of $552,062 were incurred in the department during the month. What was the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $8.610
B) $7.361
C) $6.001
D) $8.416
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jinker Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Painting Department for the month of April appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
6,700
|
50%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during April
|
57,800
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
7,600
|
60%
|
What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Painting Department for
April?
A) 56,900
B) 61,460
C) 62,360
D) 58,700
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jumil Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Painting Department for the month of April appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
4,700
|
40%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during April
|
56,600
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
6,300
|
60%
|
What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Painting Department for
April?
A) 58,200
B) 60,380
C) 58,780
D) 55,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hall Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Welding Department, started the month with 18,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $64,800. An additional 84,000 units were started into production during the month and 78,000 units were completed in the Welding Department and transferred to the next processing department. There were 24,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Welding Department that were 30% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $431,520 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $5.825
B) $3.996
C) $5.137
D) $6.000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pajona Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Molding Department is the second department in its production process. The data below summarize the department”s operations in January.
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
7,400
|
60%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during
|
|
|
|
January
|
66,000
|
|
|
Completed and transferred to the next department
|
|
|
|
during January
|
69,700
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
3,700
|
70%
|
The accounting records indicate that the conversion cost that had been assigned to beginning work in process inventory was $31,302 and a total of $497,341 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during January. What was the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for January in the Molding Department? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $7.535
B) $7.050
C) $7.313
D) $7.135
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Faivre Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Assembly Department started the month with 13,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 20% complete with respect to conversion costs. An additional 55,000 units were transferred in from the prior department during the month to begin processing in the Assembly Department. During the month 67,000 units were completed in the Assembly Department and transferred to the next processing department. There were 1,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Assembly Department that were 50% complete with respect to conversion costs. What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Assembly Department for the month?
A) 43,000
B) 64,900
C) 67,000
D) 67,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nabeth Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Lubricating Department for the month of October appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
7,700
|
80%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during
|
|
|
|
October
|
48,800
|
|
|
Completed and transferred to the next department
|
|
|
|
during October
|
55,400
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
1,100
|
90%
|
What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Lubricating Department for October?
A) 56,390
B) 42,200
C) 55,400
D) 49,790
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sadanand Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Fitting Department is the second department in its production process. The data below summarize the department”s operations in March.
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory .
|
1,100
|
40%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during
|
|
|
|
March
|
46,000
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
4,600
|
30%
|
The Fitting Department”s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost for March was $9.24. How much conversion cost was assigned to the units transferred out of the Fitting Department during March?
A) $388,634.40
B) $425,040.00
C) $435,204.00
D) $392,700.00
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sadron Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Fitting Department is the second department in its production process. The data below summarize the department”s operations in March.
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory .
|
6,200
|
20%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during
|
|
|
|
March
|
45,000
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
3,200
|
60%
|
The Fitting Department”s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost for March was $7.42. How much conversion cost was assigned to the units transferred out of the Fitting Department during March?
A) $356,160.00
B) $379,904.00
C) $333,900.00
D) $346,959.20
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rameau Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Molding Department is the second department in its production process. The data below summarize the department”s operations in January.
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory .
|
5,600
|
60%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during
|
|
|
|
January
|
47,000
|
|
|
Completed and transferred to the next department
|
|
|
|
during January
|
50,300
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
2,300
|
40%
|
The Molding Department”s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost for January was $5.29. How much conversion cost was assigned to the ending work in process inventory in the Molding Department for January?
A) $7,300.20
B) $12,167.00
C) $11,849.60
D) $4,866.80
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ramos Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Molding Department is the second department in its production process. The data below summarize the department”s operations in January.
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory .
|
2,800
|
40%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during
|
|
|
|
January
|
45,000
|
|
|
Completed and transferred to the next department
|
|
|
|
during January
|
46,700
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
1,100
|
20%
|
The Molding Department”s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost for January was $1.12. How much conversion cost was assigned to the ending work in process inventory in the Molding Department for January?
A) $985.60
B) $1,881.60
C) $1,232.00
D) $246.40
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ebart Company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Welding Department, started the month with 14,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $20,580. An additional 53,000 units were started into production during the month. There were 17,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Welding Department that were 20% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $80,660 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month on the department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $1.522
B) $2.100
C) $1.850
D) $1.511
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Maher Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Casting Department for the month of September appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory .
|
14,000
|
10%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during
|
|
|
|
September .
|
97,000
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
22,000
|
70%
|
According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $8,960 at the beginning of September. Additional conversion costs of $671,560 were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for September on the Casting Department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $6.520
B) $6.923
C) $6.400
D) $6.131
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kalra Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Enameling Department for the month of May appear below:
|
|
|
Percentage
|
|
|
Units
|
complete
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
7,200
|
20%
|
|
Transferred in from the prior department during May ….
|
70,100
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
2,600
|
80%
|
What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Enameling Department for May?
A) 65,500
B) 76,780
C) 74,700
D) 75,340
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overhill Company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. In the Cutting Department in June, units were 80% complete with respect to conversion in the beginning work in process inventory and 25% complete with respect to conversion in the ending work in process inventory. Other data for the department for June follow:
|
|
|
Conversion
|
|
|
Units
|
Cost
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
20,000
|
$40,000
|
|
Units started into production, and costs incurred during
|
|
|
|
the month .
|
|
|
|
Units completed and transferred out .
|
150,000
|
$186,000
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
130,000
|
|
The cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost is closest to:
A) $1.48
B) $1.50
C) $1.16
D) $1.82
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inacio Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Forming Department, started the month with 22,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $38,500. An additional 71,000 units were started into production during the month and 72,000 units were completed and transferred to the next processing department. There were 21,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Forming Department that were 40% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $148,850 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month on the Forming Department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)
A) $2.500
B) $2.015
C) $2.096
D) $2.290
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
The financial management team of a company is assessing an investment proposal involving a $100,000 outlay today. Manager number one expects the project to provide cash inflows of $20,000 at the end of each year for six years. She considers the project to be of low risk, requiring only a 10% rate of return. Manager number two expects the project to provide cash inflows of $5,000 at the end of the first year, followed by $23,000 at the end of each year in years two through six. He considers the project to be of medium risk, requiring a 14% rate of return. Manager number three expects the project to be of high risk, providing one large cash inflow of $135,000 at the end of the sixth year. She proposes a 15% rate of return for the project.
|
Additional information
|
|
Number of years
|
Discount rate (percent)
|
Present value of $1 due at the end of n periods (PVIF)
|
Present value of an annuity of $1 per period for n periods (PVIFA)
|
|
1
|
10
|
.9091
|
.9091
|
|
1
|
14
|
.8772
|
.8772
|
|
1
|
15
|
.8696
|
.8696
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5
|
10
|
.6209
|
3.7908
|
|
5
|
14
|
.5194
|
3.4331
|
|
5
|
15
|
.4972
|
3.3522
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6
|
10
|
.5645
|
4.3553
|
|
6
|
14
|
.4556
|
3.8887
|
|
6
|
15
|
.4323
|
3.7845
|
According to the net present value criterion, which of the following is true?
- Manager one will recommend that the project be accepted.
- Manger two will recommend that the project be accepted.
- All three managers will recommend acceptance of the project.
- All three managers will recommend rejection of the project.
Which manager will assess the project as having the shortest payback period?
- Manager one.
- Manager two.
- Manager three.
- All three managers will agree on the payback period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Simm Co. has determined its December 31 inventory on a FIFO basis to be $400,000. Information pertaining to that inventory follows:
|
Estimated selling price
|
$403,000
|
|
Estimated cost of disposal
|
20,000
|
|
Normal profit margin
|
60,000
|
|
Current replacement cost
|
360,000
|
Simm records losses that result from applying the lower of cost or market rule. At December 31, what should be the amount of Simm’s inventory?
- $400,000
- $388,000
- $360,000
- $328,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following cash transfers results in a misstatement of cash at December 31, 2001?
|
|
Bank Transfer Schedule
|
|
|
Disbursement date
|
Receipt date
|
|
Transfers
|
Per books
|
Per bank
|
Per books
|
Per bank
|
|
a.
|
12/31/01
|
01/05/02
|
12/31/01
|
01/04/02
|
|
b.
|
01/04/02
|
01/11/02
|
01/04/02
|
01/04/02
|
|
c.
|
12/31/01
|
01/04/02
|
12/31/01
|
12/31/01
|
|
d.
|
01/04/02
|
01/05/02
|
12/31/01
|
01/04/02
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following describes how the objective of a review of financial statements differs from the objective of a compilation engagement?
- The primary objective of a review engagement is to test the completeness of the financial statements prepared, but a compilation tests for reasonableness.
- The primary objective of a review engagement is to provide positive assurance that the financial statements are fairly presented, but a compilation provides no such assurance.
- In a review engagement, accountants provide limited assurance, but a compilation expresses no assurance.
- In a review engagement, accountants provide reasonable or positive assurance that the financial statements are fairly presented, but a compilation provides limited assurance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An auditor determines that the entity is presenting certain supplementary financial disclosures of pension information that are requires by the GASB. Under these circumstances, the auditor should
- Add an explanatory paragraph to the auditor’s report that refers to the required supplementary information.
- State that this audit is not being performed in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards.
- Document in the working papers that the required supplementary information is presented, but should not apply any procedures to the information.
- Compare the required supplementary information for consistency with the audited financial statements.
Comfort letters ordinarily are
|
|
Addressed to the client’s
|
Signed by the client’s
|
|
a.
|
Audit committee
|
Independent auditor
|
|
b.
|
Underwriter of securities
|
Senior management
|
|
c.
|
Audit committee
|
Senior management
|
|
d.
|
Underwriter of securities
|
Independent auditor
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After making inquiries about credit granting policies, an auditor selects a sample of sales transactions and examines evidence of credit approval. This test of controls most likely supports management’s financial statement assertion(s) of
|
|
Rights and obligations
|
Valuation or allocation
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following statements is correct regarding the auditor’s consideration of the possibility of illegal acts by clients?
- The auditor has a responsibility to plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance that no illegal acts have been committed by clients.
- The auditor’s training, experience, and understanding of the client should be used to provide a basis for the determination as to whether illegal acts have occurred.
- If specific information concerning an illegal act comes to the auditor’s attention, the auditor should apply audit procedures specifically directed to ascertaining whether an illegal act has occurred.
- If an illegal act has occurred, the auditor should express a qualified opinion or an adverse opinion on the financial statements taken as a whole.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A material overstatement in ending inventory was discovered after the year-end financial statements of a company were issued to the public. What effect did this error have on the year-end financial statements?
|
|
Current assets
|
Gross profit
|
|
a.
|
Understated
|
Overstated
|
|
b.
|
Overstated
|
Overstated
|
|
c.
|
Understated
|
Understated
|
|
d.
|
Overstated
|
Understated
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Paper Co. had net income of $70,000 during the year. Dividend payment was $10,000. The following information is available:
|
Mortgage repayment
|
$20,000
|
|
|
Available-for-sale securities purchased
|
10,000
|
increase
|
|
Bonds payable—issued
|
50,000
|
increase
|
|
Inventory
|
40,000
|
increase
|
|
Accounts payable
|
30,000
|
decrease
|
What amount should Paper report as net cash provided by operating activities in its statement of cash flows for the year?
- $0
- $10,000
- $20,000
- $30,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a not-for-profit organization, which of the following should be included in total expenses?
|
|
Grants to other organizations
|
Depreciation
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A county’s balances in the general fund included the following:
|
Appropriations
|
$435,000
|
|
Encumbrances
|
18,000
|
|
Expenditures
|
164,000
|
|
Vouchers payable
|
23,000
|
What is the remaining amount available for use by the county?
- $230,000
- $248,000
- $253,000
- $271,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, year 1, Frost Co. entered into a two-year lease agreement with Ananz Co. to lease 10 new computers. The lease term begins on January 1, year 1 and ends on December 31, year 2. The lease agreement requires Frost to pay Ananz two annual lease payments of $8,000. The present value of the minimum lease payments is $13,000. Which of the following circumstances would require Frost to classify and account for the arrangement as a capital lease?
- The economic life of the computers is three years.
- The fair value of the computers on January 1, year 1, is $14,000.
- Frost Co. does not have the option of purchasing the computers at the end of the lease term.
- Ownership of the computers remains with Ananz Co. throughout the lease term and after the lease ends.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 1, 2002, Paxton Co. had a note payable due on August 1, 2003. On January 20, 2003, Paxton signed a financing agreement to borrow the balance of the note payable from a lending institution to refinance the note. The agreement does not expire within one year, and no violation of any provision in the financing agreement exists. On February 1, 2003, Paxton was informed by its financial advisor that the lender is not expected to be financially capable of honoring the agreement. Paxton’s financial statements were issued on March 31, 2003. How should Paxton classify the note on its balance sheet at December 31, 2002?
- As a current liability because the financing agreement was signed after the balance sheet date.
- As a current liability because the lender is not expected to be financially capable of honoring the agreement.
- As a long-term liability because the agreement does not expire within one year.
- As a long-term liability because no violation of any provision in the financing agreement exists.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carlson City’s fiscal year ends December 31. On August 1, the city issued a purchase order for new vehicles to be delivered at the rate of two per month beginning October 15. Twelve vehicles were delivered as scheduled and payments of $264,000 were made upon delivery. If these were the only transactions made by the city, which of the following balances would appear on the balance sheet as of December 31?
|
a.
|
Encumbrances
|
$132,000
|
|
|
Reserve for encumbrances
|
132,000
|
|
b.
|
Fund balance
|
$132,000
|
|
|
Reserve for encumbrances
|
132,000
|
|
c.
|
Reserve for encumbrances
|
$264,000
|
|
|
Fund balance
|
264,000
|
|
d.
|
Encumbrances
|
$264,000
|
|
|
Reserve for encumbrances
|
264,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Ceil Co., a company whose common stock trades in a public market:
|
Shares outstanding at 1/1
|
100,000
|
|
Stock dividend at 3/31
|
24,000
|
|
Stock issuance at 6/30
|
5,000
|
What is the weighted-average number of shares Ceil should use to calculate its basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31?
- 120,500
- 123,000
- 126,500
- 129,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In financial reporting of segment data, which of the following must be considered in determining if an industry segment is a reportable segment?
|
|
Sales to unaffiliated customers
|
Intersegment sales
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
• Raw materials were purchased, $459,000.
• Raw materials were requisitioned for use in production, $465,000 ($431,000 direct and $34,000 indirect).
• The following employee costs were incurred: direct labor, $296,000; indirect labor, $63,000; and administrative salaries, $157,000.
• Selling costs, $134,000.
• Factory utility costs, $14,000.
• Depreciation for the year was $119,000 of which $114,000 is related to factory operations and $5,000 is related to selling and administrative activities.
• Manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs. The actual level of activity for the year was 47,000 machine-hours.
• Sales for the year totaled $1,287,000
Required:
a. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured in good form.
b. Was the overhead under- or overapplied? By how much?
c. Prepare an income statement for the year in good form. The company closes any under- or overapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hacken Company has a job-order costing system. The company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost. The information below has been taken from the cost records of Hacken Company for the past year:
|
Direct materials used in production
|
$1,250
|
|
Total manufacturing costs charged to production during the year
|
|
|
(includes direct materials, direct labor, and applied factory
|
|
|
overhead)
|
$6,050
|
|
Manufacturing overhead applied
|
$2,800
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
$1,000
|
|
Inventories:
|
|
|
Direct materials, January 1
|
$130
|
|
Direct materials, December 31
|
$80
|
|
Work in process, January 1
|
$250
|
|
Work in process, December 31
|
$400
|
|
Finished goods, January 1
|
$300
|
|
Finished goods, December 31
|
$200
|
Required:
a. Compute the cost of direct materials purchased during the year.
b. Compute the predetermined overhead rate that was used during the past year.
c. Compute the Cost of Goods Manufactured for the past year.
d. Compute the Cost of Goods Sold for the past year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Commonwealth Company uses a job-order cost system and applies manufacturing overhead cost to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate based on the cost of materials used in production. At the beginning of the year, the following estimates were made as a basis for computing the predetermined overhead rate: manufacturing overhead cost, $186,000; direct materials cost, $155,000. The following transactions took place during the year (all purchases and services were acquired on account):
a. Raw materials purchased, $96,000.
b. Raw materials requisitioned for use in production (all direct materials), $88,000.
c. Utility bills incurred in the factory, $17,000.
d. Costs for salaries and wages incurred as follows:
|
Direct labor
|
$174,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
$70,000
|
|
Selling and administrative salaries
|
$124,000
|
e. Maintenance costs incurred in the factory, $12,000.
f. Advertising costs incurred, $98,000.
g. Depreciation recorded for the year, $75,000 (75% relates to factory assets and the remainder relates to selling and administrative assets).
h. Rental cost incurred on buildings, $80,000 (80% of the space is occupied by the factory, and 20% is occupied by sales and administration).
i. Miscellaneous selling and administrative costs incurred, $12,000.
j. Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to jobs.
k. Cost of goods manufactured for the year, $480,000.
l. Sales for the year (all on account) totaled $900,000. These goods cost $550,000 to manufacture
Required:
Prepare journal entries to record the information above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following cost data relate to the manufacturing activities of the Kanaba Company last year:
|
Manufacturing overhead costs:
|
|
Property taxes
|
$1,500
|
|
Utilities, factory
|
2,500
|
|
Indirect labor
|
5,000
|
|
Depreciation, factory
|
12,000
|
|
Insurance, factory
|
3,000
|
|
Total
|
$24,000
|
|
Other costs incurred:
|
|
Purchases of direct materials
|
$16,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$20,000
|
|
Inventories:
|
|
Direct materials, January 1
|
$4,000
|
|
Direct materials, December 31
|
$3,500
|
|
Work in process, January 1
|
$3,000
|
|
Work in process, December 31
|
$3,750
|
The company uses a predetermined overhead rate to apply manufacturing overhead cost to production. The rate last year was $5.00 per machine-hour; a total of 5,000 machine-hours were recorded for the year.
Required:
a. Compute the amount of under- or overapplied overhead cost for the year.
b. Prepare a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Farber Corporation uses a job-order cost system. The information below is from the financial records of the company for last year:
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
$2,500,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
$2,425,000
|
|
Predetermined overhead rate
|
80% of direct labor cost
|
Applied overhead was 30% of total manufacturing costs. The Work in Process inventory at January 1 was 75% of the Work in Process inventory at December 31. The Work in Process inventory at December 31 was:
A) $300,000
B) $225,000
C) $100,000
D) $75,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Farwest Company during the year:
|
Raw Materials
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
4,700
|
10,000
|
|
| |
$6,900
|
|
|
|
Finished Goods
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
$1,900
|
22,900
|
|
| |
$26,300
|
|
|
|
Work in Process
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
$4,600
|
26,300
|
|
| |
$7,400
|
|
|
| |
$8,000
|
|
|
| |
$6,800
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
| |
$2,600
|
6,800
|
|
| |
$3,000
|
|
|
| |
1,900
|
|
|
|
Wages & Salaries Payable
|
|
| |
12,300
|
1,400
|
Beg Bal
|
| |
|
11,000
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
|
| |
22,900
|
|
|
The Cost of Goods Manufactured was:
A) $22,900
B) $26,300
C) $6,400
D) $49,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Farwest Company during the year:
|
Raw Materials
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
4,700
|
10,000
|
|
| |
$6,900
|
|
|
|
Finished Goods
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
$1,900
|
22,900
|
|
| |
$26,300
|
|
|
|
Work in Process
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
$4,600
|
26,300
|
|
| |
$7,400
|
|
|
| |
$8,000
|
|
|
| |
$6,800
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
| |
$2,600
|
6,800
|
|
| |
$3,000
|
|
|
| |
1,900
|
|
|
|
Wages & Salaries Payable
|
|
| |
12,300
|
1,400
|
Beg Bal
|
| |
|
11,000
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
|
| |
22,900
|
|
|
The direct labor cost was:
A) $8,000
B) $12,300
C) $12,600
D) $11,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Farwest Company during the year:
|
Raw Materials
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
4,700
|
10,000
|
|
| |
$6,900
|
|
|
|
Finished Goods
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
$1,900
|
22,900
|
|
| |
$26,300
|
|
|
|
Work in Process
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
$4,600
|
26,300
|
|
| |
$7,400
|
|
|
| |
$8,000
|
|
|
| |
$6,800
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
| |
$2,600
|
6,800
|
|
| |
$3,000
|
|
|
| |
1,900
|
|
|
|
Wages & Salaries Payable
|
|
| |
12,300
|
1,400
|
Beg Bal
|
| |
|
11,000
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
|
| |
22,900
|
|
|
The direct materials cost was:
A) $8,000
B) $10,000
C) $7,400
D) $4,600
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The CPA firm of Knox & Knox has been subpoenaed to testify and produce its correspondence and working papers in connection with a lawsuit brought against Johnson, one of its clients. Regarding the attempted resort to the privileged communication rule in seeking to avoid admission of such evidence in the lawsuit, which of the following is correct?
- Federal law recognizes such a privilege if the accountant is a Certified Public Accountant.
- The privilege is available regarding the working papers since the accountant is deemed to own them.
- The privilege is as widely available as the attorney-client privilege.
- In the absence of a specific statutory provision, the law does not recognize the existence of the privileged communication rule between an accountant and his client.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The partnership of Maxim & Rose, CPAs, has been engaged by their largest client, a limited partnership, to examine the financial statements in connection with the offering of 2,000 limited-partnership interests to the public at $5,000 per subscription. Under these circumstances, which of the following is true?
- Maxim & Rose may disclaim any liability under the Federal Securities Acts by an unambiguous, boldfaced disclaimer of liability on its audit report.
- Under the Securities Act of 1933, Maxim & Rose has responsibility only for the financial statements as of the close of the fiscal year in question.
- The dollar amount in question is sufficiently small so as to provide an exemption from the Securities Act of 1933.
- The Securities Act of 1933 requires a registration despite the fact that the client is not selling stock or another traditional “security.”
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your client has in its possession the following instrument:
|
$700.000
|
Provo, Utah
|
May 1, 2002
|
|
Thirty days after date I promise to pay to the order of
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
|
Seven hundred
|
Dollars
|
|
at
|
Boise, Idaho
|
|
|
Value received with interest at the rate of 10% per annum.
|
|
This instrument is secured by a conditional sales contract.
|
|
No. 20
|
Due June 1, 2002
|
Len Bowie
|
This instrument is
- A negotiable time draft.
- A nonnegotiable note since it states that it is secured by a conditional sales contract.
- Not negotiable until June 1, 2002.
- A negotiable bearer note.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Marcross and two business associates own real property as tenants in common that they have invested in as a speculation. The speculation proved to be highly successful, and the land is now worth substantially more than their investment. Which of the following is a correct legal incident of ownership of the property?
- Upon the death of any of the other tenants, the deceased’s interest passes to the survivor(s) unless there is a will.
- Each of the cotenants owns an undivided interest in the whole.
- A cotenant cannot sell his interest in the property without the consent of the other tenants.
- Upon the death of a cotenant, his estate is entitled to the amount of the original investment, but not the appreciation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
This item is based on the following selected 2007 information pertaining to Sam and Ann Hoyt, who filed a joint federal income tax return for the calendar year 2007. The Hoyts had adjusted gross income of $34,000 and itemized their deductions for 2007. Among the Hoyts’ cash expenditures during 2007 were the following:
$2,500 repairs in connection with 2007 fire damage to the Hoyt residence. This property has a basis of $50,000. Fair market value was $60,000 before the fire and $55,000 after the fire. Insurance on the property had lapsed in 2006 for nonpayment of premium.
$800 appraisal fee to determine amount of fire loss.
What amount of fire loss were the Hoyts entitled to deduct as an itemized deduction on their 2007 return?
- $5,000
- $2,500
- $1,600
- $1,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are the fair market values of Wald’s assets at the date of death:
|
Personal effects and jewelry
|
$650,000
|
|
Land bought by Wald with Wald’s funds five years prior to death and held with Wald’s sister as joint tenants with right of survivorship
|
1,900,000
|
The executor of Wald’s estate did not elect the alternate valuation date. The amount includible as Wald’s gross estate in the Federal estate tax return is
- $ 650,000
- $1,600,000
- $1,900,000
- $2,550,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Able, Bray, and Carry form a general partnership to produce and sell widgets. Able is a CPA, Bray has an MBA, and Carry has few skills. In their partnership agreement, they decide to split any profits they have in the following respective proportions: 45%, 45%, and 10%. They fail to agree on how they will share any losses. At the end of the first year of operations they have a large loss. Assuming each of the partners has sufficient assets to cover the loss of their partnership, how will they split the losses between Able, Bray, and Carry, respectively?
- 45%, 45%, and 10%.
- Equally.
- It cannot be determined yet until they agree upon a loss-sharing plan.
- A court of law will have to decide upon the way they will each share the loss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Total production costs of prior periods for a company are listed below. Assume that the same cost behavior patterns can be extended linearly over the range of 3,000 to 35,000 units and that the cost driver for each cost is the number of units produced.
|
Production in units per month
|
3,000
|
9,000
|
16,000
|
35,000
|
|
Cost X
|
$23,700
|
$52,680
|
$86,490
|
$178,260
|
|
Cost Y
|
47,280
|
141,840
|
252,160
|
551,600
|
What is the average cost per unit at a production level of 8,000 units for cost X?
- $5.98
- $5.85
- $7.90
- $4.83
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
The following are selected data for Lenley Manufacturing Company for the year ended 20X1.
|
Sales
|
$30,000,000
|
|
Average invested capital (total assets)
|
10,000,000
|
|
Total fixed assets
|
6,000,000
|
|
Net income
|
3,000,000
|
|
Net cash flow
|
5,000,000
|
|
Imputed interest rate
|
10%
|
Which of the following measures the return on investments for Lenley Manufacturing Company for the year?
- 2%
- 8%
- 10%
- 30%
Which of the following measures residual income for Lenley Manufacturing Company for the year?
- $1,000,000
- $2,000,000
- $3,000,000
- $6,000,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
The operating results in summarized form for a retail computer store for 2003 are
|
Revenue:
|
|
|
|
Hardware sales
|
$4,800,000
|
|
|
Software sales
|
2,000,000
|
|
|
Maintenance contracts
|
1,200,00
|
|
|
|
Total revenue
|
$8,000,000
|
|
Costs and expenses
|
|
|
|
Cost of hardware sales
|
$3,360,000
|
|
|
Cost of software sales
|
1,200,000
|
|
|
Marketing expenses
|
600,000
|
|
|
Customer maintenance costs
|
640,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
1,120,000
|
|
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
$6,920,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$1,080,000
|
The computer store is in the process of formulating its operating budget for 2004 and has made the following assumptions:
- The selling prices of hardware are expected to increase 10% but there will be no selling price increases for software and maintenance contracts.
- Hardware unit sales are expected to increase 5% with a corresponding 5% growth in the number of maintenance contracts; growth in unit software sales is estimated at 8%.
- The cost of hardware and software is expected to increase 4%.
- Marketing expenses will be increased 5% in the coming year.
- Three technicians will be added to the customer maintenance operations in the coming year, increasing the customer maintenance costs by $120,000.
- Administrative costs will be held at the same level.
The retail computer store’s budgeted total revenue for 2004 would be
- $8,804,000
- $8,460,000
- $8,904,000
- $8,964,000
The retail computer store’s budgeted total costs and expenses for the coming year would be
- $7,252,400
- $7,526,960
- $7,558,960
- $7,893,872
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
The power and maintenance departments of a manufacturing company are service departments that provide support to each other as well as to the organization’s two production departments, plating and assembly. The manufacturing company employs separate departmental manufacturing overhead rates for the two production departments requiring the allocation of the service department costs to the two manufacturing departments. Square footage of area served is used to allocate the maintenance department costs while percentage of power usage is used to allocate the power department costs. Department costs and operation data are as follows:
|
|
Service Departments
|
Production Departments
|
|
Costs:
|
Power
|
Maintenance
|
Plating
|
Assembly
|
|
Labor
|
$60,000
|
$180,000
|
|
|
|
Overhead
|
1,440,000
|
540,000
|
|
|
|
Total costs
|
$1,500,000
|
$720,000
|
|
|
|
Operating Data:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Square feet
|
6,000
|
1,500
|
6,000
|
24,000
|
|
Percent of Usage:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Long-run capacity
|
—
|
5%
|
60%
|
35%
|
|
Expected actual use
|
—
|
4%
|
70%
|
26%
|
The allocation method that would provide this manufacturer with the theoretically best allocation of service department costs would be
- A dual-rate allocation method allocating variable cost on expected actual usage and fixed costs on long-run capacity usage.
- The step-down allocation method.
- The direct allocation method.
- The reciprocal (or linear algebra) allocation method.
Without prejudice to your answer in 11, assume that the manufacturing company employs the step-down allocation method to allocate service department costs. If it allocates the cost of the maintenance department first, then the amount of the maintenance department’s costs that are directly allocated to the plating department would be
- $144,000
- $120,000
- $115,200
- $ 90,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
The following information is available for Lopinsky, Inc.:
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
|
Current assets
|
|
$
|
500,000
|
|
Property, plant, & equipment
|
|
4,000,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$
|
4,500,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
$
|
30,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Common stock
|
|
|
200,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
|
1,770,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$
|
4,500,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of debt before tax
|
7%
|
|
|
|
Cost of equity
|
12%
|
|
|
|
Tax rate
|
25%
|
|
|
What is Lopinsky’s weighted-average cost of capital?
- 9.50%
- 8.75%
- 8.22%
- 6.10%
What is Lopinsky’s debt-to-equity ratio?
- 1.28
- 0.56
- 1.20
- 2.10
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An organization has an opportunity to establish a zero balance account system using four different regional banks. The total amount of the maintenance and transfer fees is estimated to be $8,000 per annum. The organization believes that it will increase the float on its operating disbursements by an average of two days, and its cost of short-term funds is 4%. Assuming the organization estimates its average daily operating disbursements to be $80,000, what decision should the organization make regarding this opportunity?
- Do not open the zero balance accounts due to the additional cost of $8,000.
- Do not open the zero balance accounts due to an excess of costs over benefits of $1,600.
- Open the zero balance accounts due to an estimated savings of $1,200.
- Open the zero balance accounts due to an estimated savings of $6,200.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A consultant recommends that a company hold funds for the following two reasons.
Reason 1: Cash needs can fluctuate substantially throughout the year.
Reason 2: Opportunities for buying at a discount may appear during the year.
The cash balances used to address the reasons given above are correctly classified as
|
|
Reason 1
|
Reason 2
|
|
a.
|
Speculative balances
|
Speculative balances
|
|
b.
|
Speculative balances
|
Precautionary balances
|
|
c.
|
Precautionary balances
|
Speculative balances
|
|
d.
|
Precautionary balances
|
Precautionary balances
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
|
|
|
Total Cost
|
Unit Cost
|
|
Sales (40,000 units)
|
$1,000,000
|
$25
|
|
Raw materials
|
160,000
|
4
|
|
Direct labor
|
280,000
|
7
|
|
Factory overhead:
|
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
80,000
|
2
|
|
|
Fixed
|
360,000
|
|
|
Selling and general expenses:
|
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
120,000
|
3
|
|
|
Fixed
|
225,000
|
|
How many units does the company need to produce and sell to make a before-tax profit of 10% of sales?
- 65,000 units.
- 36,562 units.
- 90,000 units.
- 29,250 units.
Assuming that the company sells 80,000 units, what is the maximum that can be paid for an advertising campaign while still breaking even?
- $ 135,000
- $1,015,000
- $ 535,000
- $ 695,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
The standard direct labor cost to produce one pound of output for a company is presented below. Related data regarding the planned and actual production activities for the current month for the company are also given below.
NOTE: DLH = Direct Labor Hours.
|
Direct Labor Standard:
|
|
|
|
.4 DLH @ $12.00 per DLH = $4.80
|
|
|
Planned production
|
15,000 pounds
|
|
Actual production
|
15,500 pounds
|
|
Actual direct labor costs (6,250 DLH)
|
$75,250
|
|
|
|
The company’s direct labor rate variance for the current month would be
- $10 unfavorable.
- $240 unfavorable.
- $248 unfavorable.
- $250 unfavorable.
The company’s direct labor efficiency variance for the current month would be
- $600 unfavorable.
- $602 unfavorable.
- $2,400 unfavorable.
- $3,000 unfavorable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounting records of Omar Company contained the following information for last year:
| |
Beginning
|
Ending
|
|
Direct materials inventory
|
$9,000
|
$7,000
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
$17,000
|
$31,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory
|
$10,000
|
$15,000
|
|
Manufacturing costs incurred
|
|
Direct materials used
|
$72,000
|
|
|
Overhead applied
|
$24,000
|
|
|
Direct labor cost (10,000 hours)
|
$80,000
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
$10,000
|
|
|
Rent
|
$12,000
|
|
|
Taxes
|
$8,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$157,000*
|
|
Selling and administrative costs incurred
|
|
Advertising
|
$35,000
|
|
|
Rent
|
$20,000
|
|
|
Clerical
|
$25,000
|
|
The cost of goods manufactured for the year was:
A) $190,000
B) $162,000
C) $168,000
D) $135,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acton Corporation, which applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours, has provided the following data for its most recent year of operations.
|
Estimated manufacturing overhead
|
$139,080
|
|
Estimated machine-hours
|
3,800
|
|
Actual manufacturing overhead
|
$137,000
|
|
Actual machine-hours
|
3,780
|
The estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine-hours were made at the beginning of the year for the purpose of computing the company”s predetermined overhead rate for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acton Corporation, which applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours, has provided the following data for its most recent year of operations.
|
Estimated manufacturing overhead
|
$139,080
|
|
Estimated machine-hours
|
3,800
|
|
Actual manufacturing overhead
|
$137,000
|
|
Actual machine-hours
|
3,780
|
The estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine-hours were made at the beginning of the year for the purpose of computing the company”s predetermined overhead rate for the year. The predetermined overhead rate is closest to:
A) $36.60
B) $36.41
C) $36.24
D) $36.05
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acton Corporation, which applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours, has provided the following data for its most recent year of operations.
|
Estimated manufacturing overhead
|
$139,080
|
|
Estimated machine-hours
|
3,800
|
|
Actual manufacturing overhead
|
$137,000
|
|
Actual machine-hours
|
3,780
|
The estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine-hours were made at the beginning of the year for the purpose of computing the company”s predetermined overhead rate for the year. The applied manufacturing overhead for the year is closest to:
A) $136,269
B) $138,348
C) $136,987
D) $137,630
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acton Corporation, which applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours, has provided the following data for its most recent year of operations.
|
Estimated manufacturing overhead
|
$139,080
|
|
Estimated machine-hours
|
3,800
|
|
Actual manufacturing overhead
|
$137,000
|
|
Actual machine-hours
|
3,780
|
The estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine-hours were made at the beginning of the year for the purpose of computing the company”s predetermined overhead rate for the year.
The overhead for the year was:
A) $732 underapplied
B) $1,348 underapplied
C) $732 overapplied
D) $1,348 overapplied
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dapper Company had only one job in process on May 1. The job had been charged with $3,400 of direct materials, $4,640 of direct labor, and $9,200 of manufacturing overhead cost. The company assigns overhead cost to jobs using the predetermined overhead rate of $23.00 per direct labor-hour. During May, the activity was recorded:
|
Raw materials (all direct materials):
|
|
Beginning balance
|
$8,500
|
|
Purchased during the month
|
$42,000
|
|
Used in production
|
$48,500
|
|
Labor:
|
|
|
Direct labor-hours worked during the month
|
2,200
|
|
Direct labor cost incurred
|
$25,520
|
|
Actual manufacturing overhead costs incurred
|
$52,800
|
|
Inventories:
|
|
|
Raw materials, May 30
|
?
|
|
Work in process, May 30
|
$32,190
|
Work in process inventory on May 30 contains $7,540 of direct labor cost. Raw materials consist solely of items that are classified as direct materials. The balance in the raw materials inventory account on May 30 was:
A) $33,500
B) $2,000
C) $40,000
D) $6,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dapper Company had only one job in process on May 1. The job had been charged with $3,400 of direct materials, $4,640 of direct labor, and $9,200 of manufacturing overhead cost. The company assigns overhead cost to jobs using the predetermined overhead rate of $23.00 per direct labor-hour. During May, the activity was recorded:
|
Raw materials (all direct materials):
|
|
Beginning balance
|
$8,500
|
|
Purchased during the month
|
$42,000
|
|
Used in production
|
$48,500
|
|
Labor:
|
|
|
Direct labor-hours worked during the month
|
2,200
|
|
Direct labor cost incurred
|
$25,520
|
|
Actual manufacturing overhead costs incurred
|
$52,800
|
|
Inventories:
|
|
|
Raw materials, May 30
|
?
|
|
Work in process, May 30
|
$32,190
|
Work in process inventory on May 30 contains $7,540 of direct labor cost. Raw materials consist solely of items that are classified as direct materials. The cost of goods manufactured for May was:
A) $109,670
B) $124,620
C) $143,300
D) $126,820
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dapper Company had only one job in process on May 1. The job had been charged with $3,400 of direct materials, $4,640 of direct labor, and $9,200 of manufacturing overhead cost. The company assigns overhead cost to jobs using the predetermined overhead rate of $23.00 per direct labor-hour. During May, the activity was recorded:
|
Raw materials (all direct materials):
|
|
Beginning balance
|
$8,500
|
|
Purchased during the month
|
$42,000
|
|
Used in production
|
$48,500
|
|
Labor:
|
|
|
Direct labor-hours worked during the month
|
2,200
|
|
Direct labor cost incurred
|
$25,520
|
|
Actual manufacturing overhead costs incurred
|
$52,800
|
|
Inventories:
|
|
|
Raw materials, May 30
|
?
|
|
Work in process, May 30
|
$32,190
|
Work in process inventory on May 30 contains $7,540 of direct labor cost. Raw materials consist solely of items that are classified as direct materials. The entry to dispose of the under- or overapplied overhead cost for the month would include a:
A) debit of $2,200 to Manufacturing Overhead
B) debit of $14,950 to Manufacturing Overhead
C) credit of $14,950 to Manufacturing Overhead
D) credit of $2,200 to Manufacturing Overhead
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The direct labor rate in Brent Company is $9.00 per hour, and manufacturing overhead is applied to products using a predetermined overhead rate of $6.00 per direct labor hour. During May, the company purchased $60,000 in raw materials (all direct materials) and worked 3,200 direct labor hours. The Raw Materials inventory (all direct materials) decreased by $3,000 between the beginning and end of May. The Work in Process inventory on May 1 consisted of one job which had been charged with $4,000 in direct materials and on which 300 hours of direct labor time had been worked. There was no Work in Process inventory on May 31. The balance in the Work in Process inventory account on May 1 was:
A) $0
B) $6,700
C) $4,500
D) $8,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The direct labor rate in Brent Company is $9.00 per hour, and manufacturing overhead is applied to products using a predetermined overhead rate of $6.00 per direct labor hour. During May, the company purchased $60,000 in raw materials (all direct materials) and worked 3,200 direct labor hours. The Raw Materials inventory (all direct materials) decreased by $3,000 between the beginning and end of May. The Work in Process inventory on May 1 consisted of one job which had been charged with $4,000 in direct materials and on which 300 hours of direct labor time had been worked. There was no Work in Process inventory on May 31. The debit to Work in Process for the cost of direct materials used during May was:
A) $63,000
B) $61,000
C) $57,000
D) $67,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The direct labor rate in Brent Company is $9.00 per hour, and manufacturing overhead is applied to products using a predetermined overhead rate of $6.00 per direct labor hour. During May, the company purchased $60,000 in raw materials (all direct materials) and worked 3,200 direct labor hours. The Raw Materials inventory (all direct materials) decreased by $3,000 between the beginning and end of May. The Work in Process inventory on May 1 consisted of one job which had been charged with $4,000 in direct materials and on which 300 hours of direct labor time had been worked. There was no Work in Process inventory on May 31.
The debit to Work in Process for direct labor cost during May was:
A) $21,000
B) $26,100
C) $28,800
D) $31,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Western Company during the year:
|
Raw Material
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
3,000
|
8,000
|
|
| |
$5,000
|
|
|
| |
7,000
|
|
|
|
Finished Goods
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
9,000
|
20,000
|
|
| |
25,000
|
|
|
|
Work in Process
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
6,000
|
25,000
|
|
| |
6,500
|
|
|
| |
9,000
|
|
|
| |
7,000
|
|
|
|
Wages & Salaries Payable
|
|
| |
10,000
|
2,000
|
Beg Bal
|
| |
|
12,000
|
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
| |
1,500
|
7,000
|
|
| |
2,000
|
|
|
| |
750
|
|
|
| |
3,000
|
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
|
| |
20,000
|
|
|
The direct labor cost was:
A) $9,000
B) $12,000
C) $10,000
D) $14,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Western Company during the year:
|
Raw Material
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
3,000
|
8,000
|
|
| |
$5,000
|
|
|
| |
7,000
|
|
|
|
Finished Goods
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
9,000
|
20,000
|
|
| |
25,000
|
|
|
|
Work in Process
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
6,000
|
25,000
|
|
| |
6,500
|
|
|
| |
9,000
|
|
|
| |
7,000
|
|
|
|
Wages & Salaries Payable
|
|
| |
10,000
|
2,000
|
Beg Bal
|
| |
|
12,000
|
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
| |
1,500
|
7,000
|
|
| |
2,000
|
|
|
| |
750
|
|
|
| |
3,000
|
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
|
| |
20,000
|
|
|
The direct materials cost was:
A) $8,000
B) $6,500
C) $9,000
D) $6,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Western Company during the year:
|
Raw Material
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
3,000
|
8,000
|
|
| |
$5,000
|
|
|
| |
7,000
|
|
|
|
Finished Goods
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
9,000
|
20,000
|
|
| |
25,000
|
|
|
|
Work in Process
|
|
|
|
Beg Bal
|
6,000
|
25,000
|
|
| |
6,500
|
|
|
| |
9,000
|
|
|
| |
7,000
|
|
|
|
Wages & Salaries Payable
|
|
| |
10,000
|
2,000
|
Beg Bal
|
| |
|
12,000
|
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
| |
1,500
|
7,000
|
|
| |
2,000
|
|
|
| |
750
|
|
|
| |
3,000
|
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
|
| |
20,000
|
|
|
The manufacturing overhead was:
A) $250 overapplied
B) $750 underapplied
C) $250 underapplied
D) $750 overapplied
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kapanga Manufacturing Company uses a job-order costing system and started the month of October with a zero balance in its work in process and finished goods inventory accounts. During October, Kapanga worked on three jobs and incurred the following direct costs on those jobs:
|
|
Job B18
|
Job B19
|
Job C11
|
|
Direct materials
|
$12,000
|
$25,000
|
$18,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
$8,000
|
$10,000
|
$5,000
|
Kapanga applies manufacturing overhead at a rate of 150% of direct labor cost. During October, Kapanga completed Jobs B18 and B19 and sold Job B19. What is Kapanga”s cost of goods manufactured for October?
A) $ 50,000
B) $ 55,000
C) $ 78,000
D) $ 82,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kapanga Manufacturing Company uses a job-order costing system and started the month of October with a zero balance in its work in process and finished goods inventory accounts. During October, Kapanga worked on three jobs and incurred the following direct costs on those jobs:
|
|
Job B18
|
Job B19
|
Job C11
|
|
Direct materials
|
$12,000
|
$25,000
|
$18,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
$8,000
|
$10,000
|
$5,000
|
Kapanga applies manufacturing overhead at a rate of 150% of direct labor cost. During October, Kapanga completed Jobs B18 and B19 and sold Job B19. What is Kapanga”s work in process inventory balance at the end of October?
A) $23,000
B) $30,500
C) $32,000
D) $43,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dillon Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate of 75% of direct labor cost. Any under or overapplied overhead cost is closed out to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of the month. During May, the following transactions were recorded by the company:
|
Raw materials (all direct materials):
|
|
Purchased during the month
|
$38,000
|
|
Used in production
|
$35,000
|
|
Labor:
|
|
|
Direct labor hours worked during the month
|
3,150
|
|
Direct labor cost incurred
|
$30,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead cost incurred (total)
|
$24,500
|
|
Inventories:
|
|
Raw materials (all direct), May 31
|
$8,000
|
|
Work in process, May 1
|
$9,000
|
|
Work in process, May 31
|
$12,000
|
The amount of direct materials cost in the May 31 Work in Process inventory account
was:
A) $7,600
B) $2,000
C) $6,300
D) $4,300
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dillon Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate of 75% of direct labor cost. Any under or overapplied overhead cost is closed out to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of the month. During May, the following transactions were recorded by the company:
|
Raw materials (all direct materials):
|
|
Purchased during the month
|
$38,000
|
|
Used in production
|
$35,000
|
|
Labor:
|
|
|
Direct labor hours worked during the month
|
3,150
|
|
Direct labor cost incurred
|
$30,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead cost incurred (total)
|
$24,500
|
|
Inventories:
|
|
Raw materials (all direct), May 31
|
$8,000
|
|
Work in process, May 1
|
$9,000
|
|
Work in process, May 31
|
$12,000
|
The Cost of Goods Manufactured for May was:
A) $84,500
B) $95,000
C) $75,500
D) $81,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Farber Corporation uses a job-order cost system. The information below is from the financial records of the company for last year:
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
$2,500,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
$2,425,000
|
|
Predetermined overhead rate
|
80% of direct labor cost
|
Applied overhead was 30% of total manufacturing costs. The Work in Process inventory at January 1 was 75% of the Work in Process inventory at December 31. Farber Company”s total direct labor cost was:
A) $750,000
B) $600,000
C) $900,000
D) $937,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Farber Corporation uses a job-order cost system. The information below is from the financial records of the company for last year:
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
$2,500,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
$2,425,000
|
|
Predetermined overhead rate
|
80% of direct labor cost
|
Applied overhead was 30% of total manufacturing costs. The Work in Process inventory at January 1 was 75% of the Work in Process inventory at December 31. Total cost of direct material used by Farber Company was:
A) $750,000
B) $812,500
C) $850,000
D) $1,150,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gagnon Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Maintenance of test equipment
|
$18,000
|
|
Test and inspection of incoming materials
|
$73,000
|
|
Systems development
|
$29,000
|
|
Product recalls
|
$91,000
|
|
Quality training
|
$25,000
|
|
Disposal of defective products
|
$55,000
|
|
Supervision of testing and inspection activities
|
$24,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$58,000
|
|
Net cost of scrap
|
$23,000
|
Required:
Prepare a Quality Cost Report in good form with separate sections for prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, and external failure costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harvold Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Test and inspection of incoming materials
|
$71,000
|
|
Supplies used in testing and inspection
|
$51,000
|
|
Re-entering data because of keying errors
|
$60,000
|
|
Statistical process control activities
|
$82,000
|
|
Technical support provided to suppliers
|
$91,000
|
|
Disposal of defective products
|
$60,000
|
|
Lost sales due to poor quality
|
$87,000
|
|
Net cost of scrap
|
$85,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$70,000
|
Required:
Prepare a Quality Cost Report in good form with separate sections for prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, and external failure costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hartlie Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Lost sales due to poor quality
|
$11,000
|
|
Rework labor and overhead
|
$75,000
|
|
Statistical process control activities
|
$26,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$16,000
|
|
Re-entering data because of keying errors
|
$86,000
|
|
Debugging software errors
|
$55,000
|
|
Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting
|
$48,000
|
|
Supervision of testing and inspection activities
|
$12,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$75,000
|
Required:
Prepare a Quality Cost Report in good form with separate sections for prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, and external failure costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hartness Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$75,000
|
|
Rework labor and overhead
|
$11,000
|
|
Quality circles
|
$46,000
|
|
Quality training
|
$94,000
|
|
Test and inspection of incoming materials
|
$64,000
|
|
Product recalls
|
$71,000
|
|
Net cost of scrap
|
$12,000
|
|
Re-entering data because of keying errors
|
$52,000
|
|
Cost of field servicing and handling complaints
|
$25,000
|
Required:
Prepare a Quality Cost Report in good form with separate sections for prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, and external failure costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process costing is used in those situations where many different products or services are produced each period to customer specifications.
The basic approach in job-order costing is to accumulate costs in a particular operation or department for an entire period (month, quarter, year) and then to divide this total by the number of units produced during the period.
If a company uses predetermined overhead rates, actual manufacturing overhead costs of a period will be recorded in the Manufacturing Overhead account, but they will not be recorded on the job cost sheets for the period. In a job-order cost system, indirect labor is assigned to a job by using the labor time ticket as a source document.
The formula for computing the predetermined overhead rate is: Estimated total units in base ÷ Estimated total manufacturing costs
The fact that one department may be labor intensive while another department is machine intensive may explain in part the existence of multiple predetermined overhead rates in larger companies.
If a company closes any under- or overapplied overhead to the Cost of Goods Sold account, then Cost of Goods Sold will be credited if manufacturing overhead is overapplied for the period.
The following entry would be used to record the transfer of material from the storeroom to production if 80% of the material was direct material and 20% was indirect material:
|
Work in Process
|
40,000
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
10,000
|
|
Raw Material
|
50,000
|
If a job is not completed at the end of the year, then no manufacturing overhead cost should be applied to that job.
When raw materials are purchased, they are recorded as an expense.
In a job-order cost system, depreciation on factory equipment should be charged directly to the Work in Process account.
The entire difference between the actual manufacturing overhead cost for a period and the applied manufacturing overhead cost is typically closed to the Work In Process account.
If the actual manufacturing overhead costs for a period exceed the manufacturing overhead costs applied, then overhead would be considered to be overapplied.
When the predetermined overhead rate is based on the level of activity at capacity, the overhead underapplied may be called the Cost of Unused Capacity and treated as a period expense.
The absorption cost approach is so named because it provides for the absorption of all manufacturing costs, fixed and variable, into units of product.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following entries would record correctly the application of overhead cost?
|
A) Work in Process
|
XXX
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
XXX
|
|
B) Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
XXX
|
|
C) Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
|
Work in Process
|
XXX
|
|
D) Work in Process
|
XXX
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The operations of Kalispell Company resulted in overapplied overhead for the month just completed. Which of the following journal entries can be correct if Kalispell allocates under- or overapplied overhead among accounts?
|
A) Cost of Goods Sold
|
XXX
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
|
B) Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
XXX
|
|
C) Work in Process
|
XXX
|
|
Finished Goods
|
XXX
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
XXX
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
|
D) Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
|
Work in Process
|
XXX
|
|
Finished Goods
|
XXX
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
XXX
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following entries would record correctly the monthly salaries earned by the top management of a manufacturing company?
|
A) Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
XXX
|
|
B) Salaries Expense
|
XXX
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
XXX
|
|
C) Work in Process
|
XXX
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
XXX
|
|
D) Salaries and Wages Payable
|
XXX
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
XXX
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The journal entry to record applying overhead during the production process is:
|
A) Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
|
Work In Process
|
XXX
|
|
B) Finished Goods
|
XXX
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
|
C) Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
|
Finished Goods
|
XXX
|
|
D) Work In Process
|
XXX
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
XXX
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Blackwood Co. uses a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost to apply manufacturing overhead to jobs. The predetermined overhead rates for the year are 200% for Department A and 50% for Department B. Job 123, started and completed during the year, was charged with the following costs:
|
|
Dept. A
|
Dept. B
|
|
Direct materials
|
$25,000
|
$5,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
?
|
$30,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$40,000
|
?
|
The total manufacturing costs associated with Job 123 should be:
A) $135,000
B) $180,000
C) $195,000
D) $240,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fisher Company uses a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost to apply manufacturing overhead to jobs. The following information about Fisher Company”s Work in Process inventory account has been provided for the month of May:
|
May 1 balance
|
$26,000
|
|
Debits during May:
|
|
|
Direct Materials
|
$40,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
$50,000
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
$37,500
|
During the month, Fisher Company”s Work in Process inventory account was credited for $120,500, which represented the Cost of Goods Manufactured for the month. Only one job remained in process on May 31; this job had been charged with $9,600 of applied overhead cost. The amount of direct materials cost in the unfinished job would be:
A) $10,600
B) $16,700
C) $12,800
D) $23,400
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Juanita Corporation uses a job-order cost system and applies overhead on the basis of direct labor cost. At the end of October, Juanita had one job still in process. The job cost sheet for this job contained the following information:
|
Direct materials
|
$480
|
|
Direct labor
|
$150
|
|
Manufacturing overhead applied
|
$600
|
An additional $100 of labor was needed in November to complete this job. For this job, how much should Juanita have transferred to finished goods inventory in November when it was completed?
A) $1,330
B) $500
C) $1,230
D) $1,730
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wall Company uses a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor hours to apply manufacturing overhead to jobs. The company”s estimated costs for the next year are:
|
Direct materials
|
$3,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
$20,000
|
|
Depreciation on factory equipment
|
$6,000
|
|
Rent on factory
|
$12,000
|
|
Sales salaries
|
$29,000
|
|
Factory utilities
|
$15,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
$6,000
|
It is estimated that 10,000 direct labor hours will be worked during the year. The predetermined overhead rate will be:
A) $3.90
B) $5.90
C) $6.80
D) $9.10
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information relates to Spock Manufacturing Company:
|
Total estimated manufacturing overhead at beginning of year
|
$620,000
|
|
Total manufacturing overhead applied to production during
|
|
|
the year
|
$625,000
|
|
Total manufacturing overhead incurred during the year
|
$618,000
|
The company closes out the balance in the Manufacturing Overhead to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of the year. In the journal entry to close out the balance, the company would:
A) debit cost of goods sold for $2,000
B) credit cost of goods sold for $2,000
C) credit cost of goods sold for $7,000
D) debit cost of goods sold for $7,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Serenje Manufacturing Company produces nameplates and uses a job-order cost system. The following amounts relate to nameplate production for the month of June:
|
Work in process inventory, June 1
|
$620
|
|
Cost of materials directly assigned to production during June
|
$1,800
|
|
Cost of labor directly assigned to production during June
|
$1,200
|
|
Cost of nameplates completed during June
|
$4,300
|
Serenje applies overhead at a predetermined overhead rate of 60% of direct material cost. At the end of June, only one job was in Work in Process inventory. This job had been charged with $150 of direct material cost. What is the direct labor cost assigned to this job?
A) $100
B) $160
C) $225
D) $530
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dukes Company used a predetermined overhead rate this year of $2 per direct labor hour, based on an estimate of 20,000 direct labor hours to be worked during the year. Actual costs and activity during the year were:
|
Actual manufacturing overhead cost incurred
|
$38,000
|
|
Actual direct labor hours worked
|
18,500
|
The under- or overapplied overhead for the year was:
A) $1,000 underapplied
B) $1,000 overapplied
C) $3,000 underapplied
D) $3,000 overapplied
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In reviewing the accounting records at year-end, Garff Company”s accountant has determined that the following items and amounts were debited to the Manufacturing Overhead account during the year:
|
Factory supervisor’s salary
|
$8,000
|
|
Sales commissions
|
$7,000
|
|
Vacation pay for the materials storeroom clerk
|
$2,000
|
Including the items listed above, the debits to the Manufacturing Overhead account totaled $245,000 for the year. Credits to the account totaled $240,000 for the year. Based on this information, if all entries had been made correctly during the year the Manufacturing Overhead account would have been:
A) overapplied by $4,000
B) overapplied by $12,000
C) underapplied by $5,000
D) overapplied by $2,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute the October cost of direct materials used if raw material purchases for the month were $30,000 and the inventories were as follows:
Beginning Ending
|
Direct materials
|
$7,000
|
$4,000
|
|
Work in Process
|
$6,000
|
$7,500
|
|
Finished goods
|
$10,000
|
$12,000
|
The cost of direct materials used would be:
A) $31,500
B) $29,500
C) $27,000
D) $33,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounting records of Omar Company contained the following information for last year:
| |
Beginning
|
Ending
|
|
Direct materials inventory
|
$9,000
|
$7,000
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
$17,000
|
$31,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory
|
$10,000
|
$15,000
|
|
Manufacturing costs incurred
|
|
Direct materials used
|
$72,000
|
|
|
Overhead applied
|
$24,000
|
|
|
Direct labor cost (10,000 hours)
|
$80,000
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
$10,000
|
|
|
Rent
|
$12,000
|
|
|
Taxes
|
$8,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$157,000*
|
|
Selling and administrative costs incurred
|
|
Advertising
|
$35,000
|
|
|
Rent
|
$20,000
|
|
|
Clerical
|
$25,000
|
|
The total costs added to Work in Process during the year were:
A) $206,000
B) $162,000
C) $176,000
D) $182,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounting records of Omar Company contained the following information for last year:
| |
Beginning
|
Ending
|
|
Direct materials inventory
|
$9,000
|
$7,000
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
$17,000
|
$31,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory
|
$10,000
|
$15,000
|
|
Manufacturing costs incurred
|
|
Direct materials used
|
$72,000
|
|
|
Overhead applied
|
$24,000
|
|
|
Direct labor cost (10,000 hours)
|
$80,000
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
$10,000
|
|
|
Rent
|
$12,000
|
|
|
Taxes
|
$8,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$157,000*
|
|
Selling and administrative costs incurred
|
|
Advertising
|
$35,000
|
|
|
Rent
|
$20,000
|
|
|
Clerical
|
$25,000
|
|
If Omar Company applies overhead to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours and Job 3 took 120 hours, how much overhead should be applied to that job?
A) $960
B) $360
C) $528
D) $288
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Marrell is employed on the assembly line of a manufacturing company where she assembles a component part for one of the company”s products. She is paid $16 per hour for regular time and time and a half for all work in excess of 40 hours per week. Marrell works 45 hours during a week in which there was no idle time. The allocation of Marrell”s wages for the week as between direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead cost would be:
|
|
Direct Labor
|
Manufacturing
|
|
|
$760
|
Overhead
|
|
A)
|
$720
|
$0
|
|
B)
|
$640
|
$40
|
|
C)
|
$610
|
$80
|
|
D)
|
Direct Labor
|
$40
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Marrell is employed on the assembly line of a manufacturing company where she assembles a component part for one of the company”s products. She is paid $16 per hour for regular time and time and a half for all work in excess of 40 hours per week. Marrell”s employer offers fringe benefits that cost the company $4 for each hour of employee time (either regular or overtime). During a given week, Marrell works 48 hours but is idle for 3 hours due to material shortages. The company treats all fringe benefits as part of manufacturing overhead. The allocation of Marrell”s wages for the week between the direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead would be:
|
|
|
Manufacturing
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
Overhead
|
|
A)
|
$960
|
$64
|
|
B)
|
$768
|
$256
|
|
C)
|
$720
|
$304
|
|
D)
|
$640
|
$320
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Marrell is employed on the assembly line of a manufacturing company where she assembles a component part for one of the company”s products. She is paid $16 per hour for regular time and time and a half for all work in excess of 40 hours per week. Marrell”s employer offers fringe benefits that cost the company $4 for each hour of employee time (either regular or overtime). During a given week, Marrell works 48 hours but is idle for 3 hours due to material shortages. The company treats all fringe benefits relating to direct labor as added direct labor cost. The allocation of Marrell”s wages for the week between direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead would be:
|
|
|
Manufacturing
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
Overhead
|
|
A)
|
$832
|
$128
|
|
B)
|
$900
|
$124
|
|
C)
|
$912
|
$112
|
|
D)
|
$960
|
$64
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eakle Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Supervision of testing and inspection activities
|
$29,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$12,000
|
|
Net cost of scrap
|
$53,000
|
|
Test and inspection of incoming materials
|
$23,000
|
|
Technical support provided to suppliers
|
$71,000
|
|
Disposal of defective products
|
$94,000
|
|
Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting
|
$47,000
|
|
Liability arising from defective products
|
$75,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$22,000
|
What would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $118,000
B) $93,000
C) $76,000
D) $59,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eakle Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Supervision of testing and inspection activities
|
$29,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$12,000
|
|
Net cost of scrap
|
$53,000
|
|
Test and inspection of incoming materials
|
$23,000
|
|
Technical support provided to suppliers
|
$71,000
|
|
Disposal of defective products
|
$94,000
|
|
Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting
|
$47,000
|
|
Liability arising from defective products
|
$75,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$22,000
|
What would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $45,000
B) $52,000
C) $74,000
D) $76,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eakle Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Supervision of testing and inspection activities
|
$29,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$12,000
|
|
Net cost of scrap
|
$53,000
|
|
Test and inspection of incoming materials
|
$23,000
|
|
Technical support provided to suppliers
|
$71,000
|
|
Disposal of defective products
|
$94,000
|
|
Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting
|
$47,000
|
|
Liability arising from defective products
|
$75,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$22,000
|
What would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $426,000
B) $234,000
C) $106,000
D) $87,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ealsy Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Maintenance of test equipment
|
$95,000
|
|
Cost of field servicing and handling complaints
|
$17,000
|
|
Statistical process control activities
|
$77,000
|
|
Net cost of scrap .
|
$62,000
|
|
Downtime caused by quality problems .
|
$23,000
|
|
Technical support provided to suppliers
|
$93,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$81,000
|
|
Supplies used in testing and inspection
|
$33,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$24,000
|
What would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $172,000
B) $170,000
C) $174,000
D) $94,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ealsy Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Maintenance of test equipment
|
$95,000
|
|
Cost of field servicing and handling complaints
|
$17,000
|
|
Statistical process control activities
|
$77,000
|
|
Net cost of scrap .
|
$62,000
|
|
Downtime caused by quality problems .
|
$23,000
|
|
Technical support provided to suppliers
|
$93,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$81,000
|
|
Supplies used in testing and inspection
|
$33,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$24,000
|
What would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $114,000
B) $95,000
C) $128,000
D) $209,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ealsy Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Maintenance of test equipment
|
$95,000
|
|
Cost of field servicing and handling complaints
|
$17,000
|
|
Statistical process control activities
|
$77,000
|
|
Net cost of scrap .
|
$62,000
|
|
Downtime caused by quality problems .
|
$23,000
|
|
Technical support provided to suppliers
|
$93,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$81,000
|
|
Supplies used in testing and inspection
|
$33,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$24,000
|
What would be the total internal failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $85,000
B) $143,000
C) $40,000
D) $86,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eames Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Technical support provided to suppliers
|
$20,000
|
|
Test and inspection of in-process goods
|
$67,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$68,000
|
|
Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting
|
$46,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$97,000
|
|
Debugging software errors
|
$22,000
|
|
Downtime caused by quality problems
|
$95,000
|
|
Returns arising from quality problems
|
$12,000
|
|
Supervision of testing and inspection activities.
|
$24,000
|
What would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $163,000
B) $135,000
C) $159,000
D) $92,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eames Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Technical support provided to suppliers
|
$20,000
|
|
Test and inspection of in-process goods
|
$67,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$68,000
|
|
Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting
|
$46,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$97,000
|
|
Debugging software errors
|
$22,000
|
|
Downtime caused by quality problems
|
$95,000
|
|
Returns arising from quality problems
|
$12,000
|
|
Supervision of testing and inspection activities.
|
$24,000
|
What would be the total internal failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $162,000
B) $34,000
C) $117,000
D) $192,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eames Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Technical support provided to suppliers
|
$20,000
|
|
Test and inspection of in-process goods
|
$67,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$68,000
|
|
Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting
|
$46,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$97,000
|
|
Debugging software errors
|
$22,000
|
|
Downtime caused by quality problems
|
$95,000
|
|
Returns arising from quality problems
|
$12,000
|
|
Supervision of testing and inspection activities.
|
$24,000
|
What would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $226,000
B) $451,000
C) $109,000
D) $34,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Factoria Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Disposal of defective products
|
$41,000
|
|
Statistical process control activities
|
$29,000
|
|
Test and inspection of in-process goods
|
$65,000
|
|
Net cost of spoilage
|
$23,000
|
|
Test and inspection of incoming materials
|
$22,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$14,000
|
|
Downtime caused by quality problems
|
$56,000
|
|
Quality training
|
$42,000
|
|
Product recalls
|
$32,000
|
What would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $71,000
B) $51,000
C) $107,000
D) $43,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Factoria Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Disposal of defective products
|
$41,000
|
|
Statistical process control activities
|
$29,000
|
|
Test and inspection of in-process goods
|
$65,000
|
|
Net cost of spoilage
|
$23,000
|
|
Test and inspection of incoming materials
|
$22,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$14,000
|
|
Downtime caused by quality problems
|
$56,000
|
|
Quality training
|
$42,000
|
|
Product recalls
|
$32,000
|
What would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $63,000
B) $87,000
C) $88,000
D) $158,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Factoria Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Disposal of defective products
|
$41,000
|
|
Statistical process control activities
|
$29,000
|
|
Test and inspection of in-process goods
|
$65,000
|
|
Net cost of spoilage
|
$23,000
|
|
Test and inspection of incoming materials
|
$22,000
|
|
Warranty repairs and replacements
|
$14,000
|
|
Downtime caused by quality problems
|
$56,000
|
|
Quality training
|
$42,000
|
|
Product recalls
|
$32,000
|
What would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $88,000
B) $166,000
C) $324,000
D) $46,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fadden Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Statistical process control activities
|
$97,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$87,000
|
|
Supplies used in testing and inspection
|
$48,000
|
|
Re-entering data because of keying errors
|
$12,000
|
|
Debugging software errors
|
73,000
|
|
Quality circles
|
$84,000
|
|
Net cost of spoilage
|
$85,000
|
|
Returns arising from quality problems
|
$28,000
|
|
Cost of field servicing and handling complaints
|
$65,000
|
What would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $184,000
B) $125,000
C) $132,000
D) $181,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fadden Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Statistical process control activities
|
$97,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$87,000
|
|
Supplies used in testing and inspection
|
$48,000
|
|
Re-entering data because of keying errors
|
$12,000
|
|
Debugging software errors
|
73,000
|
|
Quality circles
|
$84,000
|
|
Net cost of spoilage
|
$85,000
|
|
Returns arising from quality problems
|
$28,000
|
|
Cost of field servicing and handling complaints
|
$65,000
|
What would be the total internal failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $150,000
B) $170,000
C) $101,000
D) $133,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fado Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Net cost of scrap
|
$18,000
|
|
Quality circles
|
$84,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$32,000
|
|
Returns arising from quality problems
|
$59,000
|
|
Systems development
|
$45,000
|
|
Supplies used in testing and inspection
|
$68,000
|
|
Product recalls
|
$34,000
|
|
Disposal of defective products
|
$62,000
|
|
Debugging software errors
|
$56,000
|
What would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $129,000
B) $116,000
C) $143,000
D) $113,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fado Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:
|
Net cost of scrap
|
$18,000
|
|
Quality circles
|
$84,000
|
|
Depreciation of test equipment
|
$32,000
|
|
Returns arising from quality problems
|
$59,000
|
|
Systems development
|
$45,000
|
|
Supplies used in testing and inspection
|
$68,000
|
|
Product recalls
|
$34,000
|
|
Disposal of defective products
|
$62,000
|
|
Debugging software errors
|
$56,000
|
What would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?
A) $458,000
B) $96,000
C) $93,000
D) $229,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Larder Corporation for the just completed year.
|
Sales
|
$950
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$170
|
|
Direct labor
|
$210
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$200
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$180
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$140
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$70
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$30
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$20
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$100
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$70
|
Required:
a. Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured in good form.
b. Compute the Cost of Goods Sold.
c. Using data from your Answers above as needed, prepare an Income Statement in good form
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kent, a wholesale distributor of cameras, entered into a contract with Williams. Williams agreed to purchase 100 cameras with certain optional attachments. The contract was made on March 1, 2007, for delivery by March 15, 2007; terms: 2/10, net 30. Kent shipped the cameras on March 6, and they were delivered on March 10. The shipment did not conform to the contract, in that one of the attachments was not included. Williams immediately notified Kent that he was rejecting the goods. For maximum legal advantage Kent’s most appropriate action is to
- Bring an action for the price less an allowance for the missing attachment.
- Notify Williams promptly of his intention to cure the defect and make a conforming delivery by March 15.
- Terminate his contract with Williams and recover for breach of contract.
- Sue Williams for specific performance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wilmont owned a tract of waterfront property on Big Lake. During Wilmont’s ownership of the land, several frame bungalows were placed on the land by tenants who rented the land from Wilmont. In addition to paying rent, the tenants paid for the maintenance and insurance of the bungalows, repaired, altered and sold them, without permission or hindrance from Wilmont. The bungalows rested on surface cinderblock and were not bolted to the ground. The buildings could be removed without injury to either the buildings or the land. Wilmont sold the land to Marsh. The deed to Marsh recited that Wilmont sold the land, with buildings thereon, “subject to the rights of tenants, if any, …” When the tenants attempted to remove the bungalows, Marsh claimed ownership of them. In deciding who owns the bungalows, which of the following is least significant?
- The leasehold agreement itself, to the extent it manifested the intent of the parties.
- The mode and degree of annexation of the buildings to the land.
- The degree to which removal would cause injury to the buildings or the land.
- The fact that the deed included a general clause relating to the buildings.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Frank Lanier is a resident of a state that imposes a tax on income. The following information pertaining to Lanier’s state income taxes is available:
|
Taxes withheld in 2007
|
$3,500
|
|
Refund received in 2007 of 2006 tax
|
400
|
|
Deficiency assessed and paid in 2007 for 2005:
|
|
|
|
Tax
|
600
|
|
|
Interest
|
100
|
What amount should Lanier utilize as state and local income taxes in calculating itemized deductions for his 2007 federal tax return?
- $3,500
- $3,700
- $4,100
- $4,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Spencer, who itemizes deductions, had adjusted gross income of $60,000 in 2007. The following additional information is available for 2007:
|
Cash contribution to church
|
$4,000
|
|
Purchase of art object at church bazaar (with a fair market value of $800 on the date of purchase)
|
1,200
|
|
Donation of used clothing to Salvation Army (fair value evidenced by receipt received)
|
600
|
What is the maximum amount Spencer can claim as a deduction for charitable contributions in 2007?
- $5,400
- $5,200
- $5,000
- $4,400
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Wald Corp.’s operations for the year ended December 31, 2007:
|
Worldwide taxable income
|
$300,000
|
|
US source taxable income
|
180,000
|
|
US income tax before foreign tax credit
|
96,000
|
|
Foreign nonbusiness-related interest earned
|
30,000
|
|
Foreign income taxes paid on nonbusiness-related interest earned
|
12,000
|
|
Other foreign source taxable income
|
90,000
|
|
Foreign income taxes paid on other foreign source taxable income
|
27,000
|
What amount of foreign tax credit may Wald claim for 2007?
- $28,800
- $36,600
- $38,400
- $39,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following data:
The partnership of Hager, Mazer & Slagle had the following cash-basis balance sheet at December 31, 2006:
|
|
|
Adjusted basis per books
|
Fair market value
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$51,000
|
$ 51,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
—
|
210,000
|
|
Totals
|
$51,000
|
$261,000
|
|
Liabilities and Capital
|
|
|
|
Note payable
|
$30,000
|
$ 30,000
|
|
Capital accounts:
|
|
|
|
|
Hager
|
7,000
|
77,000
|
|
|
Mazer
|
7,000
|
77,000
|
|
|
Slagle
|
7,000
|
77,000
|
|
Totals
|
$51,000
|
$261,000
|
Slagle, an equal partner, sold his partnership interest to Burns, an outsider, for $77,000 cash on January 1, 2007. In addition, Burns assumed Slagle’s share of partnership liabilities.
What was the total amount realized by Slagle on the sale of his partnership interest?
- $67,000
- $70,000
- $77,000
- $87,000
How much ordinary income should Slagle report in his 2007 income tax return on the sale of his partnership interest?
- $0
- $10,000
- $70,000
- $77,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eastern Corp., a calendar-year corporation, was formed in 2006. On January 2, 2007, it placed five-year property in service. The property was depreciated under the general MACRS system. Eastern did not elect to use the straight-line method. The following information pertains to Eastern:
|
Eastern’s 2007 taxable income
|
$300,000
|
|
Adjustment for the accelerated depreciation taken on 2007 five-year property
|
1,000
|
|
2007 tax-exempt interest from specified private activity bonds issued in 2003
|
5,000
|
What was Eastern’s 2007 alternative minimum taxable income before the adjusted current earnings (ACE) adjustment?
- $306,000
- $305,000
- $304,000
- $301,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bank Corp. owns 80% of Shore Corp.’s outstanding capital stock. Shore’s capital stock consists of 50,000 shares of common stock issued and outstanding. Shore’s 2007 net income was $140,000. During 2007, Shore declared and paid dividends of $60,000. In conformity with generally accepted accounting principles, Bank recorded the following entries in 2007:
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Investment in Shore Corp. common stock
|
$112,000
|
|
|
|
Equity in earnings of subsidiary
|
|
$112,000
|
|
Cash
|
48,000
|
|
|
|
Investment in Shore Corp. common stock
|
|
48,000
|
In its 2007 consolidated tax return, Bank should report dividend revenue of
- $48,000
- $14,400
- $ 9,600
- $0
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsen Corporation for the just completed year.
|
Sales
|
$930
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$70
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$40
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$190
|
|
Direct labor
|
$150
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$210
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$90
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$120
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$70
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$90
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$140
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$210
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$90
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$120
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$70
|
The cost of goods manufactured (finished) for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:
A) $590
B) $650
C) $660
D) $570
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsen Corporation for the just completed year.
|
Sales
|
$930
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$70
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$40
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$190
|
|
Direct labor
|
$150
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$210
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$90
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$120
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$70
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$90
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$140
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$210
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$90
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$120
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$70
|
The cost of goods sold for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:
A) $680
B) $540
C) $640
D) $730
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsten Corporation for the just completed year.
|
Sales
|
$990
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$70
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$100
|
|
Direct labor
|
$200
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$160
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$180
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$150
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$40
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$70
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$150
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$130
|
The cost of the raw materials used in production during the year (in thousands of
dollars) was:
A) $130
B) $170
C) $140
D) $60
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsten Corporation for the just completed year.
|
Sales
|
$990
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$70
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$100
|
|
Direct labor
|
$200
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$160
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$180
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$150
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$40
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$70
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$150
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$130
|
The cost of goods manufactured (finished) for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:
A) $530
B) $540
C) $470
D) $570
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsten Corporation for the just completed year.
|
Sales
|
$990
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$70
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$100
|
|
Direct labor
|
$200
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$160
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$180
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$150
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$40
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$70
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$150
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$130
|
The cost of goods sold for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:
A) $490
B) $450
C) $620
D) $600
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsten Corporation for the just completed year.
|
Sales
|
$990
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$70
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$100
|
|
Direct labor
|
$200
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$160
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$180
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$150
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$40
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$70
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$150
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$130
|
The net operating income for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:
A) $170
B) $140
C) $500
D) $200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karstone Corporation for the just completed year.
|
ales
|
$880
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$20
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$150
|
|
Direct labor
|
$180
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$230
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$100
|
|
Selling expenses .
|
$130
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$120
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$100
|
The cost of the raw materials used in production during the year (in thousands of dollars) was:
A) $180
B) $140
C) $160
D) $170
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karstone Corporation for the just completed year.
|
ales
|
$880
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$20
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$150
|
|
Direct labor
|
$180
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$230
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$100
|
|
Selling expenses .
|
$130
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$120
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$100
|
The cost of goods manufactured (finished) for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:
A) $580
B) $600
C) $500
D) $630
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karstone Corporation for the just completed year.
|
ales
|
$880
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$20
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$150
|
|
Direct labor
|
$180
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$230
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$100
|
|
Selling expenses .
|
$130
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$120
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$100
|
The cost of goods sold for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:
A) $620
B) $580
C) $720
D) $700
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karstone Corporation for the just completed year.
|
ales
|
$880
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$20
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$150
|
|
Direct labor
|
$180
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$230
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$100
|
|
Selling expenses .
|
$130
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$120
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$100
|
The net operating income for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:
A) $260
B) $30
C) $90
D) ($30)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The manufacturing operations of QC Company had the following inventory balances for the month of March:
|
Inventories
|
March 1
|
March 31
|
|
Raw materials
|
$10,000
|
$12,000
|
|
Work in process
|
$6,000
|
$7,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
$30,000
|
$22,000
|
The manufacturing operations of QC Company had the following inventory balances for the month of March:
|
Inventories
|
March 1
|
March 31
|
|
Raw materials
|
$10,000
|
$12,000
|
|
Work in process
|
$6,000
|
$7,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
$30,000
|
$22,000
|
If the company purchased $18,000 of raw materials during March, what was the cost of raw materials used in production?
A) $16,000
B) $20,000
C) $41,000
D) $19,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The manufacturing operations of Jones Company had the following inventory balances for the month of March:
|
Inventories
|
March 1
|
March 31
|
|
Raw materials
|
$12,000
|
$14,000
|
|
Work in process
|
$8,000
|
$9,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
$32,000
|
$25,000
|
If the company purchased $20,000 of raw materials during March, what was the cost of raw materials used in production?
A) $24,000
B) $22,000
C) $32,000
D) $18,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following data:
Mike Reed, a partner in Post Co., received the following distribution from Post:
|
|
Post’s basis
|
Fair market value
|
|
Cash
|
$11,000
|
$11,000
|
|
Land
|
5,000
|
12,500
|
Before this distribution, Reed’s basis in Post was $25,000.
If this distribution were nonliquidating, Reed’s recognized gain or loss on the distribution would be
- $11,000 gain.
- $ 9,000 loss.
- $ 1,500 loss.
- $0.
If this distribution were in complete liquidation of Reed’s interest in Post, Reed’s basis for the land would be
- $14,000
- $12,500
- $ 5,000
- $ 1,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kopel was engaged to prepare Raff’s 2006 federal income tax return. During the tax preparation interview, Raff told Kopel that he paid $3,000 in property taxes in 2006. Actually, Raff’s property taxes amounted to only $600. Based on Raff’s word, Kopel deducted the $3,000 on Raff’s return, resulting in an understatement of Raff’s tax liability. Kopel had no reason to believe that the information was incorrect. Kopel did not request underlying documentation and was reasonably satisfied by Raff’s representation that Raff had adequate records to support the deduction. Which of the following statements is correct?
- To avoid the preparer penalty for willful under-statement of tax liability, Kopel was obligated to examine the underlying documentation for the deduction.
- To avoid the preparer penalty for willful under-statement of tax liability, Kopel would be required to obtain Raff’s representation in writing.
- Kopel is not subject to the preparer penalty for willful understatement of tax liability because the deduction that was claimed was more than 25% of the actual amount that should have been deducted.
- Kopel is not subject to the preparer penalty for willful understatement of tax liability because Kopel was justified in relying on Raff’s representation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Duval Manufacturing Industries, Inc. orally engaged Harris as one of its district sales managers for an eighteen-month period commencing April 1, 2007. Harris commenced work on that date and performed his duties in a highly competent manner for several months. On October 1, 2007, the company gave Harris a notice of termination as of November 1, 2007, citing a downturn in the market for its products. Harris sues seeking either specific performance or damages for breach of contract. Duval pleads the Statute of Frauds and/or a justified dismissal due to the economic situation. What is the probable outcome of the lawsuit?
- Harris will prevail because he has partially performed under the terms of the contract.
- Harris will lose because his termination was caused by economic factors beyond Duval’s control.
- Harris will lose because such a contract must be in writing and signed by a proper agent of Duval.
- Harris will prevail because the Statute of Frauds does not apply to contracts such as his.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
According to GASB 34, Basic Financial Statements—and Management’s Discussion and Analysis—for State and Local Governments, certain budgetary schedules are required supplementary information. What is the minimum budgetary information required to be reported in those schedules?
- A schedule of unfavorable variances at the functional level.
- A schedule showing the final appropriations budget and actual expenditures on a budgetary basis.
- A schedule showing the original budget, the final appropriations budget, and actual inflows, out-flows, and balances on a budgetary basis.
- A schedule showing the proposed budget, the approved budget, the final amended budget, actual inflows and outflows on a budgetary basis, and variances between budget and actual.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nox City reported a $25,000 net increase in the fund balances for total governmental funds. Nox also reported an increase in net assets for the following funds:
|
Motor pool internal service fund
|
$ 9,000
|
|
Water enterprise fund
|
12,000
|
|
Employee pension fund
|
7,000
|
The motor pool internal service fund provides service to the general fund departments. What amount should Nox report as the change in net assets for governmental activities?
- $25,000
- $34,000
- $41,000
- $46,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Forkin Manor, a nongovernmental not-for-profit organization, is interested in having its financial statements reformatted using terminology that is more readily associated with for-profit entities. The director believes that the term “operating profit” and the practice of segregating recurring and nonrecurring items more accurately depict the organization’s activities. Under what condition will Forkin be allowed to use “operating profit” and to segregate its recurring items from it nonrecurring items in its statement of activities?
- The organization reports the change in unrestricted net assets for the period.
- A parenthetical disclosure in the notes implies that the not-for-profit organization is seeking for-profit entity status.
- Forkin receives special authorization from the Internal Revenue Service that this wording is appropriate.
- At a minimum, the organizations reports the change in permanently restricted net assets for the period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
If financial assets are exchanged for cash or other consideration, but the transfer does not meet the criteria for a sale, the transferor should account for the transaction as a
|
|
Secured borrowing
|
Pledge of collateral
|
|
a.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In calculating the carrying amount of a loan, the lender deducts from the principal
|
|
Direct loan origination costs incurred by the lender
|
Loan origination fees charged to the borrower
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lee Corporation’s checkbook balance on December 31, 2006, was $4,000. In addition, Lee held the following items in its safe on December 31:
|
Check payable to Lee Corporation, dated January 2, 2007, not included in December 31 checkbook balance
|
$1,000
|
|
Check payable to Lee Corporation, deposited December 20, and included in December 31 checkbook balance, but returned by bank on December 30, stamped “NSF.” The check was redeposited January 2, 2007, and cleared January 7
|
200
|
|
Postage stamps received from mail order customers
|
75
|
|
Check drawn on Lee Corporation’s account, payable to a vendor, dated and recorded December 31, but not mailed until January 15, 2007
|
500
|
The proper amount to be shown as Cash on Lee’s balance sheet at December 31, 2006, is
- $3,800
- $4,000
- $4,300
- $4,875
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The books of Curtis Company for the year ended December 31, 2006, showed income of $360,000 before provision for income tax. In computing the taxable income for federal income tax purposes, the following differences were taken into account:
|
Depreciation deducted for tax purposes in excess of depreciation recorded on the books
|
$16,000
|
|
Royalty income reported for tax purposes in excess of royalty income recognized on the books
|
12,000
|
Assuming a corporate income tax rate of 40%, what should Curtis record as its current federal income tax liability at December 31, 2006?
- $137,600
- $142,400
- $144,000
- $145,600
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kay Company, a lessor of office machines, purchased a new machine for $600,000 on January 1, 2006, which was leased the same day to Lee. The machine will be depreciated $55,000 per year. The lease is for a four-year period expiring January 1, 2010, and provides for annual rental payments of $100,000 beginning January 1, 2006. Additionally, Lee paid $64,000 to Kay as a lease bonus. In its 2006 income statement, what amount of revenue and expense should Kay report on this leased asset?
|
|
Revenue
|
Expense
|
|
a.
|
$100,000
|
$0
|
|
b.
|
$116,000
|
$0
|
|
c.
|
$116,000
|
$55,000
|
|
d.
|
$164,000
|
$55,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the course of your examination of the financial statements of H Co., a new client, for the year ended December 31, 2006, you discover the following:
- Inventory at January 1, 2006, had been overstated by $3,000.
- Inventory at December 31, 2006, was understated by $5,000.
- An insurance policy covering three years had been purchased on January 2, 2005, for $1,500. The entire amount was charged as an expense in 2005.
During 2006 the company received a $1,000 cash advance from a customer for merchandise to be manufactured and shipped during 2007. The $1,000 had been credited to sales revenues. The company’s gross profit on sales is 50%.
Net income reported on the 2006 income statement (before reflecting any adjustments for the above items) is $20,000.
The proper net income for 2006 is
- $26,500
- $23,500
- $16,500
- $20,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Cooke Company for 2006:
|
Net sales
|
$1,800,000
|
|
Freight-in
|
45,000
|
|
Purchase discounts
|
25,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
120,000
|
The gross margin is 40% of net sales. What is the cost of goods available for sale?
- $ 840,000
- $ 960,000
- $1,200,000
- $1,220,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Greg Corp. reported revenue of $1,250,000 in its accrual-basis income statement for the year ended June 30, 2006. Additional information was as follows:
|
Accounts receivable June 30, 2005
|
$400,000
|
|
Accounts receivable June 30, 2006
|
530,000
|
|
Uncollectible accounts written off during the fiscal year
|
15,000
|
Under the cash basis, Greg should report revenue of
- $ 835,000
- $ 850,000
- $1,105,000
- $1,135,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Questions 1 and 2 are based on the following information. Patterson Company has the following information on one of its vehicles purchased on January 1, 2002:
|
Vehicle cost
|
$50,000
|
|
Useful life, years, estimated
|
5
|
|
Useful life, miles, estimated
|
100,000
|
|
Salvage value, estimated
|
$10,000
|
|
Actual miles driven, 2002
|
30,000
|
|
2003
|
20,000
|
|
2004
|
15,000
|
|
2005
|
25,000
|
|
2006
|
12,000
|
No estimates were changed during the life of the asset.
The 2004 depreciation expense for the vehicle using the sum-of-the-years’ digits (SYD) method was
- $ 6,000
- $ 8,000
- $10,000
- $13,333
The fiscal 2003 year-end accumulated depreciation balance, using the double-declining balance method was
- $12,000
- $16,000
- $25,600
- $32,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Burrow & Co., CPAs, have provided annual audit and tax compliance services to Mare Corp. for several years. Mare has been unable to pay Burrow in full for services Burrow rendered nineteen months ago. Burrow is ready to begin fieldwork for the current year’s audit. Under the ethical standards of the profession, which of the following arrangements will permit Burrow to begin the fieldwork on Mare’s audit?
- Mare sets up a two-year payment plan with Burrow to settle the unpaid fee balance.
- Mare commits to pay the past due fee in full before the audit report is issued.
- Mare gives Burrow an eighteen-month note payable for the full amount of the past due fees before Burrow begins the audit.
- Mare engages another firm to perform the fieldwork, and Burrow is limited to reviewing the workpapers and issuing the audit report.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Apex Surety Company wrote a general fidelity bond covering defalcations by the employees of Watson, Inc. Thereafter, Grand, an employee of Watson, embezzled $18,900 of company funds. When his activities were discovered, Apex paid Watson the full amount in accordance with the terms of the fidelity bond, and then sought recovery against Watson’s auditors, Kane & Dobbs, CPAs. Which of the following would be Kane & Dobbs’ best defense?
- Apex is not in privity of contract.
- The shortages were the result of clever forgeries and collusive fraud that would not be detected by an examination made in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards.
- Kane & Dobbs were not guilty either of gross negligence or fraud.
- Kane & Dobbs were not aware of the Apex-Watson surety relationship.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mathews is an agent for Sears with the express authority to solicit orders from customers in a geographic area assigned by Sears. Mathews has no authority to grant discounts or to collect payment on orders solicited. Mathews secured an order from Davidson for $1,000 less a 10% discount if Davidson makes immediate payment. Davidson had previously done business with Sears through Mathews but this was the first time that a discount-payment offer had been made. Davidson gave Mathews a check for $900 and, thereafter, Mathews turned in both the check and the order to Sears. The order clearly indicated that a 10% discount had been given by Mathews. Sears shipped the order and cashed the check. Later, Sears attempted to collect $100 as the balance owed on the order from Davidson. Which of the following is correct?
- Sears can collect the $100 from Davidson because Mathews contracted outside the scope of his express or implied authority.
- Sears cannot collect the $100 from Davidson because Mathews, as an agent with express authority to solicit orders, had implied authority to give discounts and collect.
- Sears cannot collect the $100 from Davidson as Sears has ratified the discount granted and made to Mathews.
- Sears cannot collect the $100 from Davidson because, although Mathews had no express or implied authority to grant a discount and collect, Mathews had apparent authority to do so.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Richard Brown, who retired on May 31, 2006, receives a monthly pension benefit of $700 payable for life. His life expectancy at the date of retirement is ten years. The first pension check was received on June 15, 2006. During his years of employment, Brown contributed $12,000 to the cost of his company’s pension plan. How much of the pension amounts received may Brown exclude from taxable income for the years 2006, 2007, and 2008?
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
a.
|
|
$0
|
$0
|
$0
|
|
b.
|
$
|
4,900
|
$4,900
|
$4,900
|
|
c.
|
$
|
700
|
$1,200
|
$1,200
|
|
d.
|
$
|
4,900
|
$8,400
|
$8,400
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Smith, an individual calendar-year taxpayer, purchased 100 shares of Core Co. common stock for $15,000 on November 15, 2006, and an additional 100 shares for $13,000 on December 30, 2006. On January 3, 2007, Smith sold the shares purchased on November 15, 2006, for $13,000. What amount of loss from the sale of Core’s stock is deductible on Smith’s 2006 and 2007 income tax returns?
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
a.
|
$0
|
$0
|
|
b.
|
$0
|
$2,000
|
|
c.
|
$1,000
|
$1,000
|
|
d.
|
$2,000
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Morgan, CPA, is the principal auditor for a multinational corporation. Another CPA has audited and reported on the financial statements of a significant subsidiary of the corporation. Morgan is satisfied with the independence and professional reputation of the other auditor, as well as the quality of the other auditor’s examination. With respect to Morgan’s report on the consolidated financial statements, taken as a whole, Morgan
- Must not refer to the audit of the other auditor.
- Must refer to the audit of the other auditor.
- May refer to the audit of the other auditor.
- May refer to the audit of the other auditor, in which case Morgan must include in the auditor’s report on the consolidated financial statements a qualified opinion with respect to the examination of the other auditor.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In which of the following cases would the auditor be most likely to conclude that all of the items in an account under consideration should be examined rather than tested on a sample basis?
|
|
The measure of tolerable misstatement is
|
Misstatement frequency is expected to be
|
|
a.
|
Large
|
Low
|
|
b.
|
Small
|
High
|
|
c.
|
Large
|
High
|
|
d.
|
Small
|
Low
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A limitation on the scope of an auditor’s procedures is likely to result in a report with a(n)
|
|
Qualified opinion
|
Adverse opinion
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analytical procedures are required
|
|
Planning
|
Substantive tests
|
Final review
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kane, CPA, concludes that there is substantial doubt about Lima Co.’s ability to continue as a going concern for a reasonable period of time. If Lima’s financial statements adequately disclose its financial difficulties, Kane’s auditor’s report is required to include an explanatory paragraph that specifically uses the phrase(s)
|
|
“Possible discontinuance of operations”
|
“Reasonable period of time, not to exceed 1 year”
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How are management’s responsibility and the auditor’s responsibility represented in the standard auditor’s report?
|
|
Management’s responsibility
|
Auditor’s responsibility
|
|
a.
|
Explicitly
|
Explicitly
|
|
b.
|
Implicitly
|
Implicitly
|
|
c.
|
Implicitly
|
Explicitly
|
|
d.
|
Explicitly
|
Implicitly
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A change from one accounting principle to another with which the auditor concurs is likely to result in a report with a(n)
|
|
Qualified opinion
|
Adverse opinion
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Intentional misstatements of financial statements to deceive the financial statement users is considered by the AICPA to be
|
|
Fraudulent financial reporting
|
Misappropriation of assets
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
When a company changes the expected service life of an asset because additional information has been obtained, which of the following should be reported?
|
|
Pro forma effects of retroactive application
|
Cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following items relate to the preparation of a statement of cash flows:
|
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
2006
|
|
Cash
|
$150,000
|
$100,000
|
Net sales
|
$3,200,000
|
|
AR–net
|
420,000
|
290,000
|
CGS
|
(2,500,000)
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
330,000
|
210,000
|
Expenses
|
(500,000)
|
|
AP
|
265,000
|
220,000
|
Net income
|
$ 200,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 through 3 are based on the following information:
The December 31, 2006 balance sheet of Ratio, Inc. is presented below. These are the only accounts in Ratio’s balance sheet. Amounts indicated by a question mark (?) can be calculated from the additional information given.
|
Assets
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 25,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (trade)
|
?
|
|
Inventory
|
?
|
|
Property, plant and equipment (net)
|
294,000
|
|
|
$432,000
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
Accounts payable (trade)
|
?
|
|
Income taxes payable (current)
|
25,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
100,000
|
|
Common stock
|
300,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
?
|
|
|
?
|
|
Additional information
|
|
|
Current ratio (at year-end)
|
1.5 to 1
|
|
Total liabilities divided by total stockholders’ equity
|
.8
|
|
Inventory turnover based on sales and ending inventory
|
15 times
|
|
Inventory turnover based on cost of goods sold and ending inventory
|
10.5 times
|
|
Gross margin for 2006
|
$315,000
|
What was Ratio’s December 31, 2006 balance in the inventory account?
- $ 21,000
- $ 30,000
- $ 70,000
- $135,000
What was Ratio’s December 31, 2006 balance in trade accounts payable?
- $ 67,000
- $ 92,000
- $182,000
- $207,000
What was Ratio’s December 31, 2006 balance in retained earnings?
- $ 60,000 deficit.
- $ 60,000
- $132,000 deficit.
- $132,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2006, Richmond, Inc. signed a fixed-price contract to have Builder Associates construct a major plant facility at a cost of $4,000,000. It was estimated that it would take three years to complete the project. Also on January 1, 2006, to finance the construction cost, Richmond borrowed $4,000,000 payable in 10 annual installments of $400,000 plus interest at the rate of 11%. During 2006 Richmond made deposit and progress payments totaling $1,500,000 under the contract; the average amount of accumulated expenditures was $650,000 for the year. The excess borrowed funds were invested in short-term securities, from which Richmond realized investment income of $250,000. What amount should Richmond report as capitalized interest at December 31, 2006?
- $ 71,500
- $165,000
- $190,000
- $440,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
According to SFAS 131, Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information, an industry segment is a reportable segment if it is significant to the enterprise as a whole. An industry segment is considered significant when any of the following conditions are met except when the
- Segment revenue is 10% or more of the combined revenue of all of the company’s segments.
- Segment identifiable assets are 10% or more of the combined identifiable assets of all segments.
- Segment identifiable liabilities are 10% or more of the combined identifiable liabilities of all segments.
- Absolute value of a segment’s operating profit or operating loss is 10% or more of the combined operating profit of all segments that did not incur an operating loss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For which of the following governmental entities that use proprietary fund accounting should a statement of cash flows be presented?
|
|
Swimming pool
|
Government utilities
|
|
a.
|
No
|
No
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
When treasury stock is purchased for cash at more than its par value, what is the effect on total stockholders’ equity under each of the following methods?
|
|
Cost method
|
Par value method
|
|
a.
|
Increase
|
Increase
|
|
b.
|
Decrease
|
Decrease
|
|
c.
|
No effect
|
Decrease
|
|
d.
|
No effect
|
No effect
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 30, 2005, Future, Incorporated paid $2,000,000 for land. At December 31, 2006, the current value of the land was $2,200,000. In January 2007, the land was sold for $2,250,000. Ignoring income taxes, by what amount should stockholders’ equity be increased for 2006 and 2007 as a result of the above facts in current value financial statements?
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
a.
|
$0
|
$ 50,000
|
|
b.
|
$0
|
$250,000
|
|
c.
|
$200,000
|
$0
|
|
d.
|
$200,000
|
$ 50,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tapscott, Inc., is indebted to Bush Finance Company under a $600,000, 10%, five-year note dated January 1, 2004. Interest, payable annually on December 31, was paid on the December 31, 2004 and 2005 due dates. However, during 2005 Tapscott experienced severe financial difficulties and is likely to default on the note and interest unless some concessions are made. On December 31, 2006, Tapscott and Bush signed an agreement restructuring the debt as follows:
Interest for 2006 was reduced to $30,000 payable March 31, 2007.
Interest payments each year were reduced to $40,000 per year for 2007 and 2008.
The principal amount was reduced to $400,000.
What is the amount of gain that Tapscott should report on the debt restructure in its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2006?
- $120,000
- $150,000
- $200,000
- $230,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Included in Kerr Corporation’s liability account balances at December 31, 2006, were the following:
|
14% note payable issued October 1, 2006, maturing September 30, 2007
|
$250,000
|
|
16% note payable issued April 1, 2004, payable in 6 equal annual installments of $100,000 beginning April 1, 2005
|
400,000
|
Kerr’s December 31, 2006 financial statements were issued on March 31, 2007. On January 15, 2007, the entire $400,000 balance of the 16% note was refinanced by issuance of a long-term obligation payable in a lump sum. In addition, on March 10, 2007, Kerr consummated a noncancelable agreement with the lender to refinance the 14%, $250,000 note on a long-term basis, on readily determinable terms that have not yet been implemented. Both parties are financially capable of honoring the agreement, and there have been no violations of the agreement’s provisions. On the December 31, 2006 balance sheet, the amount of the notes payable that Kerr should classify as short-term obligations is
- $0
- $100,000
- $250,000
- $350,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
West Company determined that it has an obligation relating to employees’ rights to receive compensation for future absences attributable to employees’ services already rendered. The obligation relates to rights that vest, and payment of the compensation is probable. The amounts of West’s obligations as of December 31, 2006, are reasonably estimated as follows:
|
Vacation pay
|
$110,000
|
|
Sick pay
|
80,000
|
In its December 31, 2006 balance sheet, what amount should West report as its liability for compensated absences?
- $0
- $ 80,000
- $110,000
- $190,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The balance in Ashwood Company’s accounts payable account at December 31, 2006, was $900,000 before any necessary year-end adjustment relating to the following:
- Goods were in transit from a vendor to Ashwood on December 31, 2006. The invoice cost was $50,000, and the goods were shipped FOB shipping point on December 29, 2006. The goods were received on January 4, 2007.
- Goods shipped FOB shipping point on December 20, 2006, from a vendor to Ashwood were lost in transit. The invoice cost was $25,000. On January 5, 2007, Ashwood filed a $25,000 claim against the common carrier.
- Goods shipped FOB destination on December 21, 2006, from a vendor to Ashwood were received on January 6, 2007. The invoice cost was $15,000.
What amount should Ashwood report as accounts payable on its December 31, 2006 balance sheet?
- $925,000
- $940,000
- $950,000
- $975,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
JACKSON COMPANY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$40,000
|
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$20,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$100,000
|
|
|
Total Manufacturing overhead:
|
$105,000
|
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$125,000
|
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$15,000
|
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$18,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
$80,000
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$28,000
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Sales
|
$550,000
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$70,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Problem 1:
Jackson Company reports the following information for the year ended December 31, 2013:
What were the following amounts for 2013?
1. Cost of direct materials moved into production?
2. Cost of Goods Manufactured
3. Cost of goods sold?
4. Net Income?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Partnership Formation to Dissolution
Timothy is a 35 percent partner in the Total Partnership, a calendar-year-end entity. Timothy has an outside basis in his interest in Total of $198,000, which includes his share of the $45,000 of partnership liabilities. On December 31, Total makes a proportionate distribution of the following assets to Timothy:
|
Basis |
FMV |
| Cash |
$50,000 |
$50,000 |
| Inventory |
65,000 |
75,000 |
| Land |
50,000 |
65,000 |
| Totals |
$165,000 |
$180,000 |
- For an operating distribution, outline the tax consequences (amount and character of recognized gain or loss, basis in distributed assets) of the distribution to Timothy.
- For a liquidating distribution, outline the tax consequences (amount and character of recognized gain or loss, basis in distributed assets) of the distribution to Timothy.
- Discuss the similarities and differences between the tax consequences of the operating distribution and the tax consequences of the liquidation distribution.
Provide your reference in APA-FORMAT if any.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
• PART II – Tax Return #2, Partnership Return (Form 1065, only Page 1 and Schedule K required). You may use the tax software found at http://accountants.intuit.com/tax/proseries/
Background
The Rowdy Fun is a limited partnership and was formed on June 1, 2005, by Thomas Kyle, its general partner, and two other limited partners when they each contributed an equal amount of cash to start the new enterprise. Rowdy Fun is an outdoor equipment retailer focused on selling outdoor activities gear. Thomas has a 33.33% profits and capital interest and the limited partners hold the remaining 66.66% of the profits and capital interests. Their profits and capital interests have remained unchanged since the partnership was formed. Thomas is actively involved in managing the business while the limited partners are simply investors.
• Rowdy Fun is located at 8955 Golden Drive, Sunnydale, AZ 34592.
• The employer identification number for Rowdy Fun is 47-8593563.
• Rowdy Fun uses the accrual method of accounting and has a calendar year end.
• Thomas’ address is 853 Crystal Drive, Sunnydale, AZ 34592.
Additional Information
• Rowdy Fun has total assets of $1,900,000 and total liabilities of $550,000 at the beginning of the year and total assets of $2,300,00 and total liabilities of $725,000 at the end of the year.
• Partnership liabilities consist of accounts payable, and Thomas, as general partner, is legally responsible for paying these liabilities if the partnership does not.
• Five years ago, Rowdy Fun purchased an original outdoor statue with the intent for display in the store. In 2013, the statue was sold. The $15,000 recognized gain from the sale is reflected in the income statement.
• For tax purposes, Rowdy Fun has consistently elected under Section 179 to expense any furniture or fixtures purchased every year since it was formed. There is no tax basis in any of its depreciable assets. This year, Rowdy Fun expensed $23,000 of signs and display cases for tax purposes.
• On November 20th, Rowdy Fun distributed $90,000 ($30,000 per partner) to the partners.
• Miscellaneous expenses include a $1200 fine for violating a local ordinance.
• Rowdy Fun maintains its books using generally accepted accounting principles.
Financial Statements
Rowdy Fun
Income Statement
For year ended December 31, 2013
Sales 975,000
Sales returns and allowances (25,000)
Cost of goods sold (300,000)
Gross profit from operations 650,000
Other Income:
Interest from Money Market 3,500
Gain for sale of statue 15,000
Gross income 668,500
Expenses:
Employee wages (125,000)
Interest on accounts payable (2,000)
Payroll and property taxes (45,000)
Supplies (26,000)
Rent on retail building (20,000)
Depreciation on furniture and fixtures (15,400)
Advertising (4,000)
Guaranteed payments to Thomas Kyle (40,000)
Utilities (16,000)
Accounting and legal services (5,000)
Meals and entertainment (500)
Charitable Contributions (375)
Miscellaneous expense (425)
Total expenses (299,700)
Net Income for Books 368,800
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Take a position on the fairness of the current estate tax laws and recommend changes you would propose to the law to make estate taxes fairer and/or a rationale for eliminating gift taxes. From your research, offer support for your rationale. Provide your Reference in APA-Formats
Use the Internet to find a website that shows an example or application correlation or regression in the area of your interest or in your profession. Discuss how correlation or regression was used, summarize your finding, and share it with us. Provide your reference in APA-Format.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Uxmaiz Corporation had only one job in process during May—Job X32Z—and had no finished goods inventory on May 1. Job X32Z was started in April and finished during May. Data concerning that job appear below:
|
|
|
| Beginning balance |
$ |
5,000 |
| Charged to the job during May |
|
|
| Direct materials |
$ |
8,000 |
| Direct labor |
$ |
2,000 |
| Manufacturing overhead applied |
$ |
4,000 |
| Units completed |
|
100 |
| Units in process at the end of May |
|
0 |
| Units sold during May |
|
40 |
|
|
In May, overhead was overapplied by $300. The company adjusts its cost of goods sold every month for the amount of the overhead that was underapplied or overapplied.
|
|
|
Required:
|
| Using the indirect method, determine the cost of goods sold for May. |
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 3-2 Source Documents Matched with Transactions Following are a list of sourcc documents and a list of transactions. Indicate by letter next to each transaction the source document that would serve as evidence for the recording of the transaction. Source Documents a. Purchase invoice 1. Stock certificates b. Sales invoice g. Monthly statement from utility company c. Cash register tape h. No standard source document would nor-d. Time cards malty be available. c. Promissory note
Exercise 3-3 The Effect of Transactions on the Accounting Equation For each of the following transactions, indicate whether it increases (I), decreases (Di, or has no effect (NE) on the total dollar amount of each of the elements of the accounting equation. Transactions Assets Liabilities — Stockholders’ Equity
Example: Common stock is issued in exchange for cash. I NE 1. Equipment is purchased for cash. 2. Services are provided to customers on account. 3. Services are provided to customers in exchange for cash. 4. An account payable is paid off. 5. Cash is collected on an account receivable. 6. Buildings are purchased in exchange for a three-year note payable. 7. Advertising bill for the month is paid. 8. Dividends are paid to stockholders. 9. Land is acquired by issuing shares of stock to the owner of the land.
LO3 EXAMPLE 3-1
Exercise 3-4 Types of Transactions There arc three elements to the accounting equation: assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. Although other possibilities exist, five types of transactions arc described here. For each of these five types, write descriptions of two transactions that illustrate the type of transaction.
Type of Transaction Assets Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity 1. Increase Increase 2. Increase Increase 3. Decrease Decrease 4. Decrease Decrease 5. Increase Decrease
Transactions
1. Utilities expense for the month is recorded. 2. A cash settlement is received from a pending lawsuit. 3. Owners contribute cash to start a new corporation. 4. The biweekly payroll is paid. 5. Services arc provided in exchange for cash. 6. Equipment is acquired on a 30-day open account. 7. Service is provided to a customer. 8. A building is acquired by signing an agreement to repay a stated amount plus interest in six months.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acme Manufacturing Company of Portland, Oregon has a Research & Development department that currently provides services to in-house manufacturing departments. Other manufacuturers have expressed interested in using Acme’s R&D department for special projects. Management has decided to conduct an activity-based costing system in order to determine charges for both outside and in-house users of the department’s services.
| R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Market Analysis |
|
10,50,000 |
|
|
|
Product Design |
|
23,50,000 |
|
|
|
Product Development |
|
36,00,000 |
|
|
|
Prototype Testing |
|
14,00,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities are: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Activities |
|
Cost Drivers |
|
Total Estimated Drivers |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Market Analysis |
|
Hours of analysis |
|
1500 hours |
|
Product Design |
|
Number of designs |
|
2500 designs |
|
Product Development |
|
Number of products |
|
90 products |
|
Prototype Testing |
|
Number of tests |
|
500 tests |
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mid-term Exam Summer 2014
1. United Airlines is an example of a: a. producer. b. supplier. c. retailer. d. service provider.
2. The three forms of business entities are: a. Government, cooperatives, and philanthropic organizations. b. Financing, investing, and operating c. Sole proprietorships, partnerships, and corporations. d. Wholesaler, manufacturer, and retailer. 3. Which of the following statements would be true if you own stock in a company? a. You are an owner of the retained earnings and capital stock of the company. b. You have a claim to the assets of the business. c. You have the right to receive interest on an annual basis. d. You have the right to a portion of the company’s revenues each accounting period. 4. Which one of the following business decisions will least likely require financial information? a. The Gulf Coast Bank is reviewing the loan application from Tuo’s Restaurant. b. Tuo’s Restaurant is attempting to sell its stock to the public. c. The labor union representing Flaggler’s Fitness Spa employees is negotiating a pay raise as part of a new labor agreement. d. Tuo’s Restaurant management is deciding whether to wash its catering vans today or tomorrow. 5. Which financial statement would you analyze to determine if a company distributed any of its profits to its shareholders? a. Balance Sheet b. Statement of Retained Earnings c. Income Statement d. Statement of Public Accounting 6. Macon Enterprises purchased land for 42,000,000 in 2001. In 2015, an independent appraiser assessed the value at 53,400,000. What amount should appear on the financial statements in 2015 with respect to the land? a. 52,000,000 b. 51,400,000 c. 53,400,000 d. Whatever amount the company believes is the best indicator of the true value of the land.
Mid-term Exam Summer 2014
Sawaddee Enterprises began the year with total assets of 4450,000 and total liabilities of 4230,000.1f Sawaddee’s total assets increased by 580,000 and its total liabilities increased by $57,000 during the year, what is the amount of Sawaddee’s owners’ equity at the end of the year? a. 4197,000 b. $543,000 c. 5243,000 d. $220,000
8. Which of the following statements best describes the term “revenues”? a. Revenues represent an outflow of assets resulting from the sale of goods or services. b. Revenues represent assets received from the sale of products or services. c. Revenues represent assets used or consumed in the sale of products or services. d. Revenues represent the dollar amount of bonds sold to the public. 9. Which one of the following is not one of the three activities included in the definition of accounting? a. Communicating b. Identifying c. Measuring d. Operating
10. Harbor City Corporation’s end-of-year balance sheet consisted of the following amounts:
Cash 4 15,000 Accounts receivable 4 50,000 Property, plant, and equipment 70,000 Long-term debt 40,000 Capital stock 100,003 Accounts payable 20,000 Retained earnings ? Inventory 35,000
What is Harbor City’s retained earnings balance at the end of the current year? a. 410,000 b. 4110,000 c. 4160,003 d. 4170,000 11. Vhat is the primary objective of financial reporting? a. To help investors make credit decisions. b. To help management assess cash flows. c. To protect users from fraudulent financial information. d. To provide useful information for decision making
12. Relevant information can be quantitative or qualitative. In deciding whether to go to college part-tune or full-time, which of the following is a qualitative factor for a student? a. The cost of tuition b. The opportunity to make friends c. The price of football tickets d. “Good Student” discounts on auto insurance rates. 13. Button Transportation purchases many pieces of office furniture with an individual cost below $200 each. Button chooses to account for these expenditures as expenses when acquired rather than reporting them as property, plant, and equipment on its balance sheet. The company’s accountant and independent CPA agree that no accounting principle has been violated. What accounting justification allows Button to expense the furniture? a. Conservatism b. Matching c. Materiality d. Verifiability 14. The qualitative characteristics of accounting data include: a. assets reported on the balance sheet. b. all accounting information. c. cash flows. d. reliability. 15. Information that is material means that an error or alternative method of handling a transaction: a. would possibly affect the judgment of someone relying on the financial statements. b. would not affect the decisions of users. c. might cause a company to understate its earnings for the accounting period. d. could increase the profitability of a company.
Gointher & Sons, Inc.
Guinther & Sons, Inc. a retailer of men’s clothing, earned a net profit of $77,000 for 2014. The balance sheet for Guinther & Sons includes the following items:
Cash 529,000 Accounts receivable $39,000 Inventory 79,000 Prepaid insurance 3,000 Land 90,000 Accounts payable 21,000 Taxes payable 29,000 Capital stock 50,000 Retained earnings 97,000 Long-term notes payable 43,000 _ 16. Read the information for Guinther & Sons. Calculate the total amount of current assets for Guinther & Sons. a. $100,000 b. 5147,000 c. $150,000 d. $249,000
erm .xam Summer 2014
___ 17. Read the information for Guinther & Sons, Inc. Calculate the current ratio for Guinther & Sons. a. 2.58 to I b. 2.75 to 1 c. 3.00 to I d. 2.00 to 1
18. Read the information for Guinther & Sons, Inc. The average current ratio for stores such as Guinther & Sons is 2.4 to 1. What does this comparison tell you about its liquidity? a. It is more liquid than its competitors b. It has more long-term assets than its competitors c. Since a rule of thumb for current ratios is 2 to 1, neither Guinther & Sons, Inc. nor its competitors is liquid. d. Guinther & Sons, Inc. is more profitable than its competitors. 19. What are the two subtotals that distinguish the multi-step income statement from the single-step income statement? a. Income before taxes and income taxes b. Total operating revenues and total operating expenses c. Income from operations and income before taxes d. Total revenues and total expenses 20. Under current accounting principles, how is net income on the income statement measured? a. Net change in owners’ equity during the period. b. Excess of revenues over expenses during the period. c. Net change in the cash balance during the period. d. Excess of revenues over expenses less any dividends paid during the period. 21. Which of the following would be a case where an event as a transaction is not supported by a source document? a. a purchase of inventory on credit b. a cash sale c. the financial consequences of a fire loss d. recording payroll 22. The purchase of office equipment on credit has what effect on the accounting equation? a. Assets decrease and stockholders’ equity decreases b. Liabilities increase and stockholders’ equity decreases c. Assets increase and liabilities increase d. Assets decrease and liabilities decrease
Mid-term Exam Summer 201
– 23. During May, Aniston, Inc. purchased office supplies for cash. The supplies will be used in lime. What effect does this purchase transaction have on the accounting equation? a. Assets increase and stockholders’ equity decreases. b. Assets increase and liabilities increase. c. Assets decrease and liabilities decrease. d. There is no effect on the accounting equation as one asset account increases while another asset account decreases. – 24. Services are provided for customers who are sent bills for the amount they owe. For this transaction, identify the effect on the accounting equation. a. Assets increase and liabilities increase. b. Assets increase and stockholders’ equity increases. c. Liabilities increase and stockholders’ equity decreases. d. Liabilities decrease and assets decrease.
– 25. Owners of Tri-States Industries, Ralph and Maureen, are sent a dividend check from the company. For this transaction, what is the effect on the accounting equation for Tri-States Industries? a. Assets decrease and stockholders’ equity decreases. b. Assets increase and stockholders’ equity increases. c. Liabilities increase and stockholders’ equity decreases. d. Liabilities increase and stockholders’ equity decreases. 26. Which of the following transactions does not affect the total assets of Horizon Sailing Corp.? a. A bill is received for the telephone service used by Horizon Sailing during the past month. b. Dividends are paid by Horizon Sailing. c. Customers are billed for sales made on credit by Horizon Sailing. d. A new computer is purchased on credit by Horizon Sailing. 27. Louisiana Enterprises received payment from its customers for previous sales on credit. What was the impact on its working capital? a. Increase in working capital b. Decrease in working capital c. No effect on working capital d. Unable to determine 28. Your bookkeeper is off for the day and you are tying to figure out the last entry she recorded in the journal. Unfortunately, she only recorded part of the transaction as a decrease of $4,400 in the Accounts Payable account. It is possible that this partial entry could correspond to: a. a purchase of equipment costing 54,400 on credit. b. a payment of 54.400 to a supplier to settle a balance due. c. a $4,400 sale to a customer. d. a 54,400 issuance of the company’s capital stock.
tlid-term Exam Summer 2014 29. Which of the following statements regarding the activities of Forman Corp. is true? a. Revenues decrease Forman’s stockholders’ equity. b. Expenses increase Forman’s stockholders equity. c. Expenses decrease Forman’s stockholders’ equity. d. None of these answer choices is correct. 30. One effect on the accounting equation when a firm borrows money is: a. Stockholders’ equity decreases. b. Assets increase. c. Liabilities decrease. d. Assets decrease. 31. Which of the following is the attribute used to measure many assets that arc recognized on a balance sheet, because it is more objective and verifiable? a. Market value b. Historical cost c. Liquidation value d. Current replacement cost 32. Country Club Center sells season memberships for $200 each. During January 0E2015, 60 season memberships were sold. As of March 31, 2015, only $3,000 of season membership fees had been collected from customers. The season runs for 4 months starting May 15, 2015. Which one of the following is an amount reported on the financial statements for the period ending March 31, 2015? a. Unearned membership revenue of $3,000 b. Unearned membership revenue of 59,000 c. Accounts receivable of 53,000 d. Membership revenue of 59,000 33. Fox Auto sold merchandise to a customer for $3,000 on credit on March 10. The customer paid Fox Auto the amount due on March 31. Under the accrual basis of accounting, which of the following statements is true? a. Fox Auto will recognize the revenue on March 31. b. The March 10th transaction increases revenue, but has no effect on assets because cash has not been received. c. Revenue is recognized after the cost of the merchandise sold has been paid by Fox Auto. d. The March 31st transaction has no effect on total assets under the accrual basis.
___ 34. Cumberland City Consultants started business on January to use in the business. At the end of the month, 1, 2015, and immediately purchased $1,000 of supplies hand. What amounts should appear on the financial statements for January, re, m20ailns5? unpaid and 20% are still on 25 percent of the supplies Statement of Cash Flows
Th1.19.mlsnat me I a. ($1,000) b. ($1,000) c. ($800) d. ($800)
($1,000) ($750) ($25) ($750)
35. Which of the following concepts is important to accrual accounting? a. Time period, because accrual accounting divides earnings into time periods b. Monetary unit, because inflation is a big factor in the environment c. Cash basis, because if cash is not received, revenue is not accrued d. Entity concept, because personal transactions must be separated from business transactions 36. As a general rule, revenue is recognized at the point of sale. Which one of the following situations illustrates this rule? a. Products are sold to customers on credit with payment due in 30 days b. Employees are paid wages the week after the wages are earned c. Products are purchased for resale purposes d. Interest is collected from amounts loaned to employees 37. On January 1, 2015, Davin Avenue Associates, Inc. purchased a copier for $6,000 cash and decided to depreciate it over 5 years. What amounts associated with the copier will appear on Davin’s financial statements for the year ending December 31, 2015? Income Statement Statement of Cash Flows a. ($1,200) ($6,000) b. ($1,200) SO c. ($6,000) SO d. SO ($1,200) 38. Which one of the following is not a recognized method of recognizing assets as expenses in a particular accounting period? a. Customers’ account balances in accounts receivable are assigned to expense in the period in which each customer pays b. Prepaid insurance is assigned to expense as the insurance expires c. A building is depreciated and its cost is assigned to the current and future accounting periods in which the building is expected to be used d. Merchandise inventory is assigned to cost of goods sold in the period the goods are sold
Mid-term Exam Summer 2914
39. Which one of the following is an example of a deferred revenue? a. Sales are made to customers on credit b. Interest has been earned by a bank deposit, but it has not been recorded c. Cash is received prior to providing the services to customers d. Cash sales are made to customers
40. Adjustments are necessary only if a. The cash basis of accounting is used for all accounting periods b. Cash receipts and payments occur before or after the point in time when revenues and expenses should be recognized under the accrual basis of accounting c. Management reports its adjustments on the statement of cash flows d. The company reports revenue in the same period cash is collected
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 3
The Trial Balance of “Hair We Are” a beauty supplies store is shown below.
Trial Balance
as at June 30, 20X7
|
ACCOUNT NAME
|
$
|
$
|
|
Sales
|
|
425,000
|
|
Inventory @ July 1, 20X6
|
45,000
|
|
|
Purchases
|
190,000
|
|
|
Wages & Salaries
|
87,500
|
|
|
Telephone
|
14,500
|
|
|
Water Rates
|
10,800
|
|
|
Electricity
|
20,600
|
|
|
Discount Allowed / Discount Received
|
3,900
|
6,600
|
|
Sales Return / Purchases Return
|
9,000
|
12,300
|
|
Rental Income
|
|
72,000
|
|
Land
|
80,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
130,000
|
|
|
Fixtures & Fittings
|
50,000
|
|
|
Provision for Depreciation @ July 1, 20X6:
|
|
|
|
Buildings
|
|
26,000
|
|
Fixtures & Fittings
|
|
9,500
|
|
Carriage Inwards
|
3,400
|
|
|
Carriage Outwards
|
2,900
|
|
|
Cash
|
3,700
|
|
|
Bank
|
16,250
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable / Accounts Payable
|
127,600
|
49,200
|
|
Short-term Loans
|
|
125,600
|
|
Drawings
|
7,400
|
|
|
Capital
|
________
|
76,350
|
|
TOTAL
|
$802,550
|
$802,550
|
The following information concerning the operation of “Hair We Are” is also available:
§ Closing inventory on June 30, 20X7 was $52,000.
§ Wages of $12,000 was owed at June 30, 20X7.
§ Electricity of $3,000 was prepaid at June 30, 20X7.
§ The business had the following depreciation policy:
Land: 0%
Buildings: 2.5% per year of the cost of the asset.
Fixtures and fittings: 8% per year of the net book value of the asset.
Required:
- Prepare the Income Statement of “Hair We Are” for the year ended June 30, 20X7 (7 marks)
- Prepare the Balance Sheet as at June 30,20X7. (6 marks)
- Discuss the purpose of presenting the final accounts in a business. (3 marks)
- Discuss the accounting relevance of the accrual and matching principles. ( 3 marks)
Question 3 The Trial Balance of “Hair We Are” a beauty supplies store is shown below. Trial Balance as at June 30, 20X7 ACCOUNT NAME $ $ Sales 425,000 Inventory @ July 1,
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
please answer all the question in the attached files.and send them to me in the next 24 hour
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
All work needs to be done under that Question excel file. Consolidated worksheet is under the tab “Spreadsheet”, Need show the process and complete the consolidated worksheet just like the Example file. Please pay attention to the instruction.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the Excel file, you are to prepare the income statement, statement of stockholders’ equity, statement of cash flows, balance sheet; all in proper form You have the option of preparing a statement of comprehensive income or to incorporate that into the statement of stockholders’ equity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Answer the following questions.
|
|
|
 |
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
P3-9 (Adjusting and Closing)Presented below is the trial balance of the Crestwood Golf Club, Inc. as of December 31. The books are closed annually on December 31.
Instructions
(a)Enter the balances in ledger accounts. Allow five lines for each account.
(b)From the trial balance and the information given below, prepare annual adjusting entries and post to the ledger accounts. (Omit explanations.)
(1)The buildings have an estimated life of 30 years with no salvage value (straight-line method).
(2)The equipment is depreciated at 10% per year.
(3)Insurance expired during the year $3,500.
(4)The rent revenue represents the amount received for 11 months for dining facilities. The December rent has not yet been received.
(5)It is estimated that 12% of the accounts receivable will be uncollectible.
(6)Salaries and wages earned but not paid by December 31, $3,600.
(7)Dues received in advance from members $8,900.
(c)Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
(d)Prepare closing entries and post.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The production department of Priston Company has submitted the following forecast of units to be produced by quarter for the upcoming fiscal year.

In addition, the beginning raw materials inventory for the 1st Quarter is budgeted to be 3,600 pounds and the beginning accounts payable for the 1st Quarter is budgeted to be $11,775.
Each unit requires three pounds of raw material that costs $2.50 per pound. Management desires to end each quarter with a raw materials inventory equal to 20% of the following quarter’s production needs. The desired ending inventory for the 4th Quarter is 3,700 pounds. Management plans to pay for 70% of raw material purchases in the quarter acquired and 30% in the following quarter. Each unit requires 0.50 direct labor-hours and direct labor-hour workers are paid $12 per hour.
Required:
- Prepare the company’s direct materials budget and schedule of expected cash disbursements for purchases of materials for the upcoming fiscal year.
- Prepare the company’s direct labor budget for the upcoming fiscal year, assuming that the direct labor workforce is adjusted each quarter to match the number of hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for two proprietorships for the year 2014, Garba’s Goods and Zahra Enterprises.
Determine the missing amounts.
|
|
Garba’s Goods |
|
Zahra Enterprises |
| Beginning of year: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Total assets |
|
$110,000 |
|
|
$129,000 |
|
| Total liabilities |
|
85,000 |
|
|
$ |
(c) |
| Total owner’s equity |
|
$ |
(a) |
|
80,000 |
|
| End of year: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Total assets |
|
160,000 |
|
|
180,000 |
|
| Total liabilities |
|
120,000 |
|
|
50,000 |
|
| Total owner’s equity |
|
40,000 |
|
|
130,000 |
|
| Changes during year in owner’s equity: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Additional investment |
|
$ |
(b) |
|
25,000 |
|
| Drawings |
|
29,000 |
|
|
$ |
(d) |
| Total revenues |
|
215,000 |
|
|
100,000 |
|
| Total expenses |
|
175,000 |
|
|
60,000 |
Two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for two proprietorships for the year 2014, Garba’s Goods and Zahra Enterprises. Determine the mis
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) You have just been appointed to the board of Mega Bank. You notice that the asset and
liability management (ALM) policy and framework have not been updated for a number of
years.
(i) Explain the process you would go through to ensure this update occurs to your
satisfaction. (6 marks)
(ii) Given recent events (e.g. the global financial crisis), what areas do you think must be
addressed in the ALM policy and framework? Justify your response, including three (3)
examples. (5 marks)
(b) Discuss whether this process and the areas identified in part (a)(ii) would be different for a
domestic commercial/retail bank compared to a global investment bank.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance sheet and income statement data indicate the following:
| Bonds payable, 10% (issued 1988 due 2012) |
$1,000,000 |
| Preferred 5% stock, $100 par (no change during year) |
300,000 |
| Common stock, $50 par (no change during year) |
2,000,000 |
| Income before income tax for year |
350,000 |
| Income tax for year |
80,000 |
| Common dividends paid |
50,000 |
| Preferred dividends paid |
15,000 |
|
|
Based on the data presented above, what is the number of times bond interest charges were earned (round to one decimal point)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that you have been gi-.en a summer job at Fairwings Avionics, a company that manufactures sophisticated radar sets for commercial aircraft. The company, which is privately owned, has approached a bank for a loan to help finance its tremendous growth. The bank requires financial statements before approving such a loan. Required: Classify each cost listed below as either a product cost or a period cost for purposes of preparing the financial statements for the bank
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A difference of opinion concerning accounting and auditing matters relative to a particular phase of the audit arises between an assistant auditor and the auditor responsible for the engagement. After appropriate consultation, the assistant auditor asks to be disassociated from the resolution of the matter. The working papers would probably be
- Silent on the matter since it is an internal matter of the auditing firm.
- Expanded to note that the assistant auditor is completely disassociated from responsibility for the auditor’s opinion.
- Expanded to document the additional work required, since all disagreements of this type will require expanded substantive testing.
- Expanded to document the assistant auditor’s position, and how the difference of opinion was resolved.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is taken from the records of DW Company for last year:
|
Direct materials
|
$8,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
$3,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$11,000
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
$5,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
$19,000
|
The amount of beginning work in process inventory is:
A) $24,000
B) $2,000
C) $22,000
D) $3,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the following data for March, calculate the cost of goods manufactured:
|
Direct materials
|
$29,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
$19,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$27,000
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
$11,000
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
$12,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
$29,000
|
The cost of goods manufactured was:
A) $74,000
B) $86,000
C) $76,000
D) $75,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jacobs is employed as a machinist for an aircraft manufacturer. She is paid $15 per hour for regular time and time and a half for all work in excess of 40 hours per week. During the past week, Jacobs was idle for two hours due to machine breakdowns and was idle four hours due to materials shortages. Jacobs worked 40 hours last week with no overtime. The allocation of Jacobs” wages for the past week between direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead cost would be:
|
|
Direct
|
Manufacturing
|
|
|
Labor
|
Overhead
|
|
A)
|
$600
|
$0
|
|
B)
|
$570
|
$30
|
|
C)
|
$540
|
$60
|
|
D)
|
$510
|
$90
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Johnson is employed on the assembly line of a manufacturing company where he assembles a component part for one of the company”s products. He is paid $14 per hour for regular time and time and a half for all work in excess of 40 hours per week. During the past week, Johnson worked a total of 50 hours and had no idle time. The allocation of Johnson”s wages for the past week between direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead cost would be:
|
|
|
Manufacturing
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
Overhead
|
|
A)
|
$770
|
$0
|
|
B)
|
$700
|
$70
|
|
C)
|
$560
|
$210
|
|
D)
|
$560
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsen Corporation for the just completed year.
|
Sales
|
$930
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$70
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$40
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$190
|
|
Direct labor
|
$150
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$210
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$90
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$120
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$70
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$90
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$140
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$210
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$90
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$120
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$80
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$70
|
The cost of the raw materials used in production during the year (in thousands of
dollars) was:
A) $230
B) $220
C) $160
D) $260
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FIT Corporation”s return on net operating assets (RNOA) is 10% and its tax rate is 40%. Its net operating assets ($4 million) are financed entirely by common shareholders” equity. Management is considering its options to finance an expansion costing $2 million. It expects return on net operating assets to remain unchanged. There are two alternatives to finance the expansion:
1. Issue $1 million bonds with 12% coupon, and $1 million common stock.
2. Issue $2 million bonds with 12% coupon.
Required:
a. Determine net operating income after tax (NOPAT) and net income for each alternative.
b. Compute return on common shareholders” equity for each alternative (use ending equity).
c. Calculate the assets-to-equity ratio for each alternative.
d. Compute return on net operating assets and explain how the level of leverage interacts with it in helping determine which alternative management should pursue.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
All calculations need to be derived from the ‘Danaher 2013 Annual Report.pdf’. Also need very detailed explanation on the answers to help me understand and grasp the topic for future applications.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 2-1
Joe Smith CPA completed the following transactions in the month of June .
1Joe Smith, the owner, invested $ 130,000 cash, office equipment with a value of $ 2,300,and $ 5,400 of computer equipment to launch the business.
2Purchased land worth $ 85,000 for an office by paying $ 30,000 cash and signing a long-term note payable for $ 55,000.
4Purchased a portable building with $90,000 cash and moved it onto the land acquired on June 2.
4Completed and delivered a set of financial statements for a client and collected $ 12,000 cash.
6Paid $ 4,800 cash for the premium on a two-year insurance policy.
8Completed audit services for $ 31,000 on credit.
10Purchased $ 2,200 of additional computer equipment by paying $ 440 cash
and signing a long-term note payable for $ 1,760.
15Completed $ 25,000 of accounting services for a client. This amount is to be
received in 30 days.
20Purchased $ 2,850 of additional office equipment on credit.
20Received a bill for rent of equipment that was used on the June 8 audit.
The $ 400 rent cost must be paid within 30 days.
21Collected $ 12,500 cash in partial payment from the client described in
transaction on June 15.
22Paid $ 4,200 cash wages to an office assistant.
23Paid $ 2,850 cash to settle the account payable created in transaction on
June 20 .
24Paid $ 300 cash for minor repairs to its computer equipment.
30Paid $ 4,200 cash wages to an office assistant.
30Joe Smith withdrew $ 10,000 cash for personal use.
30Paid $ 1,750 cash for advertisements in the local newspaper during June .
Required
1.Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use account titles listed in part 2).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
| The income statement for 2014 and comparative balance sheets of Daniel Divers for 2013 and 2014 appear below. Dividends totaling $51,200 were paid during the year. Equipment costing $21,500 with a book value of $4,700 was sold for $11,300 cash during the year. |
|
|
December 31 |
| Assets |
|
2014 |
|
|
2013 |
|
| Cash |
|
$56,800 |
|
|
$58,300 |
|
| Accounts receivable |
|
14,500 |
|
|
12,200 |
|
| Merchandise inventories |
|
22,600 |
|
|
30,000 |
|
| Equipment |
|
112,000 |
|
|
98,700 |
|
| Accumulated depreciation |
|
(35,600 |
) |
|
(28,400 |
) |
| Total assets |
|
$170,300 |
|
|
$170,800 |
|
| Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Accounts payable |
|
$31,500 |
|
|
$34,700 |
|
| Income taxes payable |
|
8,900 |
|
|
7,400 |
|
| Long-term notes payable |
|
46,700 |
|
|
52,300 |
|
| Common stock, $0.50 par |
|
37,600 |
|
|
32,100 |
|
| Retained earnings |
|
45,600 |
|
|
44,300 |
|
| Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity |
|
$170,300 |
|
|
$170,800 |
|
| Sales |
|
$389,000 |
| Cost of goods sold |
|
178,000 |
| Depreciation expense |
|
24,000 |
| Interest expense |
|
2,700 |
| Other expenses |
|
109,700 |
| Gain on sale of equipment |
|
6,600 |
| Income taxes expense |
|
28,700 |
| Net income |
|
$52,500 |
Prepare the operating activities section of the 2014 statement of cash flows using the indirect method.
(Show amounts that decrease cash flow with either a – sign e.g. -15,000 or in parenthesis e.g. (15,000).)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
What lease assets and lease liabilities does Abercrombie report on its balance sheet? How do we know? b. What effect does the lease classification have on A&F’s balance sheet? Over the life of the lease, what effect does this classification have on the company’s net income? c. Using a 6% discount rate and rounding the remaining lease life to the nearest whole year, estimate the assets and liabilities that A&F fails to report as a result of its off-balance-sheet lease financing. d. What adjustments would we consider to A&F’s income statement corresponding to the adjustments we would make to its balance sheet in part c? e. Indicate the direction (increase or decrease) of the effect that capitalizing these leases would have on the following financial items and ratios for A&F: return on equity (ROE), net operating profit ~ after tax (NOPAT), net operating assets (NOA), net operating profit margin (NO PM) , net operating ~ ?et turnover (NOAT), and measures of financial leverage
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data were taken from the income statements of Bordeaux Company.
|
|
2012 |
2011 |
|
Sales Revenue |
$6,420,000 |
$6,240,000 |
|
Beginning inventory |
970,000 |
837,000 |
|
Purchases |
4,840,000 |
4,661,000 |
|
Ending inventory |
1,020,000 |
970,000 |
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foundations of Accounting I Accounting Project Written by: Karen Pitsch David’s Entertainment is a merchandising business. Their account balances as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows: 110 Cash $ 73,920 112 Accounts Receivable 34,250 113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 11,000 115 Merchandise Inventory 123,900 116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750 117 Store Supplies 2,850 123 Store Equipment 100,800 124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160 210 Accounts Payable 21,450 211 Salaries Payable 0 218 Interest Payable 0 220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 15,000 310 D. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 73,260 311 D. Williams, Drawing 50,000 312 Income Summary 0 410 Sales 853,445 411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,020 412 Sales Discounts 13,200 510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575 520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400 521 Advertising Expense 18,000 522 Depreciation Expense 0 523 Store Supplies Expense 0 529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800 530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500 531 Rent Expense 18,600 532 Insurance Expense 0 533 Bad Debt Expense 0 539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650 550 Interest Expense 1,100 David’s Entertainment uses the perpetual inventory system and the First-in, First-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the First-in, First-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt. The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily). David’s Entertainment sells four types of television entertainment units. The sale prices of each are: TV A: $3,500 TV B: $5,250 TV C: $6,125 PS D: $9,000 During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed: Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $2,600. 3. Purchased three TV C units on account from Prince Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $11,100. 4. Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation changes on purchase of December 3, $400. (NOTE: Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.) 6. Sold four TV A and four TV B on account to Albert Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 10. Sold two projector systems for cash. 11. Purchased store supplies on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, $580. 13. Issued check to Prince Co. number 2634 for the full amount due, less discount allowed. 14. Issued credit memo for one TV A unit returned on sale of December 6. 15. Issued check number 2635 for advertising expense for last half of December, $1,500. 16. Received cash from Albert Co. for the full amount due (less return of December 14 and discount). 19. Issued check number 2636 to buy two TV C units, $7,600. 19. Issued check number 2637 for $6,100 to Joseph Co. on account. 20. Sold five TV C units on account to Cameron Co., invoice number 892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 20. For the convenience of the customer, issued check number 2638 for shipping charges on sale of December 20, $700. 21. Received $12,250 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount. 21. Purchased three projector systems on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $15,600. 24. Received notification that Marie Co. has been granted bankruptcy with no amount of recovery. We are to write-off her amount due. (Note: See page 402 for entry required.) 25. Issued a debit memo for return of $5,200 because of a damaged projection system purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller. 26. Issued check number 2639 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $600. (Customer was going to return goods until an allowance was arranged.) 27. Issued check number 2640 for sales salaries of $1,750 and office salaries of $950. 28. Purchased store equipment on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, FOB destination, $1,200. 29. Issued check number 2641 for store supplies, $470. 30. Sold four TV C units on account to Randall Co., invoice number 893, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 30. Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation paid on December 20. (Round calculations to the nearest dollar.) 30. Issued check number 2642 for purchase of December 21, less return of December 25 and discount. 30. Issued a debit memo for $300 of the purchase returned from December 28. Instructions: 1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account (General Ledger). Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (x) in the Post Reference column. 2. Journalize the transactions in a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, or general journal as illustrated in chapter 7. Also post to the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary ledgers and Inventory Control Sheet as needed. 3. Total each column on the special journals and prove the journal. 4. Post the totals of the account named columns and individually post the “other” columns as well to the General Ledger. 5. Prepare the Schedule of Accounts Receivable and the Schedule of Accounts Payable (their total amount must equal the amount in their controlling general ledger account). 6. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet. 7. Complete the worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the following adjustment data: a. Merchandise inventory on December 31 $90,800 b. Insurance expired during the year 1,250 c. Store supplies on hand on December 31 975 d. Depreciation for the current year needs to be calculated. The business uses the Straight-line method, the store equipment has a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value. (NOTE: the purchase and return will not be included as the dates of the transactions were after the 15th of the month). e. Accrued salaries on December 31: Sales salaries $1,400 Office salaries 760 2,160 f. The note payable terms are at 8%, payment is not being made until Jan. 3, 2013. Interest must be recognized for one month. g. Net realizable value of Accounts Receivable is determined to be $27,950. 8. Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a classified balance sheet in good form. (Recommend review of “Current Liabilities” on pages 166 & 167 and “Current Maturities of Long-term Debt” on page 480.) 9. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. 10. Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both balance columns opposite the closing entry. 11. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The owner of a business reviews the income statement prepared by you and asks, “Why do you report a profit of only $30,000 when cash collections of $100,000 were received and cash payments for the period totalled only $50,000 for expenses?” How would you respond to the owner’s question?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Campbell Manufacturing intends to start business on January 1, 2011. Production plans for the first four months of operations are as follows:
January ………….20,000 units
February …………50,000 units
March ……………70,000 units
April ………………70,000 units
Each unit requires 2 pounds of material. The firm would like to end each month with enough raw material to cover 25 percent of the following month’s production needs. Raw material costs $7 per pound. Management pays for 40 percent of purchases in the month of purchase and receives a 10 percent discount for these payments. The remaining purchases are paid in the following month, with no discount available.
a. Prepare a purchases budget for the first quarter of 2011 in units, in total, and in dollars.
b. Determine the budgeted payments for purchases of raw materials for each of the first three months of operations and for the quarter in total.
c. Where in the budgeted financial statements do the purchase discounts appear?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inoca private limited produces two products ranges: the standard range and special range. During the July, 300 standard windows and 50 specialized windows were manufactured and indirect production costs of $73000 were incurred. An analysis of indirect costs reveals the following activities.
Activity Cost Driver Total Cost
Material Handling Number of requisitions $25000
Machine Setups Number of set ups $27000
Quality inspections Number of inspections $21000
The cost driver volume for each product was as follows.
Cost driver Specialized Standard Total
Number of requisitions 400 600 1000
Number of setups 150 300 450
Number of inspections 200 400 600
a. Indirect activity cost rate for each activity.
b. Allocate the indirect manufacturing overhead costs for July to the products using activity cost rates calculated in (a) above
c. Write a memo to the managing director of Inoca private limited explaining the benefits of activity based costing
d. Volume-based cost drivers are no longer appropriate in today’s business environment”. Discuss.
|
TASK 2: Managerial Planning
Leeway Maldives (Pvt) Ltd has the capacity to manufacture 50,000 units annually of its only product. The following information is available.
Selling price
|
$26 per unit
|
|
Variable manufacturing costs
|
$12 per unit
|
|
Fixed manufacturing costs
|
$180,000 annually
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative costs
|
$120,000 annually
|
|
Variable selling and administrative costs
|
$ 4 per unit
|
a. Calculate the number of units that need to be sold annually to break even. 3
b. How many units would need to be sold to earn a target annual profit of $120,000?
c. In an attempt to achieve better results in the marketplace, management has been looking at changing the reward systems for making, distribution and sales personnel. This would result in an increase in variable selling and administrative costs by $2 per unit, and would reduce fixed selling and administrative costs by $50000.
(i) Calculate the number of units required to break even if management implemented the changes
(ii) Would you suggest management pursues the changes? Explain.
TASK 3: Short-term Decision Making
XYZ Company produces plunge pools. Currently, the company uses internally manufactured pumps to power water jets. XYZ Company has found that 40 per cent of the pumps have failed within their 12-month warranty period, causing huge warranty costs. Because of the company’s inability to manufacture high-quality pumps, management is considering buying pumps from a reputable supplier who will also bear any related warranty costs. XYZ company’s unit cost of manufacturing pumps is $83.75 per unit, including $17.25 of allocated fixed overhead (primarily depreciation of equipment). Also, the company has spent an average of $22 (labor and parts) repairing each pump returned. XYZ Company can purchase each pump for $92.50. During 2013, XYZ Company plans to sell 12,800 plunge pools (each pool requires one pump).
XYZ company’s unit cost of manufacturing pumps is $83.75 per unit, including $17.25 of allocated fixed overhead (primarily depreciation of equipment). Also, the company has spent an average of $22 (labor and parts) repairing each pump returned. XYZ Company can purchase each pump for $92.50. During 2013, XYZ Company plans to sell 12,800 plunge pools (each pool requires one pump).
Required
a. Determine whether XYZ Company should make or buy the pumps, and the amount of cost savings arising from the best alternative. [8 marks]
b. What qualitative factors should be considered in the outsourcing decision? [7 marks]
e. “Fixed costs are always irrelevant in decision making.” Discuss. [5 marks]
TASK 4: Budgetary Control Systems
Madihaa Company Pte Ltd intends to start business on the first of January. Production plans for the first four months are as follows:
|
January
|
20,000 units
|
|
February
|
50,000 units
|
|
March
|
70,000 units
|
|
April
|
70,000 units
|
Each unit requires 2 kilograms of material. The company would like to end each month with enough raw material inventories on hand to cover 25 per cent of the following month’s production needs. The material costs $7 per kilogram. Management anticipates being able to pay for 40 per cent of its purchases in the month of purchase. They will receive a 10 per cent discount for these early payments. They anticipate having to defer payment to the next month on 60 per cent of their purchases. No discount will be taken on these late payments. The business starts with no inventories on 1 January.
Required
a.Determine the budgeted payments for purchases of materials for each of the first three months of operations. [8 marks]
b.Madihaa Company Pte Ltd is preparing a master budget for the coming year. At present senior management are reviewing the inventory policies. Which budgets, would policies concerning the level of inventories be affected and why?
c. Discuss the potential issues arising for an entity if it takes a budgetary approach in which budgetary data are imposed on business unit managers by the CEO. Contrast this with an approach whereby the budgetary data is developed in a more participatory environment.
TASK 5: Decentralization and Performance Evaluation
Zam Gems Maldives (Pvt) Ltd manufactures jewelry for three different markets. The business has grown from a backyard hobby for the owners to quite a large manufacturing concern. The company is structured into three distinct divisions aligned with each market, as shown.
Children’s jewellery Adult jewellery Crystals & homewares
Sales $4,720,000 $2,480,000 $6,300,000
Variable costs 33% 38% 50%
Fixed costs $1,960,000 $1,800,000 $1,700,000
Divisional assets $5,000,000 $4,000,000 $12,000,000
Common costs for the year totaled $500,000 and were allocated based on sales.
The management of Zam Gems Maldives (Pvt) Ltd has come across a further investment opportunity. It does not want to develop a separate division, so one of the existing divisions would need to take responsibility for the new investment opportunity. Management estimates that the new investment opportunity would require an investment of $2500000 to deliver sales of $2000000 with variable costs estimated at $625000 and fixed costs at $1000000.
Required
a. At present, divisional performance is evaluated based on ROI. If this is the case, which division would want to take over the new investment opportunity? [5 marks]
b. If the company changed its performance evaluation criteria to encompass residual income based on a charge for capital of 14 per cent, which division would want to take over the new investment opportunity? [5 marks]
c. Why is there a need to measure organizational performance? [5 marks]
d. Discuss the appropriateness of the use of ROI, RI, and EVA as performance measures. [5 marks]
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Construct Harry’s cash budget for the 3 months April. May, and June and the total for the 2nd quarter. Fixed overhead expenses requiring the use of cash may be grouped together as a single line item called “fixed overhead”. Variable overhead items may be grouped together as a single line item called “variable overhear. Show any necessary calculations. (7 points) Construct Harry’s contribution margin format budgeted income statement for the 3 months April. May. and June and the total for the 2nd quarter. Fixed overhead expenses may be grouped together as fixed overhead. Variable overhead expenses may be grouped together as variable overhead. Remember to include interest on any borrowings. Show any necessary calculations. (6 points) Explain why Harry is facing a cash flow problem in May even though his business is profitable. (2 points) During April Harry actually produced and sold 175.000 widgets. Actual sales revenues were $4.342.000. Actual costs were as detailed in the table below. Complete the table by constructing a flexible budget and performance report including variances for April based on 175,000 widgets. Your performance report should be similar to the performance report shown in exhibit 10.7 of page 559 except your report includes detailed cost production cost line items. Use the template provided below for your answer. (8 points) Write a brief report explaining the most important reasons why Harry’s profits were different from the amount projected in the master budget. (2 points)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Walters Company is considering producing 120,000 pounds of paperclips and 140,000 pounds of staples each month from their current production of grade A and grade B wiring. The following are the expenditures to date:
Jan. 1 $100,000 Bulk steel purchase
Jan. 2 – Feb. 15 $150,000 Cost to melt steel
Feb. 16 – Mar. 31 $200,000 Cost to mold steel into wires, polish wires and
wrap around large bolts
April 1 $3.00/pound market price for grade A wire
$4.00/pound market price for grade B wire
Grade A wire requires $450,000 of monthly variable costs to process into staples, which can be sold in the market on 5/1/XX for $7.00 per pound. Grade B wire requires $600,000 of monthly variable costs to process into paperclips, which can be sold in the market on 5/1/XX for $8.00 per pound.
Required:
1) Should Walters Company sell their products in the marketplace on April 1st or on May 1st?
What recommendation would you make to Walters Company?
2) What is the incremental monthly revenue (loss) for staples and paperclips?
3) How should the $450,000 of joint costs be accounted for in the further processing decision?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
This problem continues Davis consulting. Inc. situation from Problem I’21-63 of (lupin 21 Azume Davis Consuhing brg.us January with $29000 rah. Management foreaso that ash moans from cm& t ILUOtTben a be 549,000 in January and 551.500 in Febtuary. Projected cash paymnits include equipment purdsasa (517.000 in Jarman, and WAX) in February) and brogan) adminidrative apeman (5G000 ach mooch). I hvia bank requires a $20,000 minimum balance in the bras checking ac-count. At the end of any month when the account balance falls below 520000. the hank automatically extends credit to the firm in multiples of 55.000. Days borrows as little as possible and pan back loam each month in 51.000 increments. plus 5% interest on the entire unpaid principal. the Gen payment 4x-curs one month alter the loan.
Requiremaits I. Prepare Dan Cornulting’s cash budget for January and February 2013. 2. How much cash will Davis borrow in February if cash receipts from customers that month total S21,500 instead cif 551.500?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
) Lindon Company uses 4,500 units of Part X each year as a component in the assembly of one of its products. The company is presently producing Part X internally at a total cost of $69,000 as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$16,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
18,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
10,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
25,000
|
|
Total costs
|
$69,000
|
An outside supplier has offered to provide Part X at a price of $11 per unit. If Lindon stops producing the part internally, one third of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.
Required: Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting the outside supplier’s offer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
?Exercise 12–33Segmented Income Statement; TVCable Company
Countywide Cable Services, Inc. is organized with three segments: Metro, Suburban, and Outlying.
Data for these segments for the year just ended follow.
Metro Suburban Outlying
Service revenue ………………………………………….$1,000,000 $800,000 400,000
Variable expenses …………………………………. 200,000 150,000 100,000
Controllable fixed expenses …………………………… 400,000 320,000 150,000
Fixed expenses controllable by others ……………… 230,000 200,000 90,000
In addition to the expenses listed above, the company has $95,000 of common fixed expenses.
Income-tax expense for the year is $145,000.
Required:
1. Prepare a segmented income statement for Countywide Cable Services, Inc. Use the contribution format.
?Exercise 13–27Calculate Weighted-Average Cost of Capital for EVA
Golden Gate Construction Associates, a real estate developer andbuilding contractorin San Francisco, has two sources of long-term capital: debt and equity. The cost to Golden Gate of issuing debt is the after-tax cost of the interest paymentson the debt, taking intoaccountthe fact that the interest payments are tax deductible. The cost of Golden Gate’s equity capital is the investment opportunity rate of Golden Gate’s investors, that is, the rate they could earn on investments of similar risk to that of investing in Golden Gate Construction Associates. The interest rate on Golden Gate’s $60 million of long-term debt is 10 percent, and the company’s tax rate is 40 percent. The cost of Golden Gate’s equity capital is 15 percent. Moreover, the market value (and book value) of Golden Gate’s equity is $90 million.
Required:Calculate Golden Gate Construction Associates’ weighted-average cost of capital.
?Exercise 13–28Economic Value Added (EVA); Continuation of Preceding Exercise
Refer to the data in the preceding exercise for Golden Gate Construction Associates. The company has two divisions: the real estate division and the construction division. The divisions’ total assets, current liabilities, and before-tax operating income for the most recent year are as follows:
Division Total Assets Current Before-Tax
Liabilities Operating Income
Real estate …… $100,000,000 $6,000,000 $20,000,000
Construction …… 60,000,000 4,000,000 18,000,000
Required:Calculate the economic value added (EVA) for each of Golden Gate Construction Associates’ divisions. (You will need to use the weighted-average cost of capital, which was computed in the preceding exercise.)
?Exercise 13–29ROI; Residual Income
Wyalusing Industries has manufactured prefabricated houses for over 20 years. The houses are constructed in sections to be assembled on customers’ lots. Wyalusing expanded into the precut housing market when it acquired Fairmont Company, one of its suppliers. In this market, various types of lumber are precut into the appropriate lengths, banded into packages, and shipped to customers’ lots for assembly.
Wyalusing designated the Fairmont Division as an investment center. Wyalusing uses return on investment (ROI) as a performance measure with investment defined as average productive assets. Management bonuses are based in part on ROI. All investments are expected to earn a minimum return of 15 percent before income taxes. Fairmont’s ROI has ranged from 19.3 to 22.1 percent since it was acquired. Fairmont had an investment opportunity in 20×1 that had an estimated ROI of 18 percent. Fairmont’s management decided against the investment because it believed the investment would decrease the division’s overall ROI. The 20×1 income statement for Fairmont Division follows. The division’s productive assets were $12,600,000 at the end of 20×1, a 5 percent increase over the balance at the beginning of the year.
FAIRMONT DIVISION
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 20×1
(in thousands)
Sales revenue ………………………………………………………………………………………………….$24,000
Cost of goods sold ……………………………………………………………………………………………..15,800
Gross margin ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..$8,200
Operating expenses:
Administrative ………………………………………………………………………………………………………2,140
Selling …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………3,6005,740
Income from operations before income taxes …………………………………………………………….$ 2,460
Required:
1.Calculate the following performance measures for 20×1 for the Fairmont Division.
a.Return on investment (ROI).
b.Residual income.
2.Would the management of Fairmont Division have been more likely to accept the investment
opportunity it had in 20×1 if residual income were used as a performance measure instead of ROI?
Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following were among Gage Co.’s 2005 costs:
|
Normal spoilage
|
$
|
5,000
|
|
Freight out
|
|
10,000
|
|
Excess of actual manufacturing costs over standard costs
|
|
20,000
|
|
Standard manufacturing costs
|
|
100,000
|
|
Actual prime manufacturing costs
|
|
80,000
|
Gage’s 2005 actual manufacturing overhead was
- $ 40,000
- $ 45,000
- $ 55,000
- $120,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Baby Frames, Inc. evaluates manufacturing overhead in its factory by using variance analysis. The following information applies to the month of May:
|
|
Actual
|
Budgeted
|
|
Number of frames manufactured
|
19,000
|
20,000
|
|
Variable overhead costs
|
$4,100
|
$2 per direct labor hour
|
|
Fixed overhead costs
|
$22,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
2,100
|
0.1 hour per frame
|
What is the fixed overhead spending variance?
- $1,000 favorable.
- $1,000 unfavorable.
- $2,000 favorable.
- $2,000 unfavorable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Under the 2-variance method for analyzing overhead, which of the following variances consists of both variable and fixed overhead elements?
|
|
Controllable (budget) variance
|
Volume variance
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Roe Co.’s 2005 manufacturing operations:
|
Standard direct manufacturing labor hours per unit
|
2
|
|
Actual direct manufacturing labor hours
|
10,500
|
|
Number of units produced
|
5,000
|
|
Standard variable overhead per standard direct manufacturing labor hour
|
$3
|
|
Actual variable overhead
|
$28,000
|
Roe’s 2005 unfavorable variable overhead efficiency variance was
- $0
- $1,500
- $2,000
- $3,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following variances would be useful in calling attention to a possible short-term problem in the control of overhead costs?
|
|
Spending variance
|
Volume variance
|
|
a.
|
No
|
No
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following:
The diagram below depicts a factory overhead flexible budget line DB and standard overhead application line OA. Activity is expressed in machine hours with Point V indicating the standard hours required for the actual output in September 2005. Point S indicates the actual machine hours (inputs) and actual costs in September 2005.
Are the following overhead variances favorable or unfavorable?
|
|
Volume (capacity) variance
|
Efficiency variance
|
|
a.
|
Favorable
|
Favorable
|
|
b.
|
Favorable
|
Unfavorable
|
|
c.
|
Unfavorable
|
Favorable
|
|
d.
|
Unfavorable
|
Unfavorable
|
The budgeted total variable overhead cost for C machine hours is
- AB
- BC
- AC minus DO
- BC minus DO
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ajax Division of Carlyle Corporation produces electric motors, 20% of which are sold to Bradley Division of Carlyle and the remainder to outside customers. Carlyle treats its divisions as profit centers and allows division managers to choose their sources of sale and supply. Corporate policy requires that all interdivisional sales and purchases be recorded at variable cost as a transfer price. Ajax Division’s estimated sales and standard cost data for the year ending December 31, 2005, based on the full capacity of 100,000 units, are as follows:
|
|
Bradley
|
Outsiders
|
|
Sales
|
$ 900,000
|
$ 8,000,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
(900,000)
|
(3,600,000)
|
|
Fixed costs
|
(300,000)
|
(1,200,000)
|
|
Gross margin
|
$(300,000)
|
$3,200,000
|
|
Unit sales
|
20,000
|
80,000
|
Ajax has an opportunity to sell the above 20,000 units to an outside customer at a price of $75 per unit during 2005 on a continuing basis. Bradley can purchase its requirements from an outside supplier at a price of $85 per unit.
Assuming that Ajax Division desires to maximize its gross margin, should Ajax take on the new customer and drop its sales to Bradley for 2005, and why?
- No, because the gross margin of the corporation as a whole would decrease by $200,000.
- Yes, because Ajax Division’s gross margin would increase by $300,000.
- Yes, because Ajax Division’s gross margin would increase by $600,000.
- No, because Bradley Division’s gross margin would decrease by $800,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are the operating results of the two segments of Parklin Corporation
|
|
Segment A
|
Segment B
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$
|
10,000
|
$
|
15,000
|
$
|
25,000
|
|
Variable cost of goods sold
|
|
4,000
|
|
8,500
|
|
12,500
|
|
Fixed cost of goods sold
|
|
1,500
|
|
2,500
|
|
4,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
4,500
|
|
4,000
|
|
8,500
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
|
2,000
|
|
3,000
|
|
5,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
|
1,500
|
|
1,500
|
|
3,000
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
$
|
1,000
|
$
|
(500)
|
$
|
500
|
Fixed costs of goods sold are allocated to each segment based on the number of employees. Fixed selling and administrative expenses are allocated equally. If Segment B is eliminated, $1,500 of fixed costs of goods sold would be eliminated. Assuming Segment B is closed, the effect on operating income would be
- An increase of $500.
- An increase of $2,000.
- A decrease of $2,000.
- A decrease of $2,500.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is correct concerning allowing additions and deletions to audit documentation after the documentation completion date under requirements of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board?
|
|
Additions
|
Deletions
|
|
a.
|
Allowed
|
Allowed
|
|
b.
|
Allowed
|
Not allowed
|
|
c.
|
Not allowed
|
Allowed
|
|
d.
|
Not allowed
|
Not allowed
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Further audit procedures consist of which of the following?
|
|
Risk assessment procedures
|
Substantive procedures
|
Test of controls
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
No
|
No
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following matters is an auditor required to communicate to an entity’s audit committee?
|
|
Significant audit adjustments
|
Changes in significant accounting policies
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Although financial and managerial accounting differ in many ways, they are similar in that both rely on the same underlying financial data.
Managerial accounting is a branch of financial accounting and serves essentially the same purposes as financial accounting.
Managerial accounting places greater emphasis on the future than financial accounting, which is primarily concerned with the past.
Managerial accounting is not needed in a non-profit or governmental organization.
When carrying out their planning activities, managers select a course of action and specify how the action will be implemented.
When carrying out their planning activities, managers obtain feedback to ensure that the plan is actually carried out and is appropriately modified as circumstances change.
The controller occupies a line position in an organization.
Decentralization means the delegation of decision-making authority throughout an organization by allowing managers at various operating levels to make key decisions relating to their own area of responsibility.
A firm”s organization chart will normally show both the formal and informal lines of reporting and communication.
The Chief Financial Officer of an organization is responsible for ensuring that line operations run smoothly.
Traditionally, companies have maintained large amounts of raw materials, work in process, and finished goods inventories to act as buffers so that operations can proceed smoothly even if there are unanticipated disruptions.
Process Reengineering is generally considered to be a more radical approach to improvement than Total Quality Management.
Process Reengineering emphasizes a team approach involving front-line workers, whereas Total Quality Management is usually implemented using outside specialists and is imposed from above.
If ethical standards were not generally followed, one of the results would probably be fewer goods and services available in the marketplace.
The Standards of Ethical Conduct for Management Accountants promulgated by the Institute of Management Accountants specifically state that management accountants” sole ethical responsibility is to not break any laws.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For a hospital, what type of position (line or staff) is each of the following?
|
|
Emergency Room Manager
|
Human Resources (Personnel) Manager
|
|
A)
|
Staff
|
Staff
|
|
B)
|
Staff
|
Line
|
|
C)
|
Line
|
Staff
|
|
D)
|
Line
|
Line
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manufacturing overhead is an indirect cost with respect to units of product.
Depreciation on office equipment would not be included in the cost of goods manufactured.
Rent on a factory building used in the production process would be classified as a period cost and as a fixed cost.
Period costs are found only in manufacturing companies, not in merchandising companies.
Depreciation on equipment a company uses in its selling and administrative activities would be classified as a product cost.
If the finished goods inventory increases between the beginning and the end of a period, then the cost of goods manufactured is smaller than the cost of goods sold.
The cost of goods manufactured is calculated by adding the amount of work in process at the end of the year to the cost of raw materials used, direct labor worked, and manufacturing overhead incurred for the year and then subtracting work in process at the beginning of the year.
A publisher that sells its books through agents who are paid a constant percentage commission on each book sold would classify the commissions as a fixed cost.
Variable costs per unit are affected by changes in activity.
A cost is either direct or indirect. The classification will not change if the cost object changes.
The amount that a manufacturing company could earn by renting unused portions of its warehouse is an example of an opportunity cost.
Labor fringe benefits may be charged to direct labor or manufacturing overhead while overtime premiums paid usually are considered a part of manufacturing overhead.
The cost of idle time should be charged as direct labor of the job that is in process when the breakdown occurs.
Internal failure costs result from identification of defects during the appraisal process.
Such costs may include scrap, rejected products, rework, and downtime.
ISO 9000 certification is relatively easy to achieve because little documentation on quality control procedures is needed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wages paid to a timekeeper in a factory are a:
|
|
Prime cost
|
Conversion cost
|
|
A)
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
B)
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
C)
|
No
|
No
|
|
D)
|
No
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Cost A
|
Number of Units Produced
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
|
1
|
?
|
$10
|
|
|
10
|
?
|
$100
|
|
|
100
|
?
|
$1,000
|
|
|
1,000
|
?
|
$10,000
|
|
Cost B
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
$5,000
|
?
|
|
|
10
|
$500
|
?
|
|
|
100
|
$50
|
?
|
|
|
1,000
|
$5
|
?
|
Which of the above best describes the behavior of Costs A and B?
A) Cost A is fixed, Cost B is variable.
B) Cost A is variable, Cost B is fixed.
C) Both Cost A and Cost B are variable.
D) Both Cost A and Cost B are fixed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The controller of the recently organized Crandall Company is considering the two methods listed below for accounting for labor fringe benefits. Which of the two methods is considered acceptable? Method A: Treat all labor fringe benefits as indirect labor by adding them in total to manufacturing overhead. Method B: Treat labor fringe benefits that relate to direct labor as additional direct labor cost and fringe benefits relating to indirect labor as part of manufacturing overhead.
A) Only Method A is acceptable.
B) Only Method B is acceptable.
C) Both Method A and Method B are acceptable.
D) Neither Method A nor Method B is acceptable; labor fringe benefits should be treated as period expenses and should be charged off as incurred.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adolphson Corporation has provided the following summary of its quality cost report for the last two years:
|
Summary of Quality Cost Report (in thousands)
|
|
|
|
|
This Year
|
Last Year
|
% Change
|
|
Prevention costs
|
$ 300
|
$ 200
|
+50
|
|
Appraisal costs
|
315
|
210
|
+50
|
|
Internal failure costs
|
114
|
190
|
-40
|
|
External failure costs
|
621
|
1,200
|
-48
|
|
Total quality costs
|
$1,350
|
$1,800
|
-25
|
On the basis of this report, which one of the following statements is most likely
correct?
A) An increase in prevention and appraisal costs resulted in fewer defects, and
therefore, resulted in a decrease in internal and external failure costs.
B) A decrease in internal and external failure costs resulted in less need for
prevention and appraisal costs.
C) Quality costs such as scrap and rework decreased by 48%.
D) Quality costs such as returns and repairs under warranty decreased by 40%.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following costs were incurred in January:
|
Direct materials
|
$33,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
$28,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$69,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$16,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$21,000
|
Conversion costs during the month totaled:
A) $97,000
B) $167,000
C) $102,000
D) $61,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fab Co. manufactures textiles. Fab”s manufacturing costs last year included the
following salaries and wages:
|
Loom operators
|
$120,000
|
|
Factory foremen
|
$45,000
|
|
Machinery repairmen
|
$30,000
|
What is the amount of direct labor included in this list?
A) $195,000
B) $165,000
C) $150,000
D) $120,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In an activity-based costing system, cost reduction is accomplished by identifying and eliminating
|
|
All cost drivers
|
Non-value-adding activities
|
|
a.
|
No
|
No
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hoger Corporation accumulated the following cost information for its two products, A and B:
|
|
A
|
B
|
Total
|
|
Production volume
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
|
|
Total direct man. labor hrs.
|
5,000
|
20,000
|
25,000
|
|
Setup cost per batch
|
$ 1,000
|
$2,000
|
|
|
Batch size
|
100
|
50
|
|
|
Total setup costs incurred
|
$20,000
|
$40,000
|
$60,000
|
|
DMLH per unit
|
2
|
1
|
|
A traditional costing system would allocate setup costs on the basis of DMLH. An ABC system would trace costs by spreading the costs per batch over the units in a batch. What is the setup cost per unit of product A under each costing system?
|
|
Traditional
|
ABC
|
|
a.
|
$4.80
|
$10.00
|
|
b.
|
$2.40
|
$10.00
|
|
c.
|
$40.00
|
$200.00
|
|
d.
|
$4.80
|
$20.00
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lane Co. produces main products Kul and Wu. The process also yields by-product Zef. Net realizable value of by-product Zef is subtracted from joint production cost of Kul and Wu. The following information pertains to production in July 2005 at a joint cost of $54,000:
|
Product
|
Units produced
|
Market value
|
Additional cost after split-off
|
|
Kul
|
1,000
|
$40,000
|
$
|
0
|
|
Wu
|
1,500
|
35,000
|
|
0
|
|
Zef
|
500
|
7,000
|
|
3,000
|
If Lane uses the net realizable value method for allocating joint cost, how much of the joint cost should be allocated to product Kul?
- $18,800
- $20,000
- $26,667
- $27,342
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mig Co., which began operations in 2005, produces gasoline and a gasoline by-product. The following information is available pertaining to 2005 sales and production:
|
Total production costs to split-off point
|
|
$120,000
|
|
Gasoline sales
|
|
270,000
|
|
By-product sales
|
|
30,000
|
|
Gasoline inventory, 12/31/05
|
|
15,000
|
|
Additional by-product costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Marketing
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
Production
|
15,000
|
|
Mig accounts for the by-product at the time of production. What are Mig’s 2005 cost of sales for gasoline and the by-product?
|
|
Gasoline
|
By-product
|
|
a.
|
$105,000
|
$25,000
|
|
b.
|
$115,000
|
$0
|
|
c.
|
$108,000
|
$37,000
|
|
d.
|
$100,000
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to a by-product called Moy:
|
Sales in 2005
|
5,000 units
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$6
|
|
Selling costs per unit
|
2
|
|
Processing costs
|
0
|
Inventory of Moy was recorded at net realizable value when produced in 2004. No units of Moy were produced in 2005. What amount should be recognized as profit on Moy’s 2005 sales?
- $0
- $10,000
- $20,000
- $30,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In accounting for by-products, the value of the by-product may be recognized at the time of
|
|
Production
|
Sale
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Day Mail Order Co. applied the high-low method of cost estimation to customer order data for the first four months of 2005. What is the estimated variable order filling cost component per order?
|
Month
|
Orders
|
Cost
|
|
January
|
1,200
|
$
|
3,120
|
|
February
|
1,300
|
|
3,185
|
|
March
|
1,800
|
|
4,320
|
|
April
|
1,700
|
|
3,895
|
|
|
6,000
|
$
|
14,520
|
- $2.00
- $2.42
- $2.48
- $2.50
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sago Co. uses regression analysis to develop a model for predicting overhead costs. Two different cost drivers (machine hours and direct materials weight) are under consideration as the independent variable. Relevant data were run on a computer using one of the standard regression programs, with the following results:
|
|
Coefficient
|
|
Machine hours
|
|
|
Y Intercept
|
2,500
|
|
B
|
5.0
|
|
R2= .70
|
|
|
Direct materials weight
|
|
|
Y Intercept
|
4,600
|
|
B
|
2.6
|
|
R2= .50
|
|
What regression equation should be used?
- Y = 2,500 + 5.0X
- Y = 2,500 + 3.5X
- Y = 4,600 + 2.6X
- Y = 4,600 + 1.3X
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In its first year of operations, Magna Manufacturers had the following costs when it produced 100,000 and sold 80,000 units of its only product:
|
Manufacturing costs
|
Fixed
|
$180,000
|
|
|
Variable
|
160,000
|
|
Selling and admin. costs
|
Fixed
|
90,000
|
|
|
Variable
|
40,000
|
How much lower would Magna’s net income be if it used variable costing instead of full absorption costing?
- $36,000
- $54,000
- $68,000
- $94,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
Operational budgets are used by a retail company for planning and controlling its business activities. Data regarding the company’s monthly sales for the last 6 months of the year and its projected collection patterns are shown below.
The cost of merchandise averages 40% of its selling price. The company’s policy is to maintain an inventory equal to 25% of the next month’s forecasted sales. The inventory balance at cost is $80,000 as of June 30.
|
Forecasted Sales
|
|
|
|
July
|
$775,000
|
|
|
August
|
750,000
|
|
|
September
|
825,000
|
|
|
October
|
800,000
|
|
|
November
|
850,000
|
|
|
December
|
900,000
|
|
|
Types of Sales
|
|
|
|
Cash sales
|
20
|
%
|
|
Credit sales
|
80
|
%
|
|
Collection Pattern for Credit Sales
|
|
|
|
In the month of sale
|
40
|
%
|
|
In the first month following the sale
|
57
|
%
|
|
Uncollectible
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
%
|
The budgeted cost of the company’s purchases for the month of August would be
CIA adapted
- $302,500
- $305,000
- $307,500
- $318,750
The company’s total cash receipts from sales and collections on account that would be budgeted for the month of September would be
- $757,500
- $771,000
- $793,800
- $856,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rolling Wheels purchases bicycle components in the month prior to assembling them into bicycles. Assembly is scheduled one month prior to budgeted sales. Rolling pays 75% of component costs in the month of purchase and 25% of the costs in the following month. Component cost included in budgeted cost of sales are
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
July
|
August
|
|
$5,000
|
$6,000
|
$7,000
|
$8,000
|
$8,000
|
What is Rolling’s budgeted cash payment for components in May?
- $5,750
- $6,750
- $7,750
- $8,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A 2005 cash budget is being prepared for the purchase of Toyi, a merchandise item. Budgeted data are
|
Cost of goods sold for 2005
|
$300,000
|
|
Accounts payable 1/1/05
|
20,000
|
|
Inventory—1/1/05
|
30,000
|
|
12/31/05
|
42,000
|
Purchases will be made in twelve equal monthly amounts and paid for in the following month. What is the 2005 budgeted cash payment for purchases of Toyi?
- $295,000
- $300,000
- $306,000
- $312,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 thru 3 are based on the following information:
In preparing the annual profit plan for the coming year, Wilkens Company wants to determine the cost behavior pattern of the maintenance costs. Wilkens has decided to use linear regression by employing the equation y = a + bx for maintenance costs. The prior year’s data regarding maintenance hours and costs, and the result of the regression analysis are given below.
|
Average cost per hour
|
$9.00
|
|
a
|
684.65
|
|
b
|
7.2884
|
|
Standard error of a
|
49.515
|
|
Standard error of b
|
.12126
|
|
Standard error of the estimate
|
34.469
|
|
R2
|
.99724
|
|
|
Hours of activity
|
Maintenance costs
|
|
January
|
480
|
$ 4,200
|
|
February
|
320
|
3,000
|
|
March
|
400
|
3,600
|
|
April
|
300
|
2,820
|
|
May
|
500
|
4,350
|
|
June
|
310
|
2,960
|
|
July
|
320
|
3,030
|
|
August
|
520
|
4,470
|
|
September
|
490
|
4,260
|
|
October
|
470
|
4,050
|
|
November
|
350
|
3,300
|
|
December
|
340
|
3,160
|
|
Sum
|
4,800
|
$43,200
|
|
Average
|
400
|
$ 3,600
|
In the standard regression equation y = a + bx, the letter b is best described as a(n)
- Independent variable.
- Dependent variable.
- Constant coefficient.
- Variable coefficient.
The letter x in the standard regression equation is best described as a(n).
- Independent variable.
- Dependent variable.
- Constant coefficient.
- Coefficient of determination.
Based upon the data derived from the regression analysis, 420 maintenance hours in a month would mean the maintenance costs (rounded to the nearest dollar) would be budgeted at
- $3,780
- $3,600
- $3,790
- $3,746
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 thru 4 are based on the following information:
Lackland Ski Resort uses multiple regression to predict ski lift revenue for the next week based on the forecasted number of dates with temperatures above 10 degrees and predicted number of inches of snow. The following function has been developed:
Sales = 10,902 + (255 × no. of days predicted above 10 degrees) + (300 × no. of inches of snow predicted)
Other information generated from the analysis include
|
Coefficient of determination (Adjusted r squared)
|
.6789
|
|
Standard error
|
1,879
|
|
F-Statistic
|
6.279 with a significance of .049
|
Which variables(s) in this function is(are) the dependent variable(s)?
- Predicted number of days above 10 degrees.
- Predicted number of inches of snow.
- Revenue.
- Predicted number of days above 10 degrees and predicted number of inches of snow.
Assume that management predicts the number of days above 10 degrees for the next week to be 6 and the number of inches of snow to be 12. Calculate the predicted amount of revenue for the next week.
- $10,902
- $11,362
- $16,032
- $20,547
Which of the following represents an accurate interpretation of the results of Lackland’s regression analysis?
- 6.279% of the variation in revenue is explained by the predicted number of days above 10 degrees and the number of inches of snow.
- The relationships are not significant.
- Predicted number of days above 10 degrees is a more significant variable than number of inches of snow.
- 67.89% of the variation in revenue is explained by the predicted number of days above 10 degrees and the number of inches of snow.
Assume that Lackland’s model predicts revenue for a week to be $13,400. Calculate the 95% confidence interval for the amount of revenue for the week. (The 95% confidence interval corresponds to the area representing 2.3436 deviations from the mean.)
- $13,400 ± 6,279
- $13,400 ± 4,404
- $13,400 ± 6,786
- $13,400 ± 8,564
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A flexible budget is appropriate for a
|
|
Marketing budget
|
Direct material usage budget
|
|
a.
|
No
|
No
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Controllable revenue would be included in a performance report for a
|
|
Profit center
|
Cost center
|
|
a.
|
No
|
No
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is a summarized income statement of Carr Co.’s profit center No. 43 for March 2005:
|
Contribution margin
|
|
$70,000
|
|
Period expenses:
|
|
|
|
|
Manager’s salary
|
$20,000
|
|
|
|
Facility depreciation
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
Corporate expense allocation
|
5,000
|
33,000
|
|
Profit center income
|
|
$37,000
|
Which of the following amounts would most likely be subject to the control of the profit center’s manager?
- $70,000
- $50,000
- $37,000
- $33,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Companies in what type of industry may use a standard cost system for cost control?
|
|
Mass production industry
|
Service industry
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carr Co. had an unfavorable materials usage variance of $900. What amounts of this variance should be charged to each department?
|
|
Purchasing
|
Warehousing
|
Manufacturing
|
|
a.
|
$0
|
$0
|
$900
|
|
b.
|
$0
|
$900
|
$0
|
|
c.
|
$300
|
$300
|
$300
|
|
d.
|
$900
|
$0
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following direct manufacturing labor information pertains to the manufacture of product Glu:
|
Time required to make one unit
|
2 direct labor hours
|
|
Number of direct workers
|
50
|
|
Number of productive hours per week, per worker
|
40
|
|
Weekly wages per worker
|
$500
|
|
Workers’ benefits treated as direct manufacturing labor costs
|
20% of wages
|
What is the standard direct manufacturing labor cost per unit of product Glu?
- $30
- $24
- $15
- $12
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
The following information is available for Armstrong Enterprises for 2005:
|
Net operating profit (income) after taxes
|
$36,000,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
15,000,000
|
|
Change in net working capital
|
10,000,000
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
12,000,000
|
|
Invested capital (total assets – current liabilities)
|
100,000,000
|
|
Weighted average cost of capital
|
10%
|
What is the amount of the economic value added (EVA)?
- $20,000,000
- $26,000,000
- $15,000,000
- $36,000,000
What is the free cash flow for 2005?
- $36,000,000
- $30,000,000
- $29,000,000
- $26,000,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
The Dawson Corporation projects the following for the year 2005:
|
Earnings before interest and taxes
|
$35 million
|
|
Interest expense
|
5 million
|
|
Preferred stock dividends
|
4 million
|
|
Common stock dividend payout ratio
|
30%
|
|
Common shares outstanding
|
2 million
|
|
Effective corporate income tax rate
|
40%
|
The expected common stock dividend per share for Dawson Corporation for 2005 is
CMA adapted
- $2.34
- $2.70
- $3.90
- $2.10
If Dawson Corporation’s common stock is expected to trade at a price/earnings ratio of eight, the market price per share (to the nearest dollar) would be
- $125
- $ 56
- $ 72
- $ 68
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 through 5 are based on the following information:
The data presented below show actual figures for selected accounts of McKeon Company for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2005, and selected budget figures for the 2006 fiscal year. McKeon’s controller is in the process of reviewing the 2006 budget. McKeon Company monitors yield or return ratios using the average financial position of the company. (Round all calculations to three decimal places if necessary.)
|
|
5/31/06
|
5/31/05
|
|
Current assets
|
$210,000
|
$180,000
|
|
Noncurrent assets
|
275,000
|
255,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
78,000
|
85,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
75,000
|
30,000
|
|
Common stock ($30 par value)
|
300,000
|
300,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
32,000
|
20,000
|
|
2006 Operations
|
|
Sales
|
$350,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
160,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
3,000
|
|
Income taxes (40% rate)
|
48,000
|
|
Dividends declared and paid in 2006
|
60,000
|
|
Administrative expense
|
67,000
|
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
|
5/31/06
|
5/31/05
|
|
Cash
|
$ 20,000
|
$10,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
100,000
|
70,000
|
|
Inventory
|
70,000
|
80,000
|
|
Other
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
McKeon Company’s debt-to-total-asset ratio for 2006 is
- 0.352
- 0.315
- 0.264
- 0.237
The 2006 accounts receivable turnover for McKeon company is
- 1.882
- 3.500
- 5.000
- 4.118
Using a 365-day year, McKeon’s inventory turnover is
- 2.133
- 2.281
- 1.995
- 4.615
McKeon Company’s total asset turnover for 2006 is
- 0.805
- 0.761
- 0.722
- 0.348
The 2006 return on assets for McKeon Company is
- 0.261
- 0.148
- 0.157
- 0.166
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Antlers, Inc. produces a single product that sells for $150 per unit. The product is processed through the Cutting and Finishing departments. Additional data for these departments are as follows:
|
|
Cutting
|
Finishing
|
|
Annual capacity (36,000 direct labor hours available in each department)
|
180,000 units
|
135,000 units
|
|
Current production rate (annualized)
|
108,000 units
|
108,000 units
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$1,296,000
|
$1,944,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
$ 864,000
|
$1,296,000
|
|
Direct materials cost per unit
|
$ 45
|
$ 15
|
The current production rate is the budgeted rate for the entire year. Direct labor employees earn $20 per hour and the company has a “no layoff” policy in effect. What is the amount of the throughput contribution per unit as computed using the theory of constraints?
- $90.00
- $76.67
- $46.67
- $26.67
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which statement best describes the objective of the theory of constraints?
|
|
Throughput contribution
|
Investment
|
Operating costs
|
|
a.
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
Decrease
|
|
b.
|
Increase
|
Increase
|
Increase
|
|
c.
|
Decrease
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
|
d.
|
Increase
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 through 3 are based on the following information pertaining to Arp Co.’s manufacturing operations:
|
Inventories
|
3/1/05
|
3/31/05
|
|
Direct materials
|
$36,000
|
$30,000
|
|
Work in process
|
18,000
|
12,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
54,000
|
72,000
|
Additional information for the month of March 2005:
|
Direct materials purchased
|
$84,000
|
|
Direct manufacturing labor payroll
|
60,000
|
|
Direct manufacturing labor rate per hour
|
7.50
|
|
Factory overhead rate per direct labor hour
|
10.00
|
For the month of March 2005, prime cost was
- $ 90,000
- $120,000
- $144,000
- $150,000
For the month of March 2005, conversion cost was
- $ 90,000
- $140,000
- $144,000
- $170,000
For the month of March 2005, cost of goods manufactured was
- $218,000
- $224,000
- $230,000
- $236,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gram Co. develops computer programs to meet customers’ special requirements. How should Gram categorize payments to employees who develop these programs?
|
|
Direct costs
|
Value-added costs
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Costs are accumulated by responsibility center for control purposes when using
|
|
Job order costing
|
Process costing
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Birk Co. uses a job order cost system. The following debits (credit) appeared in Birk’s work in process account for the month of April 2005:
|
April
|
Description
|
Amount
|
|
1
|
Balance
|
$ 4,000
|
|
30
|
Direct materials
|
24,000
|
|
30
|
Direct manufacturing labor
|
16,000
|
|
30
|
Factory overhead
|
12,800
|
|
30
|
To finished goods
|
(48,000)
|
Birk applies overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 80% of direct manufacturing labor costs. Job No. 5, the only job still in process on April 30, 2005, has been charged with direct manufacturing labor of $2,000. What was the amount of direct materials charged to Job No. 5?
- $ 3,000
- $ 5,200
- $ 8,800
- $24,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a job cost system, manufacturing overhead is
|
|
An indirect cost of jobs
|
A necessary element in production
|
|
a.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
No
|
No
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Under Pick Co.’s job order costing system manufacturing overhead is applied to work in process using a predetermined annual overhead rate. During January 2005, Pick’s transactions included the following:
|
Direct materials issued to production
|
$ 90,000
|
|
Indirect materials issued to production
|
8,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead incurred
|
125,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead applied
|
113,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
107,000
|
Pick had neither beginning nor ending work in process inventory. What was the cost of jobs completed in January 2005?
- $302,000
- $310,000
- $322,000
- $330,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In developing a predetermined variable factory overhead application rate for use in a process costing system, which of the following could be used in the numerator and denominator?
|
|
Numerator
|
Denominator
|
|
a.
|
Actual variable factory overhead
|
Actual machine hours
|
|
b.
|
Actual variable factory overhead
|
Estimated machine hours
|
|
c.
|
Estimated variable factory overhead
|
Actual machine hours
|
|
d.
|
Estimated variable factory overhead
|
Estimated machine hours
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Parat College allocates support department costs to its individual schools using the step method. Information for May 2005 is as follows:
|
|
|
Support departments
|
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
Power
|
|
Costs incurred
|
$99,000
|
|
$54,000
|
|
|
Service percentages provided to:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
—
|
|
10
|
%
|
|
|
Power
|
20
|
%
|
—
|
|
|
|
School of Education
|
30
|
%
|
20
|
%
|
|
|
School of Technology
|
50
|
%
|
70
|
%
|
|
|
|
100
|
%
|
100
|
%
|
What is the amount of May 2005 support department costs allocated to the School of Education?
- $40,500
- $42,120
- $46,100
- $49,125
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kerner Manufacturing uses a process cost system to manufacture laptop computers. The following information summarizes operations relating to laptop computer model #KJK20 during the quarter ending March 31:
|
|
Units
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Work in process inventory, January 1
|
100
|
$70,000
|
|
Started during the quarter
|
500
|
|
|
Completed during the quarter
|
400
|
|
|
Work-in-process inventory, March 31
|
200
|
|
|
Costs added during the quarter
|
|
$750,000
|
Beginning work in process inventory was 50% complete for direct materials. Ending work in process inventory was 75% complete for direct materials. What were the equivalent units of production with regard to materials for March?
- 450
- 500
- 550
- 600
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Forming Department is the first of a two-stage production process. Spoilage is identified when the units have completed the Forming process. Costs of spoiled units are assigned to units completed and transferred to the second department in the period spoilage is identified. The following information concerns Forming’s conversion costs in May 2005:
|
|
Units
|
Conversion costs
|
|
Beginning work in process (50% complete)
|
2,000
|
$10,000
|
|
Units started during May
|
8,000
|
75,500
|
|
Spoilage—normal
|
500
|
|
|
Units completed and transferred
|
7,000
|
|
|
Ending work in process (80% complete)
|
2,500
|
|
Using the weighted-average method, what was Forming’s conversion cost transferred to the second production department?
- $59,850
- $64,125
- $67,500
- $71,250
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In process 2, material G is added when a batch is 60% complete. Ending work in process units, which are 50% complete, would be included in the computation of equivalent units for
|
|
Conversion costs
|
Material G
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A process costing system was used for a department that began operations in January 2005. Approximately the same number of physical units, at the same degree of completion, were in work in process at the end of both January and February. Monthly conversion costs are allocated between ending work in process and units completed. Compared to the FIFO method, would the weighted-average method use the same or a greater number of equivalent units to calculate the monthly allocations?
|
|
Equivalent units for weighted-average compared to FIFO
|
|
|
January
|
February
|
|
a.
|
Same
|
Same
|
|
b.
|
Greater number
|
Greater number
|
|
c.
|
Greater number
|
Same
|
|
d.
|
Same
|
Greater number
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An assembly plant accumulates its variable and fixed manufacturing overhead costs in a single cost pool which are then applied to work in process using a single application base. The assembly plant management wants to estimate the magnitude of the total manufacturing overhead costs for different volume levels of the application activity base using a flexible budget formula. If there is an increase in the application activity base that is within the relevant range of activity for the assembly plant, which one of the following relationships regarding variable and fixed costs is correct?
- The variable cost per unit is constant, and the total fixed costs decrease.
- The variable cost per unit is constant, and the total fixed costs increase.
- The variable cost per unit and the total fixed costs remain constant.
- The variable cost per unit increases, and the total fixed costs remain constant.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In Belk Co.’s just-in-time production system, costs per setup were reduced from $28 to $2. In the process of reducing inventory levels, Belk found that there were fixed facility and administrative costs that previously had not been included in the carrying cost calculation. The result was an increase from $8 to $32 per unit per year. What were the effects of these changes on Belk’s economic lot size and relevant costs?
|
|
Lot size
|
Relevant costs
|
|
a.
|
Decrease
|
Increase
|
|
b.
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
|
c.
|
Increase
|
Increase
|
|
d.
|
Decrease
|
Decrease
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the normal effect on the numbers of cost pools and allocation bases when an activity-based cost (ABC) system replaces a traditional cost system?
|
|
Cost pools
|
Allocation bases
|
|
a.
|
No effect
|
No effect
|
|
b.
|
Increase
|
No effect
|
|
c.
|
No effect
|
Increase
|
|
d.
|
Increase
|
Increase
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pole Co. is investing in a machine with a three-year life. The machine is expected to reduce annual cash operating costs by $30,000 in each of the first two years and by $20,000 in year three. Present values of an annuity of $1 at 14% are
|
Period 1
|
0.88
|
|
2
|
1.65
|
|
3
|
2.32
|
Using a 14% cost of capital, what is the present value of these future savings?
- $59,600
- $60,800
- $62,900
- $69,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
As used in capital budgeting analysis, the internal rate of return uses which of the following items in its computation?
|
|
Net incremental investment
|
Incremental average operating income
|
Net annual cash flows
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An organization is using capital budgeting techniques to compare two independent projects. It could accept one, both, or neither of the projects. Which of the following statements is true about the use of net present value (NPV) and internal rate of return (IRR) methods for evaluating these two projects?
- NPV and IRR criteria will always lead to the same accept or reject decision for two independent projects.
- If the first project’s IRR is higher than the organization’s cost or capital, the first project will be accepted but the second project will not.
- If the NPV criterion leads to accepting or rejecting the first project, one cannot predict whether the IRR criterion will lead to accepting or rejecting the first project.
- If the NPV criterion leads to accepting the first project, the IRR criterion will never lead to accepting the first project.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
A firm, with an 18% cost of capital, is considering the following projects (on January 1, 2006):
|
|
Jan. 1, 2006, Cash outflow (000’s omitted)
|
Dec. 31, 2010, Cash inflow (000’s omitted)
|
Project internal rate of return
|
|
Project A
|
$3,500
|
$7,400
|
15%
|
|
Project B
|
4,000
|
9,950
|
?
|
|
|
Present Value of $1 Due at End of “N” Periods
|
|
N
|
12%
|
14%
|
15%
|
16%
|
18%
|
20%
|
22%
|
|
4
|
.6355
|
.5921
|
.5718
|
.5523
|
.5158
|
.4823
|
.4230
|
|
5
|
.5674
|
.5194
|
.4972
|
.4761
|
.4371
|
.4019
|
.3411
|
|
6
|
.5066
|
.4556
|
.4323
|
.4104
|
.3704
|
.3349
|
.2751
|
Using the net present value method, Project A’s net present value is
- $ 316,920
- $0
- $(265,460)
- $(316,920)
Project B’s internal rate of return is closest to
- 15%
- 18%
- 20%
- 22%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bennet Inc. uses the net present value method to evaluate capital projects. Bennet’s required rate of return is 10%. Bennet is considering two mutually exclusive projects for its manufacturing business. Both projects require an initial outlay of $120,000 and are expected to have a useful life of four years. The projected after-tax cash flows associated with these projects are as follows:
|
Year
|
Project X
|
Project Y
|
|
1
|
$40,000
|
$10,000
|
|
2
|
40,000
|
20,000
|
|
3
|
40,000
|
60,000
|
|
4
|
40,000
|
80,000
|
|
Total
|
$160,000
|
$170,000
|
Assuming adequate funds are available, which of the following project options would you recommend that Bennet’s management undertake?
- Project X only.
- Project Y only.
- Projects X and Y.
- Neither project.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 thru 3 are based on the following information:
Capital Invest Inc. uses a 12% hurdle rate for all capital expenditures and has done the following analysis for four projects for the upcoming year.
|
|
|
Project 1
|
Project 2
|
Project 3
|
Project 4
|
|
Initial capital outlay
|
$200,000
|
$298,000
|
$248,000
|
$272,000
|
|
Annual net cash inflows
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
$ 65,000
|
$100,000
|
$80,000
|
$ 95,000
|
|
|
Year 2
|
70,000
|
135,000
|
95,000
|
125,000
|
|
|
Year 3
|
80,000
|
90,000
|
90,000
|
90,000
|
|
|
Year 4
|
40,000
|
65,000
|
80,000
|
60,000
|
|
Net present value
|
(3,798)
|
4,276
|
14,064
|
14,662
|
|
Profitability index
|
98%
|
101%
|
106%
|
105%
|
|
Internal rate of return
|
11%
|
13%
|
14%
|
15%
|
Which project(s) should Capital Invest Inc. undertake during the upcoming year assuming it has no budget restrictions?
- All of the projects.
- Projects 1, 2, and 3.
- Projects 2, 3, and 4.
- Projects 1, 3, and 4.
Which project(s) should Capital Invest Inc. undertake during the upcoming year if it has only $600,000 of funds available?
- Projects 1 and 3.
- Projects 2, 3, and 4.
- Projects 2 and 3.
- Projects 3 and 4.
Which project(s) should Capital Invest Inc. undertake during the upcoming year if it has only $300,000 of capital funds available?
- Project 1.
- Projects 2, 3, and 4.
- Projects 3 and 4.
- Project 3.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Buff Co. is considering replacing an old machine with a new machine. Which of the following items is economically relevant to Buff’s decision? (Ignore income tax considerations.)
|
|
Carrying amount of old machine
|
Disposal value of new machine
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
Assume that Straper Industries is considering investing in a project with the following characteristics:
|
Initial investment
|
$500,000
|
|
Additional investment in working capital
|
10,000
|
|
Cash flows before income taxes for years 1 through 5
|
140,000
|
|
Yearly tax depreciation
|
90,000
|
|
Terminal value of investment
|
50,000
|
|
Cost of capital
|
10%
|
|
Present value of $1 received after 5 years discounted at 10%
|
.621
|
|
Present value of an ordinary annuity of $1 for 5 years at 10%
|
3.791
|
|
Marginal tax rate
|
30%
|
|
Investment life
|
5 years
|
Assume that all cash flows come at the end of the year.
What is the amount of the after-tax cash flows in year 2?
- $140,000
- $125,000
- $ 98,000
- $ 70,000
What is the net present value of the investment?
- $175,000
- $ 58,000
- $ 1,135
- $ (12,340)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information: Assume that Reston Corp. is considering investing in a project. To evaluate the project, management has developed the following cash flow projections and related probabilities.
|
Present value of future cash flows
|
Probability of occurrence
|
|
$200,000
|
.4
|
|
$500,000
|
.3
|
|
$800,000
|
.3
|
What is the expected return for the project?
- $750,000
- $500,000
- $470,000
- $400,000
Assume that the standard deviation of the returns for the project is $150,000. What is the coefficient of variation for the project?
- .2345
- .3191
- .4256
- 1.10
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Let the inverse demand curve be D(Q) = 56 − 2Q, Q = q1 + q2. Costs for each firm are a constant variable cost of 2, a unit capacity charge of 18, and setup costs of f .
(a) Graph the firstmover’s marginal cost function, given that capacity (k) is equal to 4. Derive the first mover’s marginal revenue function. On the same graph draw the first mover’s marginal revenue function for q2 equal to 6, 15, and 23.
(b) Derive the first mover’s best-response function when its marginal cost is 2 and 20. Graph these best-response functions; then for k = 8 show the first mover’s best-response function. Derive and graph the second mover’s best-response function.
(c) What is the equilibrium to the quantity subgame when k = 8? Explain why the first mover will not install a capacity less than 6 or greater than 12.
(d) For fixed costs of 75, 50, 32, and 15, find the subgame perfect equilibrium. Explain intuitively your results!
(e) For all values of f except 75, what would the subgame perfect equilibrium be if the first mover was capable of selling his capacity after the second mover decides to enter/stay out?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Let the inverse demand curve be given by P = 60 − 4Q, Q = q1 + q2. Costs for each firm are a constant variable cost of 6, a unit capacity charge of 6, and setup costs of f . The incumbent and the entrant play the game of Dixit.
(a) What is the incumbent’s marginal cost function for a given capacity? Derive the incumbent’s marginal revenue function.
(b) For k1 = 5, what is the incumbent’s best-response function? Why? Derive the entrant’s best-response function.
(c) What are the Nash equilibrium quantities in the quantity subgame when k1 = 5? Characterize the equilibrium to the quantity subgame for any k1.
(d) For fixed costs of 25 and 64 find the subgame perfect equilibrium to the game of Dixit.
(e) Why is it that the equilibrium is not the same as if the two firms had just played the simple Cournot game. Explain by showing that one firm would want to deviate from the simple Cournot equilibrium in the quantity subgame. What is the strategic move made by firm 1? Is it important that the costs of capacity be sunk?
(f) Suppose that firm 1 built capacity equal to 7. Its motivation for building this is that 7 is the limit output. Would the entrant be deterred from entry by this limit output? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Requires calculus.) A monopolist faces an inverse demand function P = 10 − Q in each of two periods A and B. Her marginal costs are 5 for period A and 5 − q A for period B. Thus, the monopolist “learns” about production in period A, so that her marginal costs fall in period B. Assume that there is no discounting of second-period income.
(a) Derive the monopoly output for period A, disregarding production in period B.
(b) Now consider the dynamic (two-period) monopoly problem. Derive the monopolist’s profit maximizing quantities in both periods. Does the monopolist’s output in period A stay the same as in the first part of the question? Explain.
(c) Suppose that in period B the monopolist (incumbent) faces an entrant with unit cost ce = 5.
Write down the first order condition for this two-stage duopoly game. Just by inspection of the first order conditions, can you compare q A 1 in the dynamic monopoly case with the strategic duopoly case? What explains the difference? What kind of equilibrium in terms of top dogs, etc. is this?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following learning-by-doing two-stage model of strategic choice. Firm 1 is an incumbent in the first period and behaves as a monopolist. In the second period firm 2 enters the market. Firm 1 has a first-period cost function of 1(q11) = 4 q11 (where qi j denotes the output of firm i in period j ), while it has a second-period cost function given by c1(q12) = (4 − 0.5q11)q12.
Firm 2’s second-period cost function is c2(q22) = 4q22. Note that industry demand in period i is given by Pi = 10 − Qi , where second-period total output is Q2 = q12 + q22.
(a) Find firm 1’s optimal, monopolist level of output in the first period (qM 11 ), without taking into account any second-period information. Also calculate its period 1 profits.
(b) Assuming that firm 1 chose q11 = qM 11 in period 1, solve for the Cournot quantity competition outputs of both firms in the second stage. Calculate firm 1’s total undiscounted profits over the two periods.
(c) Show that firm 1 can increase its total profits by altering its first-period level of output qM 11 , from the level derived in (a). [Hint: consider small changes.]
(d) Explain under the taxonomy of accommodation strategies why this is possible.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Polo Co. requires higher rates of return for projects with a life span greater than five years. Projects extending beyond five years must earn a higher specified rate of return. Which of the following capital budgeting techniques can readily accommodate this requirement?
|
|
Internal rate of return
|
Net present value
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dough Distributors has decided to increase its daily muffin purchases by 100 boxes. A box of muffins costs $2 and sells for $3 through regular stores. Any boxes not sold through regular stores are sold through Dough’s thrift store for $1. Dough assigns the following probabilities to selling additional boxes:
|
Additional sales
|
Probability
|
|
60
|
.6
|
|
100
|
.4
|
What is the expected value of Dough’s decision to buy 100 additional boxes of muffins?
- $28
- $40
- $52
- $68
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 through 5 are based on the following information:
The following is selected data for the Consumer Products division of Arron Corporations for 200X:
|
Sales
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Average invested capital (assets)
|
20,000,000
|
|
Net income
|
2,000,000
|
|
Cost of capital
|
8%
|
What is the return on sales (ROS) for the division?
- 8%
- 4%
- 10%
- 20%
What is the asset turnover ratio for the division?
- .25
- 10
- 2.5
- 8
What is the return on investment (ROI) for the division?
- 10%
- 8%
- 4%
- 2%
What is the amount of residual income (RI) for the division?
- $2,000,000
- $1,600,000
- $1,000,000
- $ 400,000
What is the amount of interest rate spread for the division?
- 8%
- 10%
- 2%
- 20%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
The following is available for Cara Corp. for 2003:
|
Sales
|
$2,000,000
|
|
|
Average invested capital
|
500,000
|
|
|
Net income
|
300,000
|
|
|
Required rate of return
|
18
|
%
|
What is the return on investment at Cara Corp.?
- 60%
- 33%
- 18%
- 15%
What is the residual income for Cara Corp.?
- $0
- $200,000
- $210,000
- $246,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following selected data pertain to the Darwin Division of Beagle Co. for 2005:
|
Sales
|
$400,000
|
|
Net income
|
40,000
|
|
Capital turnover
|
4
|
|
Imputed interest rate
|
10%
|
What was Darwin’s 2005 residual income?
- $0
- $ 4,000
- $10,000
- $30,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which combination of changes in asset turnover and income as a percentage of sales will maximize the return on investment?
|
|
Asset turnover
|
Income as a percentage of sales
|
|
a.
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
|
b.
|
Increase
|
Increase
|
|
c.
|
Decrease
|
Increase
|
|
d.
|
Decrease
|
Decrease
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for the wholesale products division of Watco:
|
Net operating profit before interest and taxes
|
$30,000,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
10,000,000
|
|
Change in net working capital
|
5,000,000
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
4,000,000
|
|
Invested capital (total assets – current liabilities)
|
50,000,000
|
|
Weighted average cost of capital
|
10%
|
|
Tax rate
|
40%
|
What is the amount of economic value added (EVA) for the division?
- $30,000,000
- $13,000,000
- $25,000,000
- $ 5,000,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An organization has an opportunity to establish a zero balance account system using four different regional banks. The total amount of the maintenance and transfer fees is estimated to be $6,000 per annum. The organization believes that it will increase the float on its operating disbursements by an average of four days, and its cost of short-term funds is 4.5%. Assuming the organization estimates its average daily operating disbursements to be $40,000 what decision should the organization make regarding this opportunity?
- Do not establish the zero balance account system because it results in estimated additional net costs of $6,000.
- Do not establish the zero balance account system because it results in estimated additional net costs of $1,200.
- Establish the zero balance account system because it results in estimated net savings of $1,200.
- Establish the zero balance account system because it results in estimated net savings of $7,200.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is not a correct comparison of a just-in-time system with a traditional system?
|
|
Traditional
|
Just-in-time
|
|
a.
|
Longer lead times
|
Shorter lead times
|
|
b.
|
Inventory is an asset
|
Inventory is a liability
|
|
c.
|
Some scrap tolerated
|
Zero defects desired
|
|
d.
|
Lot size based on immediate need
|
Lot size based on formulas
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to material X that is used by Sage Co.:
|
Annual usage in units
|
20,000
|
|
Working days per year
|
250
|
|
Safety stock in units
|
800
|
|
Normal lead time in working days
|
30
|
Units of material X will be required evenly throughout the year. The order point is
- 800
- 1,600
- 2,400
- 3,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
Ethan, Inc. has seasonal demand for its products and management is considering whether level production or seasonal production should be implemented. The firms’ short-term interest cost is 8%, and management has developed the following information to make the decision:
|
|
Alternative 1 Level production
|
Alternative 2 Seasonal production
|
|
Average inventory
|
$2,000,000
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Production costs
|
$6,000,000
|
$6,050,000
|
Which alternative should be accepted and how much is saved over the other alternative?
- Alternative 1 with $500,000 in savings.
- Alternative 2 with $50,000 in savings.
- Alternative 2 with $10,000 in savings.
- Alternative 1 with $10,000 in savings.
At what rate of short-term interest rate would the two alternatives have the same cost?
- 6%
- 9%
- 10%
- 12%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
Effective September 1, a company initiates seasonal dating as a component of its credit policy, allowing wholesale customers to make purchases early but not requiring payment until the retail selling season begins. Sales occur as follows:
|
Date of sale
|
Quantity sold
|
|
September 1
|
300 units
|
|
October 1
|
100 units
|
|
November 1
|
100 units
|
|
December 1
|
150 units
|
|
January 1
|
50 units
|
- Each unit has a selling price of $10, regardless of the date of sale.
- The terms of sale are 2/10 net 30, January 1 dating.
- All sales are on credit.
- All customers take the discount and abide by the terms of the discount policy.
- All customers take advantage of the new seasonal dating policy.
- The peak selling season for all customers is mid-November to late December.
For the selling firm, which of the following is not an expected advantage to initiating seasonal dating?
- Reduced storage costs.
- Reduced credit costs.
- Attractive credit terms for customers.
- Reduced uncertainty about sales volume.
For sales after the initiation of the seasonal dating policy on September 1, total collections on or before January 11 will be
- $0
- $6,370
- $6,860
- $7,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The sales manager at Ryan Company feels confident that if the credit policy at Ryan’s were changed, sales would increase ancd consequently, the company would utilize excess capacity. The two credit proposals being considered are as follows:
|
|
Proposal A
|
Proposal B
|
|
Increase in sales
|
$500,000
|
$600,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
20%
|
20%
|
|
Bad debt percentage
|
5%
|
5%
|
|
Increase in operating profits
|
$ 75,000
|
$ 90,000
|
|
Desired return on sales
|
15%
|
15%
|
Currently, payment terms are net 30. The proposed payment terms for Proposal A and Proposal B are net 45 and net 90, respectively. An analysis to compare these two proposals for the change in credit policy would include all of the following factors except the
- Cost of funds for Ryan.
- Current bad debt experience.
- Impact on the current customer base of extending terms to only certain customers.
- Bank loan covenants on days’ sales outstanding.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that Williams Corp is financed with a heavy reliance on short-term debt and short-term rates have increased. How do these facts impact the interest expense, net income, and financial risk for Williams Corp?
|
|
Interest expense
|
Net income
|
Financial risk
|
|
a.
|
Decreases
|
Decreases
|
Decreases
|
|
b.
|
Increases
|
Decreases
|
Increase
|
|
c.
|
Decrease
|
Increases
|
Increases
|
|
d.
|
Increases
|
Decreases
|
Decreases
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
CyberAge Outlet, a relatively new store, is a café that offers customers the opportunity to browse the Internet or play computer games at their tables while they drink coffee. The customer pays a fee based on the amount of time spent signed on to the computer. The store also sells books, tee shirts, and computer accessories. CyberAge has been paying all of its bills on the last day of the payment period, thus forfeiting all supplier discounts. Shown below are data on CyberAge’s two major vendors, including average monthly purchases and credit terms.
|
Vendor
|
Average monthly purchases
|
Credit terms
|
|
Web Master
|
$25,000
|
2/10, net 30
|
|
Softidee
|
50,000
|
5/10, net 90
|
Assuming a 360-day year and that CyberAge continues paying on the last day of the credit period, the company’s weighted-average annual interest rate for trade credit (ignoring the effects of compounding) for these two vendors is
- 27.0%
- 25.2%
- 28.0%
- 30.2%
Should CyberAge use trade credit and continue paying at the end of the credit period?
- Yes, if the cost of alternative short-term financing is less.
- Yes, if the firm’s weighted-average cost of capital is equal to its weighted-average cost of trade credit.
- No, if the cost of alternative long-term financing is greater.
- Yes, if the cost of alternative short-term financing is greater.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQZ Telecom is considering a project for the coming year that will cost $50 million. DQZ plans to use the following combination of debt and equity to finance the investment:
- Issue $15 million of 20-year bonds at a price of 101, with a coupon rate of 8%, and flotation costs of 2% of par.
- Use $35 million of funds generated from earnings.
The equity market is expected to earn 12%. US Treasury bonds are currently yielding 5%. The beta coefficient for DQZ is estimated to be .60. DQZ is subject to an effective corporate income tax rate of 40%.
The before-tax cost of DQZ’s planned debt financing, net of flotation costs, in the first year is
- 11.80%
- 8.08%
- 10.00%
- 7.92%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 through 3 are based on the following information:
Watco, Inc. issued $1,000,000 in 8% bonds, maturing in ten years and paying interest semiannually. The bonds were issued at face value.
What can you assume about the interest rates at the time the bonds were issued?
- The market rate for this bond was about 8%.
- The nominal rate of interest was about 8%.
- The coupon rate on the bond includes no premium for credit risk.
- The risk-free interest rate is about 6%
If the market rate of interest for this type of bond increases to 9%, which of the following is true?
- The market value of Watco’s bond will increase.
- The market value of Watco’s bond will decrease.
- The effect will depend on the change in the LIBOR rate.
- The effect cannot be predicted.
Assume that one of Watco’s bonds with $1,000 face is currently selling for $950. What is the current yield on the bond?
- 8.00%
- 9.00%
- 7.56%
- 8.42%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
The following information is available for Rothenberg, Inc.:
|
Balance sheet
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
$
|
500,000
|
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
|
4,000,000
|
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$
|
4,500,000
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$
|
30,000
|
|
|
Long-term debt
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
|
Common stock
|
|
200,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
1,770,000
|
|
|
Total liabilities and
|
|
|
|
|
stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$
|
4,500,000
|
|
|
Budget income information
|
100,000 units
|
105,000 units
|
|
Sales
|
$
|
3,000,000
|
$3,150,000
|
|
Expenses
|
|
(2,800,000)
|
(2,850,000)
|
|
Operating income (EBIT)
|
$
|
200,000
|
$ 300,000
|
|
Earnings per share (EPS)
|
|
$0.20
|
$1.20
|
What is Rothenberg’s degree of operating leverage?
- 1/5
- 10
- 5
- 2/3
What is the degree of financial leverage for Rothenberg, Inc.?
- 10
- 5
- 1/6
- 1/10
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
Management of Russell Corporation is considering the following two potential capital structures for a newly acquired business.
|
Alternative 1
|
|
|
Long-term debt, 6% interest
|
$3,000,000
|
|
Common equity
|
$3,000,000
|
|
Cost of common equity, 10%
|
|
|
Marginal tax rate, 15%
|
|
|
Alternative 2
|
|
|
Long-term debt, 7% interest
|
$5,000,000
|
|
Common equity
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost of common equity, 12%
|
|
|
Marginal tax rate, 15%
|
|
Which of the following statements is not true if management decides to accept Alternative 1?
- Alternative 1 is the more conservative capital structure.
- Alternative 1 provides the greatest amount of financial leverage.
- Net income will be less variable under Alternative 1.
- Total interest expense will be less under Alternative 1.
Which of the alternatives has the lowest weighted-average cost of capital and how much is the differential?
- Alternative 1 by 1.5%
- Alternative 2 by 0.59%
- Alternative 1 by 0.167%
- The alternatives have equal weighted-average cost of capital.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
|
Martin Corporation STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION December 31, 2004 (Dollars in millions)
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Current assets
|
$
|
75
|
|
|
Plant and equipment
|
|
250
|
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$
|
325
|
|
Liabilities and shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$
|
46
|
|
|
Long-term debt (12%)
|
|
64
|
|
|
Common equity:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock, $1 par
|
|
10
|
|
|
|
Additional paid in capital
|
|
100
|
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
105
|
|
|
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$
|
325
|
Additional data
- The long-term debt was originally issued at par ($1,000/bond) and is currently trading at $1,250 per bond.
- Martin Corporation can now issue debt at 150 basis points over US Treasury bonds.
- The current risk-free rate (US Treasury bonds) is 7%.
- Martin’s common stock is currently selling at $32 per share.
- The expected market return is currently 15%.
- The beta value for Martin is 1.25.
- Martin’s effective corporate income tax rate is 40%
Martin Corporation’s current net cost of debt is
- 5.5%
- 7.0%
- 5.1%
- 8.5%
Using the Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM), Martin Corporation’s current cost of common equity is
- 8.75%
- 10.00%
- 15.00%
- 17.00%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:
DQZ Telecom is considering a project for the coming year that will cost $50 million. DQZ plans to use the following combination of debt and equity to finance the investment.
- Issue $15 million of 20-year bonds at a price of 101, with a coupon rate of 8%, and flotation costs of 2% of par.
- Use $35 million of funds generated from earnings.
The equity market is expected to earn 12%. US Treasury bonds are currently yielding 5%. The beta coefficient for DQZ is estimated to be .60. DQZ is subject to an effective corporate income tax rate of 40%.
Assume that the after-tax costs of debt is 7% and the cost of equity is 12%. Determine the weighted-average cost of capital.
- 10.50%
- 8.50%
- 9.50%
- 6.30%
The Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) computes the expected return on a security by adding the risk-free rate of return to the incremental yield of the expected market return that is adjusted by the company’s beta. Compute DQZ’s expected rate of return.
- 9.20%
- 12.20%
- 7.20%
- 12.00%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 through 2 are based on the following information:
A new company requires $1 million of financing and is considering two arrangements as shown in the table below.
|
Arrangement
|
Amount of equity raised
|
Amount of debt financing
|
Before-tax cost of debt
|
|
#1
|
$700,000
|
$300,000
|
8% per annum
|
|
#2
|
$300,000
|
$700,000
|
10% per annum
|
In the first year of operations, the company is expected to have sales revenues of $500,000, cost of sales of $200,000, and general and administrative expenses of $100,000. The tax rate is 30%, and there are no other items on the income statement. All earnings are paid out as dividends at year-end.
If the cost of equity were 12%, then the weighted-average cost of capital under Arrangement #1, to the nearest full percentage point, would be
- 8%
- 10%
- 11%
- 12%
Which of the following statements comparing the two financing arrangements is true?
- The company will have a higher expected gross margin under Arrangement #1.
- The company will have a higher degree of operating leverage under Arrangement #2.
- The company will have higher interest expense under Arrangement #1.
- The company will have higher expected tax expense under Arrangement #1.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Russell Inc. is evaluating four independent investment proposals. The expected returns and standard deviations for each of these proposals are presented below.
|
Investment proposal
|
Expected returns
|
Standard deviation
|
|
I
|
16%
|
10%
|
|
II
|
14%
|
10%
|
|
III
|
20%
|
11%
|
|
IV
|
22%
|
15%
|
Which one of the investment proposals has the least relative level of risk?
- Investment I.
- Investment II.
- Investment III.
- Investment IV.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following:
Natco has the following investment portfolio.
|
|
Expected return
|
Investment
|
Beta
|
|
Investment A
|
15%
|
$100,000
|
1.2
|
|
Investment B
|
10%
|
$300,000
|
-0.5
|
|
Investment C
|
8%
|
$200,000
|
1.5
|
|
Investment D
|
8%
|
$100,000
|
-1.0
|
What is the expected return of the portfolio?
- 10.25%
- 9.86%
- 12.5%
- 11.35%
If management decided to sell one of the investments, which one should be selected?
- Investment A.
- Investment B.
- Investment C.
- Investment D.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A US company currently has domestic operations only. It is considering an equal-size investment in either Canada or Britain. The data on expected rate of return and the risk associated with each of these proposed investments are given below.
|
Proposed investment
|
Mean return
|
Standard deviation
|
|
British Investment
|
22%
|
10%
|
|
Canadian Investment
|
28%
|
15%
|
The mean return on the company’s current, domestic only, business is 20% with a standard deviation of 15%. Using the above data and the correlation coefficients, the company calculated the following portfolio risk and return (based on a ratio of 50% US domestic operations and 50% international operations).
|
Proposed investment
|
Mean return
|
Standard deviation
|
|
US and Britain
|
21%
|
3%
|
|
US and Canada
|
24%
|
15%
|
The company plans to select the optimal combination of countries based on risk and return for the domestic and international investments taken together. Because the company is new to the international business environment, it is relatively risk averse. Based on the above data, which one of the following alternatives provides the best risk-adjusted return to the firm?
- Undertake the British investment.
- Undertake the Canadian investment.
- Do not undertake either investment.
- Unable to determine based on data given.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The capital budgeting technique known as payback period uses
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
Time value of money
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The capital budgeting technique known as accounting rate of return uses
|
|
Revenue over life of project
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
a.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
No
|
No
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Royal Casino
Waiters and waitresses at the Royal Casino’s main dining room in Las Vegas use handheld, radio-frequency devices to take diners’ orders and relay the orders to the kitchen. The data entry devices weigh just a few ounces and open like a wallet to reveal a keypad and a small screen. The devices are connected by radio signal to the dining room’s computer. As diners place their orders, the device prompts the waiter through the order. For instance, if the customer asks for a sirloin steak, the system asks the waiter to choose a key corresponding to the desired degree of doneness (i.e., rare, medium rare, and so forth).
When the customer has completed ordering, the waiter hits a key to indicate that fact. The system prints or displays the incoming order for cooks in the kitchen. When the dining party has finished its meal, the waiter indicates this fact by pressing the appropriate key on the handheld device. The system communicates, over conventional wiring, with a point-of-sale (POS) computer at the cash register station, which prints out a guest check. At this time, the system also records the sales event data on the host computer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
National Australia Bank recently implemented data mining tools from the SAS Institute to aid particularly in the area of predictive marketing. The tools are used to extract and analyze data in the bank’s Oracle database. Specific applications currently focus on assessing how competitors’ initiatives are affecting the bank’s bottom line. The data mining tools are used to generate market analysis models from historical data recorded in event-level form. The addition of data mining tools is one more step in a strategic set of initiatives focusing on the development of a comprehensive data warehouse. National Australia Bank considers the data warehousing initiatives to be crucial to maintaining an edge in the increasingly competitive financial services marketplace.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
National Data Corporation/Health Information Services (NDC/HIS) has found a way to leverage its extensive database of pharmaceutical firm data into a new market of information services through the use of data mining tools. A long-time supplier of information to the pharmaceutical industry, NDC/HIS recently released a new subscription service, Intellect Q&A, that provides in-depth information that subscribers can mine for key data. One happy client is Lowe McAdams Health Care, a Manhattan through NDC/HIS data and developing detailed financial information on the client that the client’s own internal reporting systems had yet to compile. The client was so impressed by Lowe’s depth of knowledge that they signed the contract. NDC/HIS was also thrilled as it created an excellent example for demonstration in selling access to their data warehouse to other potential clients.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FAI Insurance group also recently implemented a large data warehouse. Insurance companies are broadly recognized to be heavily reliant on demographic data that support assessment of insurance risk. FAI Insurance decided to use its data warehouse to reassess the relationship between historical risk from insurance policies and the pricing structure used by its underwriters. The data analysis capabilities should allow FAI to better serve its customers by more accurately assessing the insurance risk associated with a customer request. Developers of the data warehouse note that the models that can be built through data mining are much larger than those the company could previously develop. Through the use of neural networks and linear statistics, the analysts comb the data for trends and relationships. Out of 25 users currently on the research system linked to the data warehouse, 12 researchers work almost full-time on mining the data in the system. The strong relationship between the information technology group and the researchers has resulted in what FAI believes to be the most effective data-mining and data-warehousing approach in the industry. advertising agency.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Background Information
Midwest Insurance Co. is a major property/casualty underwriter based in St. Louis. It uses more than 3,000 independent insurance agents to market its products and collect premiums. In the past, agents typically have remitted the premiums to Midwest at a predetermined time each month by mailing the checks to a lockbox site or to a regional office of the insurance company. This method of cash collections has been slow, and accounting for the agents’ payments has been fraught with problems. Therefore, Midwest sought the help of Nationwide Bank (NB) in developing a more automated collection process. NB responded by developing an ACHbased “Customer-Initiated Payment Service (CIPS)” that allows the independent agents to pay Midwest with ACH debits initiated via a toll-free phone call or over the Internet. The next section describes how the CIPS process works; for simplicity, the description is limited to telephone-initiated payments.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Panhandle Department Stores operates at 30 locations in Texas and Oklahoma. The company’s headquarters are in Oklahoma City. The company accepts cash, national credit cards (VISA and MasterCard), and its own Panhandle charge card (PCC). Procedures for cash receipts are standard at each location. PCC billing and the treasury function are located at headquarters.
Customers present their purchases at a central checkout location at each store. Point-of-sale registers provide immediate updates to quantities on hand in the inventory master data, compile detailed data on sales, and accumulate “proof figures” used in cashing out the drawer at the end of each shift. Each store’s registers are tied to the central computer system in Oklahoma City.
Throughout the shift, clerks process the several forms of sales. At the end of the shift, the next clerk resets the proof totals. The front manager takes a hard copy of the proof totals for the shift completed and the drawer of the clerk whose shift was completed to the cashier, for “proving.” The cashier reconciles the drawer to the totals, prepares a two-part “cash out report” for each clerk on the shift, and updates the “over and short summary” maintained for each clerk. After the work for each shift is complete, these reports are sent to the front manager for review. Meanwhile, the clerk for the next shift has installed his own cash drawer and has begun processing sales. Store deposits are made whenever the cash-on-hand balance reaches $25,000 and at the end of the day. For each deposit, the system prints out a deposit slip; a designated employee makes the trip to the local bank. The employee brings back a receipted deposit slip. Daily, the cashier prepares the national credit card (NCC) settlement sheets in duplicate for each credit company. One copy of the settlement sheet and the supporting charge sales slips are submitted to the appropriate charge company for payment. The PCC slips, a copy of the NCC settlement sheet, a copy of the cash out report, and the day’s deposit slips are sent to Oklahoma City at 5:00 p.m. by courier mail.
In the cash receipts department at Oklahoma City, a sales report is obtained from the process at the end of each day. That report is reconciled to the cash out report and the deposit slips. The PCC slips are reconciled to that line on the cash out report. The PCC slips are then sent to data processing, where data preparation clerks enter the charges into a batch file on the computer. At 9:00 p.m. the batch is used to update the accounts receivable master data.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Panhandle Department Stores (II)
Before starting this case, review the facts in Case B. Reimbursements from the national credit cards are deposited directly in the company’s main Oklahoma City bank, and the bank notifies Panhandle of these receipts. The cash receipts department reconciles these receipts to the NCC settlement sheets that previously had been submitted to the card companies (the settlement sheets had been filed by date until this time). All receipts from the company’s proprietary cards (PCCs) are received in Oklahoma City. The company uses a turnaround document, so it receives a check and a portion of the monthly charge card statement (on which the customer has filled in the amount remitted). The cash receipts clerk examines the check against the amount written on the document and, in a space reserved, enters the amount received on the document so that it can be computer scanned. Checks and turnaround documents are batched. The documents are sent to data processing. The checks are deposited, and the deposit slip is photocopied. Copies of the batch totals and the deposit slips are filed separately by date. A copy of the deposit slip is sent to the treasurer’s office.
The turnaround documents are then scanned. Each evening at 10:00 p.m., customers’ accounts are updated with scanned data, and a cash receipts listing is produced and sent to cash receipts each morning, where it is checked against and filed with the related batch totals. A copy of the cash receipts listing is sent to the treasurer’s office.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Background Information
Down Under Airlines (DUA) processes over 400 million tickets a year. The process of issuing the tickets is highly automated; a record of each ticket sold is stored in DUA’s database. But when passengers turn in tickets, gate agents stuff the flight coupons into envelopes and ship them to DUA’s Denver headquarters. Because of discrepancies between the original records housed in the ticket database and actual ticket use as reflected by the flight coupons (see the following NOTE), DUA, like other airlines, has to match every coupon against every ticket in the database in order to accurately account for passenger revenues. With the volume of tickets involved, manual matching is a daunting task. Image processing to the rescue! (Note: For example, passengers might use a ticket from one airline to fly with another, or they might use only the A-B leg of an A-B-C flight, and so forth.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Airlines have issued paperless tickets for several years now. Recently, they have begun experimenting with allowing travelers to print their own tickets using special bar coding technology located at commercial customer locations. The bar-code ticket system can be used to communicate with business customers’ accounting systems and other internal databases to speed up the billing process. These tickets would be scanned at the airport in the same way as paper tickets or airport generated boarding cards, when the passenger boards the plane.
a. Describe the advantages to the airline of this process. Compare it to both travel-agent-issued paper tickets and to paperless tickets.
b. Describe the advantages to the customer of this process. c. Review Capsule
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Another approach to digital image processing is to render the source form of a bill as a digital image and to transmit that image to the customer. The utilities industry is one of many industries attempting to make billing processes all digital. Killen & Associates, Inc., estimates that utility companies would save $1.2 billion annually by going to electronic billing and requiring electronic payment. However, Southern California Edison, the first utility company experimenting with electronic billing, has not seen any such savings to date during its pilot implementation. Electronic payment has not been mandatory for customers, and the savings will not come until consumer interest in electronic billing and payment rises. Still, Southern California Edison continues to support the project with the belief that savings will come in the future.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lifeline Medical Supplies
Lifeline Medical Supplies makes a variety of medical supplies such as test tubes, thermometers, and disposable surgical garments. Lifeline employs the following procedures for purchases and accounts payable. The supplies manager orders goods and maintains perpetual inventory records. The records include reorder points for all regularly used items. The supplies manager prepares a requisition on a two-part prenumbered form. After signing the requisition, he files one copy by requisition number and sends the other copy to the purchasing department. The production manager also must approve requisitions for items that cost over $100 and are not covered by a blanket order.
Some supplies that are used in large quantities come under “blanket” purchase orders. Blanket orders are based on agreements between Lifeline and different vendors to buy a minimum amount of supplies over a specified period of time at a guaranteed price. Purchase requisitions against these orders do not require the production manager’s approval, as long as the agreed minimum is not surpassed. The purchasing department keeps the blanket orders filed by item name.
The purchasing department checks a requisition for proper approval and selects a vendor. A five-part prenumbered purchase order is prepared. Copies are sent to the vendor, receiving department, accounts payable, and the supplies manager. The purchasing agent records the current purchase on the blanket order if applicable and files its purchase order and requisition copies by purchase order number in the open order file. The receiving department files its copy in a file by purchase order number. The supplies manager files his copy with its corresponding requisition.
The receiving department counts the goods when they are received, compares the count to the packing slip, and prepares a four-part receiving report. Copies of the receiving report are sent to the supplies manager, the purchasing department, and accounts payable. The receiving department files its copy of the receiving report and the packing slip with its copy of the purchase order. The supplies manager updates the perpetual inventory records when he receives the receiving report and then files the purchase order, purchase requisition, and receiving report by purchase order number. The purchasing department files its copy with the order in the open order file. The purchasing department receives two-part invoices from the vendors. The invoices are compared by a clerk to the purchase order and the receiving report from the open order file. The clerk initials them if they are accurate. The purchasing agent must approve any price or quantity variances that are more than 5 percent over the price or quantity quoted on the purchase order. One copy of the approved invoice is sent to accounts payable. The purchase order, purchase requisition, invoice, and receiving report are then filed in the closed order file by purchase order number. The accounts payable department receives purchase orders and approved invoices from the purchasing department and receiving reports from the receiving department. As each one is received, it is filed in the pending file by vendor name. When all the documents for an order are received, a clerk posts the payable amount to the payable voucher for the particular vendor. A disbursement voucher is then prepared and attached to the order, receiving report, and invoice. This package is then given to the accounts payable manager for review and approval. The manager gives the approved disbursement vouchers to a second clerk. This clerk batches and totals the approved vouchers and prepares a batch summary. The batch summary is sent to the accounting department. A third clerk completes a two-part, prenumbered check/remittance advice form for each disbursement voucher. The check/remittance advices and the disbursement vouchers are sent to the cashier. The cashier totals the checks and compares that total to the total of all the batches. She then signs the checks with the treasurer’s signature using a check-signing machine that she has in her office.
She then places in envelopes the first copies of the check/remittances and sends them to the vendors. The second copy is sent to the accounting department.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For the company assigned by your instructor, draw a systems flowchart. If any exception routines are described in the narrative, they should be shown on a separate page (referenced through an offpage connector), so that the exception routines will not clutter the flowcharting of normal activities.
3 For the company assigned by your instructor, prepare a control matrix for the purchasing and/or the receiving functions only, as appropriate for the case in question. Observe the following specific instructions:
a. Your choice of recommended control plans should come from this chapter plus any other control plans from through that are germane to your company’s process.
b. Annotate the systems flowchart control plans are “present” (codes P-1 . . . P-n) or where they are “missing” (codes M-1 . . . M-n).
c. Because your explanations of the cell entries are as important as the cell entries themselves, pay particular attention to step 5 in “Steps in Preparing a Control Matrix,”.
d. In the appropriate control goal columns of the matrix, (1) identify the specific resources of this process, for which we want to ensure security of resources, and (2) indicate the master data, for which we want to ensure update accuracy (UA) and update completeness (UC).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Baby Bell Telephone Co.
Baby Bell Telephone Co. uses a computer-assisted PtoP process called PRP (purchasing, receiving, payables) that includes an EDI function. An abbreviated description of the purchasing portion of PRP follows. (The description covers only the purchase by field technicians of items to be delivered by suppliers directly to the technicians in the field.)
The company’s field technicians continually need to replace items such as small hand tools, wire, and power tools. (Note: Assume that an external entity called “Field Inventory System” triggers the PRP system by identifying a “Field inventory replacement need.”) They do so by using handheld computers to log into the PRP system. Users have login IDs and passwords that allow them access only to information for which they have clearance. Once logged in, a technician enters the requested item’s stock number. PRP presents the user with a display showing the item’s description, size, and so forth. Information on price, brand, or supplier is not provided to most users because it is information they don’t need to know. To complete the order request, the user visually verifies the information shown in the display, keys in the quantity ordered, and presses the “enter” key.
PRP records the order in the purchase order master data (disk). The order is routed through a wide area network to the workstation of an available order entry clerk in the purchasing department. The clerk enters a code that requests PRP to match the item’s stock number with the supplier code in the inventory master data. The system then retrieves the supplier’s standing data (e.g., name, address, whether or not an EDI vendor, and so forth) from the vendor master data and displays it on the workstation screen. The purchasing clerk next enters another code that either transmits the order electronically to the vendor through an EDI VAN or prints a hard copy purchase order document that is mailed to the vendor, in the case of a supplier that does not have EDI capability. In either case, the purchase order master data are updated to show that the PO has been issued. Hard copy purchase orders are put in envelopes and mailed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Listed below are 12 process failures that indicate weaknesses in control.
Process Failures
1. A cash disbursements event was updated on the wrong record in the accounts payable master data because the data entry clerk transposed digits in the vendor identification number.
2. Several scanned invoice documents were lost and did not get recorded.
3. The amount of a cash disbursement event was erroneous, resulting in a negative balance in the accounts payable master data.
4. Supplies were purchased from a vendor found on an auction site. The supplies arrived late, and were of poor quality.
5. A purchasing agent ordered unneeded inventory items from a supplier company of which he is one of the officers.
6. The total shown on a vendor’s invoice was greater than the sum of the invoice details, resulting in an overpayment to the vendor.
7. The vendor invoiced for goods that were never delivered. The invoice was paid in its full amount.
8. The vendor shipped goods that were never ordered. The invoice for those goods was paid.
9. The unit prices the vendor charged were in excess of those that had been negotiated. The invoice rendered by the vendor was paid.
10. Goods were stolen by storeroom personnel. When the shortage was discovered, the storeroom personnel claimed that the goods had never been delivered to them from the receiving department.
11. A vendor submitted an invoice in duplicate. The invoice got paid twice.
12. Because of several miscellaneous errors occurring over a number of years, the total of the outstanding vendor payable balances shows a large discrepancy from the balance reflected general ledger.
REQUIRED: List the numbers 1 through 12 on your solution sheet. For each of the 12 process failures described above, provide a twoto three-sentence description of the control plan that you believe would best address that deficiency. Obviously, there could be more than one plan for a particular situation. However, select only one plan for each of the 12 process failures and include in your description a justification of why you believe it is best. When in doubt, opt for the plan that is preventive in nature, as opposed to plans that are detective or corrective.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Uses of Electronic Data Interchange for the PtoP Process
Kaiser Permanente of Southern California is a pioneer in trying to cut medical costs. One more way to do that is through the accounts payable and cash disbursements process. The Southern California region alone processes more than 1 million invoices and 800,000 claims with over 500,000 payments. A small cut in the cost of processing each transaction adds up quickly. The solution was to move to EDI for its patient care providers—both inside and outside the managed care program. Kaiser implemented the ANSI X12 837 healthcare claims standard specifically designed for the detailed health care information required for claims processing. In cases where the provider only accepts a check, check processing has been outsourced at a savings of 35%–40%. For vendors who accept electronic funds transfers (EFT), the savings are even greater.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Uses of B2B Marketplaces for the PtoP Process
A trend in the B2B electronic marketplaces environment has been a move toward consolidation of the numerous marketplaces that popped up quickly in the early 2000s. One example is the merger between MyAircraft and AirNewco—two early entrants into the electronic marketplaces for supplying aviation-related supplies and materials. MyAircraft was a joint venture by supplier organizations such as United Technologies Corp., Honeywell International, Inc. (which at the time of this writing is in the process of merging with General Electric), and BF Goodrich Co. On the other hand, AirNewco was a joint venture by buyer organizations, including eight major international airlines and the United Parcel Service of America, Inc. The result of the merger is a single major exchange that represents the interests of both suppliers and buyers.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Intelligence
Faced with declining game attendance and lower television ratings, the National Basketball Association (NBA) has reacted swiftly in applying business intelligence tools to facilitate customer relationship management. The NBA currently assembles information about fans who purchase tickets from a number of sources around the world, including Ticketmaster, the Home Shopping Network, All-Star nominating ballots, New York’s NBA Store, databases of individual teams, and the NBA.com Web site. Each NBA team will soon be able to access the combined data in a data warehouse and use business intelligence applications to analyze the data. Teams will be able to tell if a customer prefers to purchase tickets when a particular opposing team is in town or at specific times of the year. The data analysis will also be used to market sports merchandise directly to select customers through a customer relationship management capability.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Troy Toys is a retailer operating in several cities. The individual store managers deposit daily collections at a local bank in a noninterest-bearing checking account. Twice per week, the local bank issues a depository transfer check (DTC) to the central bank at headquarters. The controller of the company is considering using a wire transfer instead. The additional cost of each transfer would be $25; collections would be accelerated by two days; and the annual interest rate paid by the central bank is 7.2% (0.02% per day). At what amount of dollars transferred would it be economically feasible to use a wire transfer instead of the DTC? Assume a 360-day year.
- It would never be economically feasible.
- $125,000 or above.
- Any amount greater than $173.
- Any amount greater than $62,500.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A firm is evaluating whether to establish a concentration banking system. The bank will charge $5,000 per year for maintenance and transfer fees. The firm estimates that the float will be reduced by two days if the concentration banking is put into place. Assuming that average daily receipts are $115,000 and short-term interest rates are 4%, what decision should the firm make regarding the concentration banking system?
- Do not establish the concentration banking system because the net cost is $5,000.
- Do not establish the concentration banking system because the net cost is $21,000.
- Establish the concentration banking system because the net benefit is $115,000.
- Establish the concentration banking system because the net benefit is $4,200.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A firm is evaluating whether to establish a lockbox system. The bank will charge $30,000 per year for the lockbox and the firm will save approximately $8,000 in internal processing costs. The firm estimates that the float will be reduced by three days if the lockbox system is put into place. Assuming that average daily cash receipts are $350,000 and short-term interest rates are 4%, what decision should the firm make regarding the lockbox system?
- Do not establish the lockbox system because the net cost is $30,000.
- Do not establish the lockbox system because the net cost is $22,000.
- Establish the lockbox system because the net benefit is $12,000.
- Establish the lockbox system because the net benefit is $20,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A business receives $235,648.98 today from its bank and signs a one-year note that has a maturity value of $250,000.00. Determine the effective annual interest rate on this loan, and determine the nominal annual rate assuming semiannual compounding. You may find the following form helpful.
|
Half-Year
|
Half-Year Start of Period
|
Interest at ?%
|
Loan Balance at End of Period
|
|
First
|
$235,648.98
|
|
|
|
Second
|
|
|
$250,000.00
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The retirement savings account example in which you invest $10,000 today and earn 5 percent annual interest (compounded annually) for 20 years. That example assumes that the 5 percent annual interest remains the same over all years. Instead, assume that you earn 4.5 percent annual interest during the first ten years and 5.5 percent annual interest during the last ten years. Are you better off in this situation?
Suppose you just received your $25,000 year-end bonus. Instead of buying a new car, you decide to put the entire $25,000 in a qualified tax-deferred retirement investment account. You’re 55 years old and plan to retire when you’re 65 years old. You’ve done some research and have come up with two options for where to put your money: One is a safe, conservative investment vehicle that should earn an annual 4.5 percent interest rate (compounded annually), and the other is a more risky investment that has a good chance of being worth $45,000 ten years later, but there’s some chance that it could be worth less than this amount. Compare your two options.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your business borrows $100,000 from a bank. You and the bank negotiate an installment loan in which you will pay off the loan over four years. The effective annual interest rate is 6 percent. The bank wants your business to amortize one-fourth of the principal amount each year. Amortize means to pay down the principal value of the loan. At the end of the first year, for instance, your business has to pay $25,000 on the principal balance of the loan plus interest for that year, and so on for the following three years. You sign the note to the bank and receive $100,000, which is deposited in your business”s checking account. Using the basic premise of the preceding question, suppose the bank wants equal payments at the end of each year. (In the preceding answer, the total payment varies year to year.) What is the annual payment on the loan under these terms?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose a business borrows $1,000,000 from a bank. The annual interest rate is 7.5 percent and the loan is for four years. The bank wants the business to make payments at the end of each year such that the principal of the loan is amortized in four equal amounts. Determine the annual payments required under the terms of this loan. You may find the following form helpful:
|
Year
|
Loan Balance at
Start of Year
|
Interest at
7.5%
|
Principal
Payment
|
Total Payment
to Bank
|
Loan Balance at
End of Year
|
|
1
|
$100,000.00
|
$75,000.00
|
$250,000.00
|
$325,000.00
|
$750,000.00
|
|
2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose a business borrows $1,000,000 from a bank. The annual interest rate is 7.5 percent and the loan is for four years. The bank wants the business to make equal payments at the end of each year such that the principal of the loan is completely amortized (paid off) by the end of the fourth year. Determine the amount of annual payment required under the terms of the loan. You may find the following form helpful:
|
Year
|
Loan Balance at
Start of Year
|
Interest at
7.5%
|
Principal
Payment
|
Total Payment
to Bank
|
Loan Balance at
End of Year
|
|
1
|
$100,000.00
|
$75,000.00
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
$0.00
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
To be conservative, assume that your retirement account will earn 4.8 percent income per year, compounded monthly (because you make monthly contributions). Although you may increase your monthly contributions in the future if your salary increases, at the present time, you can”t forecast an increase. So you assume that $400 will be contributed into your retirement account at the end of each month. Determine the balance in your retirement account at the end of 20 years. Each month, you put $250 into your retirement account, and your employer matches $150, so $400 is invested each month. Looking ahead, you wonder how much your retirement account will be worth when you retire in 20 years. You assume that your annual rate of income will be 5.4 percent over the next 20 years. Determine the future value of your retirement account 20 years from now.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You invested $1,000,000 today and receive $50,000 at the end of each year for four years. At the end of the fourth year, you liquidate the investment for $1,000,000. Determine the annual ROI for the investment, and prove your answer. You may find the following form helpful:
|
Cash Flow at End of Year
|
|
Year
|
Investment Balance
at Start of Year
|
Total Amount
|
Earnings at
?%
|
Capital
Recovery
|
Investment Balance
at End of Year
|
|
1
|
$1,000,000
|
$50,000
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
$50,000
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
$50,000
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
$1,050,000
|
|
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You invest $100,000 today. You receive $29,656.22 at the end of each year for four years. Determine the annual ROI on the investment, and prove your answer. You may find the following form helpful:
|
Cash Flow at End of Year
|
|
Year
|
Investment Balance
at Start of Year
|
Total Amount
|
Earnings at
?%
|
Capital
Recovery
|
Investment Balance
at End of Year
|
|
1
|
$100,000
|
$29,656
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
$29,656
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
$29,656
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
$29,656
|
|
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You invest $1,000,000 today. You would like to earn 6.5 percent ROI each year for four years and recover $250,000 capital each year. Determine the annual amounts of return for each year you need to meet your objectives. You may find the following form helpful:
|
Cash Flow at End of Year
|
|
Year
|
Investment Balance
at Start of Year
|
Total Amount
|
Earnings at
?%
|
Capital
Recovery
|
Investment Balance
at End of Year
|
|
1
|
$100,000
|
|
|
$250,000
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
|
$250,000
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
$250,000
|
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
$250,000
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You invest $100,000 today. The year-end cash flows from the investment are as follows: year 1 = $0; year 2 = $0; year 3 = $0; and year 4 = $128,646.64. Determine the annual ROI for this investment. You may find the following form helpful:
|
Cash Flow at End of Year
|
|
Year
|
Investment Balance
at Start of Year
|
Total Amount
|
Earnings at
?%
|
Capital
Recovery
|
Investment Balance
at End of Year
|
|
1
|
$100,000
|
$0
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
$0
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
$0
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
$128,647
|
|
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You invest $100,000 today. The year-end cash flows from the investment are as follows: year 1 = $0; year 2 = $0; year 3 = $0; and year 4 = $90,368.79. Determine the annual ROI for this investment. Does this answer make sense? You may find the following form helpful:
|
Cash Flow at End of Year
|
|
Year
|
Investment Balance
at Start of Year
|
Total Amount
|
Earnings at
?%
|
Capital
Recovery
|
Investment Balance
at End of Year
|
|
1
|
$100,000
|
$0
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
$0
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
$0
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
$90,369
|
|
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You invest $100,000 today. The year-end cash flows from the investment are as follows: year 1 = $25,000; year 2 = $48,000; year 3 = $75,000; and year 4 = negative $32,431. Determine the annual ROI on this investment. Is there anything unusual about this investment? You may find the following form helpful:
|
Cash Flow at End of Year
|
|
Year
|
Investment Balance
at Start of Year
|
Total Amount
|
Earnings at
?%
|
Capital
Recovery
|
Investment Balance
at End of Year
|
|
1
|
$100,000.00
|
$25,000
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
$48,000
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
$75,000
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
($32,431)
|
|
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You invest $100,000 today in a mutual fund. All dividends are reinvested in additional shares.
The performance of your investment over four years is as follows:
|
Year
|
Investment Value
at Start of Year
|
Total Return
for Year
|
Investment Value
at End of Year
|
ROI for Year
|
|
1
|
$100,000.00
|
$15,000.00
|
$115,000.00
|
15.0%
|
|
2
|
$115,000.00
|
($22,000.00)
|
$93,000.00
|
–19.1%
|
|
3
|
$93,000.00
|
$43,500.00
|
$136,500.00
|
46.8%
|
|
4
|
$136,500.00
|
($450.00)
|
$136,050.00
|
–0.3%
|
How would most mutual funds advertise ROI performance for the four years in this example?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You invest $100,000 today. The annual ROI on the investment is: year 1 = 12 percent; year 2 = negative 24.6 percent; year 3 = 33.7 percent; and year 4 = 29.6 percent. Determine the average annual ROI on the investment. You may find the following two forms helpful:
|
Year
|
Investment Value
at Start of Year
|
Earnings
for Year
|
ROI for Year
|
Investment Balance
at End of Year
|
|
1
|
$100,000.00
|
|
12.00%
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
–24.60%
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
33.70%
|
|
|
4
|
|
|
29.60%
|
|
|
Year
|
Investment Value
at Start of Year
|
Return at
? %
|
Investment Value
at End of Year
|
ROI for Year
|
|
1
|
$100,000.00
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 Explain the difference between the category of process control plans covered in this chapter and the process controls to be covered in .
2 a. Describe the relationship between the control matrix and the control framework.
b. What are the four basic elements included in a control matrix?
c. Describe the relationship between the control matrix and the systems flowchart. What does it mean to “annotate” the systems flowchart?
d. What are the five steps involved in preparing a control matrix?
3. Explain how a manager would use the control matrix in performing step 4 of the control framework.
a. How could the matrix be used to recommend changes in the system in order to improve control of that system?
b. How would the matrix be useful in evaluating control effectiveness, control efficiency, and control redundancy? Include in your answer a definition of these three terms.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 Describe a situation in your daily activities, working or not, where you have experienced or employed controls described in this.
2 When we record our exams into the spreadsheet used for our gradebook, we employ the following procedures:
a. For each exam, manually add up the grade for each exam and record on the front page.
b. Manually calculate the average grade for all of the exams.
c. Input the score for each part of each exam into the spreadsheet.
d. Compare the exam total on the front page of the exam to the total prepared by the computer.
e. After all the exams have been entered, compare the average grade calculated by the computer with that calculated manually. Describe how this process employs controls introduced in this.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The secure sockets layer (SSL) protocol was developed by Netscape Communications Company (now owned by America Online) and uses public key cryptography to secure communications on the Internet. With SSL, a secure session is established during which messages transmitted between two parties are protected via encryption. For example, before a consumer transmits a credit card number to a merchant, the merchant’s server establishes a secure session. The merchant decrypts the message, extracts the credit card number, and submits a charge to the consumer’s credit card company (i.e., credit card issuing bank) to clear the transaction using traditional means. SSL protects the consumer from interception and unauthorized use of the purchase and credit card information while it is on the Internet (i.e., from the consumer’s Web browser to the merchant’s Web server). Normally, the merchant cannot authenticate the transmission to determine from whom the message originated and the consumer has only moderate assurance that they have sent their credit card number to a legitimate merchant.
The secure electronic transaction (SET) protocol was developed by MasterCard and Visa to secure credit card transactions on the Internet involving three parties: the consumer, the merchant, and one or more credit card issuing banks. With SET, the consumer separately encrypts the purchase message and the credit card number. The merchant decrypts the purchase message to proceed with the sale and submits a charge to the consumer’s credit card company (i.e., credit card issuing bank) to clear the transaction using traditional means. However, unlike SSL, SET-based clearing will pass through the merchant and go directly to the consumer’s credit card issuing bank. The consumer and the merchant sign their messages with certificates obtained from financial institutions that certify that the consumer holds the credit card in question and that the merchant has a credit card clearing relationship with the issuing bank. SET protects merchants and credit card issuing banks from unauthorized purchases, and consumers from credit card fraud.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The electronic check (eCheck) is a payment mechanism developed by the Financial Services Technology Consortium (FSTC). Using public-key cryptography and digital signatures, trading partners and their banks can transmit secure messages and payment information. As with SET, eCheck certificates would be issued by banks certifying that the holder of the certificate has an account at that bank. And, payments would be processed automatically through the existing bank systems. Unlike SET, however, payments would be checks drawn on bank accounts. And, a feature beyond SSL and SET is that the eCheck protocol defines message formats, such as purchase orders, acknowledgments, and invoices, that can be processed automatically by trading parties. eCheck provides protections similar to those obtained with SET. That is, merchants and banks are protected from unauthorized use of checks, and the consumer is protected from check fraud.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What do the terms picking ticket, packing slip, bill of lading, tickler file, and one-for-one checking mean?
2. Explain how and where operations process goals would be shown in the goal columns of a control matrix prepared for the M/S process.
At a minimum, include in your discussion the following topics from:
a. Differentiation between operations process control goals and information process control goals.
b. Distinction between process effectiveness and process efficiency, and between process effectiveness and security of resources.
3 Discuss the nature and purpose of the completed picking ticket data store and the shipping notice data, both of which are shown in the logical DFDs and systems flowchart of this . Among other points of discussion, identify each of these data stores as either “sales event” data or “master” data.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bambino’s Pizzeria
For its chain of fast food outlets, Bambino’s Pizzeria has recently installed a system to speed up deliveries. In each of its stores, Bambino’s has three or four PCs connected to incoming phone lines. When a customer calls in an order to have pizza delivered, an employee answers and Caller ID checks the phone number against a data store containing past phone orders. If the order is for a repeat customer the system matches the number with the customer database and displays the customer record on the screen. (Customer records contain a variety of information, including whether the customer’s dog bites.) For first-time customers, the employee verifies the caller’s name and address, and creates a record in the customer database. The order taker then types in the customer’s pizza order. The system prints out a three-part order on a printer located in the kitchen. The original is used by the cook to prepare the order. When the order is ready, the cook marks the other two copies completed and gives them to the delivery driver to serve as delivery receipts for the driver and customer, respectively. At the same time that the order is printed, the order taker’s computer displays a city locator grid that is used to help dispatch the drivers. From a copy of the display, a dispatch slip—showing the customer’s street and connecting roads— is printed for the driver. The final system output generated at this time is a record of the order, which is the source for the event data written to the order system. The data will be used later to tally sales, calculate the driver’s pay, and generate other reports. (Note: For this problem, assume that these activities are beyond the order-taking system’s context.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that Company C’s product cost increases $0.50 per unit. Assume that all other profit factors for Company C remain the same as shown in table. Determine its operating profit for this scenario. Also, how does this change affect the company’s breakeven sales volume?
| |
Company B
|
Company C
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
50,000
|
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$15,000,000
|
$300.00
|
$36,000,000
|
$24.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$27,000,000
|
$18.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$9,000,000
|
$6.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,200,000
|
$2.80
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,800,000
|
$3.20
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$1,950,000
|
$39.00
|
$3,000,000
|
$2.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$36.00
|
$1,800,000
|
$1.20
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that Company B could increase its sales price $15 per unit and sell the same number of units. Assume Company B’s volume-driven variable operating expenses are $15 per unit sold, and its revenue driven variable operating expenses are 20 percent of sales revenue. How would this $15 sales price increase affect its contribution margin per unit, total contribution margin, and operating profit?
| |
Company B
|
Company C
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
50,000
|
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$15,000,000
|
$300.00
|
$36,000,000
|
$24.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$27,000,000
|
$18.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$9,000,000
|
$6.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,200,000
|
$2.80
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,800,000
|
$3.20
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$1,950,000
|
$39.00
|
$3,000,000
|
$2.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$36.00
|
$1,800,000
|
$1.20
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that Company C increased its sales price $1.50. Sales volume remains the same as shown in table. The company’s revenue-driven variable operating expenses are 10 percent of sales revenue, and its volume-driven variable operating expenses are $0.40 per unit sold. Determine Company C’s operating profit for this scenario. Also, how does this change affect the company’s breakeven sales volume?
| |
Company B
|
Company C
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
50,000
|
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$15,000,000
|
$300.00
|
$36,000,000
|
$24.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$27,000,000
|
$18.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$9,000,000
|
$6.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,200,000
|
$2.80
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,800,000
|
$3.20
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$1,950,000
|
$39.00
|
$3,000,000
|
$2.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$36.00
|
$1,800,000
|
$1.20
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that Company A were to offer all customers special rebates as a sales incentive. As a result, assume that sales price would decrease $10 per unit, but that annual sales volume would increase to 150,000 units. Assume that the company’s fixed operating expenses would not increase at the higher sales volume level (which may be stretching things a bit). Also assume that its variable operating expenses are all revenue-driven and equal to 15 percent of sales revenue. In terms of the impact on operating profit, would the rebate strategy to increase sales volume be a good trade-off for the company?
| |
Company A
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
120,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$24,000,000
|
$200.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$15,600,000
|
$130.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$8,400,000
|
$70.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,600,000
|
$30.00
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$4,800,000
|
$40.00
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$3,000,000
|
$25.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$15.00
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How is the $83,600,000 cost of goods sold expense of Company X determined?
| |
Company X
|
|
| |
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
|
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
110,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$1,400.00
|
$154,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-760
|
-83,600,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$640.00
|
$70,400,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-300
|
-33,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$340.00
|
$37,400,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-21,450,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$15,950,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
150,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
120,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$215.00
|
$25,800,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
125
|
15,000,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
70
|
8,400,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$410.00
|
$49,200,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
350
|
42,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$760.00
|
$91,200,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
As you can see in table, Company X recorded $42,000,000 fixed manufacturing overhead costs in the year. Suppose, instead, that its fixed manufacturing overhead costs were $45,600,000 for the year, which is an increase of $3,600,000. Would the company’s operating profit have been $3,600,000 lower?
| |
Company X
|
|
| |
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
|
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
110,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$1,400.00
|
$154,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-760
|
-83,600,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$640.00
|
$70,400,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-300
|
-33,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$340.00
|
$37,400,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-21,450,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$15,950,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
150,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
120,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$215.00
|
$25,800,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
125
|
15,000,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
70
|
8,400,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$410.00
|
$49,200,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
350
|
42,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$760.00
|
$91,200,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Company X produced 120,000 units and sold 110,000 units during the year. Therefore, the company increased its inventory 10,000 units. Does this increase seem reasonable? Or is the company’s production output compared with its sales volume out of kilter?
| |
Company X
|
|
| |
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
|
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
110,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$1,400.00
|
$154,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-760
|
-83,600,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$640.00
|
$70,400,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-300
|
-33,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$340.00
|
$37,400,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-21,450,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$15,950,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
150,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
120,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$215.00
|
$25,800,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
125
|
15,000,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
70
|
8,400,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$410.00
|
$49,200,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
350
|
42,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$760.00
|
$91,200,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The operating profit report and manufacturing activity summary of Company Z for the year. Assume that the business had no work-in-process inventory at the start or end of the year. The business purchased $19,500,000 raw materials on credit during the year. Prepare the basic manufacturing entries for the business by following the series of entries explained table.
| |
Company Y
|
Company Z
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,000,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$85.00
|
$42,500,000
|
$25.00
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-56
|
-28,000,000
|
-18.45
|
-36,900,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$29.00
|
$14,500,000
|
$6.55
|
$13,100,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-12.5
|
-6,250,000
|
-2.5
|
-5,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$16.50
|
$8,250,000
|
$4.05
|
$8,100,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-5,000,000
|
|
-7,500,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$3,250,000
|
|
$600,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
800,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$15.00
|
$7,500,000
|
$7.50
|
$18,750,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20
|
10,000,000
|
2.75
|
6,875,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
5
|
2,500,000
|
5
|
12,500,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$40.00
|
$20,000,000
|
$15.25
|
$38,125,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
16
|
8,000,000
|
3.2
|
8,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$56.00
|
$28,000,000
|
$18.45
|
$46,125,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine what Company Z’s operating profit would have been if it had sold 2,100,000 units during the year, which is 100,000 more units than in the example shown in table. Assume that production output had remained the same at 2,500,000 units (the company’s production output capacity).
| |
Company Y
|
Company Z
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,000,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$85.00
|
$42,500,000
|
$25.00
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-56
|
-28,000,000
|
-18.45
|
-36,900,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$29.00
|
$14,500,000
|
$6.55
|
$13,100,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-12.5
|
-6,250,000
|
-2.5
|
-5,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$16.50
|
$8,250,000
|
$4.05
|
$8,100,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-5,000,000
|
|
-7,500,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$3,250,000
|
|
$600,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
800,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$15.00
|
$7,500,000
|
$7.50
|
$18,750,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20
|
10,000,000
|
2.75
|
6,875,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
5
|
2,500,000
|
5
|
12,500,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$40.00
|
$20,000,000
|
$15.25
|
$38,125,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
16
|
8,000,000
|
3.2
|
8,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$56.00
|
$28,000,000
|
$18.45
|
$46,125,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
What would be the operating profit of Company X if its production output for the year had been 110,000 units (equal to the number of units sold) instead of the 120,000 units production output level assumed in table?
| |
Company X
|
|
| |
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
|
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
110,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$1,400.00
|
$154,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-760
|
-83,600,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$640.00
|
$70,400,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-300
|
-33,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$340.00
|
$37,400,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-21,450,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$15,950,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
150,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
120,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$215.00
|
$25,800,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
125
|
15,000,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
70
|
8,400,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$410.00
|
$49,200,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
350
|
42,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$760.00
|
$91,200,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Company Y was on track to sell 550,000 units in the year, but late in the year, a major customer canceled a large order for 50,000 units. The business reduced its production output to 500,000 units, as you see in table. Determine the operating profit Company Y would have earned if it had manufactured and sold 550,000 units in the year.
| |
Company Y
|
Company Z
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,000,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$85.00
|
$42,500,000
|
$25.00
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-56
|
-28,000,000
|
-18.45
|
-36,900,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$29.00
|
$14,500,000
|
$6.55
|
$13,100,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-12.5
|
-6,250,000
|
-2.5
|
-5,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$16.50
|
$8,250,000
|
$4.05
|
$8,100,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-5,000,000
|
|
-7,500,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$3,250,000
|
|
$600,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
800,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$15.00
|
$7,500,000
|
$7.50
|
$18,750,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20
|
10,000,000
|
2.75
|
6,875,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
5
|
2,500,000
|
5
|
12,500,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$40.00
|
$20,000,000
|
$15.25
|
$38,125,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
16
|
8,000,000
|
3.2
|
8,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$56.00
|
$28,000,000
|
$18.45
|
$46,125,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that Company Z’s production output for the year is 2,000,000 units. In other words, assume that the business manufactures the same number of units that it sells in the year. Assume all other manufacturing and operating factors are the same. Determine the company’s operating profit for the year.
| |
Company Y
|
Company Z
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,000,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$85.00
|
$42,500,000
|
$25.00
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-56
|
-28,000,000
|
-18.45
|
-36,900,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$29.00
|
$14,500,000
|
$6.55
|
$13,100,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-12.5
|
-6,250,000
|
-2.5
|
-5,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$16.50
|
$8,250,000
|
$4.05
|
$8,100,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-5,000,000
|
|
-7,500,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$3,250,000
|
|
$600,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
800,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$15.00
|
$7,500,000
|
$7.50
|
$18,750,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20
|
10,000,000
|
2.75
|
6,875,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
5
|
2,500,000
|
5
|
12,500,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$40.00
|
$20,000,000
|
$15.25
|
$38,125,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
16
|
8,000,000
|
3.2
|
8,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$56.00
|
$28,000,000
|
$18.45
|
$46,125,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the table scenario Company X manufactured 120,000 units during the year, which caused its inventory to increase 10,000 units. Suppose, instead, that the company had manufactured 150,000 units during the year, which is its production capacity. Assume sales and other factors were the same in this alternative scenario as shown in table – only production output is different. What would be its operating profit for the year if it had produced 150,000 units?
| |
Company X
|
|
| |
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
|
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
110,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$1,400.00
|
$154,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-760
|
-83,600,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$640.00
|
$70,400,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-300
|
-33,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$340.00
|
$37,400,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-21,450,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$15,950,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
150,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
120,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$215.00
|
$25,800,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
125
|
15,000,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
70
|
8,400,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$410.00
|
$49,200,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
350
|
42,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$760.00
|
$91,200,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Towards the end of the year, the president of Company Y looks at the preliminary numbers for operating profit and doesn’t like what he sees. He’s “promised” the board of directors that operating profit for the year will come in at $4,850,000. In fact, his bonus depends on hitting that operating profit target. There is still time before the end of the year to crank up production output for the year. Therefore, he orders that production output be stepped up. The president asks you to determine what the production output level for the year would have to be in order to report $4,850,000 operating profit for the year. Of course, you have ethical qualms about doing this, but you need the job. So, you reluctantly decide to do the calculation. Determine the production output level that would yield $4,850,000 operating profit for the year.
| |
Company Y
|
Company Z
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,000,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$85.00
|
$42,500,000
|
$25.00
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-56
|
-28,000,000
|
-18.45
|
-36,900,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$29.00
|
$14,500,000
|
$6.55
|
$13,100,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-12.5
|
-6,250,000
|
-2.5
|
-5,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$16.50
|
$8,250,000
|
$4.05
|
$8,100,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-5,000,000
|
|
-7,500,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$3,250,000
|
|
$600,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
800,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$15.00
|
$7,500,000
|
$7.50
|
$18,750,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20
|
10,000,000
|
2.75
|
6,875,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
5
|
2,500,000
|
5
|
12,500,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$40.00
|
$20,000,000
|
$15.25
|
$38,125,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
16
|
8,000,000
|
3.2
|
8,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$56.00
|
$28,000,000
|
$18.45
|
$46,125,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After Company Y’s operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity for the year has been prepared, you, the chief accountant, learn that $1,000,000 of raw materials were thrown away during the year because the items had spoiled and couldn’t be used in the manufacturing process. The company’s president knows about this loss and insists that no change be made in the operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity. Do you go along with the president, or do you argue for changing the operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity?
| |
Company Y
|
Company Z
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,000,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$85.00
|
$42,500,000
|
$25.00
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-56
|
-28,000,000
|
-18.45
|
-36,900,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$29.00
|
$14,500,000
|
$6.55
|
$13,100,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-12.5
|
-6,250,000
|
-2.5
|
-5,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$16.50
|
$8,250,000
|
$4.05
|
$8,100,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-5,000,000
|
|
-7,500,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$3,250,000
|
|
$600,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
800,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$15.00
|
$7,500,000
|
$7.50
|
$18,750,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20
|
10,000,000
|
2.75
|
6,875,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
5
|
2,500,000
|
5
|
12,500,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$40.00
|
$20,000,000
|
$15.25
|
$38,125,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
16
|
8,000,000
|
3.2
|
8,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$56.00
|
$28,000,000
|
$18.45
|
$46,125,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How would Company Y’s operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity be revised if the cost of idle capacity is treated as a period cost in the year?
| |
Company Y
|
Company Z
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,000,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$85.00
|
$42,500,000
|
$25.00
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-56
|
-28,000,000
|
-18.45
|
-36,900,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$29.00
|
$14,500,000
|
$6.55
|
$13,100,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-12.5
|
-6,250,000
|
-2.5
|
-5,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$16.50
|
$8,250,000
|
$4.05
|
$8,100,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-5,000,000
|
|
-7,500,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$3,250,000
|
|
$600,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
800,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$15.00
|
$7,500,000
|
$7.50
|
$18,750,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20
|
10,000,000
|
2.75
|
6,875,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
5
|
2,500,000
|
5
|
12,500,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$40.00
|
$20,000,000
|
$15.25
|
$38,125,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
16
|
8,000,000
|
3.2
|
8,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$56.00
|
$28,000,000
|
$18.45
|
$46,125,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that Company Z manufactures 2,100,000 units during the year. Determine its operating profit for the year. Assume that the cost of idle capacity is treated as a period cost and isn’t embedded in product cost.
| |
Company Y
|
Company Z
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,000,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$85.00
|
$42,500,000
|
$25.00
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-56
|
-28,000,000
|
-18.45
|
-36,900,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$29.00
|
$14,500,000
|
$6.55
|
$13,100,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-12.5
|
-6,250,000
|
-2.5
|
-5,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$16.50
|
$8,250,000
|
$4.05
|
$8,100,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-5,000,000
|
|
-7,500,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$3,250,000
|
|
$600,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
800,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
500,000
|
|
2,500,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$15.00
|
$7,500,000
|
$7.50
|
$18,750,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20
|
10,000,000
|
2.75
|
6,875,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
5
|
2,500,000
|
5
|
12,500,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$40.00
|
$20,000,000
|
$15.25
|
$38,125,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
16
|
8,000,000
|
3.2
|
8,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$56.00
|
$28,000,000
|
$18.45
|
$46,125,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Company X’s operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity presented below. Note that its annual production capacity is 150,000 units, but the business manufactured only 120,000 units during the year. Therefore, it had 20 percent idle capacity (30,000 units not produced ÷ 150,000 units production capacity = 20 percent idle capacity). However, the cost of idle capacity isn’t treated as a separate period cost; all the company’s fixed manufacturing overhead costs are included in calculating its product cost. Suppose that the business treats the cost of idle capacity as a period cost. Prepare a revised operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity for the business.
| |
Company X
|
|
| |
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Operating Profit Report for Year
|
|
|
|
Sales volume, in Units
|
|
110,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$1,400.00
|
$154,000,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)
|
-760
|
-83,600,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$640.00
|
$70,400,000
|
|
Variable Operating Expenses
|
-300
|
-33,000,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
$340.00
|
$37,400,000
|
|
Fixed Operating Expenses
|
|
-21,450,000
|
|
Operating Profit
|
|
$15,950,000
|
|
Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
|
Annual Production Capacity, in Units
|
|
150,000
|
|
Actual Output, in Units
|
|
120,000
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$215.00
|
$25,800,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
125
|
15,000,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
70
|
8,400,000
|
|
Total Variable Manufacturing Costs
|
$410.00
|
$49,200,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs
|
350
|
42,000,000
|
|
Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs
|
$760.00
|
$91,200,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose a business borrows $100,000 for one year. The lender quotes a 6 percent annual interest rate that’s compounded semi-annually (twice a year). Determine the annual effective interest rate on the loan.
You may find the following form helpful.
|
Half-Year
|
Half-Year Start of Period
|
Interest at ?%
|
Loan Balance at End of Period
|
|
First
|
$100,000.00
|
|
|
|
Second
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company borrows $250,000 from its bank for one year. At the maturity date, one year after the money’s deposited in the company’s checking account, it writes a check to the bank for $268,324 to pay off the loan. Determine the effective annual interest rate and the nominal annual interest rate assuming semiannual compounding.
|
Half-Year
|
Half-Year Start of Period
|
Interest at ?%
|
Loan Balance at End of Period
|
|
First
|
$250,000.00
|
|
|
|
Second
|
|
|
$268,324.00
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following statements is correct with respect to the differences and similarities between a corporation and a limited partnership?
- Stockholders may be entitled to vote on corporate matters but limited partners are prohibited from voting on any partnership matters.
- Stock of a corporation may be subject to the registration requirements of the federal securities laws but limited partnership interests are automatically exempt from those requirements.
- Directors owe fiduciary duties to the corporation and limited partners owe such duties to the partnership.
- A corporation and a limited partnership may be created only under a state statute and each must file a copy of its organizational document with the proper governmental body.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following facts is(are) generally included in a corporation’s articles of incorporation?
|
|
Name of registered agent
|
Number of authorized shares
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gallagher Corporation issued 100,000 shares of $40 par value stock for $50 per share to various investors. Subsequently, Gallagher purchased back 10,000 of those shares for $30 per share and held them as treasury stock. When the price of the stock recovered somewhat, Gallagher sold this treasury stock to Thomas for $35 per share. Which of the following statements is correct?
- I. Gallagher’s purchase of the stock at below par value is illegal.
- II. Gallagher’s purchase of the stock at below par value is void as an ultra vires act.
- Gallagher’s resale of the treasury stock at below par value is valid.
- a. I only.
- b. II only.
- c. III only.
- d. I and II only.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following securities are corporate debt securities?
|
|
Convertible bonds
|
Debenture bonds
|
Warrants
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brawn subscribed to 1,000 shares of $1 par value stock of Caldo Corporation at the agreed amount of $20 per share. She paid $5,000 on April 1 and then paid $9,000 on August 1. Caldo Corporation filed for bankruptcy on December 1 and the creditors of the corporation sought to hold Brawn liable under her subscription agreement. Which of the following is true?
- Brawn has no liability to the creditors because subscription contract was with the corporation, not the creditors.
- Brawn has no liability to the creditors because she has paid more than $1,000 to the corporation which is the par value of the 1,000 shares.
- Brawn is liable for $6,000 to the creditors for the amount unpaid on the subscription price.
- Brawn is liable for $6,000 to the creditors based on the doctrine of ultra vires.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Norwood was a promoter of Parker Corporation. On March 15, Norwood purchased some real estate from Burrows in Parker’s name and signed the contract “Norwood, as agent of Parker Corporation.” Parker Corporation, however, did not legally come into existence until June 10. Norwood never informed Burrows on or before March 15 that Parker Corporation was not yet formed. After the corporation was formed, the board of directors refused to adopt the preincorporation contract made by Norwood concerning the real estate deal with Burrows. Burrows sued Parker, Norwood, and the board of directors. Which of the following is correct?
- None of these parties can be held liable.
- Norwood only is liable.
- Norwood and Parker are liable but not the board of directors.
- Norwood, Parker, and the board of directors are all liable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The officers of West Corporation wish to buy some used equipment for West Corporation. The used equipment is actually owned by Parks, a director of West Corporation. For this transaction to not be a conflict of interest for Parks, which of the following is(are) required to be true?
- I. Parks sells the used equipment to West Corporation in a contract that is fair and reasonable to the corporation.
- II. Parks’ ownership of the used equipment is disclosed to the shareholders of West who approve it by majority vote.
- Parks’ ownership of the used equipment is disclosed to the board of directors, who approve it by a majority vote of the disinterested directors.
- a. Any one of I, II, or III.
- b. I and II are both required.
- c. I and III are both required.
- d. All three of I, II, and III are required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
When a corporation elects to be a Subchapter S corporation, which of the following statements is(are) true regarding the federal tax treatment of the corporation’s income or loss?
- I. The corporation’s income is taxed at the corporate level and not the shareholders’ level.
- II. The shareholders report the corporation’s income on their tax returns when the income is distributed to them.
- The shareholders report the corporation’s income on their tax returns even if the income is not distributed to them.
- The shareholders generally report the corporation’s loss on their tax returns.
- a. I only is true.
- b. II only is true.
- c. III only is true.
- d. III and IV only are true.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A, B and C are the partners in a firm called the ABC Firm. A has the intention of deceiving D, a supplier of office stationery, buys certain stationery on behalf of the ABC Firm. The stationery is of use in the ordinary course of the firm”s business. A does not give the stationery to the firm, instead brings it to his own use. The supplier D, who is unaware of the private use of the stationery by A, claims the price from the firm. The firm refuses to pay for the price on the ground that the stationery was never received by it (firm). Referring to the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, decide:
- Whether the Firm”s contention shall be tenable?
- What would be your answer if a part of the stationery so purchased by A was delivered to the firm by him and the rest of the stationery was used by him for private use, about which neither the firm nor the supplier D was aware?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose Company A had sold 125,000 units during the year, instead of the 120,000 units in the table. Using each of the three analysis methods just explained, determine Company A’s operating profit at the 125,000 units sales volume level. Assume other profit factors remain the same.
| |
Company A
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
120,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$24,000,000
|
$200.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$15,600,000
|
$130.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$8,400,000
|
$70.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,600,000
|
$30.00
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$4,800,000
|
$40.00
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$3,000,000
|
$25.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$15.00
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Instead of the scenario shown in table assume that Company A had a bad year. Its internal operating profit report for this alternative scenario is presented below. Using the three methods explained in this section, analyze why the business suffered a loss for the year.
| |
Company A
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
120,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$24,000,000
|
$200.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$15,600,000
|
$130.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$8,400,000
|
$70.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,600,000
|
$30.00
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$4,800,000
|
$40.00
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$3,000,000
|
$25.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$15.00
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
120,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$21,000,000
|
$175.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$15,600,000
|
$130.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$5,400,000
|
$45.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,150,000
|
$26.25
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$2,250,000
|
$18.75
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$3,000,000
|
$25.00
|
|
Operating profit (loss)
|
($750,000)
|
($6.25)
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Table presents profit performance information for two businesses for their most recent years. Using the three profit analysis methods explained in this section, analyze the profit performance of Company B.
| |
Company B
|
Company C
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
50,000
|
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$15,000,000
|
$300.00
|
$36,000,000
|
$24.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$27,000,000
|
$18.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$9,000,000
|
$6.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,200,000
|
$2.80
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,800,000
|
$3.20
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$1,950,000
|
$39.00
|
$3,000,000
|
$2.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$36.00
|
$1,800,000
|
$1.20
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the three profit analysis methods explained in this section, analyze the profit performance of Company C.
| |
Company B
|
Company C
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
50,000
|
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$15,000,000
|
$300.00
|
$36,000,000
|
$24.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$27,000,000
|
$18.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$9,000,000
|
$6.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,200,000
|
$2.80
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,800,000
|
$3.20
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$1,950,000
|
$39.00
|
$3,000,000
|
$2.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$36.00
|
$1,800,000
|
$1.20
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume the following: Company B’s Sources of Capital: See table for Company B’s operating profit performance for the year. The business paid $480,000 interest for the year. Calculate its financial leverage gain (or loss) for the year.
| |
Company B
|
Company C
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
50,000
|
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$15,000,000
|
$300.00
|
$36,000,000
|
$24.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$27,000,000
|
$18.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$9,000,000
|
$6.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,200,000
|
$2.80
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,800,000
|
$3.20
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$1,950,000
|
$39.00
|
$3,000,000
|
$2.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$36.00
|
$1,800,000
|
$1.20
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume the following: Company C’s Sources of Capital:
|
Debt
|
$6,000,000
|
|
Owners’ equity
|
$6,000,000
|
|
Total capital
|
$12,000,000
|
See table for Company C’s profit data for the year. The business paid $360,000 interest for the year. Calculate its financial leverage gain (or loss) for the year.
| |
Company B
|
Company C
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
50,000
|
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$15,000,000
|
$300.00
|
$36,000,000
|
$24.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$27,000,000
|
$18.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$9,000,000
|
$6.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,200,000
|
$2.80
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,800,000
|
$3.20
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$1,950,000
|
$39.00
|
$3,000,000
|
$2.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$36.00
|
$1,800,000
|
$1.20
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that Company B’s fixed operating expenses were $3,030,000 for the year. Otherwise, other profit factors are the same as in table. Using the sources of capital and interest expense presented, calculate Company B’s financial leverage gain (or loss) for the year.
| |
Company B
|
Company C
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
50,000
|
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$15,000,000
|
$300.00
|
$36,000,000
|
$24.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$27,000,000
|
$18.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$9,000,000
|
$6.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,200,000
|
$2.80
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,800,000
|
$3.20
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$1,950,000
|
$39.00
|
$3,000,000
|
$2.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$36.00
|
$1,800,000
|
$1.20
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose Company B sold 5 percent fewer units during the year than it did according to table. Determine Company B’s operating profit for this scenario.
| |
Company B
|
Company C
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
50,000
|
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$15,000,000
|
$300.00
|
$36,000,000
|
$24.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$27,000,000
|
$18.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$9,000,000
|
$6.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,200,000
|
$2.80
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,800,000
|
$3.20
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$1,950,000
|
$39.00
|
$3,000,000
|
$2.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$36.00
|
$1,800,000
|
$1.20
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose Company C sold 10 percent fewer units during the year than it did according to table. Determine Company C’s operating profit for this scenario.
| |
Company B
|
Company C
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
50,000
|
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$15,000,000
|
$300.00
|
$36,000,000
|
$24.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$27,000,000
|
$18.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$7,500,000
|
$150.00
|
$9,000,000
|
$6.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,200,000
|
$2.80
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$3,750,000
|
$75.00
|
$4,800,000
|
$3.20
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$1,950,000
|
$39.00
|
$3,000,000
|
$2.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$36.00
|
$1,800,000
|
$1.20
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose Company A wants to improve its contribution margin per unit as the means to order to increase its operating profit $240,000. Assume its 120,000 units sales volume remains the same. Assume, further, that the business targeted its product cost as the most feasible way to improve contribution margin per unit. So, assume that sales price, variable operating expenses per unit, and fixed operating expenses remain the same. How much would product cost have to improve to achieve the $240,000 increase in Operating profit?
| |
Company A
|
| |
Totals
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales volume, in units
|
120,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$24,000,000
|
$200.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$15,600,000
|
$130.00
|
|
Gross margin
|
$8,400,000
|
$70.00
|
|
Variable operating expenses
|
$3,600,000
|
$30.00
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$4,800,000
|
$40.00
|
|
Fixed operating expenses
|
$3,000,000
|
$25.00
|
|
Operating profit
|
$1,800,000
|
$15.00
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alchorn, Black, and Chan formed a limited partnership with Chan becoming the only limited partner. Capital contributions from these partners were $20,000, $40,000, and $50,000, respectively. Chan, however, helped in the management of the partnership and Ham, who had several contracts with the partnership, thought Chan was a general partner. Ham won several breach of contract actions against the partnership and the partnership does not have sufficient funds to pay these claims. What is the potential liability for Alchorn, Black, and Chan?
- Unlimited liability for all three partners.
- Unlimited liability for Alchorn and Black; $50,000 for Chan.
- Up to each partner’s capital contribution.
- None of the above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Costner Company uses an absorption costing system in accounting for the single product it manufactures. The following selected data are for the year 2009:
|
Sales (10,000 units)
|
$360,000
|
|
Direct materials used (variable cost)
|
129,600
|
|
Direct labor costs (variable cost)
|
43,200
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
12,960
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
17,280
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expenses
|
21,600
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expenses
|
72,000
|
The company produced 12,000 units and sold 10,000 units. Direct materials and direct labor are variable costs. One unit of direct material goes into each unit of finished goods. Overhead rates are based on a volume of 12,000 units and are USD 1.08 and USD 1.44 per unit for variable and fixed overhead, respectively. The ending inventory is the 2,000 units of finished goods on hand at the end of 2009. There was no inventory at the beginning of 2009.
a. Prepare an income statement for 2009 under variable costing.
b. Prepare an income statement for 2009 under absorption costing.
c. Explain the reason for the difference in net income between a and b.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pocket Umbrella, Inc., is considering producing a new type of umbrella. This new pocket-sized umbrella would fit into a coat pocket or purse. Classify the following costs of this new product as direct materials, direct labor, manufacturing overhead, selling, or administrative.
a. Cost of advertising the product.
b. Fabric used to make the umbrellas.
c. Maintenance of cutting machines used to cut the umbrella fabric so it will fit the umbrella frame.
d. Wages of workers who assemble the product.
e. President”s salary.
f. The salary of the supervisor of the people who assemble the product.
g. Wages of the product tester who stands in a shower to make sure the umbrellas do not leak.
h. Cost of market research survey.
i. Salary of the company”s sales managers.
j. Depreciation of administrative office building.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classify the costs listed in Alternate problem A as either product costs or period costs.
Presley Manufacturing Company is a producer of music compact discs (CDs) and tapes. The following account balances are for the year ended 2009 December 31
|
Administrative expenses
|
$60,000
|
|
Depreciation expense – Manufacturing equipment
|
50,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
468,000
|
|
Manufacturing supplies expense
|
40,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
36,000
|
|
Beginning inventories, 2009 January 1:
|
|
Direct materials
|
14,000
|
|
Work in process
|
20,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
128,000
|
|
Ending inventories, 2009 December 31
|
|
Direct materials
|
44,000
|
|
Work in process
|
56,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
92,000
|
|
Direct materials purchases
|
216,000
|
|
Rent expense – Factory
|
28,000
|
|
Sales
|
1,400,000
|
|
Selling expense
|
72,000
|
|
Other manufacturing overhead
|
126,000
|
a. Prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactured for Presley Manufacturing Company for 2009.
b. Prepare an income statement for the year ended 2009 December 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suzie Garcia, an accountant for a consulting firm, had just received the monthly cost reports for the two jobs she supervises: one for Arrow Space, Inc., and one for the US government. She immediately called her boss after reading the figures for the Arrow Space job. “We are going to be way over budget on the Arrow Space contract,” she informed her boss. “The job is only about three-fourths complete, but we have spent all the money that we had budgeted for the entire job.” “You had better watch these job costs more carefully in the future,” her boss advised. “Meanwhile, charge the rest of the costs needed to complete the Arrow Space job to your US government job. The government will not notice the extra costs. Besides, we get reimbursed for costs on the government job, so we will not lose any money on this problem you have with the Arrow Space contract.” What should Suzie do? Does it matter that Suzie”s company is reimbursed for costs on the US government contract? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In teams of two or three students, interview in person or by speakerphone, a businessperson in your community who uses job costing (for example, businesses that produce custom products such as homes, signs, or landscape design, or business consultants). Ask how this person assigns costs to products and how this information affects business decisions. Keep in mind that many businesspeople use terms other than job costing and manufacturing overhead. Be flexible with your use of accounting terminology in this interview. Each team should write a memorandum to the instructor summarizing the results of the interview. Information contained in the memo should include:
Date:
To:
From:
Subject:
Content of the memo must include the name and title of the person interviewed, name of the company, date of the interview, examples of the use of accounting information for decision making, and any other pertinent information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dart Corp., a calendar-year corporation, was formed in 1997 and made an S corporation election in 2000 that is still in effect. Its books and records for 2007 reflect the following information:
|
Accumulated earnings and profits at 1/1/07
|
$90,000
|
|
Accumulated adjustments account at 1/1/07
|
50,000
|
|
Ordinary income for 2007
|
200,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A shareholder’s basis in the stock of an S corporation is increased by the shareholder’s pro rata share of income from
|
|
Tax-exempt interest
|
Taxable interest
|
|
a.
|
No
|
No
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An S corporation has 30,000 shares of voting common stock and 20,000 shares of nonvoting common stock issued and outstanding. The S election can be revoked voluntarily with the consent of the shareholders holding, on the day of the revocation,
|
|
Shares of voting stock
|
Shares of nonvoting stock
|
|
a.
|
0
|
20,000
|
|
b.
|
7,500
|
5,000
|
|
c.
|
10,000
|
16,000
|
|
d.
|
20,000
|
0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An S corporation’s accumulated adjustments account, which measures the amount of earnings that may be distributed tax-free
- Must be adjusted downward for the full amount of federal income taxes attributable to any taxable year in which the corporation was a C corporation.
- Must be adjusted upward for the full amount of federal income taxes attributable to any taxable year in which the corporation was a C corporation.
- Must be adjusted upward or downward for only the federal income taxes affected by capital gains or losses, respectively, for any taxable year in which the corporation was a C corporation.
- Is not adjusted for federal income taxes attributable to a taxable year in which the corporation was a C corporation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ace Corp. and Bate Corp. combine in a qualifying reorganization and form Carr Corp., the only surviving corporation. This reorganization is tax-free to the
|
|
Shareholders
|
Corporations
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jan, an unmarried individual, gave the following outright gifts in 2007:
|
Donee
|
Amount
|
Use by donee
|
|
Jones
|
$15,000
|
Down payment on house
|
|
Craig
|
13,000
|
College tuition
|
|
Kande
|
5,000
|
Vacation trip
|
Jan’s 2007 exclusions for gift tax purposes should total
- $30,000
- $29,000
- $27,000
- $18,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fred and Amy Kehl, both US citizens, are married. All of their real and personal property is owned by them as tenants by the entirety or as joint tenants with right of survivorship. The gross estate of the first spouse to die
- Includes 50% of the value of all property owned by the couple, regardless of which spouse furnished the original consideration.
- Includes only the property that had been acquired with the funds of the deceased spouse.
- Is governed by the federal statutory provisions relating to jointly held property, rather than by the decedent’s interest in community property vested by state law, if the Kehls reside in a community property state.
- Includes one-third of the value of all real estate owned by the Kehls, as the dower right in the case of the wife or curtesy right in the case of the husband.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In connection with a “buy-sell” agreement funded by a cross-purchase insurance arrangement, business associate Adam bought a policy on Burr’s life to finance the purchase of Burr’s interest. Adam, the beneficiary, paid the premiums and retained all incidents of ownership. On the death of Burr, the insurance proceeds will be
- Includible in Burr’s gross estate, if Burr owns 50% or more of the stock of the corporation.
- Includible in Burr’s gross estate only if Burr had purchased a similar policy on Adam’s life at the same time and for the same purpose.
- Includible in Burr’s gross estate, if Adam has the right to veto Burr’s power to borrow on the policy that Burr owns on Adam’s life.
- Excludible from Burr’s gross estate.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eng and Lew, both US citizens, died in 2007. Eng made taxable lifetime gifts of $100,000 that are not included in Eng’s gross estate. Lew made no lifetime gifts. At the dates of death, Eng’s gross estate was $1,600,000, and Lew’s gross estate was $1,800,000. A federal estate tax return must be filed for
|
|
Eng
|
Lew
|
|
a.
|
No
|
No
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following:
Lyon, a cash-basis taxpayer, died on January 15, 2007. In 2007, the estate executor made the required periodic distribution of $9,000 from estate income to Lyon’s sole heir. The following pertains to the estate’s income and disbursements in 2007:
|
2007 Estate Income
|
|
$20,000
|
Taxable interest
|
|
10,000
|
Net long-term capital gains allocable to corpus
|
|
2007 Estate Disbursements
|
|
$5,000
|
Administrative expenses attributable to taxable income
|
For the 2007 calendar year, what was the estate’s distributable net income (DNI)?
- $15,000
- $20,000
- $25,000
- $30,000
Lyon’s executor does not intend to file an extension request for the estate fiduciary income tax return. By what date must the executor file the Form 1041, US Fiduciary Income Tax Return, for the estate’s 2007 calendar year?
- March 15, 2008.
- April 15, 2008.
- June 15, 2008.
- September 15, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following fiduciary entities are required to use the calendar year as their taxable period for income tax purposes?
|
|
Estates
|
Trusts (except those that are tax exempt)
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
No
|
No
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kopel was engaged to prepare Raff’s 2006 federal income tax return. During the tax preparation interview, Raff told Kopel that he paid $3,000 in property taxes in 2006. Actually, Raff’s property taxes amounted to only $600. Based on Raff’s word, Kopel deducted the $3,000 on Raff’s return, resulting in an understatement of Raff’s tax liability. Kopel had no reason to believe that the information was incorrect. Kopel did not request underlying documentation and was reasonably satisfied by Raff’s representation that Raff had adequate records to support the deduction. Which of the following statements is correct?
- To avoid the preparer penalty for willful under-statement of tax liability, Kopel was obligated to examine the underlying documentation for the deduction.
- To avoid the preparer penalty for willful under-statement of tax liability, Kopel would be required to obtain Raff’s representation in writing.
- Kopel is not subject to the preparer penalty for willful understatement of tax liability because the deduction that was claimed was more than 25% of the actual amount that should have been deducted.
- Kopel is not subject to the preparer penalty for willful understatement of tax liability because Kopel was justified in relying on Raff’s representation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Clark, a professional tax return preparer, prepared and signed a client’s 2006 federal income tax return that resulted in a $600 refund. Which one of the following statements is correct with regard to an Internal Revenue Code penalty Clark may be subject to for endorsing and cashing the client’s refund check?
- Clark will be subject to the penalty if Clark endorses and cashes the check.
- Clark may endorse and cash the check, without penalty, if Clark is enrolled to practice before the Internal Revenue Service.
- Clark may endorse and cash the check, without penalty, because the check is for less than $500.
- Clark may endorse and cash the check, without penalty, if the amount does not exceed Clark’s fee for preparation of the return.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
According to the profession’s standards, which of the following statements is correct regarding the standards a CPA should follow when recommending tax return positions and preparing tax returns?
- A CPA may recommend a position that the CPA concludes is frivolous as long as the position is adequately disclosed on the return.
- A CPA may recommend a position in which the CPA has a good faith belief that the position has a realistic possibility of being sustained if challenged.
- A CPA will usually not advise the client of the potential penalty consequences of the recommended tax return position.
- A CPA may sign a tax return as preparer knowing that the return takes a position that will not be sustained if challenged.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sydney, Bailey, and Calle form a partnership under the Revised Uniform Partnership Act. During the first year of operation, the partners have fundamental questions regarding the rights and obligations of the partnership as well as the individual partners. Which of the following questions can correctly be answered in the affirmative?
- I. Is the partnership allowed legally to own property in the partnership’s name?
- II. Do the partners have joint and several liability for breaches of contract of the partnership?
- Do the partners have joint and several liability for tort actions against the partnership?
- a. I only.
- b. I and II only.
- c. II and III only.
- d. I, II, and III.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was obtained from the records of a manufacturing unit using standard costing system.
|
Particulars
|
Standard
|
Actual
|
|
Production
|
4, 000
|
3, 800
|
|
Working Days
|
20
|
21
|
|
Fixed Overheads
|
Rs.40, 000
|
Rs.39, 000
|
|
Variable Overheads
|
Rs.12, 000
|
Rs.12, 000
|
Calculate,
• Variable Overhead Variance
• Fixed Overhead Expenditure Variance
• Fixed Overhead Volume Variance
• Fixed Overhead Efficiency Variance
• Fixed Overhead Calendar Variance
• Also prepare a reconciliation statement for the standard fixed expenses worked out at standard fixed overhead rate and the actual fixed overhead.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data has been collected from the cost records of a unit for computing various fixed overhead variances for a particular period.
|
Particular
|
Details
|
|
Number of budgeted working days
|
25
|
|
Budgeted man hour per day
|
6, 000
|
|
Output [budgeted] per man hours
|
1 unit
|
|
Fixed overhead cost as budgeted
|
Rs.1, 50, 000
|
|
Actual number of working days
|
27
|
|
Actual man hour per day
|
6, 300
|
|
Actual output per man hour
|
0.9 units
|
|
Actual fixed overheads
|
Rs.1, 56, 000
|
Calculate the following Fixed Overhead Variances
• Expenditure variance
• Calendar variance
• Capacity variance
• Efficiency variance
• Volume Variance
• Cost Variance
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company manufacturing two products uses standard costing system. The following data relating to
August 2007 have been furnished to you:
|
Particulars
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
|
Standard Cost Per Unit &Direct Materials
|
Rs.2
|
Rs.4
|
|
Direct Wages
|
Rs.8
|
Rs.6
|
|
Fixed Overheads
|
Rs.16
|
Rs.12
|
|
Total
|
Rs.26
|
Rs.22
|
|
Units processed/in process
|
|
|
|
Beginning of the month, all materials applied and 50% complete in respect of labour and overheads
|
4, 000
|
12, 000
|
|
End of the month, all materials applied and 80% complete in respect of labour and overheads
|
8, 000
|
12, 000
|
|
Units completed and transferred to warehouse during the month
|
16, 000
|
20, 000
|
| |
|
|
|
|
You may use average cost method to analyse
The following were the actual costs recorded during the month.
Direct materials purchased at standard price amount to Rs.2, 00, 000 and actual cost of which is Rs.2, 20, 000. Direct materials used for consumption at standard price amount to Rs.1, 75, 000. Direct wages for actual hours worked at standard wages rates were Rs.4, 20, 000 and at actual wages rate were Rs.4, 12, 000. Fixed overheads budgeted were Rs.8, 25, 000 and actual fixed overheads incurred were Rs.8, 50, 000.
Required,
I. Direct material price variance at the point of consumption and at the point of purchase
II. Direct material usage variance
III. Direct wage rate and efficiency variance
IV. Fixed overheads volume and expenditure variance
V. Standard cost of WIP at the end of the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute the following variances from the data given below.
I. Total sales margin variance
II. Sales margin volume variance
III. Sales margin price variance
IV. Sales margin quantity [sub volume] variance.
|
Product
|
Budgeted Quantity Units
|
Actual Quantity Units
|
Budgeted Sales Price Per Unit
|
Actual Sale Price Per Unit
|
Standard Cost Per Unit
|
|
X
|
240
|
400
|
Rs.50
|
Rs.45
|
Rs.30
|
|
Y
|
160
|
200
|
25
|
20
|
15
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Define ‘Standard Cost& and ‘Standard Costing&. In which type of industries standard costing can be employed?
2. What is the difference between ‘budgetary control& and ‘standard costing&?
3. Discuss the benefits and limitations of standard costing.
4. Explain the various types of standards.
5. Discuss briefly the procedure of establishment of standard costs regarding material, labour and overheads.
6. Describe and compare the different methods of accounting for standard costs.
7. Define and explain briefly the following terms:
- Material price variance
- Material usage variance
- Material mixture variance
- Material yield variance
8. Define and explain briefly the following terms:
- Wage rate variance
- Labour efficiency variance
- Variable overhead efficiency variance
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Define and explain the following terms:
- Fixed overhead cost variance
- Fixed overhead volume variance
- Fixed overhead capacity variance
- Fixed overhead calendar variance
- Fixed overhead efficiency variance.
2. Define and explain the sales variances based on a] profits and b] turnover.
3. Write short notes on investigation of variances and management by exception in connection with standard costing.
4. Recently there have been significant developments in budgetary control and standard costing systems. You are required to discuss, a] five factors which should be kept in mind in deciding whether or not to investigate a variance and b] the importance of recognizing the behavioral aspects in effective system.
5. Explain the meaning, causes and disposal of labour variances.
6. What do you understand by ‘learning curve&? State the uses of learning curve in cost and management accounting.
7. What are the behavioral aspects which should be borne in mind by those who are designing and operating standard costing and budgetary control system?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The budgeted overheads and cost driver volumes of XYZ are as follows.
|
Cost Pool
|
Budgeted Overheads (Rs.)
|
Cost Driver
|
Budgeted Volume
|
|
Material procurement
|
5,80,000
|
No. of orders
|
1,100
|
|
Material handling
|
2,50,000
|
No. of movements
|
680
|
|
Set-up
|
4,15,000
|
No. of set ups
|
520
|
|
Maintenance
|
9,70,000
|
Maintenance hours
|
8,400
|
|
Quality control
|
1,76,000
|
No. of inspection
|
900
|
|
Machinery
|
7,20,000
|
No. of machine hours
|
24,000
|
The company has produced a batch of 2,600 components of AX-15, its material cost was Rs. 1,30,000 and labor cost Rs. 2,45,000. The usage activities of the said batch are as follows.
Material orders & 26, maintenance hours & 690, material movements & 18, inspection & 28, set ups & 25, machine hours & 1,800
Calculate & cost driver rates that are used for tracing appropriate amount of overheads to the said batch and ascertain the cost of batch of components using Activity Based Costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information relates to budgeted operations of Division X of a manufacturing company.
|
Particulars
|
Amount in rupees
|
|
Sales & 50,000 units @ Rest. 8
|
4,00,000
|
|
Less :- Variable Costs @ Rest. 6 per unit
|
3,00,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
1,00,000
|
|
Less : Fixed Costs
|
75,000
|
|
Divisional Profits
|
25,000
|
The amount of divisional investment is Rs. 1,50,000 and the minimum desired rate of return on the investment is the cost of capital of 20%
Calculate
I] Divisional expected ROI and ii] Divisional expected RI
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has two division, A and B. Division A manufactures a component which is used by Division B to produce a finished product. For the next period, output and costs have been budgeted as follows.
|
Particulars
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Component units
|
50,000
|
———-
|
|
Finished units
|
—————
|
50,000
|
|
Total variable costs – Rupees
|
2,50,000
|
6,00,000
|
|
Fixed Costs Rupees
|
1,50,000
|
2,00,000
|
The fixed costs are separable for each division. You are required to advise on the transfer price to be fixed for Division A&s component under the following circumstances.
A. Division A can sell the component in a competitive market for Rs. 10 per unit. Division B can also purchase the component from the open market at that price.
B. As per the situation mentioned in (A) above, and further assume that Division B currently buys the component from an external supplier at the market price of Rs. 10 and there is reciprocal agreement between the external supplier and another Division C, within the same group. Under this agreement, the external supplier agrees to buy one product unit from Division C at a profit of Rs. 4 per unit to that division, for every component which Division B buys from the sup.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company fixes the inter-divisional transfer prices for its products on the basis of cost plus an estimated return on investment in its divisions. The relevant portion of the budget for the
Division A for the year 2006-07 is given below.
|
Particulars
|
Amount in Rupees
|
|
Fixed Assets
|
5,00,000
|
|
Current Assets (other than debtors)
|
3,00,000
|
|
Debtors
|
2,00,000
|
|
Annual fixed cost for the division
|
8,00,000
|
|
Variable cost per unit of product
|
10
|
|
Budgeted volume of production per year (units )
|
4,00,000
|
|
Desired Return on Investment
|
28%
|
You are required to determine the transfer price for Division A.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has two divisions, Division A and Division B. Division A has a budget of selling 20,000 number of a particular component X to fetch a return of 20% on the average assets employed. The following particulars of Division A are also known.
|
Particulars
|
Amount in Rupees
|
|
Fixed Overheads
|
5,00,000
|
|
Variable Cost
|
Re. 1 per unit
|
|
Average Assets & Debtors Inventories Plant
|
2,00,000 5,00,000 5,00,000
|
However there is a constraint in marketing and only 1,50,000 units of the component X can be directly sold to the market at the proposed price.
It has been gathered that Division B can take up the balance 50,000 units of component X. A wants a price of Rs. 4 per unit but B is prepared to pay Rs. 2 per unit of X.
Division A has another option on hand, which is to produce only 1,50,000 units of component X. This will reduce the holding of assets by Rs. 2,00,000 and fixed overheads by Rs. 25,000.
You are required to advise the most profitable course of action for Division A.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transferor Ltd. have two processes & Preparing and Finishing. The normal output per week is 7,500 units [completed] at a capacity of 75%.
Transferee Ltd. Had production problems in preparing and require 2,000 units per week of prepared material for their finishing process.
The existing cost structure of one prepared unit of Transferor Ltd. at the existing capacity is as follows.
Material: Rs. 2.00 [variable 100%]
Labor: Rs. 2.00 [variable 50%]
Overheads: Rs. 4.00 [variable 25%]
The sale price of a completed unit of Transferor Ltd. is Rs. 16 with a profit of Rs. 4 per unit.
Contrast the effect on the profits of Transferor Ltd. for 6 months [25 weeks] of supplying units to
Transferor Ltd. with the following alternative transfer prices per unit.
I] Marginal Cost II] Marginal Cost + 25% III] Marginal Cost + 15% return on capital employed. [
Assume capital employed Rs. 20 lakhs] IV] Existing Cost V] Existing Cost + a portion of profit on the basis of preparing cost/total cost X unit profit. VI] At an agreed market price of Rs. 8.50 Assume no increase in the fixed costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company is organized into two divisions namely A and B. A produces three products, K, L and
M. The relevant data per unit is given below.
|
Particulars
|
K
|
L
|
M
|
|
Market price
|
Rs. 120
|
Rs. 115
|
Rs. 100
|
|
Variable costs
|
84
|
60
|
70
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
4
|
5
|
3
|
|
Maximum sales potential – units
|
1600
|
1000
|
600
|
Division B has a demand for 600 units of product L for its use. If division A cannot supply the requirements, division B can buy a similar product from market at Rs.112 per unit. What should be the transfer price of 600 units of L for division B, if the total direct labor hours available in division A are restricted to 15,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following are the correct journal entries for the preceding data?
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
22,500
|
|
|
Various accounts
|
22,500
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
21,000
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
21,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
22,500
|
|
|
Various accounts
|
22,500
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
15,428
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
15,428
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
24,000
|
|
|
Various accounts
|
24,000
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
15,428
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
15,428
|
|
Various accounts
|
22,500
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
22,500
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
15,428
|
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
15,428
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classify the costs listed in the previous exercise as either product costs or period costs.
Gore Company makes products for sporting events. The following data are for the year ended 2010 December 31:
|
Materials inventory, 2010 January 1
|
$45,000
|
|
Materials inventory, 2010 December 31
|
65,000
|
|
Materials purchases
|
175,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
225,000
|
|
Work in process inventory, 2010 January 1
|
30,000
|
|
Work in process inventory, 2010 December 31
|
40,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
130,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory, 2010 January 1
|
80,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory, 2010 December 31
|
140,000
|
Prepare a Cost of Goods Manufactured Statement and compute the cost of goods sold.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Different companies use different bases in computing their predetermined overhead rates. From the following estimated data, compute the predetermined rate to be used by each company:
| |
Company Paper
|
Rock
|
Scissors
|
|
Machine-hours
|
100,000
|
210,000
|
125,000
|
|
Direct labor-hours
|
50,000
|
48,000
|
39,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$800,000
|
$735,000
|
$410,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead cost
|
$400,000
|
$432,000
|
$375,000
|
Basis for determining predetermined overhead rate:
|
Company
|
Basis
|
|
Paper
|
Direct labor cost
|
|
Rock
|
Direct labor-hours
|
|
Scissors
|
Machine-hours
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to the previous exercise. Assume the actual hours and cost data were:
|
Actual
|
Paper
|
Rock
|
Scissors
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$450,000
|
$400,000
|
$375,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$850,000
|
$700,000
|
$400,000
|
|
Direct labor-hours
|
45,000
|
46,000
|
38,000
|
|
Machine-hours
|
105,000
|
200,000
|
130,000
|
a. Compute overapplied or underapplied overhead for each company.
b. Prepare journal entries to transfer overapplied or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold for each company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data relate to Socks Company for the year ended 2010 December 31:
|
Cost of production:
|
|
Direct materials (variable)
|
$360,000
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
504,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead:
|
|
Variable
|
180,000
|
|
Fixed
|
360,000
|
|
Sales commissions (variable)
|
108,000
|
|
Sales salaries (fixed)
|
72,000
|
|
Administrative expenses (fixed)
|
144,000
|
|
Units produced
|
150,000
|
|
Units sold (at $18 each)
|
120,000
|
|
Beginning inventory, 2010 January 1
|
-0-
|
There were no beginning inventories. Assume direct materials and direct labor are variable costs. Prepare two income statements—a variable costing income statement and an absorption costing income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Total Block, Inc., is considering a new sunscreen packet that contains a skin wipe with sunscreen on it. These would be particularly useful for people who do not want to carry a bottle of sunscreen, according to Sunspot”s marketing manager. Classify the following costs of this new product as direct materials, direct labor, manufacturing overhead, selling, or administrative.
a. President”s salary.
b. Packages used to hold the skin wipes.
c. Cleaning materials used to clean the skin wipe packages.
d. Wages of workers who package the product.
e. Cost of advertising the product.
f. The salary of the supervisor of the workers who package the product.
g. Cost accountant”s salary (the accountant works in the factory).
h. Cost of a market research survey.
i. Sales commissions paid as a percent of sales.
j. Depreciation of administrative office building.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Green Thumb Landscaping Company uses a job cost system. As of 2010 January 1, its records showed the following inventory balances:
|
Materials (shrubs, trees, etc.)
|
$13,500
|
|
Work in process
|
25,800
|
|
Finished goods (Job No. 211)
|
30,000
|
The work in process inventory consisted of two jobs:
|
Job No.
|
|
Direct
|
Direct
|
Manufacturing
|
Total
|
| |
|
Materials
|
Labor
|
Overhead
|
|
212
|
10 Downing St.
|
$4,500
|
$6,000
|
$2,400
|
$12,900
|
|
213
|
1010 Wilshire Blvd.
|
5,100
|
4,800
|
3,000
|
12,900
|
| |
|
$9,600
|
$10,800
|
$5,400
|
$25,800
|
Here are data for the company for January: Materials purchased, USD 48,000. Landscaping direct labor costs: direct labor to Job No. 212, USD 12,000; to Job No. 213, USD 24,000; and to Job No. 214, USD 36,000. Indirect labor, USD 30,000. Direct materials used: direct materials for Job No. 212, USD 7,800; for Job No.213, USD 14,400; and for Job No. 214, USD 24,000. Supplies (indirect materials) used amounted to USD 1,200. Overhead is assigned to jobs at USD 3 per labor-hour, with 8,000 labor-hours to Job 212 and 2,000 labor-hours each to Jobs 213 and 214. Jobs 212 and 213 were completed and in Finished Goods Inventory at the end of January. Sales revenues for January were USD 45,000; cost of goods sold was USD 30,000 for Job No. 211 that was in Finished Goods Inventory on 2010 January 1. Overhead costs incurred other than indirect labor and indirect materials were depreciation, USD 3,000, and utilities, fuel, and miscellaneous, USD 3,000.
a. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions, including the transfer of underapplied or overapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold.
b. Assuming selling and administrative expenses were USD 10,000, prepare an income statement for January.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The annual budget of ABC Ltd. at 60% and 80% level of performance is as under. [Rs. in thousands]
|
Particulars
|
60% capacity
|
80% capacity
|
|
Direct material
|
360
|
480
|
|
Direct labour
|
480
|
640
|
|
Production overheads
|
252
|
276
|
|
Administrative overheads
|
124
|
132
|
|
Selling and distribution overheads
|
136
|
148
|
|
Total
|
1, 352
|
1, 676
|
The company is experiencing difficulties in selling its products and is presently operating at 50% capacity. The sales revenue for the year is estimated at Rs.9,00,000. The directors are seriously considering suspending operations till the market picks up. Market research undertaken by the company reveals that in about 12 months time, the sales will pick up and the company can comfortably operate at 75% level of performance and earn a sales income of Rs.18,00,000 in that year. The sales personnel of the company do not want to suspend operations for fear of adverse reactions in the market but the directors want to decide the issue purely on financial considerations.
If the manufacturing and other operations of the company are suspended for a year, it is estimated that,
1) The present fixed cost could be reduced to Rs.2, 20, 000 per annum.
2) The settlement cost of personnel not required would amount to Rs.1, 50, 000.
3) The maintenance of plant has to go on and that would cost Rs.20, 000 per annum
4) On resuming operations, the expenditure connected with reopening after shut down would amount to Rs.80, 000. Submit a report to the directors and indicate therein, based on purely financial considerations, whether it would be advisable to suspend the company&s operations in the current year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The effect of price reduction is always to reduce the profit/volume ratio, to raise the break even point and to shorten the margin of safety. Explain and illustrate by numerical example.
2. What is a break even chart? What is a profit graph? State the purpose of constructing such charts.
3. State the assumptions and limitations of break even point analysis.
4. Construct a profit graph with suitable data and obtain an equation of the profit line. Use this equation in profit planning.
5. What are the different methods available for segregation of semi variable expenses? Explain with examples.
6. Discuss fully the applications of marginal costing.
7. Discuss the reasons for difference between profits under marginal costing and absorption costing.
8. Discuss the limitations of marginal costing.
9. What do you understand by profit/volume ratio? Discuss the importance of the profit/volume ratio and state how it can be improved?
10. Discuss the importance of break even point.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company manufactures two products, X and Y. A forecast of units to be sold in the first four months of the year is given below.
|
Particulars
|
Product X [units]
|
Product Y [units]
|
|
January
|
1, 000
|
2, 800
|
|
February
|
1, 200
|
2, 800
|
|
March
|
1, 600
|
2, 400
|
|
April
|
2, 000
|
2, 000
|
|
May
|
2, 400
|
1, 600
|
Other information is given below.
|
Particulars
|
Product X & Rs. Per Unit
|
Product Y- Rs. Per Unit
|
|
Direct material
|
12.50
|
19.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
4.50
|
7.00
|
|
Factory overheads per unit
|
3.00
|
4.00
|
There will be no opening and closing work in progress [WIP] at the end of any month and finished product [in units] equal to half of the budgeted sale of the next month should be in stock at the end of each month. [including previous year December]
You are required to prepare,
A] Production budget for January to April and
B] Summarized production cost budget.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Ltd. manufactures a single product P with a single grade of labor. The sales budget and finished goods stock budget for the 1st Quarter ending on 30th June 2008 are as follows.
Sales: 1,400 units
Opening finished units: 100 units
Closing finished units: 140 units
The goods are imported only when production work is complete and it is budgeted that 10% of finished work will be scrapped. The standard direct labor content of the product P is 3 hours. The budgeted productivity ratio for direct labor is 80% only. The company employs 36 direct operatives who are expected to average 144 working hours each in the 1st quarter. You are required to prepare,
I] Production Budget II] Direct Labor Budget and III] Comment on the problem that your direct labor budget reveals and suggest how this problem might be overcome.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data, prepare a Production Budget for XYZ Ltd for a period of 6 months ending
30th June.
|
Product
|
Opening Stock 1st January 2008 – units
|
Closing Stock 30th June 2008 Units
|
Sales Forecast Units
|
Normal Loss in Production [%]
|
|
A
|
8,000
|
10,000
|
60,000
|
4
|
|
B
|
9,000
|
50,000
|
50,000
|
2
|
|
C
|
12,000
|
14,000
|
80,000
|
6
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A newly started company wishes to prepare Cash Budget from January 2008. Prepare a Cash Budget for the first six months from the following estimated receipts and expenditures.
|
Month
|
Total Sales Rs.
|
Materials Rs.
|
Wages Rs.
|
Production Overheads Rs.
|
Selling & Distribution Overheads Rs.
|
|
January
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
4,000
|
3,200
|
800
|
|
February
|
22,000
|
14,000
|
4,400
|
3,300
|
900
|
|
March
|
24,000
|
14,000
|
4,600
|
3,300
|
800
|
|
April
|
26,000
|
12,000
|
4,600
|
3,400
|
900
|
|
May
|
28,000
|
12,000
|
4,800
|
3,500
|
900
|
|
June
|
30,000
|
16,000
|
4,800
|
3,600
|
1,000
|
Cash balance on 1st January was Rs.10, 000. A new machine is to be installed at Rs.30, 000 on credit to be repaid by two equal installments in March and April. Sales commission @ 5% on total sales is to be paid within the month following actual sales. Rs.10, 000 being the amount of 2nd call on shares may be received in March. Share premium amounting to Rs.2, 000 is also receivable with 2nd call. Credit allowed by suppliers is 2 months, credit allowed to customers is 1 month, delay in payment of overheads is 1 month, and delay in payment in wages is ½ month.
Assume cash sales to be 50% of total sales.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Summarized below are the Income and Expenditure forecasts for the month March to August 2008
|
Month
|
Credit Sales Rs.
|
Credit Purchases Rs.
|
Wages Rs.
|
Mfg. Expenses Rs.
|
Offi ce Expenses Rs.
|
Selling Expenses Rs.
|
|
March
|
60,000
|
36,000
|
9,000
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
4,000
|
|
April
|
62,000
|
38,000
|
8,000
|
3,000
|
1,500
|
5,000
|
|
May
|
64,000
|
33,000
|
10,000
|
4,500
|
2,500
|
4,500
|
|
June
|
58,000
|
35,000
|
8,500
|
3,500
|
2,000
|
3,500
|
|
July
|
56,000
|
39,000
|
9,000
|
4,000
|
1,000
|
4,500
|
|
August
|
60,000
|
34,000
|
8,000
|
3,000
|
1,500
|
4,500
|
You are given the following further information
- Plant costing Rs.16, 000 due for delivery in June. 10% on delivery and balance after three months.
- Advance tax Rs.8, 000 is payable in March and June
- Period of credit allowed, Suppliers 2 months and customers 1 month
- Lag in payment of manufacturing expenses half month
- Lag in payment of all other expenses one month
- Cash balance on 1st May 2008 is Rs.8, 000
- Prepare Cash Budget for three months starting from 1st May 2008
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a Cash Budget in respect of six months from July to December from the following information.
|
Month
|
Sales Rs.000
|
Mat. Rs.000
|
Wages Rs.000
|
Production O/H Rs.000
|
Admn O/H Rs.
|
Selling O/H Rs
|
Dist. O/H Rs
|
R & D O/H Rs
|
|
April
|
100
|
40
|
10
|
4.4
|
3,000
|
1,600
|
800
|
1,000
|
|
May
|
120
|
60
|
11.2
|
4.8
|
2,900
|
1,700
|
900
|
1,000
|
|
June
|
80
|
40
|
8
|
5
|
3,040
|
1,500
|
700
|
1,200
|
|
July
|
100
|
60
|
8.4
|
4.6
|
2,960
|
1,700
|
900
|
1,200
|
|
Aug.
|
120
|
70
|
9.2
|
5.2
|
3,020
|
1,900
|
1,100
|
1,400
|
|
Sept
|
140
|
80
|
10
|
5.4
|
3,080
|
2,000
|
1,200
|
1,400
|
|
Oct
|
160
|
90
|
10.4
|
5.8
|
3,120
|
2,050
|
1,250
|
1,600
|
|
Nov
|
180
|
100
|
10.8
|
6
|
3,140
|
2,150
|
1,350
|
1,600
|
|
Dec
|
200
|
110
|
11.6
|
6.4
|
3,200
|
2,300
|
1,500
|
1,600
|
The cash balance as on 1st July was expected Rs.1, 50, 000
Expected Capital Expenditure:
Plant and Machinery to be installed in August to a cost of Rs.40, 000 will be payable on September 1st. The extension to the Research and Development Department amounting to Rs.10, 000 will be completed on August 1st, payable Rs.2, 000 per month from the date of completion. Under a hire purchase agreement Rs.4, 000 is to be paid each month. The Cash Sales of Rs.2, 000 per month are expected. No commission is payable. However a commission of 5% on credit sales is to be paid within the month following the sale. Period of credit allowed by suppliers 3 months, credit allowed to customers 2 months, delay in payment of overheads 1 month, delay in payment of wages 1st week of the following month. An income tax of Rs.1, 00, 000 is due to be paid on October 1st. A preference share dividend of 10% on Rs.2, 00, 000 is payable on November 1st. 10% calls on the ordinary share capital of Rs.4, 00, 000 is due on July 1st and September 1st. The dividend from investments amounting to Rs.30, 000 is expected on November 1st.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The company desires to maintain a cash balance of Rs.15, 000 at the end of each quarter. Cash can be borrowed or repaid in multiples of Rs.500 at an interest rate of 10% p.a. Management does not want to borrow cash more than what is necessary and wants to repay as early as possible. In any event, loans cannot be extended beyond a quarter. Interest is computed and paid when principal is repaid. Assume that borrowing takes place at the beginning and repayments are made at the end of the quarter. A manufacturing company is currently working at 50% capacity and produces 10, 000 units at a cost of Rs.180 per unit as per the following details.
Materials: Rs.100
Labor: Rs.30
Factory Overheads: Rs.30 [40% fixed]
Administrative Overheads: Rs.20 [50% fixed]
Total Cost Per Unit: Rs.180
The selling price per unit at present is Rs.200. At 60% working, material cost per unit increases by 2% and selling price per unit falls by 2%. At 80% working, material cost per unit increases by 5% and selling price per unit falls by 5%. Prepare a Flexible Budget to show the profits/losses at 50%, 60% and 80% capacity utilization.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Ltd. manufactures a single product for which market demand exists for additional quantity.
Present sales of Rs.60, 000 per month utilize only 60% capacity of the plant. Sales Manager assures that with a reduction of 10% in the price, he would be in a position to increase the sales by about 25% to 30%. The following data are available.
Selling price: Rs.10 per unit
Variable cost: Rs.3 per unit
Semi variable cost: Rs.6, 000 fixed plus Rs.0.50 per unit
Fixed cost: Rs.20, 000 at present level estimated to be Rs.24, 000 at 80% output
You are required to,
• Prepare a statement showing the operating profit at 60%, 70% and 80% levels of capacity utilization at current selling price and at proposed selling price
• The percentage increase in the present output which will be required to maintain the present profit margin at the proposed selling price.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following budget of PQ Ltd, a manufacturing organization, has been prepared for the year 2007-08.
|
Particulars
|
% of Sales Value
|
|
Raw Materials
|
40
|
|
Direct Wages
|
25
|
|
Factory Overheads – Variable
|
10
|
|
Factory Overheads – Fixed
|
5
|
|
Administration and Selling and Distribution Overheads – Variable
|
6
|
|
Administration and Selling and Distribution Overheads – Fixed
|
12
|
|
Profit
|
2
|
|
Sales Value
|
100
|
After considering the quarterly performance, it is felt that the budgeted volume of sales would not be achieved. But the company expects to achieve 80% of the budgeted sales [equivalent to sales value of Rs.160, 00, 000] At this stage; the company has received an export order for its usual line of products. The estimated prime cost and special export expenses for fulfilling the export order are Rs.13, 00, 000 and Rs.40, 000 respectively. You are required to,
1) Present the original budget and the revised budget based on 80% achievement of the target sales, showing the quantum of profit/loss
2) Prepare a statement of budgeted costs for working out the overhead recovery rates in percentages
3) Work out the lowest quotation for the export order.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information relates to the production activities of Goodwish Ltd for 3 months ending on 31st December, 2006.
|
Particulars
|
Amount in Rupees
|
|
Fixed Expenses:
|
|
Management Salaries
|
2,10, 000
|
|
Rent and Taxes
|
1,40, 000
|
|
Depreciation of Machinery
|
1,75, 000
|
|
Sundry Office Expenses
|
2,22, 000
|
|
Total Fixed Expenses
|
7,47, 000
|
|
Semi & Variable Expenses at 50% capacity
|
|
Plant Maintenance
|
62, 500
|
|
Labor
|
2,47, 000
|
|
Salesmen&s salaries
|
72, 500
|
|
Sundry Expenses
|
65, 000
|
|
Total Semi-Variable Expenses
|
4,47, 000
|
|
Variable Expenses
|
|
Materials
|
6,00, 000
|
|
Labour
|
6,40, 000
|
|
Salesmen&s commission
|
95, 000
|
|
Total Variable Expenses
|
13,35, 000
|
It is further noted that semi-variable expenses remain constant between 40% and 70% capacity, increase by 10% of the above figures between 70% and 85% capacity and increase by 15% of the above figures between 85% and 100% capacity. Fixed expenses remain constant whatever the level of activity may be. Sales at 60% capacity are Rs.25,50, 000, at 80% capacity Rs.34, 00, 000 and at 100% capacity Rs.42, 50, 000. Assuming that all items of produced are sold, prepare a Flexible Budget at 60%, 80% and 100% productive capacity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
S.M. Ltd. produces two products, A and B. The budget for these products [at 60% level of activity] for the year 2008-09 gives the following information.
|
Particulars
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
|
Raw Material Per Unit
|
Rs.7.50
|
Rs.3.50
|
|
Direct Labor Per Unit
|
Rs.4.00
|
Rs.3.00
|
|
Variable Overheads Per Unit
|
Rs.2.00
|
Rs.1.50
|
|
Fixed Overheads Per Unit
|
Rs.6.00
|
Rs.4.50
|
|
Selling Price Per Unit
|
Rs.20.00
|
Rs.15.00
|
|
Production and Sales [Units]
|
4,000
|
6,000
|
The Managing Director, not being satisfied, with the projected results presented above, referred the budget to the Marketing Director for his observations regarding performance improvement. The Marketing Director suggested that the sales [ in quantity] of both the products A and B could be increased by 50% provided the selling price were reduced by 5% and 10% for the products A and B respectively. The price reduction should be made applicable to the entire sales [in quantity] of both the products A and B. You are required to prepare a statement of overall profitability on the basis of original budget and the revised budget.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What factors generally determine a budget period? Give examples.
2. What is ‘Principal Budget Factor&? Give a list of such factors and state the effect of existence of two or more budget factors in an organization.
3. Distinguish between ‘fixed budget& and ‘flexible budget&. What is the starting point for the preparation of budgets?
4. Budgetary control of repairs and maintenance is extremely difficult & Discuss
5. What do you understand by ‘Zero Base Budgeting& as distinct from conventional budgeting? Briefly state its process, its advantages and limitations. Discuss its applications in Indian conditions.
6. What do you understand by ‘Performance Budgeting&? Explain its main features.
7. You are the budget controller of a large organization and are primarily concerned with budgetary control of large-scale administrative expenses.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data are available in respect of a manufacturing company
|
Particulars
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
|
Production – units
|
400
|
360
|
|
Man-hours to produce above
|
8,000
|
7,000
|
|
Variable overheads
|
Rs.10, 000
|
Rs.9, 150
|
The standard time to produce one unit of the product is 20 hours.
Calculate variable overhead variances.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available from the records of a manufacturing company using standard costing system.
|
Particulars
|
Standard
|
Actual
|
|
Production
|
4,000 units
|
3,800 units
|
|
Working days
|
20
|
21
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
Rs.40, 000
|
Rs.39, 000
|
|
Variable overheads
|
Rs.12, 000
|
Rs.12, 000
|
Calculate the following overhead variances
I] Variable overhead variance
II] Fixed overhead cost variance
III] Fixed overhead expenditure variance
IV] Fixed overhead volume variance
V] Fixed overhead efficiency variance
VI] Fixed overhead calendar variance
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Ltd. produces an article by blending two basic raw materials. It operates a standard costing system and the following standards have been set for raw materials.
|
Material
|
Standard Mix
|
Standard Price
|
|
A
|
40%
|
Rs.4.00
|
|
B
|
60%
|
Rs.3.00
|
The standard loss in processing is 15%. During September 2007, the company produced 1, 700 kg of finished output.
The position of stock and purchases for the month of September 2007 is as under,
|
Material
|
Quantity as on 1/9/2007 Kg
|
Quantity as on 30/9/2007 -Kg
|
Purchases Kg
|
Cost Rs.
|
|
A
|
35
|
5
|
800
|
3, 400
|
|
B
|
40
|
50
|
1, 200
|
3, 000
|
Calculate Material Cost Variance, Price Variance, Quantity Variance, Mix Variance and Yield Variance. Assume that First In First Out method is followed for material issues
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company is manufacturing a chemical product making use of four different types of raw materials.
The following information is available regarding the standards and actual.
|
Material
|
Share of total input Standard – %
|
Raw material cost Standard Rs/kg
|
Quantity consumed Actual
|
Raw material cost & Actual Rs./kg
|
|
A
|
40
|
50
|
42, 000
|
48
|
|
B
|
30
|
80
|
31, 000
|
80
|
|
C
|
20
|
90
|
18, 000
|
92
|
|
D
|
10
|
100
|
9, 000
|
110
|
There is an inevitable normal loss of 10% during the processing. Actual output 92, 000 kg
Calculate Material Cost, Price, Quantity, Mix and Yield variances.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The standard material inputs required for 1, 000 kg of a finished output are given below.
|
Material in kg
|
Quantity [Rs.]
|
Standard Rate Per Kg & Rs.
|
|
P
|
450
|
20
|
|
Q
|
400
|
40
|
|
R
|
250
|
60
|
|
Total Input
|
1100
|
|
|
Less: Standard Loss
|
100
|
|
|
Standard Output
|
1000
|
|
Actual production in a period was 20, 000 kg of the finished product for which the actual quantities of materials used and the prices paid thereof are as under.
|
Material
|
Quantity Used – Kg
|
Purchased Price Per Unit [Rs]
|
|
P
|
10, 000
|
19
|
|
Q
|
8, 500
|
42
|
|
R
|
4, 500
|
65
|
Calculate Material Cost, Price, Quantity, Mix and Yield Variances. Prepare reconciliation among the
Variances
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following standards have been set to manufacture a product
Direct Materials:
• 2 units of A @ Rs.4 per unit: Rs.8
• 3 units of B @ Rs.3 per unit: Rs.9
• 15 units of C @ Re.1 per unit: Rs.15
• Direct Labour 3 hrs @ Rs.8 per hour: Rs.24
• Standard Prime Cost: Rs.56
The company manufactured and sold 6000 units of the product during the year. Direct Material cost was as follows:
• 12, 500 units of A @ Rs.4.40 per unit
• 18, 000 units of B @ Rs.2.80 per unit
• 88, 500 units of C @ Rs.1.20 per unit
The company worked for 17, 500 direct labour hours during the year. For 2500 of these hours the company paid Rs.12 per hour while for the remaining the wages were paid at the standard rate. Calculate material price and usage variances and labour rate and efficiency variances.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presents a business’s comparative balance sheet that’s missing the information for owners’ equity. Assume that the company didn’t issue additional capital stock shares during the year and didn’t pay cash dividends to its shareowners during the year. Determine its net income for the year 2007.
|
Balance Sheets at Year-Ends 2006 and 2007
|
|
Assets
|
2006
|
2007
|
Changes
|
|
Cash
|
$456,000
|
$425,000
|
($31,000)
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$386,000
|
$340,000
|
($46,000)
|
|
Inventory
|
$518,000
|
$576,000
|
$58,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$46,000
|
$52,000
|
$6,000
|
|
Current Assets
|
$1,406,000
|
$1,393,000
|
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$897,000
|
$1,060,000
|
$163,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($257,000)
|
($318,000)
|
($61,000)
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$640,000
|
$742,000
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$2,046,000
|
$2,135,000
|
|
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$246,000
|
$230,000
|
($16,000)
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$204,000
|
$215,000
|
$11,000
|
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$350,000
|
$300,000
|
($50,000)
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
$800,000
|
$745,000
|
$125,000
|
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$400,000
|
$525,000
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The beginning and ending balances of certain accounts in a company’s balance sheet are as follows:
| |
Beginning Balance
|
Ending Balance
|
Changes
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$500,000
|
$465,000
|
($35,000)
|
|
Inventory
|
$780,000
|
$860,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$110,000
|
$105,000
|
($5,000)
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$350,000
|
$325,000
|
($25,000)
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$165,000
|
$175,000
|
$10,000
|
The business records $145,000 depreciation expense for the year and its net income is $258,000 for the year. Determine its cash flow from operating activities for the year. Present your answer in the indirect format for cash flow from operating activities in the statement of cash flows.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that the facts remain the same except that the business doesn’t record depreciation expense in the year. Instead, it leases all its fixed assets and pays rent. The rent expense for the year is $145,000. Determine its cash flow from operating activities for the year. Present your answer for reporting cash flow from operating activities according to the indirect format
|
Cash Flow from Operating Activities
|
|
|
|
Net Income
|
$405,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable increase
|
($35,000)
|
|
|
Inventory increase
|
($45,000)
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses increase
|
($15,000)
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
$191,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable increase
|
$35,000
|
|
|
Accrued expenses payable increase
|
$40,000
|
$576,000
|
|
Cash Flow from Investing Activities
|
|
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
|
($425,000)
|
|
Cash Flow from Financing Activities
|
|
|
|
Short-term notes payable increase
|
$125,000
|
|
|
Long-term notes payable increase
|
$125,000
|
|
|
Issue of capital stock
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Cash dividends to shareowners
|
($250,000)
|
$50,000
|
|
Increase in cash during year
|
|
$201,000
|
|
Beginning cash balance
|
|
$700,000
|
|
Ending cash balance
|
|
$901,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Review the company’s year-end listing of accounts’ balances shown below.
a. How can you tell from this listing of accounts that the business has not recorded its following three expenses for the year?
• Bad debts expense: Caused by uncollectible accounts receivable
• Cost of goods sold expense: For the cost of products sold; the revenue from these sales has been recorded in the sales revenue account
• Depreciation expense: For the use of fixed assets (property, plant, and equipment) during the year
b. Also, did you notice that there is no income tax expense account? What is the explanation for this omission?
| |
End of First Year
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$559,750
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$645,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$0
|
|
Inventory
|
$3,725,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$185,000
|
|
|
Property, Plant & Equipment
|
$1,150,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
$0
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$309,500
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
|
$108,500
|
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
|
$350,000
|
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
|
$500,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity – Capital Stock
|
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity – Retained Earnings
|
|
$0
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
$4,585,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Bad Debts Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Selling & General Expenses
|
$1,033,000
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
$55,250
|
|
|
Totals
|
$7,353,000
|
$7,353,000
|
At this point the chief accountant sits down with top management to decide which accounting methods the business should use to record cost of goods sold expense, depreciation expense, and bad debts expense. The financial statements for the first year cannot be prepared until these accounting choices are made and the three expenses are recorded.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Review the company’s year-end listing of accounts’ balances shown below.
a. How can you tell from this listing of accounts that the business has not recorded its following three expenses for the year?
• Bad debts expense: Caused by uncollectible accounts receivable
• Cost of goods sold expense: For the cost of products sold; the revenue from these sales has been recorded in the sales revenue account
• Depreciation expense: For the use of fixed assets (property, plant, and equipment) during the year
b. Also, did you notice that there is no income tax expense account? What is the explanation for this omission?
| |
End of First Year
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$559,750
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$645,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$0
|
|
Inventory
|
$3,725,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$185,000
|
|
|
Property, Plant & Equipment
|
$1,150,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
$0
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$309,500
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
|
$108,500
|
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
|
$350,000
|
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
|
$500,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity – Capital Stock
|
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity – Retained Earnings
|
|
$0
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
$4,585,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Bad Debts Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Selling & General Expenses
|
$1,033,000
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
$55,250
|
|
|
Totals
|
$7,353,000
|
$7,353,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Does the interest expense in table look reasonable, or does it need an adjustment at the end of the year?
| |
End of First Year
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$559,750
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$645,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$0
|
|
Inventory
|
$3,725,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$185,000
|
|
|
Property, Plant & Equipment
|
$1,150,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
$0
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$309,500
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
|
$108,500
|
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
|
$350,000
|
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
|
$500,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity – Capital Stock
|
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity – Retained Earnings
|
|
$0
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
$4,585,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Bad Debts Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Selling & General Expenses
|
$1,033,000
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
$55,250
|
|
|
Totals
|
$7,353,000
|
$7,353,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In table the Owners’ Equity — Retained Earnings account has a zero balance. Why?
| |
End of First Year
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$559,750
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$645,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$0
|
|
Inventory
|
$3,725,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$185,000
|
|
|
Property, Plant & Equipment
|
$1,150,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
$0
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$309,500
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
|
$108,500
|
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
|
$350,000
|
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
|
$500,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity – Capital Stock
|
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity – Retained Earnings
|
|
$0
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
$4,585,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Bad Debts Expense
|
$0
|
|
|
Selling & General Expenses
|
$1,033,000
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
$55,250
|
|
|
Totals
|
$7,353,000
|
$7,353,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose the business whose inventory acquisition history appears table sold all 186,000 units that it had available for sale during the year. In this situation, does the business’s choice of cost of goods sold expense method make any difference?
| |
Quantity
|
Per Unit
|
Cost
|
|
First purchase
|
14,200 Units
|
$25.75
|
$365,650
|
|
Second purchase
|
42,500 Units
|
$23.85
|
$1,013,625
|
|
Third purchase
|
16,500 Units
|
$24.85
|
$410,025
|
|
Fourth purchase
|
36,500 Units
|
$23.05
|
$841,325
|
|
Fifth purchase
|
6,100 Units
|
$26.15
|
$159,515
|
|
Sixth purchase
|
52,000 Units
|
$23.65
|
$1,229,800
|
|
Seventh purchase
|
18,200 Units
|
$26.00
|
$473,200
|
|
Totals
|
186,000 Units
|
|
$4,493,140
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The chief accountant of the business outlined in the example question is from the double-breasted, dull grey suit, old guard school of accounting. He argues that a customer’s account receivable should be written off as uncollectible when it becomes more than 30 days old. The normal credit term offered by the business to customers is 30 days. At the end of its first year, $278,400 of the company’s $645,000 accounts receivable is more than 30 days old. What bad debts expense entry would the chief accountant make at the end of the year if he had his way? Do you agree with his approach?
The president of the business outlined in the example question attends an industry update seminar at which the speaker says that the average bad debts experience of businesses in this field is about 1 percent of sales. Assume that the business adopts this method. Determine its bad debts expense for the first year and for the balances in its accounts receivable and allowance for doubtful accounts at the end of the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Viveka Elementary School has a total of 150 students consisting of 5 sections with 30 students per section. The school plans for a picnic around the city during the weekend to places such as zoo, the amusement park, the planetarium etc. A private transport operator has come forward to lease out the buses for taking the students. Each bus will have a maximum capacity of 50 [excluding 2 seats reserved for the teachers accompanying the students]. The school will employ two teachers for each bus, paying them an allowance of Rs.50 per teacher. It will also lease out the required number of buses. The following are the other cost estimates:
Breakfast: Rs.5 per student
Lunch: Rs.10 per student
Tea: Rs.3 per student
Entrance fee at zoo: Rs.2 per student
Rent: Rs.650 per bus
Special permit fees Rs.50 per bus
Block entrance fees at the planetarium Rs.250
Prizes to students for games: Rs.250
No costs are incurred in respect of accompanying teachers. [Except the allowance of Rs.50 per teacher]
You are required to prepare a statement showing the total cost and also average cost per student for the levels of 30,60,90,120 and 150 students.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A retail dealer in garments is currently selling 24, 000 shirts annually. He supplies the following details for the year ended 31st March 2007.
Selling price per shirt: Rs.800
Variable cost per shirt: Rs.600
Fixed Cost:
Staff salaries: Rs.24, 00, 000
General Office Cost: Rs.8, 00, 000
Advertising Cost: Rs.8, 00, 000
As a Cost Accountant, you are required to answer the following each part independently:
1. Calculate Break Even Point and margin of safety in sales revenue and number of shirts sold.
2. Assume that 30, 000 shirts were sold during the year, find out the net profit of the fi rm.
3. Assuming that in the coming year, an additional staff salary of Rs.10, 00, 000 is anticipated, and price of shirt is likely to be increased by 15%, what should be the break even point in number of shirts and sales?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following figures are available from the records of Venus Traders as on 31st March
|
Particulars
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Sales
|
150
|
200
|
|
Profits
|
30
|
50
|
Calculate:
a) Profit/Volume ratio and total fixed expenses
b) Break Even Sales
c) Sales required to earn a profit of Rs.90 lakhs
d) Profit/Loss that would arise if the sales were Rs.280 lakhs
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Company has two Plants at Locations I and II, operating at 100% and 75% of their capacities respectively. The company is considering a proposal to merge the two plants at one location to optimize available capacity. The following details are available in respect of the two plants, regarding their present performance/operation.
|
Particulars
|
Location I
|
Location II
|
|
Sales [Rs.in lakhs]
|
200
|
75
|
|
Variable Costs [Rs. in lakhs]
|
140
|
54
|
|
Fixed Cost [Rs. in lakhs]
|
30
|
14
|
For decision-making purposes, you are required to work out the following information,
I. The capacity at which the merged plan will break even.
II. The profit of the merged plant working at 80% capacity
III. Sales required if the merged plant is required to earn an overall profit of Rs.22, 00,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company wants to buy a new machine to replace one, which is having frequent breakdown. It received offers for two models, M1 and M2. Further details regarding these two models are given below
|
Particulars
|
M1
|
M2
|
|
Installed Capacity [Units]
|
10, 000
|
10, 000
|
|
Fixed overheads per annum
|
Rs.2, 40,000
|
Rs.1, 00,000
|
|
Estimated profit at the above capacity
|
Rs.1, 60,000
|
Rs.1, 00,000
|
The product manufactured using this type of machine, M1 or M2, is sold at Rs.100 per unit. You are required to determine,
a. Break Even level of sales for each model.
b. The level of sales at which both the models will earn the same profit.
c. The model suitable for different levels of demand for the product.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company manufactures a single product with a capacity of 1 50 000 units per annum. The summarized profitability statement for a year is as under:
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Sales: 1 00 000 units @ Rs.15 per unit
|
|
15, 00,000
|
|
Less: Cost of Sales
- Direct materials
- Direct labor
- Production overheads-variable
- Production overheads-fixed
- Administrative overheads-fixed
- Selling and distribution overheads &variable
- Selling and distribution overheads-fixed
|
3, 00,00
2, 00,000
60,000
3,00,000
1, 50,000
90,000
1,50,000
|
|
|
Total cost of sales
|
|
12, 50,000
|
|
Profit
|
|
2, 50,000
|
You are required to evaluate the following options:
1) What will be the amount of sales required to earn a target profit of 25% on sales, if the packing is improved at a cost of Re.1 per unit?
2) There is an offer from a large retailer for purchasing 30 000 units per annum subject to providing a packing with a different brand name at a cost of Rs.2 per unit. However, in this case there will be no selling and distribution expenses. Also this will not in any way affect the company&s existing business.
What will be the break even price for this additional offer?
3) If an expenditure of Rs.3, 00,000 is made on advertising, the sales would increase from the present level of 1 00 000 units to 1 20 000 units at a price of Rs.18 per unit. Will that expenditure be justified?
4) If the selling price is reduced by Rs.2 per unit, there will be 100% capacity utilization. Will the reduction in selling price be justified?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A] The following particulars are extracted from the records of a company.
|
Particulars
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
|
Sale price per unit
|
Rs.100
|
Rs.120
|
|
Consumption of material
|
2 kg
|
3 kg
|
|
Material cost
|
Rs.10
|
Rs.15
|
|
Direct labour cost
|
15
|
10
|
|
Direct expenses
|
5
|
6
|
|
Machine hours used
|
3
|
2
|
|
Fixed overheads per unit
|
Rs.5
|
Rs.10
|
|
Variable overheads per unit
|
15
|
20
|
Direct labour per hour is Rs.5. Comment on the profitability of each product [both use same raw material] when, I] total sales potential in units is limited II] total sales potential in value is limited III] raw material is in short supply IV} production capacity [in terms of machine hours] is limited.
B] Assuming raw material as the key factor, availability of which is 10,000 kg and maximum sales potential of each product being 3500 units, find out the product mix which will yield maximum profits.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
P Ltd. manufactures and sells children&s toys of high quality over an extensive market utilizing the services of skilled artists who are paid at an average rate of Rs.15 per hour. The total number of skilled hours available in a year is only 14000. The details of planned production for 2008-09; estimated cost and unit selling prices are given below:
|
Product [Toy]
|
Production Planned [Units]
|
Direct Materials Per Unit Rs.
|
Direct Labour Per Unit Rs.
|
Fixed Overheads Per Unit Rs.
|
Selling Price Per Unit Rs.
|
|
A
|
3000
|
20
|
10
|
15
|
70
|
|
B
|
4000
|
24
|
12
|
18
|
92
|
|
C
|
4000
|
32
|
12
|
18
|
95
|
|
D
|
3000
|
40
|
16
|
24
|
110
|
|
E
|
2400
|
60
|
20
|
30
|
180
|
Variable overheads costs amount to 50% of the direct labor cost. The company has estimated the following maximum and minimum demands for each product.
|
Particulars
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
D
|
E
|
|
Maximum & Units
|
5000
|
6000
|
6000
|
4000
|
4000
|
|
Minimum – Units
|
1000
|
1000
|
1000
|
500
|
500
|
You are required to work out profit as per the production plan of the company and also compute the
optimum profit in the given situation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has compiled the following data for the preparation of its budget for the year 2008-09
|
Particulars
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Product C
|
|
Sale per month – units
|
8, 000
|
4, 000
|
6, 000
|
|
Selling Price
|
Rs.40 per unit
|
Rs.80 per unit
|
Rs.100 per unit
|
|
Direct Materials
|
Rs.20 per unit
|
Rs.48 per unit
|
Rs.40 per unit
|
|
Direct Labour: Department 1 Rs.5 per hour Department 2 Rs.4 per hour
|
5
|
10
|
20
|
|
Variable Overheads
|
8
|
4
|
12
|
|
Fixed Overheads: Rs.1, 50, 000 per month
|
Rs.3 per unit
|
Rs.3 per unit
|
Rs.7 per unit
|
After the budget was discussed, the following action plan was approved for improving the profitability of the company.
I] Direct labour in department 1, which is in short supply should be increased by 15, 000 hours by spending fixed overheads of Rs.8, 000 per month.
II] To boost sales, an advertisement program should be launched at a cost of Rs.10, 000 per month.
III] The selling price should be reduced by: A: 2.5%, B: 8.75%, C: 1%
IV] The sales target have been increased and the sales department has confirmed that the company will be able to achieve the following quantities of sales.
A: 12, 000 units, B: 6, 000 units, C: 10, 000 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sterling Industries Ltd. manufactures product Z by making and assembling three components, A, B and C. The components are made in a machine shop using three identical machines each of which can make any of the three components. However, the total capacity of the three machines is only 12, 000 machine hours per month and is just sufficient to meet the current demand. Labour for assembling is available according to requirements. Further details are given below.
|
Component
|
Machine Hours Per Unit
|
Variable Cost Per Unit
|
|
A
|
4
|
Rs.64
|
|
B
|
5
|
Rs.75
|
|
C
|
6
|
Rs.110
|
|
Assembling [per unit of Z]
|
—
|
—
|
Fixed cost per month amounts to Rs.50, 000. Product Z is sold at Rs.300 per unit. From next month onwards the company expects the demand for Z to rise by 25%. As the machine capacity is limited, the company wants to meet the increase in demand by buying such numbers of A, B or C which is more profitable.
You are asked to find out the following:
I] Current demand and profits made by the company.
II] Which component and how many units of the same should be bought from the market to meet the increase in demand?
III] Profit made by the company is suggestion in I is accepted?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company produces 30, 000 units of product A and 20, 000 units of product B per annum. The sales value and costs of the two products are as follows:
Sales value Rs.7, 60, 000 Factory overheads: Rs.1, 90, 000
Direct material: Rs.1, 40, 000 Administrative and selling overheads: Rs.1, 20, 000
Direct labour: Rs1, 90, 000
50% of the factory overheads are variable and 50% of the administrative and selling overheads are fixed. The selling price of A is Rs.12 per unit and Rs.20 per unit for B.
The direct material and labour ratio for product A is 2:3 and for B is 4:5. For both the products, the selling price is 400% of direct labour. The factory overheads are charged in the ratio of direct labour and administrative and selling overheads are recovered at a flat rate of Rs.2 per unit for A and Rs.3 per unit for B.
Due to fall in demand, of the above products, the company has a plan to diversify and make product C using 40% capacity. It has been estimated that for C direct material and direct labour will be Rs.2.50 and Rs.3 per unit respectively. Other variable costs will be the same as applicable to the product A. The selling price of product C is Rs.14 per unit and production will be 30 000 units.
Assuming 60% capacity is used for manufacture of A and B, calculate,
I] Present cost and profit
II] Cost and profit after diversification
III] Give your recommendations as to whether to diversify or not.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The company’s most recent balance sheet given below. The business uses the straight-line depreciation method, by which an equal amount of depreciation is allocated to each year of a fixed asset’s estimated useful life. If the business had used accelerated depreciation for its fixed assets instead, the balance in the accumulated depreciation account would be $2,100,000. How would its balance sheet be different if the business had used accelerated depreciation? (Ignore income tax effects in your answer.)
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,500,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$700,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$1,000,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$600,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$1,800,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$300,000
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$2,800,000
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$4,600,000
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$4,800,000
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($1,400,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$3,400,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,200,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$8,000,000
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$3,200,000
|
| |
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$8,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The company’s most recent balance sheet given below. The business uses very conservative accounting methods for certain expenses, but it could have used more liberal accounting methods for these expenses. The more liberal accounting methods would have caused the following results:
• Accounts receivable balance would have been $50,000 higher
• Inventory would have been $225,000 higher
• Accumulated depreciation would have been $300,000 lower
Using the landscape format, prepare a revised balance sheet for the business giving effect to these differences. (Ignore income tax effects.)
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,500,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$700,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$1,000,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$600,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$1,800,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$300,000
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$2,800,000
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$4,600,000
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$4,800,000
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($1,400,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$3,400,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,200,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$8,000,000
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$3,200,000
|
| |
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$8,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Do you see anything suspicious in the balance sheet in Figure 6-1 that may indicate accounting fraud?
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,500,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$700,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$1,000,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$600,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$1,800,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$300,000
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$2,800,000
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$4,600,000
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$4,800,000
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($1,400,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$3,400,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,200,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$8,000,000
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$3,200,000
|
| |
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$8,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In reading the company’s latest balance sheet given below, you see that $3,200,000 is reported for owners’ equity. Is this book value of owners’ equity a good guide for putting a value on the business?
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,500,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$700,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$1,000,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$600,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$1,800,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$300,000
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$2,800,000
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$4,600,000
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$4,800,000
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($1,400,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$3,400,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,200,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$8,000,000
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$3,200,000
|
| |
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$8,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the operating ratios for Company X, whose income statement appears below, determine the balances for the assets and liabilities driven by its sales revenue and expenses.
|
Sales Revenue
|
$5,200,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
-3,120,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$2,080,000
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
-1,430,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
-160,000
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$490,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-97,500
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$392,500
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
-137,375
|
|
Net Income
|
$255,125
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the balance of cash based on the normative operating ratio for this asset account.
|
Sales Revenue
|
$15,400,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
-8,470,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$6,930,000
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
-4,368,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
-425,000
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$2,137,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-260,000
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$1,877,000
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
-656,950
|
|
Net Income
|
$1,220,050
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the balance of accounts receivable based on the normative operating ratio for this asset account.
|
Sales Revenue
|
$15,400,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
-8,470,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$6,930,000
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
-4,368,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
-425,000
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$2,137,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-260,000
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$1,877,000
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
-656,950
|
|
Net Income
|
$1,220,050
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the balance of inventory based on the normative operating ratio for this asset account.
|
Sales Revenue
|
$15,400,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
-8,470,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$6,930,000
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
-4,368,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
-425,000
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$2,137,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-260,000
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$1,877,000
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
-656,950
|
|
Net Income
|
$1,220,050
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the balance of accounts payable based on the normative operating ratios for this liability account.
|
Sales Revenue
|
$15,400,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
-8,470,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$6,930,000
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
-4,368,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
-425,000
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$2,137,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-260,000
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$1,877,000
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
-656,950
|
|
Net Income
|
$1,220,050
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the balance of accrued expenses payable based on the normative operating ratio for this liability account.
|
Sales Revenue
|
$15,400,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
-8,470,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$6,930,000
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
-4,368,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
-425,000
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$2,137,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-260,000
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$1,877,000
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
-656,950
|
|
Net Income
|
$1,220,050
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Instead of the amounts shown below, suppose that the cost of Company X’s fixed assets was $3,850,000 and that accumulated depreciation was $958,000. Determine the amount of capital the business would have had to raise in this scenario.
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$700,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$350,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$500,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$165,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$780,000
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$110,000
|
|
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$2,090,000
|
|
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$2,450,000
|
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($685,000)
|
|
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$1,765,000
|
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$3,855,000
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that the balances of assets, accounts payable, and accrued expenses payable were the same as shown below. However, the balance of accumulated depreciation was $400,000. In this scenario, would Company X have had to raise more capital?
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$700,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$350,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$500,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$165,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$780,000
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$110,000
|
|
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$2,090,000
|
|
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$2,450,000
|
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($685,000)
|
|
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$1,765,000
|
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$3,855,000
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Based on Company’s income statement and balance sheet, determine the business’s accounts receivable operating ratio. Express the ratio in weeks rather than as a percentage.
|
Sales Revenue
|
$23,530,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
-14,118,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$9,412,000
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
-7,722,000
|
|
Depreciating Expense
|
-826,500
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$863,500
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-245,000
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$618,500
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
-185,550
|
|
Net Income
|
$432,950
|
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
Cash
|
$1,357,500
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,100,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$2,715,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$742,500
|
|
Inventory
|
$2,172,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$750,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$519,750
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$3,592,500
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$6,764,250
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, &
|
$4,575,000
|
Owners’ Equity:
|
|
|
Equipment
|
($1,385,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
$3,190,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,861,750
|
|
Cost less Depreciation
|
$9,954,250
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$4,361,750
|
|
Total Assets
|
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$9,954,250
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Based on Company’s income statement and balance sheet, determine the business’s inventory operating ratio. Express the ratio in weeks rather than as a percentage.
|
Sales Revenue
|
$23,530,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
-14,118,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$9,412,000
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
-7,722,000
|
|
Depreciating Expense
|
-826,500
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$863,500
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-245,000
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$618,500
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
-185,550
|
|
Net Income
|
$432,950
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,357,500
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,100,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$2,715,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$742,500
|
|
Inventory
|
$2,172,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$750,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$519,750
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$3,592,500
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$6,764,250
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, &
|
$4,575,000
|
Owners’ Equity:
|
|
|
Equipment
|
($1,385,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
$3,190,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,861,750
|
|
Cost less Depreciation
|
$9,954,250
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$4,361,750
|
|
Total Assets
|
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$9,954,250
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Based on Company’s income statement and balance sheet, determine the business’s accrued expenses payable operating ratio. Express the ratio in weeks rather than as a percentage.
|
Sales Revenue
|
$23,530,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
-14,118,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$9,412,000
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
-7,722,000
|
|
Depreciating Expense
|
-826,500
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$863,500
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-245,000
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$618,500
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
-185,550
|
|
Net Income
|
$432,950
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,357,500
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,100,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$2,715,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$742,500
|
|
Inventory
|
$2,172,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$750,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$519,750
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$3,592,500
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$6,764,250
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, &
|
$4,575,000
|
Owners’ Equity:
|
|
|
Equipment
|
($1,385,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
$3,190,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,861,750
|
|
Cost less Depreciation
|
$9,954,250
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$4,361,750
|
|
Total Assets
|
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$9,954,250
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Based on Company’s income statement and balance sheet, determine the business’s prepaid expenses operating ratio. Express the ratio in weeks rather than as a percentage.
|
Sales Revenue
|
$23,530,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
-14,118,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$9,412,000
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
-7,722,000
|
|
Depreciating Expense
|
-826,500
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$863,500
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-245,000
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$618,500
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
-185,550
|
|
Net Income
|
$432,950
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,357,500
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,100,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$2,715,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$742,500
|
|
Inventory
|
$2,172,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$750,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$519,750
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$3,592,500
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$6,764,250
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, &
|
$4,575,000
|
Owners’ Equity:
|
|
|
Equipment
|
($1,385,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
$3,190,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,861,750
|
|
Cost less Depreciation
|
$9,954,250
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$4,361,750
|
|
Total Assets
|
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$9,954,250
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The president of the business also serves as the chair of its board of directors. After you have determined net income for 2007 based on the balance sheet in Figure 8-1, the president tells you that he thinks $200,000 cash dividends were paid to shareowners during 2007. Based on this additional information about cash dividends, what amount of net income did the business earn in 2007?
|
Balance Sheets at Year-Ends 2006 and 2007
|
|
Assets
|
2006
|
2007
|
Changes
|
|
Cash
|
$700,000
|
$901,000
|
$201,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$500,000
|
$535,000
|
$35,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$780,000
|
$825,000
|
$45,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$110,000
|
$125,000
|
$15,000
|
|
Current Assets
|
$2,090,000
|
$2,386,000
|
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$2,450,000
|
$2,875,000
|
$425,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($685,000)
|
($876,000)
|
($191,000)
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$1,765,000
|
$1,999,000
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$3,855,000
|
$4,385,000
|
|
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$350,000
|
$385,000
|
$35,000
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$165,000
|
$205,000
|
$40,000
|
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$500,000
|
$625,000
|
$125,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
$1,015,000
|
$1,215,000
|
|
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$1,000,000
|
$1,125,000
|
$125,000
|
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
|
|
Capital
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After you revise your net income answer (see the example question in this section), the president tells you that he has since talked with other directors of the business and realized that he was wrong about the cash dividends. Now he’s fairly certain that $250,000 cash dividends were paid to shareowners during 2007 and that the business issued additional capital stock shares for $50,000. Based on this additional information, what amount of net income did the business earn in 2007?
A business reports $500,000 net loss for the year just ended. It didn’t issue or retire any capital stock shares during the year, and it didn’t pay cash dividends because of its loss in the year. Did its net worth decrease $500,000 during the year? Did its cash balance decrease $500,000 during the year because of its loss?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Can the net worth of a business go negative? If so, explain briefly how this may happen and if it means that the business would have a negative cash balance.
Presents the comparative balance sheet of the business and to Figure 8-2 that presents its statement of changes in stockholders’ equity. Suppose the business had paid $175,000 cash dividends (instead of $250,000) to stockholders in 2007. In this scenario, which dollar amounts in the business’s comparative balance sheet would be different as the result of this one change?
|
Balance Sheets at Year-Ends 2006 and 2007
|
|
Assets
|
2006
|
2007
|
Changes
|
|
Cash
|
$700,000
|
$901,000
|
$201,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$500,000
|
$535,000
|
$35,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$780,000
|
$825,000
|
$45,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$110,000
|
$125,000
|
$15,000
|
|
Current Assets
|
$2,090,000
|
$2,386,000
|
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$2,450,000
|
$2,875,000
|
$425,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($685,000)
|
($876,000)
|
($191,000)
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$1,765,000
|
$1,999,000
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$3,855,000
|
$4,385,000
|
|
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$350,000
|
$385,000
|
$35,000
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$165,000
|
$205,000
|
$40,000
|
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$500,000
|
$625,000
|
$125,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
$1,015,000
|
$1,215,000
|
|
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$1,000,000
|
$1,125,000
|
$125,000
|
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
|
|
Capital
|
|
|
|
|
Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity
|
| |
Capital Stock
|
Retained Earning
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
|
Balance at end of 2005
|
$750,000
|
$922,000
|
$1,672,000
|
|
Net Income – 2006
|
|
$318,000
|
|
|
Cash Dividends – 2006
|
|
($150,000)
|
|
|
Balance at end of 2006
|
$750,000
|
$1,090,000
|
$1,840,000
|
|
Capital Stock Issue
|
$50,000
|
|
|
|
Net Income – 2007
|
|
$405,000
|
|
|
Cash Dividends – 2007
|
|
($250,000)
|
|
|
Balance at end of 2007
|
$800,000
|
$1,245,000
|
$2,045,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Continuing the example scenario created earlier in this chapter, the president asks you to determine cash flow from profit (net income) in 2007. In other words, he wants to know how much the business’s cash balance increased from making profit in the year. Based on the information in its comparative balance sheet and its statement of changes in stockholders equity, determine the business’s cash flow from profit for 2007. Did its cash balance increase $405,000, the same amount as net income? Or, did cash increase a different amount? Did cash decrease as the result of the company’s profit-making activities? (It’s possible.)
|
Balance Sheets at Year-Ends 2006 and 2007
|
|
Assets
|
2006
|
2007
|
Changes
|
|
Cash
|
$700,000
|
$901,000
|
$201,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$500,000
|
$535,000
|
$35,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$780,000
|
$825,000
|
$45,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$110,000
|
$125,000
|
$15,000
|
|
Current Assets
|
$2,090,000
|
$2,386,000
|
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$2,450,000
|
$2,875,000
|
$425,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($685,000)
|
($876,000)
|
($191,000)
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$1,765,000
|
$1,999,000
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$3,855,000
|
$4,385,000
|
|
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$350,000
|
$385,000
|
$35,000
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$165,000
|
$205,000
|
$40,000
|
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$500,000
|
$625,000
|
$125,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
$1,015,000
|
$1,215,000
|
|
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$1,000,000
|
$1,125,000
|
$125,000
|
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
|
|
Capital
|
|
|
|
|
Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity
|
| |
Capital Stock
|
Retained Earning
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
|
Balance at end of 2005
|
$750,000
|
$922,000
|
$1,672,000
|
|
Net Income – 2006
|
|
$318,000
|
|
|
Cash Dividends – 2006
|
|
($150,000)
|
|
|
Balance at end of 2006
|
$750,000
|
$1,090,000
|
$1,840,000
|
|
Capital Stock Issue
|
$50,000
|
|
|
|
Net Income – 2007
|
|
$405,000
|
|
|
Cash Dividends – 2007
|
|
($250,000)
|
|
|
Balance at end of 2007
|
$800,000
|
$1,245,000
|
$2,045,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose a small business keeps just the following eight accounts.
|
Liability for Unpaid Expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
|
|
|
The business’s transactions during the year include:
a. Made sales during the year for $2,400 (all were cash sales)
b. The cost of goods sold during the year was $1,600
c. Incurred $425 in operating expenses, which will be paid sometime later
d. Borrowed $10,000 from bank (ignore the interest expense on this note)
e. Cut a check for $275 in payment of operating expenses; these particular expenses are recorded as paid and haven’t been recorded previously in a liability account.
How should these transactions be recorded in the business’s accounts?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A business makes almost all credit sales. At the end of the year, the business has $485,000 total accounts receivable. This ending balance doesn’t include $28,500 specific accounts receivable that were written off during the period. The business estimates that customers will not pay $6,500 of the ending balance of its accounts receivable. What year-end adjusting entry is made?
The business has more cash than it needs for day-to-day operations, so the excess cash is invested in short-term marketable securities that pay interest. During the year, the business receives interest checks, which it records in the interest income account. At the end of the year, $48,500 interest has been earned but not yet received. This interest will be included in the interest checks the business receives next year. The business hasn’t recorded this earned interest. What adjusting entry is made at the end of the year?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the end of the year, the business owes its employees $58,300 for accumulated vacation and sick pay. This amount will be paid when employees actually take their vacations and time off for sick leave. No entry has been made for this accrued liability. What adjusting entry is made at the end of the year?
Based on the final determination of its federal income tax for the year, the business owes $431,500. During the year, it made $3,978,500 total installment payments towards its income tax, which were charged (debited) to its income tax expense account. The $431,500 balance still owed to the government will be paid when the business’s income tax return is filed later.
a. What adjusting entry is made at the end of the year?
b. What is the amount of income tax expense reported in its income statement for the year?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the end of the year, the business counts and inspects its ending inventory of products on hand, which is stored in its warehouse and retail sales areas. Usually, employees discover some damaged and spoiled products that can’t be sold. This year is no exception. The cost of spoiled and damaged products that will have to be thrown away is $26,300. What adjusting entry is made?
At the end of the year, after all year-end adjusting entries have been made and posted, the balances in the revenue and expense accounts of the business are as follows:
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
|
$2,725,000
|
|
|
Selling & Administrative Expenses
|
|
$1,228,500
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
|
$175,000
|
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
|
$138,000
|
|
What entry is made to close the nominal accounts and enter the profit or loss for the year?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The T accounts before the closing entry is recorded are provided here. What are the balances in the revenue and expense accounts after the closing entry is posted? in the revenue and expense accounts of the business are as follows:
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
|
$2,725,000
|
|
|
Selling & Administrative Expenses
|
|
$1,228,500
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
|
$175,000
|
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
|
$138,000
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The business is organized legally as a partnership and therefore doesn’t pay income tax. (A partnership’s annual taxable income or loss is passed through to its partners who pick up their share of profit or loss in their individual income tax returns.) Year-end adjusting entries have been recorded and posted, and the business’s revenue and expense accounts are provided here. What closing entry is recorded?
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
|
$687,500
|
|
|
Selling & Administrative Expenses
|
|
$674,300
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A business reports $346,000 net income (profit) for the year just ended. Determine two valid scenarios for changes in its assets and liabilities resulting from its profit for the year.
A business reports $3,800,000 loss for the year just ended. Determine two valid scenarios for changes in its assets and liabilities resulting from its loss for the year.
A business reports $5,250,000 net income for the year just ended. In its statement of cash flows for the year, the business reports that its cash flow from operating activities (from its profit for the year) is $4,650,000. In other words, its cash balance increased $4,650,000 from its profit-making activities for the year. Determine two valid scenarios for changes in assets other than cash and in liabilities that result from its profit for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The sales revenue and expenses of a business for the year just ended are as follows:
|
Cost of goods sold expense
|
$598,500
|
|
Income tax expense
|
None
|
|
Interest expense
|
$378,000
|
|
Selling and general expenses
|
$896,500
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$1,698,000
|
Prepare the annual income statement of the business in the single-step format.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that you are one of the major shareowners of the private business whose annual income statement is shown below. You aren’t a manager of the business or on its board of directors, but as an outside investor, you’re vitally interested in how the business is doing financially. So you carefully read the business’s financial statements, especially its income statement. You depend on the business making a profit in order to pay dividends from profit to its shareowners. Are you satisfied with the extent of expense disclosure in the income statement? Do you want the income statement to report one or more of the following expenses?
• Compensation of officers
• Salaries and wages of employees
• Repairs and maintenance
• Bad debts
• Rents
• Taxes and licenses
• Depreciation
• Advertising
• Pension and profit-sharing plans
• Employee benefit plans
|
Sales Revenue
|
$26,000,000.00
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
14,300,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$11,700,000.00
|
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
8,700,000
|
|
Operating Earnings
|
$3,000,000.00
|
|
Interest Expense
|
400,000
|
|
Earnings Before Income Tax
|
$2,600,000
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
910,000
|
|
Net Income
|
$1,690,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the five summary journal entries for sales revenue and expenses for the year, can you determine the cash flow from profit (that is, the net cash increase or decrease from its profit-making activities for the year)?
The sales revenue entry given below. Assume that accounts receivable increased $500,000 instead of the $1,000,000 increase in that entry. Prepare the summary journal entry for sales revenue.
|
Cash
|
$25,000,000.00
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$26,000,000.00
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of goods sold expense entry given below. Assume that inventory decreased $500,000 during the year because the business sold more products than it purchased. And assume that accounts payable decreased $250,000 during the year because the business paid more of its purchase liabilities than it bought on credit. Prepare the summary journal entry for cost of goods sold expense.
|
Cost of Goods Sold Expense
|
$14,300,000.00
|
|
Inventory
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Cash
|
$14,500,000.00
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$1,800,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The selling and general expenses entry given below. Assume that prepaid expenses didn’t change during the year. The amounts for depreciation expense and the increases in accounts payable and accrued expenses payable are the same as in the summary journal entry. Selling and general expenses are $8,700,000, the same as in the example. Prepare the summary journal entry for selling and general expenses.
|
Selling and General Expenses
|
$8,700,000.00
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$300,000
|
|
Cash
|
$6,900,000.00
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$850,000
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$725,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
$525,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income tax expense entry earlier given below. Assume that the business overpaid its income tax for the year; the total of installment payments during the year was $50,000 more than its $910,000 income tax for the year. The overpayment will be refunded to the business. Prepare the summary journal entry for income tax expense.
|
Income Tax Expense
|
$910,000.00
|
|
Cash
|
$830,000
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$80,000.00
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
This comprehensive journal entry for the asset and liability effects of making profit “speaks” to an accountant, who’s familiar with journal entries and debits and credits. Translate this journal entry into plain English, giving an explanation that non-accounting business managers, lenders, and investors can understand.
The effects from sales and expenses for the year just ended for a business were as follows:
Sales revenue was $15,700,000; the business collected $13,900,000 cash from customers, and accounts receivable increased $1,800,000. The cost of products sold during the year was $9,800,000, and the business added $500,000 of products to inventory. It didn’t pay for all $10,300,000 in purchases. Its accounts payable for inventory purchases increased $250,000. Selling and general expenses were $4,860,000. The business added $125,000 to its prepaid expenses balance during the year. It recorded a $145,000 depreciation expense for the year. (Depreciation is included in the selling and general expenses amount reported in its income statement.) Not all expenses were paid for by the end of the year; unpaid expenses caused a $150,000 increase in accounts payable and a $225,000 increase in accrued expenses payable. The business paid $200,000 interest during the year. The amount of unpaid interest at year-end increased $25,000. The business is organized legally as a limited liability company (LLC) and has elected not to pay income tax. Its taxable income for the year is passed through to its shareowners, who include their respective portions of the business’s taxable income in their individual income tax returns.
a. Prepare the annual income statement of the business in single-step form.
b. Prepare a summary journal entry for the sales and for each expense of the business for the year.
c. Prepare a comprehensive entry showing the changes in assets and liabilities from profit for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The comprehensive entry for this business summarizing the changes in assets and liabilities from its sales and expenses for the year is as follows:
|
Cash
|
$280,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$825,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$375,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$25,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$955,000
|
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$475,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
$390,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity — Retained Earnings
|
$875,000
|
For the business’s board of directors, prepare a schedule of changes in assets and liabilities that summarizes the effects on the business’s financial condition from its profit for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After its initial financing and investing activities, the business manufactures its first batch of products. The total cost of this production run is $800,000. No sales have been made yet, but the business is poised to send out its sales force to call on customers. Its balance sheet after the first production run is as follows:
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
Cash
|
$440,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$225,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$800,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$500,000
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$2,000,000
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($15,000)
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
Cost less Depreciation
|
$1,985,000
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$3,225,000
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$3,225,000
|
Explain the changes in the company’s balance sheet, starting with its balance sheet immediately after its initial financing and investing transactions (see the preceding example question).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Does the balance sheet shown below report the current replacement costs of the business’s fixed assets (which are labeled “Property, Plant & Equipment” in the balance sheet)? Also, does the balance sheet indicate which depreciation methods the business uses to depreciate its fixed assets?
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,500,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$700,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$1,000,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$600,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$1,800,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$300,000
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$2,800,000
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$4,600,000
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$4,800,000
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($1,400,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$3,400,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,200,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$8,000,000
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$3,200,000
|
| |
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$8,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose the business sold only services and not products. Which account(s) would you not expect to see in its balance sheet?
The balance sheet given below, how would you assess the short-run solvency of the business? (Solvency refers to the ability of a business to pay its liabilities on time.)
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,500,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$700,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$1,000,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$600,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$1,800,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$300,000
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$2,800,000
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$4,600,000
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$4,800,000
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($1,400,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$3,400,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,200,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$8,000,000
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$3,200,000
|
| |
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$8,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that just before the end of the year, the business paid an additional $400,000 of its accounts payable. Normally, it would not have accelerated payments of accounts payable, but the order to do so came down from “on high,” and the payments were made. Why do you think the business may have done this?
Suppose the business held its books open for several days into the next year. It recorded an additional $200,000 of payments from customers as if they had been received on December 31 (the last day of its fiscal year) even though the money wasn’t actually received and deposited in its bank account until after the end of the year. Why do think the business may have done this?
Q. Determine whether the size of the business’s balance sheet is consistent with the size of its income statement.
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,500,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$700,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$1,000,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$600,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$1,800,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$300,000
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$2,800,000
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$4,600,000
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$4,800,000
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($1,400,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$3,400,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,200,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$8,000,000
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$3,200,000
|
| |
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$8,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Does the balance sheet presented below give any indication of how old the company is, or how many years it has been in business? Are there any particular accounts or other items in the balance sheet that indicate whether the company is fairly new or has been around for many years?
|
Assets
|
Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$1,500,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$700,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$1,000,000
|
Accrued Expenses Payable
|
$600,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$1,800,000
|
Short-term Notes Payable
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$300,000
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$2,800,000
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$4,600,000
|
Long-term Notes Payable
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Property, Plant, & Equipment
|
$4,800,000
|
Owners Equity:
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
($1,400,000)
|
Capital Stock (10,000 shares)
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost Less Depreciation
|
$3,400,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
$2,200,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$8,000,000
|
Total Owners’ Equity
|
$3,200,000
|
| |
|
Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity
|
$8,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Three of the four components of cash flow for the year of a business are as follows:
|
Cash flow from operating activities
|
$2,680,000
|
|
Cash flow from investing activities
|
????
|
|
Cash flow from financing activities
|
$1,250,000
|
|
Net increase (decrease) in cash during the year
|
$400,000
|
Determine cash flow from investing activities for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Three of the four components of cash flow for the year of a business are as follows:
|
Cash flow from operating activities
|
????
|
|
Cash flow from investing activities
|
($480,000)
|
|
Cash flow from financing activities
|
($150,000)
|
|
Net increase (decrease) in cash during the year
|
$150,000
|
Determine cash flow from operating activities for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose a business commits accounting fraud by deliberately not writing down its inventory of $268,000, which is the cost of certain products that it can no longer sell and will be thrown in the junk heap. How should its balance sheet be adjusted to correct for this accounting fraud, ignoring income tax effects?
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
Fixed Assets (Net of Accumulated Depreciation)
|
_____
|
|
_____
|
|
Total Assets
|
|
Total Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose a business commits accounting fraud by deliberately not recording $465,000 liabilities for unpaid expenses at the end of the year. How should its balance sheet be adjusted to correct for this accounting fraud, ignoring income tax effects?
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
Fixed Assets (Net of Accumulated Depreciation)
|
_____
|
|
_____
|
|
Total Assets
|
|
Total Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the year, a business engaged in the following transactions:
a. Borrowed money from a lender (for example, a bank)
b. Purchased products that it put in inventory to be sold to customers at a later date
c. Bought new delivery trucks that will be used for several years
d. Sold to customers products that had been held in inventory
For each transaction, identify which type of transaction it is according to the four basic types:
• Profit-making activities (sales and expenses)
• Set-up and follow-up transactions for sales and expenses
• Investing activities
• Financing activities
Purchasing and constructing assets that have multi-year lives are long-term investments, which are classified as investing activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to the eight basic accounts presented in the condensed balance sheet shown below the four assets, the two liabilities, and the two owners’ equities. How does each of the following transactions change the company’s financial condition?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$250,000
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
$350,000
|
|
Receivables
|
$300,000
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
$500,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$400,000
|
|
Owner’s invested capital
|
$250,000
|
|
PP&E, net
|
$550,000
|
|
Owner’s retained earnings
|
$400,000
|
|
Assets
|
$1,500,000
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owner’s Equity
|
$1,500,000
|
a. The business borrows $500,000 and signs a legal instrument called a note payable to the lender, promising to pay interest over the life of the loan and to return $500,000 at a future date.
b. The business invests $250,000 in a new machine that it will use for several years and pays for the purchase with a check.
c. The business owners invest an additional $750,000 in the business to aid in its growth and expansion.
d. The business distributes $100,000 of the profit it earned during the year to its shareowners.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that all revenue transactions during the year increase cash and that all expense transactions during the year decrease cash. In other words, suppose no other assets and no operating liabilities are affected by the profit-making activities of the business during the year (this scenario isn’t realistic and is assumed only for this problem). The net income (bottom-line profit) of this a typical business for the year is $950,000. How does profit change its financial condition?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the year, a business borrowed $850,000 and used $750,000 of those funds to invest in new long-term operating assets. How do these actions change its financial condition?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A note payable liability came due (meaning it reached its maturity date) during the year, and the business decided not to renew (or rollover) this loan. Accordingly, the business paid $500,000 to the lender, and the note payable was cancelled. (All interest expense on this debt was recorded correctly during the year.) How did paying off the note payable change the business’s financial condition?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A business sells only to other businesses and makes all sales on credit; it doesn’t have any cash sales or advance payment sales. During the year, the business made $35,000,000 sales. From these sales, the business collected $31,500,000 during the year, and it also collected the $3,250,000 receivables balance at the start of the year. What are the effects of these collections on the business’s financial condition?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A business requires advance payments on all sales. In other words, it collects cash from customers before products are delivered to them later. During the year, the business received $12,500,000 in advance payments from customers. By the end of the year, the business had delivered 85 percent of products to customers for advance payments received during the year. Also, the business delivered products to customers during the year that fully discharged the $1,500,000 balance in liability for advance payments at the start of the year. What are the effects of these exchanges on the business’s financial condition?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the year, a business made $3,650,000 cash sales. The business has a very liberal product return policy and therefore accepted product returns from customers and refunded $450,000 cash. What are the effects of these returns on the business’s financial condition?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During its first year of business, a company made $6,250,000 credit sales. The business collected $5,600,000 cash from customers during the year from these sales. Unfortunately, a few customers didn’t pay despite repeated requests and threats of legal action. The business cut off credit to these “deadbeat” customers and refused to make any more credit sales to them. The business had to write off $150,000 uncollectible receivables. What are the effects of these events on its financial condition?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A business leases all its long-term operating assets (buildings, machines, vehicles, and so on). Thus, it has no depreciation expense. For the year just ended, the business recorded $2,450,000 total expenses. Expenses caused $75,000 increase in operating liabilities. Inventory increased $45,000 during the year. How did expenses change the financial condition of the business?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A business decides to engage in accounting fraud to improve its profit performance for the year. Of course this is unethical and illegal, but the chief executive of the business is desperate, and the chief accountant agrees to conspire with the chief executive to carry out this accounting fraud. They decide that they can’t manipulate sales revenue for the year, so the accounting fraud has to be done on the expense side of the ledger. The changes in financial condition caused by the actual expenses of the business for the year are given below. How might management go about misstating the expenses in order to boost profit $125,000?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
–$4,800,000
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
$275,000
|
|
Receivables
|
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
|
Inventory
|
$50,000.00
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
|
PP&E, net
|
–$400,000
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
–$5,425,000
|
|
Assets
|
–$5,150,000
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
–$5,150,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Sales revenue
|
$3,200,000
|
|
Less: Expenses
|
–3,000,000
|
|
Equals: Profit
|
$200,000
|
Determining the effects of profit on the year-end financial condition of a business is a little more involved than the profit computation. You merge the two summaries of changes in financial condition presented earlier in this chapter — one from revenue (see the section “Concentrating on Sales”) and the second from expenses (see the section “Concentrating on Expenses”) — to determine the composite effect on assets, liabilities, and owners’ retained earnings.
What is the composite change in the year-end financial condition of the business caused by its profit-making activities over the year? Refer back to the financial condition changes caused by sales and expenses, which are presented .
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that sales for the year caused the following changes in the company’s financial condition:
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
Cash
|
+$3,000,000
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
–$50,000
|
|
Receivables
|
+$250,000
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
+$3,300,000
|
|
Assets
|
+$3,250,000
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
+$3,250,000
|
What is the composite effect on financial condition from the company’s profit-making activities for the year?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Starting with the financial condition of the business at the beginning of the year (see “Seeing
Both Sides of Business Transactions” earlier in this chapter) and the changes caused by its profit making activities during the year (see “Concentrating on the Composite Effect of Profit and Loss” earlier in this chapter), what is its financial condition at the end of the year, ignoring other transactions that occurred during the year? To help you work this problem, the company’s financial condition at the start of the year is repeated here.
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
Cash
|
$250,000
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
$350,000
|
|
Receivables
|
$300,000
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
$500,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$400,000
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
$250,000
|
|
PP&E, net
|
$550,000
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
$400,000
|
|
Assets
|
$1,500,000
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Building on your answer, assume that the business had other non-profit transactions during the year, as follows:
_ Increased its interest-bearing liabilities $100,000.
_ Paid $80,000 distribution from profit to its shareowners
Taking into account these additional transactions, what is the financial condition of the business at the end of the year?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
Cash
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
|
Receivables
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
|
PP&E, net
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following condensed balance sheet presents eight core accounts of a business. Which of the eight accounts have a high frequency of transactions recorded in them during the year, and which have a low frequency of transactions? In other words, which of these eight are busy accounts, and which are not?
|
Condensed Balance Sheet
|
|
Cash
|
$250,000
|
|
Operating liabilities
|
$350,000
|
|
Receivables
|
$300,000
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities
|
$500,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$400,000
|
|
Owners’ invested capital
|
$250,000
|
|
PP&E, net
|
$550,000
|
|
Owners’ retained earnings
|
$400,000
|
|
Assets
|
$1,500,000
|
=
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
$1,500,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Steel Corporation”s comparative statements of income and retained earnings and consolidated balance sheet for 2010 and 2009 follow: Steel Corporation Consolidated statement of Earnings For the years ended 2010 December 31, 2009 (USD thousands)
| |
December31
|
| |
(1)
|
(2)
|
|
Net sales
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Costs and expenses:
|
$4,876.5
|
$4,819.4
|
|
Cost of sales
|
$4,202.8
|
$4,287.3
|
|
Depreciation
|
284
|
261.1
|
|
Estimated restructuring losses
|
111.8
|
137.4
|
|
Total costs
|
$4,598.6
|
$4,685.8
|
|
Income from operations
|
$268.9
|
$ 133.6
|
|
Financing income (expense):
|
7.7
|
7.1
|
|
Interest and other income
|
-60
|
-46.2
|
|
Interest and other financing costs
|
$ 216.6
|
$ 94.5
|
|
Loss before income taxes and cumulative
|
|
effect of changes in accounting
|
|
Benefit (provision) for income taxes
|
-37
|
14.0)
|
|
Net earning (loss)
|
$ 179.6
|
80.5
|
|
Retained earnings, January 1
|
-859.4
|
939.9)
|
| |
$ (679.8)
|
-859.4
|
|
Dividends
|
0
|
0
|
|
Retained earnings, December 31
|
$ (679.8)
|
859.4)
|
Steel Corporation Consolidated balance sheet As of 2010 December 31, and 2009
| |
Dec-31
|
|
| |
-1
|
-2
|
|
Assets
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 180.0
|
$ 159.5
|
|
Receivables
|
374.6
|
519.5
|
|
Total
|
$ 554.6
|
$ 679.0
|
|
Inventories
|
|
|
Raw materials and supplies
|
$ 335.5
|
$ 331.9
|
|
Finished and semi-finished products
|
604.9
|
534.9
|
|
Contract work in process less billings of
|
18
|
16
|
|
$10.9 and $2.3
|
|
|
Total inventories
|
$ 958.2
|
$ 882.9
|
|
Other current assets
|
$ 13.0
|
$ 7.2
|
|
Total current assets
|
$ 1,525.8
|
$ 1,569.1
|
|
Property, plant and equipment less
|
$ 2,714.2
|
$ 2,759.3
|
|
accumulated depreciation of $4329.5 and
|
|
$4167.8
|
|
|
|
Investments and miscellaneous assets
|
112
|
124
|
|
Deferred income tax asset – net
|
885
|
903
|
|
Intangible asset – Pensions
|
463
|
427
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 5,700.3
|
$ 5,782.4
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 381.4
|
$ 387.0
|
|
Accrued employment costs
|
208
|
166
|
|
Postretirement benefits other than pensions
|
150
|
138
|
|
Accrued taxes
|
72
|
68
|
|
Debt and capital lease obligations
|
92
|
88.9
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
146
|
163.9
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 1,049.6
|
$ 1,011.2
|
|
Pension liability
|
$ 1,115.0
|
$ 1,117.1
|
|
Postretirement benefits other than pensions
|
1,415
|
1,441.40
|
|
Long-term debt and capital lease obligations
|
546.8
|
668.4
|
|
Other
|
335.6
|
388.5
|
|
Total noncurrent liabilities
|
$ 3,412.4
|
# 3,615.4
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$ 4,462.0
|
$ 4,626.6
|
|
Common stockholders” equity
|
|
Preferred stock – at $1 per share par value
|
$ 11.6
|
$ 11.6
|
|
(aggregate liquidation preference of $481.2);
|
|
Authorized 20,000,000 shares
|
|
Preference stock – at $1 per share par value
|
2.6
|
2.6
|
|
(aggregate liquidation preference of $88.2);
|
|
Authorized 20,000,000 shares
|
|
Common stock – at $1 per share par
|
112.7
|
111.9
|
|
value/Authorized 250,000,000 and
|
|
150,000,000 shares; Issued 112,699,869 and
|
|
111,882,276 shares
|
|
|
Held in treasury, 1,992,189 and 1,996,715
|
-59.4
|
-59.5
|
|
shares at cost
|
|
|
Additional paid-in capital
|
1,850.60
|
1,949
|
|
Accumulated deficit
|
679.8)
|
-859
|
|
Total common stockholders” equity
|
$ 1,238.3
|
$ 1,155.8
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
$ 5,700.3
|
$ 5,782.4
|
a. Perform a horizontal and vertical analysis of Steel”s financial statements in a manner similar to Exhibit 57 and Exhibit 58.
b. Comment on the results obtained in part (a).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ford Motor Company is the world”s second-largest producer of cars and trucks and ranks among the largest providers of financial services in the United States. The following information pertains to Ford: (in millions)
|
(in millions)
|
1998
|
1999
|
2000
|
|
Sales
|
$118.017
|
$135,073
|
$141,230
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,04,616
|
1,18,985
|
1,26,120
|
|
Gross margin
|
$ 13,401
|
$ 16,088
|
$ 15,110
|
|
Operating expenses
|
7,834
|
8,874
|
9,884
|
|
Net operating income
|
$ 5,567
|
$ 7,214
|
$ 5,226
|
a. Prepare a statement showing the trend percentages for each item, using 1998 as the base year.
b. Comment on the trends noted in part (a).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tulip Products, Inc., has a current ratio on 2010 December 31, of 2:1 before the following transactions were completed:
• Sold a building for cash.
• Exchanged old equipment for new equipment. (No cash was involved.)
• Declared a cash dividend on preferred stock.
• Sold merchandise on account (at a profit).
• Retired mortgage notes that would have matured in 2011.
• Issued a stock dividend to common stockholders.
• Paid cash for a patent.
• Temporarily invested cash in government bonds.
• Purchased inventory for cash.
• Wrote off an account receivable as uncollectible. Uncollectible amount is less than the balance of the Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts.
• Paid the cash dividend on preferred stock that was declared earlier.
• Purchased a computer and gave a two-year promissory note.
• Collected accounts receivable.
• Borrowed from the bank on a 120-day promissory note.
• Discounted a customer”s note. Interest expense was involved.
Consider each transaction independently of all the others.
a. Indicate whether the amount of working capital will increase, decrease, or be unaffected by each of the transactions.
b. Indicate whether the current ratio will increase, decrease, or be unaffected by each of the transactions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following selected data are for three companies:
| |
Operating Assets
|
Net Operating Income
|
Net Sales
|
|
Company 1
|
$ 1,404,000
|
$ 187,200
|
$ 2,059,200
|
|
Company 2
|
8,424,000
|
608,400
|
1,87,20,000
|
|
Company 3
|
37,440,000
|
4,914,000
|
3,51,00,000
|
a. Determine the operating margin, turnover of operating assets, and rate of return on operating assets for each company.
b. In the subsequent year, the following changes took place (no other changes occurred): Company 1 bought some new machinery at a cost of USD 156,000. Net operating income increased by USD 12,480 as a result of an increase in sales of USD 249,600. Company 2 sold some equipment it was using that was relatively unproductive. The book value of the equipment sold was USD 624,000. As a result of the sale of the equipment, sales declined by USD 312,000, and operating income declined by USD 6,240. Company 3 purchased some new retail outlets at a cost of USD 6,240,000. As a result, sales increased by USD 9,360,000, and operating income increased by USD 499,200.
• Which company has the largest absolute change in:
a. Operating margin ratio?
b. Turnover of operating assets?
c. Rate of return on operating assets?
• Which one realized the largest dollar change in operating income? Explain this change in relation to the changes in the rate of return on operating assets.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
One of the largest spice companies in the world, McCormick & Company, Inc., produces a diverse array of specialty foods. The following information is for McCormick & Company, Inc.:
| |
2000
|
1999
|
|
(USD thousands)
|
|
|
Net sales
|
$2,123,500
|
$2,006,900
|
|
Income before interest and taxes
|
2,25,700
|
1,74,700
|
|
Net income
|
1,37,500
|
98,500
|
|
Interest expense
|
39,700
|
32,400
|
|
Stockholders” equity
|
3,59,300
|
3,82,400
|
|
Common stock, no par value, November 30
|
1,75,300
|
1,73,800
|
Assume average common shares outstanding for 2000 and 1999 are 69,600 and 72,000 (in thousands), respectively. Compute the following for both 2000 and 1999. Then compare and comment. Assume stockholders” equity for 1998 was USD 388,100.
a. EPS of common stock.
b. Net income to net sales.
c. Return on average common stockholders” equity.
d. Times interest earned ratio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The comparative balance sheets of the Darling Corporation for 2011 December 31, and 2010 follow: Darling Corporation Comparative balance sheets 2011 December 31, and 2010 (USD millions)
| |
2011
|
2010
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 480,000
|
$ 96,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
86,400
|
1,15,200
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
3,84,000
|
4,03,200
|
|
Plant and equipment, net
|
2,68,800
|
2,88,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 1,219,200
|
$902,400
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
$ 96,000
|
$ 96,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
|
Common stock
|
6,72,000
|
6,72,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
4,51,200
|
1,34,400
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
$1,219,200
|
$902,400
|
Based on your review of the comparative balance sheets, determine the following:
a. What was the net income for 2011 assuming there were no dividend payments?
b. What was the primary source of the large increase in the cash balance from 2010 to 2011?
c. What are the two main sources of assets for Darling Corporation?
d. What other comparisons and procedures would you use to complete the analysis of the balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
As Miller Manufacturing Company”s internal auditor, you are reviewing the company”s credit policy. The following information is from Miller”s annual reports for 2008, 2009, 2010, and 2011:
| |
2008
|
2009
|
2010
|
2011
|
|
Nets accounts receivable
|
$
|
$ 2,160,000
|
$ 2,700,000
|
$ 3,600,000
|
| |
1,080,000
|
|
|
|
|
Net sales
|
10,800,000
|
13,950,000
|
1,71,00,000
|
1,98,00,000
|
Management has asked you to calculate and analyze the following in your report: a. If cash sales account for 30 percent of all sales and credit terms are always 1/10, n/60, determine all turnover ratios possible and the number of days” sales in accounts receivable at all possible dates. (The number of days” sales in accounts receivable should be based on year-end accounts receivable and net credit sales.)
b. How effective is the company”s credit policy
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wendy Prince has consulted you about the possibility of investing in one of three companies (Apple, Inc., Baker Company, or Cookie Corp.) by buying its common stock. The companies” investment shares are selling at about the same price. The long-term capital structures of the companies alternatives are as follows:
| |
Apple,
|
Baker
|
Cookie
|
| |
Inc.
|
Company
|
Corp.
|
|
Bonds with a 10% interest rate
|
$2,400,000
|
|
Preferred stock with an 8%
|
$2,400,000
|
|
dividend rate
|
|
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
$4,800,000
|
2400000
|
24,00,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
3,84,000
|
3,84,000
|
3,84,000
|
|
Total long-term equity
|
$5,184,000
|
$5,184,000
|
$5,184,000
|
|
Number of common shares
|
4,80,000
|
2,40,000
|
2,40,000
|
|
outstanding
|
|
|
Prince has already consulted two investment advisers. One adviser believes that each of the companies will earn USD 300,000 per year before interest and taxes. The other adviser believes that each company will earn about USD 960,000 per year before interest and taxes. Prince has asked you to write a report covering these points:
a. Compute each of the following, using the estimates made by the first and second advisers.
(a)Earnings available for common stockholders assuming a 40 percent tax rate.
(b)EPS of common stock.
(c)Rate of return on total stockholders” equity.
b. Which stock should Prince select if she believes the first adviser?
c. Are the stockholders as a group (common and preferred) better off with or without the use of long-term debt in the companies?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following selected financial data excerpted from the annual report of Appliance Corporation represents the summary
information which management presented for interested parties to review: Appliance Corporation
Selected Financial Data (USD thousands except per share data)
| |
2010
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Net sales
|
$3,049,524
|
33,72,515
|
$2,987,054
|
$3041223
|
$2,970,626
|
|
Cost of sales
|
22,50,616
|
24,96,065
|
22,62,942
|
23,39,406
|
22,54,221
|
|
Income taxes
|
74,800
|
90,200
|
38,600
|
15,900
|
44,400
|
|
Income (loss) from continuing
|
14,996)
|
1,51,137
|
51,270
|
-8,254
|
79,017
|
|
operations
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
percent of income (loss) from
|
|
|
|
|
|
continuing operations to net sales
|
0.5%)
|
4.50%
|
1.70%
|
-0.30%
|
2.70%
|
|
Income (loss) from continuing
|
|
|
|
|
|
operations per share
|
$ (0.14)
|
1.42
|
0.48
|
-0.08
|
$ 0.75
|
|
Dividends paid per share
|
0.515
|
0.5
|
0.5
|
0.5
|
0.5
|
|
Average shares outstanding (in
|
|
|
|
|
|
thousands)
|
1,07,062
|
1,06,795
|
1,06,252
|
1,06,077
|
1,05,761
|
|
Working capital
|
$ 543,431
|
$ 595,703
|
$ 406,181
|
$452,626
|
$ 509,025
|
|
Depreciation of property, plant and
|
|
|
|
|
equipment
|
1,02,572
|
1,10,044
|
1,02,459
|
94,032
|
83,352
|
|
Additions to property, plant and
|
|
|
|
|
equipment
|
1,52,912
|
84,136
|
99,300
|
1,29,891
|
1,43,372
|
|
Total assets
|
21,25,066
|
25,04,327
|
24,69,498
|
25,01,490
|
25,35,068
|
|
Long-term debt
|
5,36,579
|
6,63,205
|
724,65
|
7,89,232
|
8,09,480
|
|
Total debt to capitalization
|
45.90%
|
50.70%
|
60.00%
|
58.70%
|
45.90%
|
|
Shareowners” equity per share of
|
|
|
|
|
common stock
|
$ 6.05
|
$ 6.82
|
$ 5.50
|
$ 9.50
|
|
a. As a creditor, what do you believe management”s objectives should be? Which of the preceding items of information would assist a creditor in judging management”s performance?
b. As an investor, what do you believe management”s objectives should be? Which of the preceding items of information would assist an investor in judging management”s performance?
c. What other information might be considered useful?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a group of two or three students, go to the library and attempt to locate Dun & Bradstreet”s Industry Norms and Key Business Ratios. You may have to ask the reference librarian for assistance to see if this item is available at your institution. If it is not available at your institution, ask if it is available through an interlibrary loan. (Obviously, if you cannot obtain this item, you cannot do this project.) Then select and obtain the latest annual report of a company of your choice. Determine the company”s SIC Code (a code that indicates the industry in which that company operates). SIC Codes for specific companies are available on COMPACT DISCLOSURE, an electronic source that may be available at your library. As an alternative, you could call the company”s home office to inquire about its SIC Code. The annual report often contains the company”s phone number. From the annual report, determine various ratios for the company, such as the current ratio, debt to equity ratio, and net income to net sales. Then compare these ratios to the industry norms for the company”s SIC Code as given in the Dun & Bradstreet source. Write a report to your instructor summarizing the results of your investigation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a group of two or three students, obtain the annual report of a company of your choice Identify the major sections of the annual report and the order in which they appear. Would you recommend the order be changed to emphasize the most useful and important information? If so, how? Then describe some specific useful information in each section. Comment on your perceptions of the credibility that a reader of the annual report could reasonably assign to each section of the report. For instance, if such a discussion appears in the annual report you select, would you assign high credibility to everything that appears in the Letter to Stockholders regarding the company”s future prospects? Write a report to your instructor summarizing the results of your investigation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are given the following data relating to a company:
|
Estimated manufacturing overhead per year
|
USD 24,000
|
|
Expected level of activity per year
|
40,000 machine-hours
|
|
Predetermined overhead rate
|
USD 0.60 per machine-hour
|
|
Actual overhead costs incurred during year
|
USD 22,500
|
|
Actual machine-hours
|
35,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Is each of the following equations correct? What key point does each equation raise?
|
a.
|
$250,000 Assets
|
=
|
$100,000 Liabilities
|
+
|
$100,000 Owners’ equity
|
|
b.
|
$2,345,000 Assets
|
=
|
$46,900 Liabilities
|
+
|
$2,298,100 Owners’ equity
|
|
c.
|
$26,450 Assets
|
=
|
$675,000 Liabilities
|
+
|
$648,550 Owners’ equity
|
|
d.
|
$648,550 Owners’ equity
|
=
|
$4,250,000 Liabilities
|
+
|
$400,000 Owners’ equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is the normal way to present the accounting equation?
|
a.
|
Liabilities
|
=
|
Assets
|
–
|
Owners’ equity
|
|
b.
|
Assets
|
–
|
Liabilities
|
=
|
Owners’ equity
|
|
c.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Owners’ equity
|
|
d.
|
Assets
|
–
|
Liabilities
|
–
|
Owners’ equity
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You started a new business one year ago. You’ve been very busy dealing with so many problems that you haven’t had time to sit down and look at whether you made a profit or not. You haven’t run out of cash (which for a start-up venture is quite an accomplishment), but you understand that the sustainability of the business depends on making a profit. The following two summaries present cash flow information for the year and information about two assets and a liability at year-end:
|
Revenue and Expense Cash Flows For First Year
|
|
$558,000 cash receipts from sales
|
|
$375,000 cash payments for purchases of products
|
|
$340,000 cash payments for other expenses
|
|
Two Assets and a Liability at Year-End
|
|
$52,000 receivables from customers for sales made to them during the year
|
|
$85,000 cost of products in ending inventory that haven’t yet been sold
|
|
$25,000 liability for unpaid expenses
|
Compare the profit or loss of your business for its first year according to the cash- and accrual-basis accounting methods.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Take a look at this extremely abbreviated and condensed income statement for a business’s most recent year.
|
Income Statement for Year
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$26,000,000
|
|
Expenses
|
24,310,000
|
|
Net income
|
$1,690,000
|
This business sells products, which are also called goods or merchandise. The cost of products sold to customers during the year was $14,300,000. Expand the condensed income statement to reflect this additional information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please refer to the income statement for the answer to the example question. Suppose the business distributed $650,000 cash to its shareowners from its profit (net income) for the year. Is this cash disbursement treated as an expense?
|
Income Statement for Year
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$26,000,000
|
|
Expenses
|
24,310,000
|
|
Net income
|
$1,690,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following list summarizes the assets and liabilities of a business at the close of business on the last day of its most recent profit period:
|
Amounts owed by customers to the business
|
$485,000
|
|
Cost of unsold products (that will be sold next period)
|
$678,000
|
|
Cash balance on deposit in checking account with bank
|
$396,000
|
|
Amounts owed by business for unpaid purchases and expenses
|
$438,000
|
|
Notes payable to bank (on which interest is paid)
|
$500,000
|
|
Original cost of long-term operating assets that are being depreciated over their useful lives to the business
|
$950,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation of long-term operating assets
|
$305,000
|
Using this information, prepare the business’s balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The statement of cash flows for a business’s most recent year is presented as follows. Based on the information provided, is it possible to determine the amount of cash flow from operating activities?
|
Cash flow from operating activities:
|
|
?????
|
|
Cash flow from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Capital
|
($2,345,000)
|
|
|
expenditures
|
|
|
|
Proceeds from disposal of real estate
|
$225,000
|
($2,120,000)
|
|
Cash flow from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
Increase in debt
|
$1,625,000
|
|
|
Issue of capital
|
$550,000
|
|
|
stock shares
|
|
|
|
Cash dividends to shareholders
|
($400,000)
|
$1,775,000
|
|
Net cash increase during year
|
$355,000
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Three of the four components of cash flow for the year of a business are as follows:
|
Cash flow from operating activities
|
$450,000
|
|
Cash flow from investing activities
|
($725,000)
|
|
Cash flow from financing activities
|
$50,000
|
|
Net increase (decrease) in cash during the year
|
????
|
Determine the increase or decrease in cash during the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mechan Company develops, manufactures, markets, installs and supports a wide range of standards-based LAN and WAN connectivity hardware and software products. The company”s statements of cash flow for the years 2008-2010 follow. Then the relevant portion of Management”s Discussion and Analysis of the statement of cash flows is provided. Consolidated statements of cash flows
Years ended 2010 February 29, and 2009 February 28 and 2008 (In thousands)
| |
2010
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
Net income
|
$ 164,418
|
$ 161,974
|
$ 119,218
|
|
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net
|
|
cash provided by operating activities:
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
32,061
|
26,832
|
17,335
|
|
Provision for losses on accounts receivable
|
356
|
72
|
1,734
|
|
Loss on disposals of property, plant and equipment
|
93
|
174
|
113
|
|
Deferred taxes Changes in assets and liabilities:
|
-38,766
|
-4,434
|
-6,151
|
|
Accounts receivables
|
-55,101
|
27,698)
|
-17,707
|
|
Inventories
|
-50,483
|
23,080)
|
-8,758
|
|
Prepaid expenses and other assets
|
-18,844
|
3,123)
|
1,211
|
|
Accounts payable and accrued expenses
|
62,908
|
11,336
|
22,003
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
3,705
|
10,476
|
-3,924
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities$
|
1,00,347
|
$152,529
|
$125,074
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
$ (65,035)
|
$ (63,091)
|
39,399)
|
|
Purchase of available-for-sale securities
|
-79,427
|
-71,598
|
30,097)
|
|
Purchase of held-to-maturity securities
|
-2,05,852
|
-2,82,712
|
258,517)
|
|
Materials of marketable securities
|
2,08,922
|
3,23,682
|
1,97,406
|
|
Net cash used in investing activities
|
$(141,392
|
$ (93,719)
|
$(130,607
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
Repayment of notes receivable from stockholders
|
$ 174
|
$ 131
|
66
|
|
Repurchase of common stock
|
1,173)
|
-13,070
|
—
|
|
Tax benefit of options exercised
|
7,215
|
5,712
|
6,980
|
|
Common stock issued to employee stock purchase plan
|
3,323
|
2,287
|
1,637
|
|
Proceeds from stock option exercise
|
16,021
|
4,887
|
7,185
|
|
Net cash provided by (used for) financing activities
|
$ 25,560
|
$ (53)
|
$ 15,868
|
|
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash
|
$ 166
|
$ 712
|
$ 161
|
|
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
|
$ (15,319)
|
$ 59,469
|
$ 10,469
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year
|
1,14,032
|
54,563
|
44,067
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents, end of year
|
$ 98,713
|
$ 114,032
|
$ 54,563
|
|
Cash paid during the year for: Income taxes
|
$ 105,233
|
$ 68,420
|
$ 67,263
|
Management”s discussion and analysis Net cash provided by operating activities was USD 100.3 million in fiscal 2010, compared to USD 152.5 million in fiscal 2009 and USD 125.1 million in fiscal 2008. Capital investment for fiscal 2010 of USD 65.0 million included USD 9.8 million for building costs of which USD 3.4 was for the purchase of an engineering building, USD 21.4 million for engineering computer and computer related software and equipment, USD 5.5 million for manufacturing and related equipment and USD 19.0 million for expanding global sales operations. During fiscal 2009, capital expenditures of USD 63.1 million included approximately USD 8.2 million for building costs related to expanding manufacturing and distribution capacities and enlarging worldwide sales operations, USD 12.5 million for manufacturing and manufacturing support equipment and USD 15.0 million for engineering computer and computer related equipment. Another USD 15.0 million was spent in support of expanded global sales activities. During fiscal 2008, capital expenditures of USD 39.4 million included USD 3.9 million on buildings, USD 10.1 million on engineering equipment, USD 7.8 million on manufacturing capacity expansions and USD 2.0 million to equip new sales offices. Cash, cash equivalents and marketable securities increased during fiscal 2010 to USD 407.0 million, from USD 345.9 million in the prior fiscal year. State and local municipal bonds of approximately USD 264.2 million, maturing in approximately 1.5 years, were being held by the Company at 2010 February 29. At 2010 February 29, the Company did not have any short or long term borrowing or any significant financial commitments outstanding, other than those required in the normal course of business. In the opinion of management, internally generated funds from operations and existing cash, cash equivalents and marketable securities will be adequate to support the Company”s working capital and capital expenditures requirements for both short and long term needs.
a. Which method did the company use in arriving at net cash flows from operating activities?
b. Did current assets other than cash increase or decrease during the year ended 2010 February 29?
c. Did current liabilities increase or decrease during the year ended 2010 February 29?
d. What were the main investing activities during this three-year period?
e. What was the main source of cash from financing activities during the threeyear period?
f. Did the company pay any interest expense during the year ended 2010 February 19?
g. Given the following data, calculate the cash flow per share of common stock ratio, the cash flow margin ratio, and the cash flow liquidity ratio. How do these ratios compare with the ratios shown for other companies in the chapter?
|
(in thousands)
|
|
Average number of shares of common stock outstanding
|
71,839
|
|
Net sales
|
$ 1,069,715
|
|
Cash and marketable securities
|
2,53,540
|
|
Current liabilities
|
1,64,352
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following comparative balance sheets and other data are for
Dayton Tent & Awning Sales, Inc.:
Dayton Tent & Awning Sales, Inc.
Comparative Balance Sheets 2011 June 30 and 2010
|
Assets
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
$ 441,800
|
$ 332,600
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
7,50,750
|
4,32,900
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
8,19,000
|
8,50,200
|
|
Land
|
3,900
|
5,850
|
|
Buildings
|
3,12,000
|
3,51,000
|
|
Machinery and tools
|
21,84,000
|
12,09,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation – machinery and
|
8,58,000
|
4,68,000
|
|
tools
|
-8,09,250
|
510,900)
|
|
Total assets
|
$
|
$
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
45,60,200
|
31,38,650
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 226,750
|
$ 275,500
|
|
Accrued liabilities payable
|
1,85,800
|
1,11,700
|
|
Bank loans (due in 2009)
|
56,550
|
66,300
|
|
Mortgage bonds payable
|
3,82,200
|
1,85,250
|
|
Common stock – $100 par
|
17,55,000
|
5,85,000
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par
|
58,500
|
0-
|
|
Retained earnings
|
18,95,400
|
19,14,900
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
$
|
$
|
| |
45,60,200
|
31,38,650
|
Net income for the year was USD 128,000.
Depreciation for the year was USD 356,850.
There was a gain of USD 7,800 on the sale of land. The land was sold for USD 46,800. The additional mortgage bonds were issued at face value as partial payment for a
building valued at USD 975,000. The amount of cash paid was USD 778,050.
Machinery and tools were purchased for USD 448,500 cash. Fully depreciated machinery with a cost of USD 58,500 was scrapped and written off.
Additional common stock was issued at USD 105 per share. The total proceeds were USD 1,228,500.
Dividends declared and paid were USD 147,500.
A payment was made on the bank loan, USD 9,750.
The company paid interest of USD 9,000 and income taxes of USD 75,000.
a. Prepare a working paper for a statement of cash flows.
b. Prepare a statement of cash flows under the indirect method. Also prepare any
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following income statement and other data are for
Kennesaw Auto Glass Specialists, Inc..
Kennesaw auto glass specialists, Inc.
Income Statement For the year ended 2010 December 31
|
Sales
|
|
$450,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,25,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
$325,000
|
|
Operating expenses (other than depreciation) $60,000
|
$60,000
|
|
|
Depreciation expense 20,000
|
20,000
|
80,000
|
|
Net income
|
$245,000
|
Changes in current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities during the year were:
| |
Increase
|
Decrease
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$15,000
|
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
$25,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
8,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
15,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities payable
|
4,000
|
|
Depreciation was the only noncash item affecting net income.
a. Prepare a working paper to calculate cash flows from operating activities under the direct method.
b. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the direct method.
c. Prove that the same cash flows amount is obtained under the indirect method by preparing the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the indirect method. You need not prepare a working paper.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Founded in 1901, The Gillette Company is the world leader in male grooming products, a category that includes blades and razors, shaving preparations and electric shavers. Gillette also holds the number one position worldwide in selected female grooming products, such as wet shaving products and hair epilation devices. The Company is the world”s top seller of writing instruments and correction products, toothbrushes and oral care appliances. In addition, the Company is the world leader in alkaline batteries.
Gillette manufacturing operations are conducted at 38 facilities in 19 countries, and products are distributed through wholesalers, retailers, and agents in over 200 countries and territories.
The company”s statements of cash flows for the years 2001-2003 follow. Then the relevant portion of Management”s Discussion and Analysis of the statement of cash flows is provided. Consolidated statement of cash flows (millions of dollars)
|
Years ended 2003,2002, 2001 December31
|
2003
|
2002
|
2001
|
|
Operating activities
|
|
|
|
Income from continuing operations
|
$ 832
|
$1,248
|
$1,073
|
|
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net
|
|
provided by operating activities:
|
572
|
—
|
440
|
|
Provision of restructuring and asset impairment
|
535
|
464
|
421
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
5
|
-7
|
-46
|
|
Other
|
|
|
|
|
Changes in assets and liabilities, excluding
|
|
effects from acquisition and divestitures:
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
-100
|
48)
|
-442
|
|
Inventories
|
149
|
140)
|
-62
|
|
Accounts payable and accrued liabilities
|
-45
|
65
|
72
|
|
Other working capital items
|
-136
|
97
|
-104
|
|
Other noncurrent assets and liabilities
|
-197
|
252)
|
-142
|
|
Funding German pension plans
|
—
|
—
|
-252
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
$ 1,604
|
$1,427
|
$ 958
|
|
Investing activities
|
|
|
|
Additions to property, plant and equipment
|
$ (793)
|
$ (889)
|
$ (952)
|
|
Disposals of property, plant and equipment
|
41
|
124
|
65
|
|
Acquisitions of businesses, less cash acquired
|
—
|
—
|
-91
|
|
Sale of businesses
|
539
|
—
|
200
|
|
Other
|
-1
|
2
|
5
|
|
Net cash used in investing act
|
$(214)
|
$ (763)
|
$ (773)
|
|
Financing activities
|
|
|
|
Purchase of treasury stock
|
$ (944)
|
$(2,021)
|
$(1,066)
|
|
Proceeds from sale of put options
|
23
|
72
|
56
|
|
Proceeds from exercise of stock options and
|
36
|
149
|
126
|
|
purchase plans
|
|
|
|
Proceeds from long-term debt
|
494
|
1,105
|
500
|
|
Repayment of long-term debt
|
-365
|
—
|
-12
|
|
Increase (decrease) in loans payable
|
-385
|
484
|
708
|
|
Dividends paid
|
-671
|
-626
|
-552
|
|
Settlements of debt-related derivative contracts
|
279
|
42
|
9
|
|
Net cash used in financing activities
|
$ (1,553)
|
$ (795)
|
$ (231)
|
|
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash
|
$ (5)
|
$ (2)
|
$ (2)
|
|
Net cash provided by discontinued operations
|
130
|
111
|
45
|
|
Decrease in cash and cash equivalents
|
$ (18)
|
$ (22)
|
$ (3)
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of
|
80
|
102
|
105
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year
|
$ 62
|
$ 80
|
$ 102
|
|
Supplemental disclosure of cash paid for:
|
|
Interest
|
$ 243
|
$ 126
|
$ 120
|
|
Income taxes
|
$ 480
|
$ 457
|
$ 473
|
|
Noncash investing and financing activities:
|
|
Acquisition of businesses
|
|
|
Fair value of assets acquired
|
$—
|
$—
|
$ 100
|
|
Cash paid
|
—
|
—
|
91
|
|
Liabilities assumed
|
$ —
|
$ —-
|
$ 9
|
Management”s discussion and analysis –
Financial*
Financial condition
The Company”s financial condition continued to be strong in 2003. Net debt (total debt net of associated swaps, less cash and cash equivalents) decreased USD 82 million during 2003, despite additional spending under the Company”s share repurchase program, due to improved cash flow from operations, proceeds from the sale of the Stationery Products business and the favorable exchange impact on foreign currency debt. Net debt at 2003 December 31, amounted to USD 4.45 billion, compared with USD 4.53 billion and USD 3.18 billion at 2002 December 31 and 2001, respectively. The market value of Gillette equity was USD 38 billion at the end of 2003, compared with USD 43 billion at the end of 2002. The Company”s book equity position amounted to USD 1.92 billion at the end of 2003, compared with
USD 3.06 billion at the end of 2002 and USD 4.54 billion at the end of 2001. The decreases in book equity in 2003 and 2002 were due primarily to the Gillette share repurchase program, as well as to the effect of foreign currency translation.
Net cash provided by operating activities in 2003 was USD 1.60 billion, compared with USD 1.43 billion in 2002 and USD .96 billion in 2001. The current ratio of the
Company was .86 for 2003, compared with ratios of 1.39 for 2002 and 1.40 for 2001.
The decrease in the 2003 current ratio was primarily attributable to the Company”s reclassification of all commercial paper borrowings to short-term debt, due to the
Company”s credit facility agreements expiring within 2001. Capital spending in 2003 amounted to USD 793 million, compared with USD 889 million in 2002 and USD 952 million in 2001. Spending in all three years reflected substantial investments in the blade and razor, Duracell and Braun Products segments.
In 2003, the Company sold the Stationery Products business for USD 528 million.
In 2001, the Company made acquisitions in the Duracell Products segment for USD 100 million and sold the Jafra business for USD 200 million. Share repurchase funding in 2003, net of proceeds received from the sale of put options on Company stock, amounted to USD 921 million, compared with USD 1,949 million in 2002 and USD 1,010 million in 2001.
Strong cash inflows from operations, proceeds from the sale of the Stationery Products business and alternate financing sources enabled the Company to reduce its USD 2.0 billion revolving credit facility in 2003 to USD 1.4 billion, expiring October 2004, and its USD 1.1 billion credit facility, expiring December 2004, to USD 550 million in January 2004. Both facilities are used by the Company to complement its commercial paper program.
In order to increase flexibility in sourcing short-term borrowing, the Company launched a USD 1 billion Euro commercial paper program in 2003. At year-end 2003, there was USD 586 million outstanding under this program and USD 1.45 billion outstanding under the US program, compared with USD 2.41 billion at the end of 2002 and USD 1.66 billion at the end of 2001.
During 2003, the Company issued Euro-denominated notes for USD 228 million, due December 2005, and entered into a USD 264 million Euro-denominated debt obligation, with redemption rights in December 2004. During 2002, the Company issued Euro-denominated notes for USD 343 million, due February 2007, and entered into a USD 325 million Euro-denominated debt obligation, with redemption rights in March 2005, and a USD 437 million Euro-denominated debt obligation, with redemption rights in January 2007. The net proceeds were used to refinance existing short-term debt associated with the Company”s share repurchase program.
During 2003, both Standard & Poor”s and Moody”s maintained the Company”s current credit ratings. Standard & Poor”s rates the Company”s long-term debt at AA, while Moody”s rating is Aa3. The commercial paper rating is A1+ by Standard & Poor”s and P1 by Moody”s.
Gillette will continue to have capital available for growth through both internally generated funds and significant credit resources. The Company has substantial unused lines of credit and access to worldwide financial market sources for funds. Source: The Gillette Company”s 2000 annual report, p. 22.
a. Does the company use the direct or indirect method of calculating net cash provided by operating activities?
b. Determine whether each of the current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities increased or decreased during 2003.
c. How is the company expanding its asset base?
d. How much greater is the total market value of the company”s outstanding shares of common stock than the book equity (stockholders; equity)?
e. What is the likelihood that the company will be able to pay at least the current level of dividends in the future?
f. Do you expect to see purchases of treasury stock increase or decrease in the future?
g. Given the following data, calculate the cash flow per share of common stock ratio, the cash flow margin ratio, and the cash flow liquidity ratio. (Round the net cash provided by operating activities to the nearest million before you calculate the ratios.) How do the ratios compare with the ones for companies illustrated in the chapter?
| |
(in millions)
|
|
Average number of shares of common stock
|
1,059
|
|
outstanding
|
|
Net sales
|
9,295
|
|
Cash and marketable securities
|
62
|
|
Current liabilities
|
5,471
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is from the accounting records of Wescott Office Supplies, Inc., for the fiscal years 2011 and 2010:
|
Assets
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Cash
|
$ 66,250
|
$ 61,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
84,000
|
42,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
42,000
|
48,250
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
7,875
|
12,125
|
|
Land
|
94,500
|
78,750
|
|
Buildings
|
1,99,500
|
1,47,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation – buildings
|
-31,500
|
-26,250
|
|
Equipment
|
2,57,250
|
2,10,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation- equipment
|
-78,750
|
-63,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$641,125
|
$509,875
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$73,500
|
$ 47,250
|
|
Accrued liabilities payable
|
50,500
|
55,750
|
|
Five-year note payable
|
52,500
|
-0-
|
|
Capital stock -$50 par
|
4,20,000
|
3,67,500
|
|
Retained earnings
|
39,375
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
$641,125
|
$509,875
|
Net income for year ended 2011 June 30, was USD 56,250.
Additional land was acquired for cash, USD 15,750.
No equipment or building retirements occurred during the year.
Equipment was purchased for cash, USD 47,250.
The five-year note for USD 52,500 was issued to pay for a building erected on land leased by the company. Stock was issued at par for cash, USD 52,500.
Dividends declared and paid were USD 51,000. The company paid interest of USD 10,000 and income taxes of USD 40,000.
a. Prepare a working paper for a statement of cash flows.
b. Prepare a statement of cash flows under the indirect method. Also prepare any necessary supplemental schedule(s).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
National Sports, Inc., is a sports equipment sales company. During 2011, the company replaced USD 18,000 of its fully depreciated equipment with new equipment costing USD 23,000. Although a midyear dividend of USD 5,000 was paid, the company found it necessary to borrow USD 5,000 from its bank on a two-year note. Further borrowing may be needed since the Cash account is dangerously low at year-end.
Following are the income statement and “cash flow statement”, as the company”s accountant calls it, for 2011.
|
National Sports, Inc.
|
|
|
|
Income Statements For the year ended 2011 December 31
|
|
Sales
|
|
$195,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$140,000
|
|
|
|
Operating expense and taxes
|
49,700
|
1,89,700
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
$5,300
|
|
|
National Sports, Inc.
|
|
Cash flow Statement For the Year ended 2011 December 31
|
|
Cash received:
|
|
|
|
From operations:
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
$5,300
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
Total cash from operations
|
$10,300
|
|
|
Note issued to back
|
5,000
|
|
|
Mortgage note issued
|
16,000
|
|
|
Total funds provided
|
$31,300
|
|
|
Cash paid:
|
|
|
|
|
New equipment
|
$23,000
|
|
|
|
Dividends
|
5,000
|
28,000
|
|
|
Increase in cash
|
$ 3,300
|
|
The company”s president is very concerned about what he sees in these statements and how it relates to what he knows has actually happened. He turns to you for help. Specifically, he wants to know why the cash flow statement shows an increase in cash of USD 3,300 when he knows the cash balance decreased from USD 15,000 to USD 500 during the year. Also, why is depreciation shown as providing cash?
You believe you can answer the president”s questions after receiving the following condensed balance sheet data:
|
National Sports, Inc.
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheets 2011 December 31, and 2010 December 31
|
|
Assets
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 500
|
$ 15,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
17,800
|
13,200
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
28,500
|
17,500
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
700
|
300
|
|
Total current assets
|
$ 47,500
|
$ 46,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment:
|
|
Equipment
|
$40,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation – equipment
|
-11,000
|
|
|
Total property, plant, and equipment
|
$ 29,000
|
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 8,700
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities payable
|
600
|
1,100
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 9,300
|
$ 11,100
|
|
Long-term liabilities:
|
|
Notes payable
|
5,000
|
-0-
|
|
Mortgage note payable
|
16,000
|
-0-
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$ 30,300
|
$ 11,100
|
|
Stockholders” equity:
|
|
Common stock
|
$ 40,000
|
$ 40,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
6,200
|
5,900
|
|
Total stockholders” equity
|
$ 46,200
|
$ 45,900
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
$ 76,500
|
$ 57,000
|
Prepare a correct statement of cash flows using the indirect method that shows why National Sports, Inc., is having such a difficult time keeping sufficient cash on hand. Also, answer the president”s questions. The company paid interest of USD 400 and income taxes of USD 3,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are comparative balance sheets for Hardiplank Siding, Inc.:
|
Hardiplank Siding, Inc.
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheets 2011 December 31, and 2010
|
|
Assets
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Cash
|
$ 80,000
|
$ 57,500
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
60,000
|
45,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
90,000
|
52,500
|
|
Land
|
67,500
|
60,000
|
|
Buildings
|
90,000
|
90,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation buildings
|
-30,000
|
27,000)
|
|
Equipment
|
2,85,000
|
2,25,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation –
|
-52,500
|
48,000)
|
|
equipment
|
|
|
Goodwill
|
1,20,000
|
1,50,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$710,000$
|
710,000$605,000
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 95,000
|
$ 65,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities payable
|
30,000
|
22,500
|
|
Capital stock
|
3,15,000
|
3,00,000
|
|
Paid-in capital – stock dividends
|
75,000
|
67,500
|
|
Paid-in capital – land donations
|
15,000
|
0-
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,80,000
|
1,50,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders”
|
$710,000$
|
710,000$605,000
|
|
equity
|
|
|
An analysis of the Retained Earnings account for the year reveals the following:
|
Balance, 2011 January 1
|
$150,000
|
|
Add: Net income for the year
|
1,07,500
|
|
Less: cash dividends
|
$55,000
|
$257,500
|
|
Stock dividends
|
22,500
|
77,500
|
|
Balance, 2011 December 31
|
$180,000
|
a. Equipment with a cost of USD 30,000 on which USD 27,000 of depreciation had been accumulated was sold during the year at a loss of USD 1,500. Included in net income is a gain on the sale of land of USD 9,000.
b. The president of the company has set two goals for 2012: (1) increase cash by USD 40,000 and (2) increase cash dividends by USD 35,000. The company”s activities in 2012 are expected to be quite similar to those of 2011, and no new fixed assets will be acquired.
Prepare a schedule showing cash flows from operating activities under the indirect method for 2011. Can the company meet its president”s goals for 2012? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to the Annual report appendix. Evaluate the ease with which The Limited will be able to maintain its dividend payments in the future at 2006 amounts. (Hint: Compare current dividend amount with net cash provided by operating activities.)
Annual report analysis D Refer to “A broader perspective: Johnson & Johnson” and answer the following questions:
a. Over the last three years from which major activities (operations, investing, financing) has Johnson & Johnson received net cash inflows and on which major activities have they spent the funds?
b. What relationship do you see between “Depreciation and amortization of property and intangibles” and “Additions of property, plant, and equipment”?
c. What were the two major sources of cash outflows to stockholders and which was larger?
d. By how much did the investments in marketable securities grow or shrink over the three-year period?
e. By how much did long-term debt grow or shrink over the three-year period?
f. If you were a stockholder, would you feel uncertain or confident that this company will be able to pay future dividends at the same rate as in the past?
g. For what reason or reasons might the company be buying back its own stock?
h. For the latest year, did the current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities go up or down?
i. From the information that is available, does it appear that the company is performing well or poorly?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data were abstracted from the 2007 December 31, balance sheet of Andrews Company (use for the first two questions questions):
|
Cash
|
$136,000
|
|
Marketable securities
|
64,000
|
|
Accounts and notes receivable, net
|
1,84,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
2,44,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
12,000
|
|
Accounts and notes payable, short-term
|
2,56,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
64,000
|
|
Bonds payable, long-term
|
4,00,000
|
The current ratio is:
a. 1:2.
b. 2:1.
c. 1.2:1.
d. 3:1.
The acid-test ratio is:
a. 1:2.
b. 2:1.
c. 1.2:1.
d. 3:1.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Benson Company shows the following data on its 2011 financial statements (use for the rest of the questions ):
|
Accounts receivable, January 1
|
$720,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, December 31
|
9,60,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, January 1
|
9,00,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, December 31
|
10,20,000
|
|
Gross sales
|
48,00,000
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
1,80,000
|
|
Net sales
|
46,20,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
33,60,000
|
|
Income before interest and taxes
|
7,20,000
|
|
Interest on bonds
|
1,92,000
|
|
Net income
|
3,84,000
|
The accounts receivable turnover is:
a. 5.5 times per year.
b. 5.714 times per year.
c. 5 times per year.
d. 6.667 times per year.
The inventory turnover is:
a. 5 times per year.
b. 4.8125 times per year.
c. 3.5 times per year.
d. 4 times per year.
The times interest earned ratio is:
a. 4.75 times per year.
b. 3.75 times per year.
c. 2 times per year.
d. 3 times per year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income statement data for Boston Company for 2009 and 2010 follow:
| |
2009
|
2010
|
|
Net sales
|
$2,610,000
|
$1,936,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
18,29,600
|
12,56,400
|
|
Selling expenses
|
3,96,800
|
3,50,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
2,34,800
|
1,98,400
|
|
Federal income taxes
|
57,600
|
54,000
|
Real world question From the financial statements of The Limited in the Annual report appendix, determine the 2003 cash flow margin.Real world question From the financial statements of The Limited in the Annual report appendix, determine the 2003 cash flow margin.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Columbia Corporation had the following selected financial data for 2009 December 31: Net cash provided by operating activities
|
Net sales
|
$1,800,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
10,80,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
3,15,000
|
|
Net income
|
1,95,000
|
|
Total assets
|
10,00,000
|
|
Net cash provided by operating
|
25,000
|
|
activities
|
|
Compute the cash flow margin.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following partial income statement, calculate the inventory turnover for the period.
|
Net sales
|
|
$2,028,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
$ 234,000
|
|
|
Purchases
|
12,36,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
$1,560,000
|
|
Less: Ending inventory
|
2,65,200
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
12,94,800
|
|
Gross margin
|
$ 733,200
|
|
Operating expenses
|
3,27,600
|
|
Net operating income
|
$ 405,600
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Loom”s comparative statements of income and retained earnings for 2010 and 2009 are given below. Loom Consolidated statement of earnings For the years ended 2010 December 31, and 2009 (USD thousands, except per data share)
| |
Dec-31
|
|
| |
(1)
|
(2)
|
| |
2010
|
2009
|
|
Net sales
|
$2,403,100
|
$2,297,800
|
|
Cost of sales
|
18,85,700
|
16,51,300
|
|
Gross earnings
|
$ 517,400
|
$ 646,500
|
|
Selling, general and administrative expenses
|
4,29,700
|
3,76,300
|
|
Goodwill amortization
|
37,300
|
35,200
|
|
Impairment write down of goodwill
|
1,58,500
|
0
|
|
Operating earnings (loss)
|
$(108,100)
|
$235,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
-1,16,900
|
-95,400
|
|
Other expense-net
|
-21,700
|
-6,100
|
|
Earnings (loss) before income tax (benefit)
|
$ (246,700)
|
$133,500
|
|
expense, extraordinary item and cumulative
|
|
effect of change in accounting principles
|
|
Income tax (benefit) expense
|
(19,400)
|
73,200
|
|
Earnings (loss) before cumulative effect
|
$ (227,300)
|
$60,300
|
|
change in account principles
|
|
Cumulative effect of change in accounting
|
|
principles:
|
|
|
Pre-operating costs
|
(5,200)
|
0
|
|
Net earnings (loss)
|
$ (232,500)
|
$60,300
|
|
Retained earnings, January 1
|
6,80,600
|
6,20,300
|
| |
$ 448,100
|
$680,600
|
|
Dividends
|
0
|
0
|
|
Retained earnings, December 31
|
$ 448,100
|
$680,600
|
Loom Consolidated balance sheet As of 2010 December 31, and 2009 (USD thousands)
| |
Dec-31
|
|
| |
(1)
|
(2)
|
|
Assets
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 26,500
|
$ 49,400
|
|
Notes and accounts receivable (less allowance
|
2,61,000
|
2,95,600
|
|
for possible losses of $26,600,000 and
|
|
$20,700,000, respectively)
|
|
Inventories
|
|
|
Finished goods
|
5,22,300
|
4,96,200
|
|
Work in process
|
1,32,400
|
1,41,500
|
|
Materials and supplies
|
44,800
|
39,100
|
|
Other
|
72,800
|
54,800
|
|
Total current assets
|
$ 1,059,800
|
$ 1,076,600
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
|
Land
|
$ 20,100
|
$ 19,300
|
|
Buildings, structures and improvements
|
4,86,400
|
4,35,600
|
|
Machinery and equipment
|
10,76,600
|
10,41,300
|
|
Construction in progress
|
24,200
|
35,200
|
|
Total property, plant and equipment
|
$ 1,607,300
|
$ 1,531,400
|
|
Less accumulated depreciation
|
5,78,900
|
4,73,200
|
|
Net property, plant and equipment
|
$ 1,028,400
|
$ 1,058,200
|
|
Other assets
|
|
|
Goodwill (less accumulated amortization of
|
$ 771,100
|
$ 965,800
|
|
$257,800,000 and $242,400,000,
|
|
respectively).
|
|
|
Other
|
60,200
|
62,900
|
|
Total other assets
|
$831,300
|
$ 1,028,700
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 2,919,500
|
$ 3,163,500
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
Current maturities of long-term debt
|
$ 14,600
|
$ 23,100
|
|
Trade accounts payable
|
60,100
|
1,13,300
|
|
Accrued insurance obligations
|
38,800
|
23,600
|
|
Accrued advertising and promotion
|
23,800
|
23,400
|
|
Interest payable
|
16,000
|
18,300
|
|
Accrued payroll and vacation pay
|
15,300
|
33,100
|
|
Accrued pension
|
11,300
|
19,800
|
|
Other accounts payable and accrued expenses
|
1,23,900
|
77,200
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 303,800
|
$ 331,800
|
|
Noncurrent liabilities
|
|
Long-term debt
|
14,27,200
|
14,40,200
|
|
Net deferred income taxes
|
0
|
43,400
|
|
Other
|
2,92,900
|
2,22,300
|
|
Total noncurrent liabilities
|
$ 1,720,000
|
$ 1,705,900
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$ 2,023,900
|
$ 2,037,700
|
|
Common stockholders” equity
|
|
Common stock and capital in excess of par
|
|
value, $.01 par value; authorized, Class A,
|
|
200,000,000 shares, Class B, 30,000,000
|
|
shares; issued and outstanding:
|
|
Class A Common Stock, 69,268,701 and
|
$ 465,600
|
$ 463,700
|
|
69,160,349 shares, respectively
|
|
Class B Common Stock, 6,690,976 shares
|
4,400
|
4,400
|
|
Retained earnings
|
4,48,100
|
6,80,600
|
|
Currency translation and minimum pension
|
-22,500
|
-22,900
|
|
liability adjustments
|
|
Total common stockholders” equity
|
$ 895,600
|
$ 1,125,800
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
$ 2,919,500
|
$ 3,163,500
|
Perform a horizontal and vertical analysis of Loom”s financial statements in a manner similar to those illustrated in this chapter. Comment on the results of the analysis in (a).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deere & Company manufactures, distributes, and finances a full range of agricultural equipment; a broad range of industrial equipment for construction, forestry, and public works; and a variety of lawn and grounds care equipment. The company also provides credit, health care, and insurance products for businesses and the general public. Consider the following information from the Deere & Company 2000 Annual Report:
|
(in millions)
|
1997
|
1998
|
1999
|
2000
|
|
Sales
|
$12,791
|
$13,822
|
$11,751
|
$13,137
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
8,481
|
9,234
|
8,178
|
8,936
|
|
Gross margin
|
4,310
|
4,588
|
3,573
|
4,201
|
|
Operating expenses
|
2,694
|
2,841
|
3,021
|
3,236
|
|
Net operating income
|
$ 1,616
|
$ 1,747
|
$ 552
|
$ 965
|
a. Prepare a statement showing the trend percentages for each item using 1997 as the base year.
b. Comment on the trends noted in part (a).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data are for Toy Company:
| |
31 December
|
| |
2011
|
2010
|
|
Allowance for uncollectible accounts
|
$72,000
|
$57,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
34,500
|
45,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
2,10,000
|
1,86,000
|
|
Cash in Bank A
|
10,95,000
|
9,75,000
|
|
Wages payable
|
-0-
|
37,500
|
|
Accounts payable
|
7,14,000
|
5,85,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
13,42,500
|
14,37,000
|
|
Bonds payable, due in 2005
|
6,15,000
|
5,94,000
|
|
Marketable securities
|
2,17,500
|
1,47,000
|
|
Notes payable (due in six months)
|
3,00,000
|
1,95,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
9,07,500
|
8,70,000
|
|
Cash flow from operating activities
|
1,92,000
|
1,80,000
|
a. Compute the amount of working capital at both year-end dates.
b. Compute the current ratio at both year-end dates.
c. Compute the acid-test ratio at both year-end dates.
d. Compute the cash flow liquidity ratio at both year-end dates.
e. Comment briefly on the company”s short-term financial position.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Digital Company has net operating income of USD 500,000 and
operating assets of USD 2,000,000.
Its net sales are USD 4,000,000.
The accountant for the company computes the rate of return on operating assets after computing the operating margin and the turnover of operating assets.
a. Show the computations the accountant made.
b. Indicate whether the operating margin and turnover increase or decrease after each of the following changes. Then determine what the actual rate of return on operating assets would be. The events are not interrelated; consider each separately, starting from the original earning power position. No other changes occurred.
(a)Sales increased by USD 160,000. There was no change in the amount of operating income and no change in operating assets.
(b)Management found some cost savings in the manufacturing process. The amount of reduction in operating expenses was USD 40,000. The savings resulted from the use of less materials to manufacture the same quantity of goods. As a result, average inventory was USD 16,000 lower than it otherwise would have been. Operating income was not affected by the reduction in inventory.
(c)The company invested USD 80,000 of cash (received on accounts receivable) in a plot of land it plans to use in the future (a non-operating asset); income was not affected.
(d)The federal income tax rate increased and caused income tax expense to increase by USD 20,000. The taxes have not yet been paid.
(e)The company issued bonds and used the proceeds to buy USD 400,000 of machinery to be used in the business. Interest payments are USD 20,000 per year. Net operating income increased by USD 100,000 (net sales did not change).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Polaroid Corporation designs, manufactures, and markets worldwide \ instant photographic cameras and films, electronic imaging recording devices, conventional films, and light polarizing filters and lenses. The following information is for Polaroid:
|
(in millions)
|
2,000
|
1999
|
|
Net sales
|
$13,994
|
$14,089
|
|
Income before interest and taxes
|
2,310
|
2,251
|
|
Net income
|
1,407
|
1,392
|
|
Interest expense
|
178
|
142
|
|
Stockholders” equity (on 1998 December 31,
|
3,428
|
3,912
|
|
$3,988)
|
|
|
|
Common stock, par value $1, December 31
|
978
|
978
|
Compute the following for both 2000 and 1999. Then compare and comment.
a. EPS of common stock.
b. Net income to net sales.
c. Net income to average common stockholders” equity.
d. Times interest earned ratio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Walt Disney Company operates several ranges of products from theme parks and resorts to broadcasting and other creative content. The following balance sheet and supplementary data are for The Walt Disney Company for 2000.
The Walt Disney Company Consolidated balance sheet For 2000 September 30 (USD millions)
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 842
|
|
Receivables
|
3,599
|
|
Inventories
|
702
|
|
and television costs
|
1,162
|
|
Other
|
|
1,258
|
|
Total current costs
|
$7,563
|
|
and television costs
|
5,339
|
|
Investments
|
2,270
|
|
Theme parks, resorts, and other property,
|
|
Attractions, buildings, and equipment
|
$16,160
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(6,892)
|
9,718
|
|
Project in process
|
1,995
|
|
Land
|
|
597
|
|
Intangibles assets, net
|
16,117
|
|
Other assets
|
1,428
|
|
Total assets
|
$25,027
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
|
Accounts payable and accrued liabilities
|
$ 5,161
|
|
Current portion of borrowing
|
2,502
|
|
Unearned royalties
|
739
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 8,402
|
|
Borrowings
|
6,959
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
2,833
|
|
Other long-term liabilities
|
2,377
|
|
Minority interest
|
356
|
|
Common shareholders” equity
|
|
Common shares ($.01 par value)
|
$12,101
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
12,767
|
|
|
Cumulative translation and other adjustments
|
(28)
|
|
|
Treasury shares
|
(740)
|
24,100
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
$45,027
|
• Net income, USD 920.
• Income before interest and taxes, USD 3,231.
• Cost of goods sold, USD 21,321.
• Net sales, USD 25,402.
• Inventory on 1999 September 30, USD 796.
• Total interest expense for the year, USD 598.
Calculate the following ratios and show your computations. For calculations normally involving averages, such as average stockholders” equity, use year-end amounts unless the necessary information is provided.
a. Current ratio.
b. Net income to average common stockholders” equity.
c. Inventory turnover.
d. Number of days” sales in accounts receivable (assume 365 days in 2000).
e. EPS of common stock (ignore treasury stock).
f. Times interest earned ratio.
g. Equity ratio.
h. Net income to net sales.
i. Total assets turnover.
j. Acid-test ratio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cooper Company currently uses the FIFO method to account for its inventory but is considering a switch to LIFO before the books are closed for the year. Selected data for the year are:
|
Merchandise inventory, January 1
|
$1,430,000
|
|
Current assets
|
36,03,600
|
|
Total assets (operating)
|
57,20,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold (FIFO)
|
22,30,800
|
|
Merchandise inventory, December 31 (LIFO)
|
15,44,400
|
|
Merchandise inventory, December 31 (FIFO)
|
18,87,600
|
|
Current liabilities
|
11,44,000
|
|
Net sales
|
38,32,400
|
|
Operating expenses
|
9,15,200
|
a. Compute the current ratio, inventory turnover ratio, and rate of return on operating assets assuming the company continues using FIFO.
b. Repeat part (a) assuming the company adjusts its accounts to the LIFO inventory method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to the previous problem, Cord Company uses the equity method. Assume the following are from the adjusted trial balances of Cord Company and Thorpe Company on 2010 December 31
| |
Company
|
Company
|
|
Debit balance accounts
|
|
|
Cash
|
$351,000
|
$315,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
378,000
|
180,000
|
|
Notes receivable
|
315,000
|
45,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, December 31
|
495,000
|
287,100
|
|
Investment in Thorpe Company
|
2,790,000
|
|
|
Equipment, net
|
615,000
|
427,500
|
|
Building, net
|
1,814,400
|
950,400
|
|
Land
|
765,000
|
405,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,800,000
|
630,000
|
|
Expense (excluding depreciation and taxes)
|
720,000
|
270,900
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
108,000
|
62,100
|
|
Income tax expense
|
585,000
|
189,000
|
|
Dividends
|
540,000
|
108,000
|
|
Total of the accounts with debit balances
|
$11,277,000
|
$3,870,000
|
|
Credit balance accounts
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$135,000
|
$180,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
144,000
|
90,000
|
|
Common stock – $45 par value
|
5,400,000
|
1,800,000
|
|
Retained earnings – January 1
|
1,800,000
|
450,000
|
|
Revenue from sales
|
3,600,000
|
1350000
|
|
Income from Thorpe Company
|
198,000
|
|
|
Total of the accounts with credit balances
|
$11,277,000
|
$3,870,000
|
There is no intercompany debt at the end of the year. Prepare a work sheet for consolidated financial statements on 2010 December 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On 2010 September 1, Ramsey Company purchased the
following relatively long-term investments classified as available-for-sale securities:
•Two thousand shares of Lacey Company capital stock at USD 439.20 plus broker”s commission of USD 5,760.
•One thousand shares of Membrow Company capital stock at USD 705.60 plus broker”s commission of USD 5,040. Cash dividends of USD 18.00 per share on the Lacey capital stock and USD 14.40 per share on the Membrow capital stock were received on December 7 and December 10, respectively. On 2010 December 31, per share market values are Lacey, USD 460.80; and Membrow, USD 655.20.
a. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions.
b. Prepare the necessary adjusting entry(ies) at 2010 December 31, to adjust the carrying values assuming that market price changes are believed to be temporary. Where would the accounts appear in the financial statements?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kress, Inc., purchased on 2010 July 2, 240 shares of Baker Company USD 180 par value common stock as a temporary investment at USD 288 per share, plus a broker”s commission of USD 432. On 2010 July 15, a cash dividend of USD 7.20 per share was received. On 2010 September 1, Baker Company split its USD 180 par value common shares two for one. On 2010 November 2, Kress sold 200 shares of Baker common stock at USD 180, less a broker”s commission of USD 288.
a. Prepare journal entries to record all of the above transactions.
b. How would you recommend that the remaining shares be classified in the 2010 December 31, balance sheet if still held at that date?
c. Assume the remaining shares were considered current assets classified as trading securities at the end of 2010, at which time their market value was USD 128 per share. Prepare any necessary adjusting entries for the end of 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Codd Company acquired 70 percent of the outstanding voting common stock of Snow Company for USD 8,568,000 on 2010 January 1. The investment is accounted for under the equity method. During the years 2010-2012, Snow Company reported the following:
| |
Net Income(loss)
|
DividendsPaid
|
|
2007
|
$1,454,880
|
$871,920
|
|
2008
|
372,960
|
223,440
|
|
2009
|
-23,520
|
55,860
|
a. Prepare general journal entries to record the investment and the effect of the subsidiary”s income, losses, and dividends on Codd Company”s accounts.
b. Compute the investment account balance on 2011 December 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer back to the previous problem. Maple Company uses the equity method. Assume the following amounts are taken from the adjusted trial balances of Maple Company and Dodd Company on 2010 December 31:
| |
Maple
|
Dodd
|
|
Debit balance accounts
|
Company
|
Company
|
|
Cash
|
$864,000
|
$364,295
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
553,536
|
414,000
|
|
Notes receivable
|
342,000
|
90,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, December 31
|
1,530,000
|
1,008,000
|
|
Investment in Dodd Company
|
$4,519,356
|
|
|
Equipment, net
|
1,147,500
|
691,860
|
|
Building, net
|
3,136,500
|
1,573,200
|
|
Land
|
1,404,000
|
450,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
8,064,000
|
$2,160,000
|
|
Expense (excluding depreciation and taxes)
|
2,160,000
|
810,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
243,000
|
$128,940
|
|
Income tax expense
|
569,664
|
123,504
|
|
Dividends
|
477,000
|
178,200
|
|
Total of the accounts with debit balances
|
$25,037,556
|
$7,992,000
|
|
Credit balance accounts
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$720,000
|
$378,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
270,000
|
180,000
|
|
Common stock – $90 par value
|
9,540,000
|
3,564,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
2,610,000
|
270,000
|
|
Revenue from sales
|
11,520,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Income from Dodd Company
|
377,556
|
|
|
Total of the accounts with credit balances
|
$25,037,556
|
$7,992,000
|
There is no intercompany debt at the end of the year Prepare a work sheet for consolidated financial statements on 2010 December 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are the CPA engaged to audit the records of Quigley Company. You find that your client has a portfolio of marketable equity securities that has a total market value of USD 300,000 less than the total cost of the portfolio. You ask the vice president for finance if the client expects to sell these securities in the coming year. He answers that he does not know. The securities will be sold if additional cash is needed to finance operations. When you ask for a cash forecast, you are told that a forecast has been prepared that covers the next year. It indicates no need to sell the marketable securities. Write a brief statement in which you explain how you would classify the client”s portfolio of marketable securities in the balance sheet. Does it really make any difference whether the securities are classified as trading securities or available-forsale securities? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harner Company issued USD 100,000 of 12 percent bonds on 2010 March 1. The bonds are dated 2010 January 1, and were issued at 96 plus accrued interest. The entry to record the issuance would be:
|
Cash
|
98,000
|
|
|
Discount on bonds payable
|
4,000
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
100,00
|
| |
|
0
|
|
Bonds interest payable
|
2,000
|
|
Cash
|
102,000
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
100,00
|
| |
|
0
|
|
Bond interest payable
|
2,000
|
|
Cash
|
96,000
|
|
|
Discount on bonds payable
|
4,000
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
100,00
|
| |
|
0
|
d. None of the above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
If the bonds in the first question had been issued at 104, the entry to record the issuance would have been:
|
Cash
|
104,000
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
100,000
|
|
Premium on bonds
|
4,000
|
|
payable
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
102,000
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
100,000
|
|
Bonds interest payable
|
2,000
|
|
Cash
|
106,000
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
100,000
|
|
Premium on bonds
|
4,000
|
|
payable
|
|
|
|
Bonds interest payable
|
2,000
|
d. None of the above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On 2009 December 1, New Jersey Waste Management Company issued USD 300,000 of 10-year, 9 percent bonds dated 2009 July 1, at 100. Interest on the bonds is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1. All of the bonds are registered. The company”s accounting period ends on March 31. Quarterly financial statements are prepared. The company deposits a sum of money sufficient to pay the semiannual interest on the bonds in a special checking account in First National Bank and draws interest payment checks on this account. The deposit is made the day before the checks are drawn. Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of the bonds; the December 31 adjusting entry; the 2010 January 1, interest payment; and the adjusting entry needed on 2010 March 31, to prepare quarterly financial statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Safe Toy Company is seeking to issue USD 800,000 face value of 10 percent, 20-year bonds. The bonds are dated 2009 June 30, call for semiannual interest payments, and mature on 2029 June 30.
a. Compute the price investors should offer if they seek a yield of 8 percent on these bonds. Also, compute the first six months” interest assuming the bonds are issued at that price. Use the interest method and calculate all amounts to the nearest dollar.
b. Repeat part (a) assuming investors seek a yield of 12 percent. Alternate problem C On 2009 July 1, Tick-Tock Clock Company issued USD 100,000 face value of 8 percent, 10-year bonds. These bonds call for semiannual interest payments and mature on 2019 July 1. The company received cash of USD 87,538, a price that yields 10 percent. Assume that the company”s fiscal year ends on March 31. Prepare journal entries to record the bond interest expense on 2010 January 1, and the adjustment needed on 2010 March 31, using the interest method. Calculate all amounts to the nearest dollar.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company is trying to decide whether to invest USD 2 million on plant expansion and USD 1 million to finance a related increase in inventories and accounts receivable. The USD 3 million expansion is expected to increase business volume substantially. Profit forecasts indicate that income from operations will rise from USD 1.6 million to USD 2.4 million. The income tax rate will be about 40 percent. Net income last year was USD 918,000. Interest expense on debt now outstanding is USD 70,000 per year. There are 200,000 shares of common stock currently outstanding. The USD 3 million needed can be obtained in two alternative ways:
Finance entirely by issuing additional shares of common stock at an expected issue price of USD 75 per share.
•Finance two-thirds with bonds, one-third with additional stock. The bonds would have a 20-year life, bear interest at 10 percent, and sell at face value. The issue price of the stock would be USD 80 per share. Should the investment be made? If so, explain which financing plan you would recommend. (Hint: Calculate earnings per share for last year and for future years under each of the alternatives.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An annual report of a company contained the following paragraph in the notes to the financial statements: The 9 7/8 percent Senior Subordinated Debentures are redeemable at the option of [the company] at 103.635 percent of the principal amount plus accrued interest if redeemed prior to [a certain date], and at decreasing prices thereafter. Mandatory sinking fund payments of USD 3,000,000 (which [the company] may increase to USD 6,000,000 annually)…and are intended to retire, at par plus accrued interest, 75 percent of the issue prior to maturity.
Answer the following questions:
a. What does the term debentures mean?
b. How much is the call premium initially? Does this premium decrease over time?
c. Under what circumstances might the company want to increase the sinking fund payments?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Wall Street Journal contained a table showing yield comparisons for groups of corporate bonds. The following data have been adapted from the table:
| |
|
Yield
|
Percentage
|
| |
|
As of
|
52-week
|
|
| |
28-Apr
|
27-Apr
|
High
|
|
|
Risk category
|
|
|
|
|
1-10 year maturities:
|
|
Low
|
|
High quality
|
7.08%
|
6.94%
|
7.16%
|
5.32%
|
|
Medium quality
|
7.41
|
7.26
|
7.49
|
5.76
|
|
Over 10 year maturities:
|
|
|
|
High quality
|
7.91
|
7.81
|
8.06
|
6.93
|
|
Medium quality
|
8.36
|
8.25
|
8.49
|
7.29
|
|
High-yield bonds
|
10.45
|
10.48
|
10.53
|
9.25
|
|
Standard & Poor”s
|
|
ratings were:
|
|
High quality
|
AAA to AA
|
|
Medium quality
|
A to BBB
|
|
High yield
|
BB to C
|
Prepare written answers to the following questions.
a. In each column of numbers, why do the yield rates increase from top to bottom?
b. For the high quality and medium quality bonds, what could account for the increase in the yield rates from 4/27 to 4/28? Take into consideration possible economic events.
c. Which risk class of bonds was closest to its 52-week high on 4/28? What could have been the cause?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to the Annual report appendix and determine the times interest earned ratio for 2003 for The Limited. Use “operating income” to represent IBIT. Prepare written comments on the results of your analysis. Annual report analysis E A recent annual report of Emhart Corporation contained the following paragraph in its notes to the financial statements: The 6 3/4 percent convertible subordinated debentures may be converted into shares of common stock at a price of USD 26.50 per share at any time prior to maturity. They are redeemable at prices decreasing from 105 percent of face amount currently to 100 percent [at a certain future date].
Answer the following questions:
a. If you held one USD 1,000 bond, how many shares of stock would you receive if you converted the bond into shares of stock? (Hint: You can use the principal amount of the bond to buy shares of stock at the stated price.)
b. Assume you held one USD 1,000 bond and the bond was called by the company at a price of 105 percent of the face amount. If the current market price per share of the stock was USD 29, would you convert the bond into shares of stock or would you surrender the bond? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of goods sold in the income statement for the year ended 2010 was USD 260,000. The balances in Merchandise Inventory and Accounts Payable were:
| |
2010 January
|
2010 December31
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
$160,000
|
$180,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
44,000
|
36,000
|
Calculate the amount of cash paid for merchandise for 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are balance sheet data for Quality Merchandise, Inc.:
| |
31-Dec
|
|
| |
2011
|
2010
|
|
Cash
|
$47,000
|
$26,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
141,000
|
134,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
83,000
|
102,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
9,000
|
11,000
|
|
Plant assets (net of accumulated depreciation)
|
235,000
|
230,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
122,000
|
127,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities payable
|
40,000
|
41,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
300,000
|
300,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
53,000
|
35,000
|
Assume that the depreciation recorded in 2011 was USD 15,000. Compute the cash spent to purchase plant assets, assuming no assets were sold or scrapped in 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data are from a company”s Automobile and the Accumulated Depreciation—Automobile accounts:
|
Date Automobile
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Jan. 1 Balance brought forward
|
16,000
|
|
July 1 Traded for new auto
|
16,000
|
-0-
|
|
New auto
|
31,000
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
Automobile
|
|
|
Jan. 1 Balance brought forward
|
12,000
|
|
July 1 One-half year”s depreciation
|
2,000
|
14,000
|
|
Auto traded
|
14,000
|
|
-0-
|
|
Dec. 31 One-half year”s depreciation
|
4,000
|
4,000
|
The old auto was traded for a new one, with the difference in values paid in cash. The income statement for the year shows a loss on the exchange of autos of USD 1,200. Indicate the dollar amounts, the descriptions of these amounts, and their exact locations in a statement of cash flows—indirect method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement and other data of Dunbar Carpet Outlet, Inc., follow: Dunbar Carpet Outlet, Inc. Income statement For the Year Ended 2010 December 31
|
Sales
|
|
$920,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
380,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
$540,000
|
|
Operating expenses (other than depreciation)
|
$140,000
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
40,000
|
180,000
|
|
Net income
|
$360,000
|
Changes in current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities during the year were:
| |
Increase
|
Decrease
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$20,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
$16,000
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
8,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
28,000
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities payable
|
4,000
|
|
Depreciation was the only noncash item affecting net income.
a. Prepare a working paper to calculate cash flows from operating activities under the direct method.
b. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the direct method.
c. Prove that the same cash flows amount will be obtained under the indirect method by preparing the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the indirect method. You need not prepare a working paper.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following comparative balance sheets and other data are for Cellular Telephone Sales, Inc.:
Cellular Telephone Sales, Inc. Comparative balance sheets 2011 December 31 and 2010
|
Assets
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Cash
|
$76,105
|
$51,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
26,075
|
24,250
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
30,000
|
35,000
|
|
Supplies on hand
|
1,750
|
2,550
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
1,400
|
1,200
|
|
Land
|
1,80,000
|
1,42,500
|
|
Equipment
|
2,70,000
|
3,00,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation – equipment
|
-75,000
|
-67,500
|
|
Total assets
|
$510,330
|
$489,000
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 45,330
|
$ 76,300
|
|
Salaries payable
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities payable
|
2,000
|
8,250
|
|
Long-term note payable
|
1,50,000
|
1,50,000
|
|
Common stock ($5 par)
|
1,85,000
|
1,65,000
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par
|
32,500
|
-0-
|
|
Retained earnings
|
91,500
|
87,450
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
$510,330
|
$489,000
|
Land was bought for USD 37,500 cash. The company intends to build a building on the land. Currently the company leases a building for its operations.
Equipment costing USD 50,000 with accumulated depreciation of USD 30,000 was sold for USD 23,500 (a gain of USD 3,500), and equipment costing USD 20,000 was purchased for cash.
Depreciation expense for the year was USD 37,500.
Common stock was issued for USD 52,500 cash.
Dividends declared and paid in 2011 totaled USD 32,950.
Net income was USD 37,000.
The company paid interest of USD 3,000 and income taxes of USD 17,000. Prepare a statement of cash flows under the indirect method. Also prepare any necessary supplemental schedule(s).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computer Associates International, Inc., is leading business software company. The company was founded in 1977 with four employees and has grown to 18,200 employees and about 4.2 billion in revenues.
The company”s statements of cash flows for the years 2002 through 2004 follow.
Then the relevant portion of Management”s Discussion and Analysis of the statement of cash flows is provided.
Consolidated statements of cash flows Year Ended March 31
|
Operating activities:
|
2004
|
2003(Inmillions)
|
2002
|
|
Net (loss) income Adjustments to reconcile net (loss) income to net cash provided by operating activities:
|
$ (591)
|
$ 696
|
$ 626
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
1,110
|
594
|
325
|
|
Provision for deferred income taxes (benefit)
|
-350
|
412
|
107
|
|
Charge for purchased research and development—
|
795
|
|
|
Compensation (gain) expense related to stock pension plants
|
-146
|
30
|
778
|
|
Decrease (increase) in noncurrent installment accounts receivable, net
|
956
|
-1,039
|
-422
|
|
Decrease (increase) in deferred maintenance revenue
|
-3
|
113
|
43
|
|
Foreign currency transaction loss – before taxes
|
14
|
5
|
11
|
|
Charge for investment write-off
|
50
|
|
|
Gain on sale of property and equipment Changes in other operating assets and liabilities, net of effects of acquisitions:
|
-5
|
-14
|
|
Decrease (increase) in trade and installment receivables
|
418
|
83
|
-169
|
|
Other changes in operating assets and liabilities
|
-25
|
-168
|
-18
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities Investing activities: Acquisitions, primarily purchased software,
|
$ 1,383
|
$ 1,566
|
$ 1,267
|
|
marketing rights and intangibles, net of cash acquired
|
$ (174)
|
$ (3,049)
|
$ (610)
|
|
Settlements of purchases accounting liabilities
|
-367
|
-429
|
-57
|
|
Purchases of property and equipment
|
-89
|
-198
|
-222
|
|
Proceeds from sale of property and equipment
|
5
|
12
|
38
|
|
Disposition of businesses
|
158
|
—
|
—
|
|
Purchases of marketable securities
|
-48
|
-95
|
-2,703
|
|
Sales of marketable securities
|
40
|
189
|
2,639
|
|
Increase in capitalized development costs and other
|
-49
|
-36
|
-29
|
|
Net cash used in investing activities Financing activities:
|
$ (524)
|
$ (3,606)
|
$ (944)
|
|
Dividends
|
$ (47)
|
$ (43)
|
$ (44)
|
|
Purchases of treasury stock
|
-449
|
—
|
-1,090
|
|
Proceeds from borrowings
|
1,049
|
3,672
|
2,141
|
|
Repayment of borrowings
|
-1,981
|
-776
|
-1,216
|
|
Exercise of common stock options and other
|
50
|
96
|
38
|
|
Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities
|
$ (1,378)
|
$ 2,949
|
$ (171)
|
|
(Decrease) Increase in cash and cash equivalents before effect of exchange rate changes on cash
|
$ (519)
|
$ 909
|
$ 152
|
|
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash
|
-25
|
-1
|
-4
|
|
(Decrease) Increase in cash and cash equivalents
|
$ (544)
|
$ 908
|
$ 148
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents – Beginning of year
|
1,307
|
399
|
251
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents – End of the year
|
$ 763
|
$ 1,307
|
$ 399
|
Liquidity and capital resources Cash, cash equivalents and marketable securities totaled USD 850 million at 2004 March 31, a decrease of USD 537 million from the 2003 March 31 balance of USD 1,387 million. During fiscal year 2004, the Company used cash on hand to repay over USD 900 million in debt and repurchase approximately USD 450 million in treasury stock. Cash generated from operations for fiscal year 2001 was USD 1,383 million, a decrease of USD 183 million from the prior year”s cash from operations of USD 1,566 million. Cash from operations was unfavorably impacted this current fiscal year due to higher costs associated with increased headcount and other expenses related to the Sterling acquisition. The Company”s bank credit facilities consist of a USD 1 billion four-year revolving credit facility, a USD 2 billion four-year term loan, and a 75 million British Pound Sterling denominated 364-day term loan. During the year, the Company repaid all outstanding amounts under both its USD 1.3 billion 364-day and four-year revolving credit agreements. As a reflection of its continued reduced need for bank borrowings, emphasis on debt reduction, and overall expected ability to generate cash from operations, the Company did not renew its USD 1.3 billion 364-day revolving credit facility when it expired in May 2004. As of 2004 March 31, USD 2 billion remained outstanding under the four-year term loan and approximately USD 124 million was outstanding under the pound sterling term loan at various interest rates. There are no drawings under the Company”s USD 1 billion four-year revolving credit facility. The interest rates on such debt are determined based on a ratings grid, which applies a margin to the prevailing London InterBank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”). In addition, the Company established a USD 1 billion US Commercial Paper (“CP”) program in the first quarter of this year to refinance some of its debt at more attractive interest levels. As of 2004 March 31, USD 340 million was outstanding under the CP program. The Company also utilizes other financial markets in order to maintain its broad sources of liquidity. In fiscal 2002, USD 1.75 billion of unsecured Senior Notes were issued in a transaction governed by Rule 144A of the Securities Act of 1933. Amounts borrowed, rates and maturities for each issue were USD 575 million at 6.25 percent due 2006 April 15, USD 825 million at 6.375 percent due 2008 April 15 and USD 350 million at 6.5 percent due 2011 April 15. As of 2004 March 31, USD 192 million was outstanding under the Company”s 6.77 percent Senior Notes. These Notes call for annual repayment of USD 64 million each April until final maturity in 2006. Unsecured and uncommitted multicurrency lines of credit are available to meet any short-term working capital needs for subsidiaries operating outside the US. These lines total USD 56 million, of which USD 14 million was drawn as of 2004 March 31. Debt ratings for the Company”s senior unsecured notes and its bank credit facilities are BBB+ and Baa1 from Standard & Poor”s and Moody”s Investor Services, respectively. The Company”s Commercial Paper program is rated A-2 from Standard & Poor”s and P-2 from Moody”s. Peak borrowings under all debt facilities during fiscal year 2004 totaled approximately USD 5.4 billion with a weighted-average interest rate of 7.2 percent. As of 2004 March 31, the cumulative number of shares purchased under the Company”s various open market Common Stock repurchase programs, including almost 16 million shares purchased in the current fiscal year, was 166 million. The remaining number of shares authorized for repurchase is approximately 34 million. Capital resource requirements as of 2004 March 31 consisted of lease obligations for office space, computer equipment, mortgage or loan obligations and amounts due as a result of product and company acquisitions. It is expected that existing cash, cash equivalents, marketable securities, the availability of borrowings under credit lines and cash provided from operations will be sufficient to meet on going cash requirements. The Company expects its long-standing history of providing extended payment terms to customers to continue under the new business model and thus does not expect a change to its future cash flow, since customers are expected to continue to finance their purchases over the contract period.
a. Explain how the company could have a net loss in 2004 and yet have a positive net cash provided by operating activities.
b. What was the reason given by management for repaying all outstanding amounts under revolving credit agreements.
c. What is the interest rate on borrowings?
d. What information would normally appear immediately below the statement of cash flows that seems to be missing?
e. Does the amount of cash provided by operating activities seem large enough to continue the present dividend payments?
f. Given the following data, calculate the cash flow per share of common stock ratio, the cash flow margin ratio, and cash flow liquidity ratio.
| |
(in millions)
|
|
Average number of shares of common stock outstanding
|
583
|
|
Net sales
|
4,198
|
|
Cash and marketable securities
|
850
|
|
Current liabilities
|
2,286
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kelley Company reported net income of USD 358,050 for 2009, USD 371,400 for 2010, and USD 325,800 for 2011, using the incorrect inventory amounts shown for 2009 December 31, and 2010. Recently, Kelley corrected the inventory amounts for those dates. Kelley used the correct 2011 December 31, inventory amount in calculating 2011 net income.
| |
Incorrect
|
Correct
|
|
2009 December 31
|
USD 72,600
|
USD 86,200
|
|
2010 December 31
|
84000
|
70200
|
Prepare a schedule that shows: (a) the reported net income for each year, (b) the amount of correction needed for each year, and (c) the correct net income for each year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An examination of the financial records of Lanal Company on 2009 December 31, disclosed the following with regard to merchandise inventory for 2009 and prior years:
2005 December 31, inventory was correct.
2006 December 31, inventory was overstated USD 200,000.
2007 December 31, inventory was overstated USD 100,000.
2081 December 31, inventory was understated USD 220,000.
2009 December 31, inventory was correct.
The reported net income for each year was:
|
2006
|
$384,000
|
|
2007
|
544,000
|
|
2008
|
670,000
|
|
2009
|
846,000
|
a. Prepare a schedule of corrected net income for each of the four years, 2006-2009.
b. What error(s) would have been included in each December 31 balance sheet? Assume each year”s error is independent of the other years” errors.
c. Comment on the implications of your corrected net income as contrasted with reported net income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brett Company sells personal computers and uses the specific identification method to account for its inventory. On 2010 November 30, the company had 46 Orange III personal computers on hand that were acquired on the following dates and at these stated costs:
| |
Units
|
Unit cost
|
|
3-Jul
|
10
|
@ $10,080
|
|
10-Sep
|
20
|
@ $ 9,600
|
|
29-Nov
|
16
|
@ $10,700
|
Brett sold 36 Orange III computers at USD 12,720 each in December. There were no purchases of this model in December.
a. Compute the gross margin on December sales of Orange III computers assuming the company shipped those units that would maximize reported gross margin.
b. Repeat part (a) assuming the company shipped those units that would minimize reported gross margin for December.
c. In view of your answers to parts (a) and (b), what would be your reaction to an assertion that the specific identification method should not be considered an acceptable method for costing inventory?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following purchases and sales for Ripple Company are for April 2010. There was no inventory on April 1.
|
Purchases
|
|
Sales
|
| |
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
|
Units
|
|
3-Apr
|
3,200
|
@ $33.00
|
6-Apr
|
1,500
|
|
10-Apr
|
1,600
|
@ 34.00
|
12-Apr
|
1,400
|
|
22-Apr
|
2,000
|
@ 35.00
|
25-Apr
|
2,300
|
|
28-Apr
|
1,800
|
@ 36.00
|
|
|
a. Compute the ending inventory as of 2010 April 30, using perpetual inventory procedure, under each of the following methods: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted-average (carry unit cost to four decimal places and round total cost to nearest dollar).
b. Repeat a using periodic inventory procedure.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data relate to the beginning inventory, purchases, and sales of Braxton Company for the year 2010:
| |
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
|
Merchandise Inventory, January 1
|
1,400
|
@ $5.04
|
|
Purchases:
|
|
|
|
2-Feb
|
1,000
|
@ 4.80
|
|
5-Apr
|
2,000
|
@ 3.60
|
|
15-Jun
|
1,200
|
@ 3.00
|
|
30-Sep
|
1,400
|
@ 2.88
|
|
28-Nov
|
1,800
|
@ 4.20
|
|
Sales:
|
|
|
|
10-Mar
|
900
|
|
|
15-May
|
1,800
|
|
|
6-Jul
|
800
|
|
|
23-Aug
|
600
|
|
|
22-Dec
|
2,500
|
|
a. Assuming use of perpetual inventory procedure, compute the ending inventory and cost of goods sold under each of the following methods: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted-average (carry unit cost to four decimal places and round total cost to nearest dollar).
b. Repeat (a) assuming use of periodic inventory procedure.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accountant for Gentry Company prepared the following schedule of the company”s inventory at 2009 December 31, and used the LCM method applied to total inventory in determining cost of goods sold:
|
Item
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Unit Market
|
|
Q
|
4,200
|
$7.20
|
$7.20
|
|
R
|
2,400
|
6
|
5.76
|
|
S
|
5,400
|
4.8
|
4.56
|
|
T
|
4,800
|
4.2
|
4.32
|
a. State whether this approach is an acceptable method of inventory measurement and show the calculations used to determine the amounts.
b. Compute the amount of the ending inventory using the LCM method on an item-by-item basis.
c. State the effect on net income in 2009 if the method in (b) was used rather than the method referred to in (a).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
As part of a loan agreement with a local bank, Brazos Company must present quarterly and cumulative income statements for the year 2009. The company uses periodic inventory procedure and marks its merchandise to sell at a price yielding a gross margin of 30 per cent. Selected data for the first six months of 2009 are as follows:
| |
First Quarter
|
Second Quarter
|
|
Sales
|
$248,000
|
$256,000
|
|
Purchases
|
160,000
|
184,000
|
|
Purchase returns and allowances
|
9,600
|
11,200
|
|
Purchase discounts
|
3,200
|
3,520
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
8,000
|
4,800
|
|
Transportation-in
|
8,000
|
8,320
|
|
Miscellaneous selling expenses
|
25,600
|
24,000
|
|
Miscellaneous administrative expenses
|
9,600
|
8,000
|
The cost of the physical inventory taken 2008 December 31, was USD 30,400.
a. Indicate how income statements can be prepared without taking a physical inventory at the end of each of the first two quarters of 2009.
b. Prepare income statements for the first quarter, the second quarter, and the first six months of 2009.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cobb Company records show the following information for 2010:
| |
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Sales
|
|
$350,400
|
|
Purchases
|
$2/0,000
|
420,000
|
|
Transportation-in
|
26,280
|
—
|
|
Merchandise inventory, 1/1/2014
|
12,000
|
1/,400
|
|
Purchase returns
|
15,120
|
18,600
|
Compute the estimated year-end inventory balance at cost using the retail method of estimating inventory.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harris Company reported net income of USD 312,000 for 2009, USD 324,000 for 2010, and USD 348,000 Recently Harris corrected these inventory amounts. Harris used the correct 2011 December 31, inventory amount in calculating 2011 net income.
|
2009 December 31
|
$96,000
|
$108,000
|
|
2010 December 31
|
91,200
|
84,000
|
Prepare a schedule that shows: (a) the reported net income for each year, (b) the amount of correction needed for each year, and (c) the correct net income for each year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An examination of the financial records of Jersey Company on 2009
December 31, disclosed the following with regard to merchandise inventory for 2009 and prior years:
2008 December 31, inventory was correct.
2009 December 31, inventory was understated USD 50,000.
2010 December 31, inventory was overstated USD 35,000.
2011 December 31, inventory was understated USD 30,000.
2012 December 31, inventory was correct.
The reported net income for each year was:
|
2009
|
$292,500
|
|
2010
|
$355,000
|
|
2011
|
$382,500
|
|
2012
|
$350,000
|
a. Prepare a schedule of corrected net income for each of the four years, 2009-2012.
b. What errors would have been included in each December 31 balance sheet? Assume each year”s error is independent of the other years” errors.
c. Comment on the implications of the corrected net income as contrasted with reported net income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
High Surf Company sells the Ultra-Light model wind surfer and uses the specific identification method to account for its inventory. The Ultra-Lights are identical except for identifying serial numbers. On 2009 August 1, the company had three Ultra-Lights that cost USD 14,000 each in its inventory. During the month, the company purchased the following:
| |
Units
|
Unit cost
|
|
3-Aug
|
5
|
@ $13,000
|
|
17-Aug
|
6
|
@ $14,500
|
|
28-Aug
|
6
|
@ 15,000
|
High Surf Company sold 13 Ultra-Lights in August at USD 20,000 each.
a. Compute the gross margin earned by the company in August if it shipped the units that would maximize gross margin.
b. Repeat part (a) assuming the company shipped the units that would minimize gross margin.
c. Do you think High Surf Company should be permitted to use the specific identification method of accounting for Ultra-Lights in view of the manipulation possible as shown by your calculations in (a) and (b)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The inventory records of Coral Company show the following:
Jan. 1 Beginning inventory consists of 12 units costing USD 48 per unit.
5 Purchased 15 units @ USD 49.92 per unit.
10 Sold 9 units @ USD 108 per unit.
12 Sold 7 units @ USD108 per unit.
20 Purchased 20 units @ USD 50.16 per unit.
22 Purchased 5 units @ USD 48 per unit.
30 Sold 20 units @ USD 110.40 per unit.
Assume all purchases and sales are made on account.
a. Using FIFO perpetual inventory procedure, compute cost of goods sold for January.
b. Using FIFO perpetual inventory procedure, prepare the journal entries for January.
c. Compute the cost of goods sold under FIFO periodic inventory procedure. Is there a difference between the amount computed using the two different procedures?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are data for Dandy Company for the year 2010:
| |
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
|
Merchandise Inventor y,
|
700
|
@ $20.4
|
|
1-Jan
|
|
0
|
|
Purchases:
|
|
|
|
February 2
|
500
|
@21
|
| |
|
@
|
|
Apr i l 5
|
1,000
|
@24
|
|
June 1 5
|
600
|
@ 2/ .00
|
|
30-Sep
|
700
|
@ 30.00
|
|
28-Nov
|
900
|
@ 31.20
|
|
Sales :
|
4,400
|
|
|
March 5
|
1,200
|
|
|
18-Jul
|
800
|
|
|
August 12
|
900
|
|
|
October 15
|
3,300
|
|
a. Compute the ending inventory as of 2010 December 31, assuming use of perpetual inventory procedure, under each of the following methods: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted-average (carry unit cost to four decimal places and round total cost to nearest dollar).
b. Compute the ending inventory as of 2010 December 31, assuming use of periodic inventory procedure, under each of the following methods: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted-average.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Star Company accounts for its inventory using the LIFO method under periodic inventory procedure. Data on purchases, sales, and inventory for the year ended 2009 December 31, are:
| |
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
| |
|
|
|
Merchandise inventory,
|
|
|
|
1-Jan
|
2,000
|
@ $20
|
|
Purchases:
|
|
|
|
January /
|
5,000
|
@ 24
|
|
7-Jul
|
10,000
|
@ 28
|
|
21-Dec
|
6,000
|
@ 32
|
During 2009, 16,000 units were sold for USD 1,280,000, leaving an inventory on 2009 December 31, of 7,000 units.
a. Compute the gross margin earned on sales during 2009.
b. Compute the change in gross margin that would have resulted if the purchase of December 21 had been delayed until 2010 January 6.
c. Recompute the gross margin assuming that 9,000 units rather than 6,000 units were purchased on December 21 at the same cost per unit.
d. Solve parts (a), (b), and (c) using the FIFO method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Data on the ending inventory of Jannis Company on 2009 December 31, are:
|
Item
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Unit Market
|
|
1
|
8,400
|
$3.20
|
$3.12
|
|
2
|
16,800
|
2.88
|
3.04
|
|
3
|
5,600
|
2.8
|
2.88
|
|
4
|
14,000
|
3.84
|
3.6
|
|
5
|
11,200
|
3.6
|
3.68
|
|
6
|
2,800
|
3.04
|
2.88
|
a. Compute the ending inventory applying the LCM method to the total inventory.
b. Determine the ending inventory by applying the LCM method on an item-by-item basis.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Apple Company”s records contained the following inventory information:
| |
Cost
|
Retail
|
| |
|
$420,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
582,000
|
|
Purchases
|
$396,000
|
12,000
|
|
Purchase returns
|
8,400
|
—
|
|
Transportation-
|
10,800
|
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
|
|
|
1-Jan
|
21,600
|
30,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics case – Writing experience D Respond in writing to the following questions based on the ethics case concerning Terry Dorsey:
a. Do you believe that Terry”s scheme will work?
b. What would you do if you were Terry”s accountant?
c. Comment on each of Terry”s points of justification.
Group project E In teams of two or three students, interview the manager of a merchandising company. Inquire about inventory control methods, inventory costing methods, and any other information about the company”s inventory procedures. As a team, write a memorandum to your instructor summarizing the results of the interview. The heading of the memorandum should include the date, to whom it is written, from whom, and the subject matter.
Group project F In a team of two or three students, locate and visit a nearby retail store that uses perpetual inventory procedure and a computerized inventory management system. Investigate how the system works by interviewing a knowledgeable person in the company. Write a report to your instructor and make a short presentation to the class on your findings.
Group project G With a small group of students, identify and visit a retail store that uses periodic inventory procedure and uses the retail inventory method for preparing interim (monthly or quarterly) financial reports. Discover how the retail inventory method is applied and how the end-of-year inventory amount is calculated. Write a report to your instructor summarizing your findings.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Paris Company acquired on 2010 July 15, 400 shares of Rome Company USD 720 par value capital stock at USD 698.40 per share plus a broker”s commission of USD 1,728. On 2010 August 1, Paris Company received a cash dividend of USD 8.64 per share. On 2010 November 3, it sold 200 of these shares at USD 756 per share less a broker”s commission of USD 1,152. On 2010 December 1, Rome Company issued shares comprising a 100 percent stock dividend declared on its capital stock on November 18. On 2010 December 31, the end of Paris Company”s calendar-year accounting period, the market quotation for Rome Company”s common stock was USD 331.20 per share. The decline was considered to be temporary.
a. Prepare journal entries to record all of these data assuming the securities are considered temporary investments classified as trading securities. Where should the accounts in the last entry appear in the financial statements?
b. Assume Rome Company has become a major customer so the shares are held for long-term affiliation purposes. Indicate how the investment should be shown in the balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On 2010 October 17, Strong Company purchased the following common stocks (all trading securities) at the indicated per share prices that included commissions:
|
600 shares of X Company common stock @ $216
|
$129,600
|
|
1,000 shares of Y Company common stock @ $144
|
144,000
|
|
1,600 shares of Z Company common stock @ $72
|
115,200
|
| |
$388,800
|
On 2010 December 31, the market prices per share of the above common stocks were X, USD 223.20; Y, USD 136.80; and Z, USD 54. Summarized, the cash dividends per share received in 2011 were X, USD 14.40; Y, USD 7.20; and Z, USD 5.40. On 2011 December 31, the per share market prices were X, USD 252.80; Y, USD 115.20; and Z, USD 72. All of these changes in market prices are considered temporary. Prepare journal entries for all of these transactions, including calendar year-end adjusting entries, assuming the shares of common stock acquired are considered trading securities. If the securities acquired are considered available-for-sale securities, how would the entries differ? For both parts a and b, give the descriptions (titles) and the dollar amounts of the items that would appear in the income statements for 2010 and 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On 2010 January 1, Long Company acquired 80 percent of the outstanding voting common stock of Fall Company for USD 4,032,000 cash. Long Company uses the equity method. During 2010, Fall reported USD 672,000 of net income and paid USD 288,000 in dividends. The stockholders” equity section of the 2009 December 31, balance sheet for Fall follows:
|
Stockholders” equity:
|
|
Paid-in capital:
|
|
Common stock – $42 par
|
$4,200,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
840,000
|
|
Total stockholders” equity
|
$5,040,000
|
a. Prepare the general journal entries to record the investment and the effect of Fall”s income and dividends on Long Company”s accounts.
b. Prepare the elimination entry that would be made on the work sheet for a consolidated balance sheet as of the date of acquisition.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following contract prices and costs relate to all of Orlando Construction Company”s long-term construction projects (in millions of dollars):
| |
Contract Price
|
Prior to 2010
|
In 2010
|
Cost to Be Incurred in Future Years
|
|
On projects completed in 2010
|
$46
|
$4
|
$36
|
$0
|
|
On incomplete projects
|
144
|
24
|
48
|
48
|
General and administrative expenses for 2010 amounted to USD 1,200,000. Assume that the general and administrative expenses are not to be treated as a part of the construction cost.
a. Compute net income for 2010 using the completed-contract method.
b. Compute net income for 2010 using the percentage-of-completion method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A seller sold merchandise which has a list price of USD 4,000 on account, giving a trade discount of 20 per cent. The entry on the books of the seller is:
| |
|
|
|
|
a.
|
Accounts Receivable
|
3,200
|
|
| |
Trade Discounts
|
800
|
|
| |
Sales
|
|
4,000
|
|
b.
|
Accounts Receivable
|
4,000
|
|
| |
Sales
|
|
4,000
|
|
c.
|
Accounts Receivable
|
3,200
|
|
| |
Trade Discounts
|
800
|
|
| |
Sales
|
|
4,000
|
|
d.
|
Accounts Receivable
|
3,200
|
|
| |
Sales
|
|
3,200
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the following table, indicate how to increase or decrease (debit or credit) each account, and indicate its normal balance (debit or credit).
| |
Increased by (debit or credit)
|
Decreased by (debit or credit)
|
Normal Balance (debit or credit)
|
|
Title of Account
|
|
|
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
|
|
|
|
Sales Discounts
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
|
|
|
Purchases
|
|
|
|
|
Purchase Returns and Allowances
|
|
|
|
|
Purchase Discounts
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
|
|
|
Transportation-In
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lasky Company sold merchandise with a list price of USD 60,000 on July 1. For each of the following independent assumptions, calculate (1) the gross selling price used to record the sale and (2) the amount that the buyer would have to remit when paying the invoice.
|
Trade Discount Granted
|
Credit Terms
|
Date Paid
|
|
a. 30%, 20%
|
2/10, n/30
|
10-Jul
|
|
b. 40%, 10%
|
2/EOM, n/60
|
10-Aug
|
|
c. 30%, 10%, 5%
|
3/10/EOM, n/60
|
10-Aug
|
|
d. 40%
|
1/10, n/30
|
12-Jul
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In each case, use the following information to calculate the missing information:
| |
Case 1
|
Case 2
|
Case 3
|
|
Gross sales
|
$640,000
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
|
Sales discounts
|
?
|
25,600
|
19,200
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
19,200
|
44,800
|
32,000
|
|
Net sales
|
608,000
|
1,209,600
|
|
|
Merchandise inventory, January 1
|
256,000
|
|
384,000
|
|
Purchases
|
384,000
|
768,000
|
|
|
Purchase discounts
|
7,680
|
13,440
|
12,800
|
|
Purchase returns and allowances
|
24,320
|
31,360
|
32,000
|
|
Net purchases
|
352,000
|
|
672,000
|
|
Transportation-in
|
25,600
|
38,400
|
32,000
|
|
Net cost of purchases
|
377,600
|
761,600
|
?
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
?
|
1,081,600
|
1,088,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, December 31
|
?
|
384,000
|
448,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
320,000
|
?
|
640,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
512,000
|
320,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mars Musical Instrument Company and Tiger Company engaged in the following transactions with each other during July 2010:
July 2 Mars Musical Instrument Company purchased merchandise on account with a list price of USD 48,000 from Tiger Company. The terms were 3/EOM, n/60, FOB shipping point, freight collect. Trade discounts of 15 per cent, 10 per cent, and 5 per cent were granted by Tiger Company.
5 The buyer paid the freight bill on the purchase of July 2, USD 1,104.
6 The buyer returned damaged merchandise with an invoice price of USD 2,790 to the seller and received full credit.
On the last day of the discount period, the buyer paid the seller for the merchandise.
Prepare all the necessary journal entries for the buyer and the seller.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data for June 2010 are for Rusk Company”s first month of operations:
June 1 Rusk Company was organized, and the stockholders invested USD 1,008,000 cash, USD 336,000 of merchandise inventory, and a USD 288,000 plot of land in exchange for capital stock.
4 Merchandise was purchased for cash, USD 432,000; FOB shipping point, freight collect.
9 Cash of USD 10,080 was paid to a trucking company for delivery of the merchandise purchased June 4.
13 The company sold merchandise on account, USD 288,000; terms 2/10, n/ 30.
15 The company sold merchandise on account, USD 230,400; terms 2/10, n/30.
16 Of the merchandise sold June 13, USD 31,680 was returned for credit.
20 Salaries for services received were paid as follows: to office employees, USD 31,680; to salespersons, USD 83,520.
22 The company collected the amount due on the remaining USD 256,320 of accounts receivable arising from the sale of June 13.
24 The company purchased merchandise on account at a cost of USD 345,600; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.
26 The company returned USD 57,600 of the merchandise purchased June 24 to the vendor for credit.
27 A trucking company was paid USD 7,200 for delivery to Rusk Company of the goods purchased June 24.
29 The company sold merchandise on account, USD 384,000; terms 2/10, n/30.
30 Sold merchandise for cash, USD 172,800.
30 Payment was received for the sale of June 15.
30 Paid store rent for June, USD 43,200.
30 Paid the amount due on the purchase of June 24.
The inventory on hand at the close of business June 30 was USD 672,000 at cost.
a. Prepare journal entries for the transactions.
b. Post the journal entries to the proper ledger accounts. Use the account numbers in the chart of accounts shown in a separate file at the end of the text. Assume that all postings are from page 20 of the general journal.
c. Prepare a trial balance as of 2010 June 30.
d. Prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 June 30. No adjusting entries are needed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Western Wear Company, a wholesaler of western wear clothing, sells to retailers. The company entered into the following transactions in May 2010:
May 1 The Western Wear Company was organized as a corporation. The stockholders purchased stock at par for the following assets in the business: USD 462,000 cash, USD 168,000 merchandise, and USD 105,000 land.
1 Paid rent on administrative offices for May, USD 25,200.
5 The company purchased merchandise from Carl Company on account, USD 189,000; terms 2/10, n/30. Freight terms were FOB shipping point, freight collect.
8 Cash of USD 8,400 was paid to a trucking company for delivery of the merchandise purchased May 5.
14 The company sold merchandise on account, USD 315,000; terms 2/10, n/30.
15 Paid Carl Company the amount due on the purchase of May 5.
16 Of the merchandise sold May 14, USD 13,860 was returned for credit.
19 Salaries for services received were paid for May as follows: office employees, USD 16,800; salespersons, USD 33,600.
24 The company collected the amount due on USD 126,000 of the accounts receivable arising from the sale of May 14.
25 The company purchased merchandise on account from Bond Company, USD 151,200; terms 2/10, n/30. Freight terms were FOB shipping point, freight collect.
27 Of the merchandise purchased May 25, USD 25,200 was returned to the vendor.
28 A trucking company was paid USD 2,100 for delivery to The Western Wear Company of the goods purchased May 25.
29 The company sold merchandise on open account, USD 15,120; terms 2/10, n/30.
30 Cash sales were USD 74,088.
30 Cash of USD 100,800 was received from the sale of May 14.
31 Paid Bond Company for the merchandise purchased on May 25, taking into consideration the merchandise returned on May 27.
The inventory on hand at the close of business on May 31 is USD 299,040.
From the data given for The Western Wear Company:
a. Prepare journal entries for the transactions.
b. Post the journal entries to the proper ledger accounts. Use the account numbers in the chart of accounts shown in a separate file at the end of the text. Assume that all postings are from page 15 of the general journal.
(There were no adjusting journal entries.)
c. Prepare a trial balance.
d. Prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 May 31.
e. Prepare a classified balance sheet as of 2010 May 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
a. Candle Carpet Company engaged in the following transactions in August 2010:
Aug. 2 Sold merchandise on account for USD 300,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.
18 Received payment for the sale of August 2.
20 A total of USD 10,000 of the merchandise sold on August 2 was returned, and a full refund was made because it was the wrong merchandise.
28 An allowance of USD 16,000 was granted on the sale of August 2 because some merchandise was found to be damaged; USD 16,000 cash was returned to the customer.
b. Lee Furniture Company engaged in the following transactions in August 2010:
Aug. 4 Purchased merchandise on account at a cost of USD 140,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.
6 Paid freight of USD 2,000 on the purchase of August 4.
10 Sold goods for USD 100,000; terms 2/10, n/30.
12 Returned USD 24,000 of the merchandise purchased on August 4.
14 Paid the amount due on the purchase of August 4.
Prepare journal entries for the transactions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Edwardo Auto Parts Company and Spoon Company engaged in the following transactions with each other during August 2010:
Aug.15 Edwardo Auto Parts Company purchased merchandise on account with a list price of USD 192,000 from Spoon Company. Trade discounts of 20 per cent and 10 per cent were allowed. Terms were 2/10, n/30, FOB destination, freight prepaid.
16 The seller paid the freight charges, USD 2,400.
17 The buyer requested an allowance of USD 4,512 against the amount due because the goods were damaged in transit.
20 The seller granted the allowance requested on August 17.
The buyer paid the amount due on the last day of the discount period. Record all of the entries required on the books of both the buyer and the seller.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gardner Company engaged in the following transactions in June 2010, the company”s first month of operations:
June 1 Stockholders invested USD 384,000 cash and USD 144,000 of merchandise inventory in the business in exchange for capital stock.
3 Merchandise was purchased on account, USD 192,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.
4 Paid height on the June 3 purchase, USD 5,280.
7 Merchandise was purchased on account, USD 96,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination, freight prepaid.
10 Sold merchandise on account, USD 230,400; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.
11 Returned USD 28,800 of the merchandise purchased on June 3.
12 Paid the amount due on the purchase of June 3.
13 Sold merchandise on account, USD 240,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination, height prepaid.
14 Paid height on sale of June 13, USD 14,400.
20 Paid the amount due on the purchase of June 7.
21 USD 48,000 of the goods sold on June 13 were returned for credit.
22 Received the amount due on sale of June 13.
25 Received the amount due on sale of June 10.
29 Paid rent for the administration building for June, USD 19,200.
30 Paid sales salaries of USD 57,600 for June.
30 Purchased merchandise on account, USD 48,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination, freight prepaid.
The inventory on hand on June 30 was USD 288,000.
a. Prepare journal entries for the transactions.
b. Post the journal entries to the proper ledger accounts. Use the account numbers in the chart of accounts shown in a separate file at the end of the text. Assume that all postings are from page 10 of the general journal.
c. Prepare a trial balance as of 2010 June 30.
d. Prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 June 30. No adjusting entries are needed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Organized on 2010 May 1, Noah Cabinet Company engaged in the following transactions:
May 1 The stockholders invested USD 900,000 in this new business by purchasing capital stock.
1 Purchased merchandise on account from String Company, USD 46,800; terms n/60, FOB shipping point, freight collect.
3 Sold merchandise for cash, USD 28,800.
6 Paid transportation charges on May 1 purchase, USD 1,440 cash.
7 Returned USD 3,600 of merchandise to String Company due to improper size.
10 Requested and received an allowance of USD 1,800 from String Company for improper quality of certain items.
14 Sold merchandise on account to Texas Company, USD 18,000; terms 2/20, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.
16 Issued cash refund for return of merchandise relating to sale made on May 3, USD 180.
18 Purchased merchandise on account from Tan Company invoiced at USD 28,800; terms 2/15, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.
18 Received a bill for freight charges of USD 900 from Ball Trucking Company on the purchase from Tan Company.
19 Texas Company returned USD 360 of merchandise purchased on May 14.
24 Returned USD 2,880 of defective merchandise to Tan Company. Received full credit.
28 Texas Company remitted balance due on sale of May 14.
31 Paid Tan Company for the purchase of May 18 after adjusting for transaction of May 24.
31 Paid miscellaneous selling expenses of USD 7,200.
31 Paid miscellaneous administrative expenses of USD 10,800.
The May 31st inventory is USD 57,600.
From the data for Noah Cabinet Company:
a. Journalize the transactions. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.
b. Post the entries to the proper ledger accounts. Use the account numbers appearing in the chart of account shown in a separate file at the end of the text. Assume all postings are from page 5 of the general journal.
(There were no adjusting journal entries.)
c. Prepare a trial balance.
d. Prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 May 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business decision case A Candy”s Shirts, Inc., has an opportunity to purchase 40,000 shirts with the logo of her favorite school in January 2009. Candy, who is not currently in business, is considering buying these shirts and then renting a display cart from which to sell these shirts (called a kiosk) in a shopping mall. Based on the following information and estimates, Candy needs to decide if the business would be profitable:
Cost of the 40,000 shirts, all of which must be purchased in January 2009, is USD 440,000.
Candy thinks it would take two years to sell all of the shirts. She estimates her sales at 25,000shirts in 2009 and 15,000 shirts in 2010.
Rent of the kiosk would be USD 1,500 per month in 2009 and USD 1,600 per month in 2010.
Candy can buy some counters on which to display the merchandise for USD 4,000. She could sell the counters for USD 500 at the end of the second year.
Candy estimates the cost to decorate her kiosk would be USD 2,500.
Candy would hire employees and pay them USD 1 per shirt sold.
Candy plans to sell the shirts for USD 17 each.
Candy and her husband purchased USD 100,000 of capital stock in the business. Therefore, she plans to borrow USD 400,000 from their family banker. Interest expense on this loan will be USD 52,000 in 2009 and USD 6,500 in 2010. Candy plans to repay USD 300,000 on 2010 January 2, and the remaining USD 100,000 on 2010 July 1
Candy needs to rent some storage space because all 40,000 shirts cannot be stored at the kiosk. Storage space costs USD 2,500 per year.
a. Prepare estimated income statements for 2009 and 2010 for Candy”s business. Does it appear that the business will be profitable?
b. Will Candy have the cash available to pay the bank loan as she planned?
Business decision case B In the Annual report appendix, refer to the consolidated statements of earnings for The Limited”s most recent three years. Calculate the gross margin percentage and write an explanation of what the results mean for each of the three years. Annual report analysis C Refer to the consolidated statements of income of The Limited in the Annual report appendix. Identify the 2000, 1999, and 1998 net sales; cost of goods sold; gross profit; selling, administrative, and general expenses; and operating income. Do the results present a favorable trend? Comment on the results.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are data related to Adler Company”s beginning inventory, purchases, and sales:
|
Beginning Inventory and Purchases
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
|
Units
|
|
Beginning inventory 6,250
|
@ $3.00
|
3-Feb
|
5,250
|
|
March 15 5,000
|
@ 3.12
|
4-May
|
4,500
|
|
May 10 8,750
|
@ 3.30
|
16-Sep
|
8,000
|
|
August 12 6,250
|
@ 3.48
|
9-Oct
|
7,250
|
|
November 20 3,750
|
@ 3.72
|
|
|
|
30,000
|
|
|
25,000
|
a. Compute the ending inventory under each of the following methods:
Specific identification (assume ending inventory is taken equally from the August 12 and November 20 purchases).
FIFO: (a) Assume use of perpetual inventory procedure.
(b) Assume use of periodic inventory procedure.
LIFO: (a) Assume use of perpetual inventory procedure.
(b) Assume use of periodic inventory procedure.
Weighted-average: (a) Assume use of perpetual inventory procedure.
(b) Assume use of periodic inventory procedure.
(Carry unit cost to four decimal places and round total cost to nearest dollar.)
b. Give the journal entries to record the individual purchases and sales (Cost of Goods Sold entry only) under the LIFO method and perpetual procedure.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
a. Joel Company reported annual net income as follows:
2007…. USD 27,200
2008…. USD 28,400
2009…. USD 24,000
Analysis of the inventories shows that certain clerical errors were made with the following results:
| |
Incorrect inventory amount
|
Correct inventory amount
|
|
2007 December 31
|
$4,800
|
$5,680
|
|
2008 December 31
|
5,600
|
4,680
|
What is the corrected net income for 2007, 2008, and 2009?
b. The records of Little Corporation show the following account balances on the day a fire destroyed the company”s inventory:
Merchandise inventory, January 1 USD 40,000
Net cost of purchases (to date) USD 200,000
Sales (to date) USD 300,000
Average rate of gross margin for the past five years 30 per cent of net sales.
Compute an estimated value of the ending inventory using the gross margin method.
c. The records of Draper Company show the following account balances at year-end:
| |
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Merchandise inventory, January 1
|
.$17,600
|
$25,000
|
|
Purchases
|
68,000
|
100,000
|
|
Transportation-in
|
1,900
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
101,000
|
Compute the estimated ending inventory at cost using the retail inventory method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false.
(1) Overstated ending inventory results in an overstatement of cost of goods sold and an understatement of gross margin and net income.
(2) In a period of rising prices, FIFO results in the lowest cost of goods sold.
(3) Under LCM, inventory is written down to market value when the market value is less than the cost, and inventory is written up to market value when the market value is greater than the cost.
(4) Under the gross margin method, an estimate must be made of gross margin to determine estimated cost of goods sold and estimated ending inventory.
(5) To use the retail inventory method, both cost and retail prices must be known for the goods available for sale.
(6) Under perpetual procedure, cost of goods sold is determined as a result of the closing entries made at the end of the period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise A Crocker Company reported annual net income as follows:
|
2008
|
$484,480
|
|
2009
|
487,680
|
|
2010
|
409,984
|
Analysis of its inventories revealed the following incorrect inventory amounts and these correct amounts:
| |
Incorrect Inventory Amount
|
Correct inventory amount
|
|
2008 December 31
|
$76,800
|
$89,600
|
|
2009 December 31
|
86,400
|
77,600
|
Compute the annual net income for each of the three years assuming the correct inventories had been used.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kettle Company made the following purchases of Product A in its first year of operations:
| |
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
|
2-Jan
|
1,400
|
@ $7.40
|
|
31-Mar
|
1,200
|
@ 7.00
|
|
5-Jul
|
2,400
|
@ 7.60
|
|
1-Nov
|
1,800
|
@ 8.00
|
The ending inventory that year consisted of 2,400 units. Kettle uses periodic inventory procedure.
a. Compute the cost of the ending inventory using each of the following methods: (1) FIFO, (2)
LIFO, and (3) weighted-average.
b. Which method would yield the highest amount of gross margin? Explain why it does.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your assistant has compiled the following data:
|
Item
|
Quantity (units)
|
Unit Cost
|
Unit Market
|
Total Cost
|
Total Market
|
|
A
|
300
|
$57.60
|
$55.20
|
$17,280
|
$16,560
|
|
B
|
300
|
28.8
|
33.6
|
8,640
|
10,080
|
|
C
|
900
|
21.6
|
21.6
|
19,440
|
19,440
|
|
D
|
500
|
12
|
13.2
|
6,000
|
6,600
|
Calculate the dollar amount of the ending inventory using the LCM method, applied on an item-by item basis, and the amount of the decline from cost to lower-of-cost-or-market.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tilley-Mill Company takes a physical inventory at the end of each calendar-year accounting period to establish the ending inventory amount for financial statement purposes. Its financial statements for the past few years indicate an average gross margin on net sales of 25 per cent.
On July 18, a fire destroyed the entire store building and its contents. The records in a fireproof vault were intact. Through July 17, these records show:
Merchandise inventory, January 1 USD 672,000
Merchandise purchases USD 9,408,000
Purchase returns USD 134,400
Transportation-in USD 504,000
Sales USD 14,336,000
Sales returns USD 672,000
The company was fully covered by insurance and asks you to determine the amount of its claim for loss of merchandise.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After adjustment, these selected account balances of Cold Stream Campground are:
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
$540,000.00
|
|
Rental revenue
|
|
960000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
$336,000.00
|
|
|
Depreciated expense – Buildings
|
64000
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
208000
|
|
|
Dividends
|
32000
|
|
In T-account format, show how journal entries to close the books for the period would be posted. (You do not need to show the closing journal entries.) Enter these balances in the accounts before doing so. Key the postings from the first closing entry with the number (1), the second with the number
(2), and so on.
The following account balances appeared in the Income Statement columns of the work sheet entries prepared for Liu Company for the year ended 2010 December 31:
|
Account Titles
|
Income Statement
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
330,000
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
1,350
|
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
130,000
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
2,250
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
900
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
6,750
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
2,250
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Equipment
|
4,500
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
562
|
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
1,125
|
| |
148,552
|
331,125
|
|
Net Income
|
182,553
|
|
| |
331,125
|
331,125
|
Prepare the closing journal entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the legend at the right, determine the category (number) into which you would place each of these items.
| |
Item
|
|
Legend
|
|
a.
|
Land.
|
1
|
Current assets.
|
|
b.
|
Marketable securities.
|
2
|
Long-term investments.
|
|
c.
|
Notes payable, due in three years.
|
3
|
Property, plant, and equipment.
|
|
d.
|
Taxes withheld from employees.
|
4
|
Intangible assets.
|
|
e.
|
Patents.
|
5
|
Current liabilities.
|
|
f.
|
Retained earnings.
|
6
|
Long-term liabilities.
|
|
g.
|
Unearned subscription fees.
|
7
|
Stockholders” equity.
|
|
h.
|
Bonds of another corporation (a 20-year investment).
|
|
|
|
i.
|
Notes payable, due in six months.
|
|
|
|
j.
|
Accumulated depreciation.
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following adjusted trial balance is for Jasper Appliance Repair Company:
|
JASPER APPLIANCE REPAIR COMPANY Adjusted Trial Balance 2010 June 30
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$63,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
42,000
|
|
|
Trucks
|
110,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Trucks
|
|
$30,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
10,800
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
20,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
50,000
|
|
Retained Earnings, 2009 July 1
|
|
5,500
|
|
Dividends
|
10,000
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
230,000
|
|
Rent Expense
|
12,000
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
5,000
|
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
90,000
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
1,500
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
1,200
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Trucks
|
10,000
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
1,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
600
|
|
| |
$346,300
|
$346,300
|
Prepare the closing journal entries at the end of the fiscal year, 2010 June 30.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following trial balance and additional data are for Sure Sale Reality Company
|
SURE SALE REALTY COMPANY Trial Balance 2010 December 31
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$62,800
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
117,120
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
46,080
|
|
|
Equipment
|
173,760
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$21,120
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
62,400
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
96,000
|
|
Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1
|
|
49,920
|
|
Dividends
|
46,080
|
|
|
Commissions Revenue
|
|
653,200
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
321,600
|
|
|
Travel Expense
|
96,480
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
18,720
|
|
| |
$882,640
|
$882,640
|
The prepaid rent is for the period 2010 July 1, to 2011 June 30.
The equipment has an expected life of 10 years with no salvage value. Accrued salaries are USD 11,520.
Travel expenses accrued but unreimbursed to sales staff at December 31 were USD 17,280
a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the year ended 2010 December 31. You need not include account numbers or explanations of adjustments.
b. Prepare adjusting journal entries.
c. Prepare closing journal entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following trial balance and additional data are for South Sea Tours, Inc.:
|
SOUTH SEA TOURS, INC. Trial Balance 2010 December 31
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$109,050
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
133,750
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,350
|
|
|
Prepaid Advertising
|
18,000
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
11,250
|
|
|
Land
|
90,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
165,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
|
$49,500
|
|
Office Equipment
|
83,400
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment
|
|
16,680
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
56,850
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
75,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
240,000
|
|
Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1
|
|
47,820
|
|
Dividends
|
30,000
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
368,350
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
96,000
|
|
|
Travel Expense
|
111,000
|
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
600
|
|
Interest Expense
|
3,000
|
|
| |
$854,800
|
$854,800
|
The company consistently followed the policy of initially debiting all prepaid items to asset accounts.
The buildings have an expected life of 50 years with no salvage value. The office equipment has an expected life of 10 years with no salvage value.
Accrued interest on notes receivable is USD 450.
Accrued interest on the notes payable is USD 1,000.
Accrued salaries are USD 2,100.
Expired prepaid insurance is USD 3,750.
Expired prepaid advertising is USD 16,500.
a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the year ended 2010 December 31. You need not include account numbers. Briefly explain the entries in the Adjustments columns at the bottom of the work sheet, as was done in Exhibit 20.
b. Prepare the required closing entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following trial balance and additional data are for Florida Time-Share Property
Management Company:
|
FLORIDA TIME-SHARE PROPERTY MANAGEMENT COMPANY Trial Balance 2010 December 31
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$424,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
28,800
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
7,680
|
|
|
Supplies on Hand
|
2,400
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
24,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment
|
|
$5,760
|
|
Automobiles
|
64,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Automobiles
|
|
16,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
2,880
|
|
Unearned Management Fees
|
|
12,480
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
360,000
|
|
Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1
|
|
120,640
|
|
Dividends
|
28,000
|
|
|
Commissions Revenue
|
|
260,000
|
|
Management Fee Revenue
|
|
19,200
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
199,840
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
2,400
|
|
|
Gas and Oil Expense
|
14,240
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
1,600
|
|
| |
$796,960
|
$796,960
|
Insurance expense for the year, USD 3,840.
Rent expense for the year, USD 19,200.
Depreciation expense: office equipment, USD 2,880; and automobiles, USD 12,800.
Salaries earned but unpaid at December 31, USD 26,640.
Supplies on hand at December 31, USD 1,000.
The unearned management fees were received and recorded on 2010 November 1. The advance payment covered six months” management of an apartment building.
a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the year ended 2010 December 31. You need not include account numbers or explanations of adjustments.
b. Prepare an income statement.
c. Prepare a statement of retained earnings.
d. Prepare a classified balance sheet.
e. Prepare adjusting and closing entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following trial balance and additional data are for Best-Friend Pet Hospital, Inc.
|
BEST-FRIEND PET HOSPITAL, INC. Trial Balance 2010 December 31
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$16,490
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
54,390
|
|
|
Supplies on Hand
|
900
|
|
|
Prepaid Fire Insurance
|
1,800
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
21,600
|
|
|
Equipment
|
125,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation —Equipment
|
|
$25,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
29,550
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
9,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
150,000
|
|
Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1
|
|
20,685
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
179,010
|
|
Interest Expense
|
225
|
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
142,200
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
29,250
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
2,135
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
3,705
|
|
|
Legal and Accounting Expense
|
13,750
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
1,800
|
|
| |
$413,245
|
$413,245
|
The company consistently followed the policy of initially debiting all prepaid items to asset accounts.
Prepaid fire insurance is USD 600 as of the end of the year.
Supplies on hand are USD 638 as of the end of the year.
Prepaid rent is USD 2,625 as of the end of the year.
The equipment is expected to last 10 years with no salvage value.
Accrued salaries are USD 2,625.
a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the year ended 2010 December 31. You need not include account numbers. Briefly explain the entries in the Adjustments columns at the bottom of the work sheet, as was done in Exhibit 20.
b. Prepare the 2010 December 31, closing entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following trial balance and additional data are for Roswell Interior Decorators, Inc.:
|
ROSWELL INTERIOR DECORATORS, INC Trial Balance 2010 December 31
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$85,400
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
81,600
|
|
|
Supplies on Hand
|
4,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
12,240
|
|
|
Prepaid Advertising
|
2,880
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,400
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
7,600
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment
|
|
$2,760
|
|
Office Furniture
|
29,200
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Office Furniture
|
|
8,280
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
25,200
|
|
Notes Payable (due 2011)
|
|
4,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
100,000
|
|
Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1
|
|
22,400
|
|
Dividends
|
45,520
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
250,000
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
98,800
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
20,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
24,000
|
|
| |
$412,640
|
$412,640
|
Supplies on hand at 2010 December 31, are USD 1,000.
Rent expense for 2010 is USD 10,000.
Advertising expense for 2010 is USD 2,304.
Insurance expense for 2010 is USD 2,400.
Depreciation expense is office equipment, USD 912, and office furniture, USD 3,000.
Accrued interest on notes payable is USD 150.
Accrued salaries are USD 4,200.
a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the year ended 2010 December 31. You need not include account numbers or explanations of adjustments.
b. Prepare an income statement.
c. Prepare a statement of retained earnings.
d. Prepare a classified balance sheet.
e. Prepare adjusting and closing entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the following transactions or circumstances and the entries made, state which, if any, of the assumptions, concepts, principles, or modifying conventions of accounting have been violated. For each violation, give the entry to correct the improper accounting assuming the books have not been closed.
During the year, Dorsey Company did the following:
Had its buildings appraised. They were found to have a market value of USD 410,000, although their book value was only USD 380,000. The accountant debited the Buildings and Accumulated
Depreciation—Buildings accounts for USD 15,000 each and credited Paid-in Capital—From Appreciation. No separate mention was made of this action in the financial statements.
Purchased new electric pencil sharpeners for its offices at a total cost of USD 60. These pencil sharpeners were recorded as assets and are being depreciated over five years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the items in Column A with the proper descriptions in Column B.
|
Column A
|
Column B
|
|
Going concern (continuity).
|
a. An assumption relied on in the preparation of the primary financial statements that would be unreasonable when the inflation rate is high.
|
|
Consistency.
|
b. Concerned with relative dollar amounts.
|
|
Disclosure.
|
c. The usual basis for the recording of assets.
|
|
Periodicity.
|
d. Required if the accounting treatment differs from that previously used for a particular item.
|
|
Conservatism.
|
e. An assumption that would be unreasonable to use in reporting on a firm that had become insolvent.
|
|
Stable dollar.
|
f. None of these.
|
|
Matching.
|
g. Requires a company to use the same accounting procedures and practices through time.
|
|
Materiality.
|
h. An assumption that the life of an entity can be subdivided into time periods for reporting purposes.
|
|
Exchange-price (cost).
|
i. Discourages undue optimism in measuring and reporting net assets and net income.
|
|
Business entity.
|
j. Requires separation of personal from business activities in the recording and reporting processes.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Parker Clothing Company sells its products on an installment sales basis. Data for 2010 and 2011 follow:
| |
2010
|
2011
|
|
Installment sales
|
$800,000
|
$960,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold on installment sales
|
560,000
|
720,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
120,000
|
160,000
|
|
Cash collected from 2010 sales
|
480,000
|
240,000
|
|
Cash collected from 2011 sales
|
|
640,000
|
a. Compute the net income for 2011, assuming use of the accrual (sales) basis of revenue recognition.
b. Compute the net income for 2011, assuming use of the installment basis of recognizing gross margin.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the descriptions in Column B with the accounting qualities in Column A. Use some descriptions more than once.
|
Column A: Accounting qualities
|
Column B: Descriptions
|
|
Relevance.
|
a. Users of accounting information.
|
|
Feedback value.
|
b. Pervasive constraint.
|
|
Decision makers.
|
c . User-specific qualities.
|
|
Representational faithfulness.
|
d. Primary decision-specific qualities.
|
|
Reliability.
|
e. Ingredients of primary qualities.
|
|
Comparability.
|
f. Secondary and interactive qualities.
|
|
Benefits exceed costs.
|
g. Threshold for recognition.
|
|
Predictive value.
|
|
|
Timeliness.
|
|
|
Decision usefulness.
|
|
|
Verifiability.
|
|
|
Understandability.
|
|
|
Neutrality.
|
|
|
Materiality.
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ramirez Video, Inc., sells video recorders under terms calling for a small down payment and monthly payments spread over three years. Following are data for the first three years of the company”s operations:
|
2008
|
2009
|
2010
|
|
Gross margin rate 30%
|
40%
|
50%
|
|
Cash collected in 2010:
|
|
|
|
From sales in…………$216,000
|
|
|
|
From sales in
|
$288,000
|
|
|
From sales in
|
|
$480,000
|
Total sales for 2010 were USD 1,600,000, while general and selling expenses amounted to USD 400,000.
a. Compute net income for 2010, assuming revenues are recognized at the time of sale.
b. Compute net income for 2010, using the installment method of accounting for sales and gross margin.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the descriptions in Column B with the proper terms in Column A.
|
Column A
|
|
Column B
|
|
1. Financial reporting objectives.
|
a.
|
Information is free of measurement method bias.
|
|
2. Qualitative characteristics.
|
b.
|
The benefits exceed the costs.
|
|
3. Relevance.
|
c.
|
Relatively large items must be accounted for in a theoretically correct way.
|
|
4. Predictive value.
|
d.
|
The information can be substantially duplicated by independent measurers using the same measurement methods.
|
|
5. Feedback value.
|
e.
|
When information improves users” ability to predict outcomes of events.
|
|
6. Timeliness.
|
f.
|
Broad overriding goals sought by accountants engaging in financial reporting.
|
|
7. Reliability.
|
g.
|
When information is pertinent or bears on a decision.
|
|
8. Representational faithfulness.
|
h.
|
The characteristics that accounting information should possess to be useful in decision making.
|
|
9. Verifiability.
|
i.
|
Information that reveals the relative success of users in predicting outcomes.
|
|
10. Neutrality.
|
j.
|
When accounting statements on economic activity correspond to the actual underlying activity.
|
|
11. Comparability.
|
k.
|
When information is provided soon enough that it may be considered in decision making.
|
|
12. Consistency.
|
l.
|
When information faithfully depicts for users what it purports to represent.
|
|
13. Cost-benefit.
|
m.
|
Requires a company to use the same accounting principles and reporting practices through time.
|
|
14. Materiality.
|
n.
|
When reported differences and similarities in information are real and not the result of differing accounting treatments.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nevada Real Estate Sales Company sells lots in its development in Dry Creek Canyon under terms calling for small cash down payments with monthly installment payments spread over a few years. Following are data on the company”s operations for its first three years:
| |
2008
|
2009
|
2010
|
|
Gross margin rate
|
45%
|
48%
|
50%
|
|
Cash collected in 2010 from sales of lots made in
|
$640,000
|
$800,000
|
$900,000
|
The total selling price of the lots sold in 2010 was USD 3,000,000, while general and administrative expenses (which are not included in the costs used to determine gross margin) were USD 800,000.
a. Compute net income for 2010 assuming revenue is recognized on the sale of a lot.
b. Compute net income for 2010 assuming use of the installment basis of accounting for sales and gross margin.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Explain the need for reconciliation of cost and financial accounts.
2. Explain the importance of reconciliation of cost and financial accounts. Mention four items of expenses or incomes, which will appear in financial accounts but normally appear in cost accounts.
3. Why is a reconciliation of cost and financial accounts necessary? Under what circumstances a reconciliation statement can be avoided?
4. At the end of an accounting period, it is found that the profit as shown in the financial accounts falls considerably short of the profits according to the cost accounts. Indicate how the discrepancy may have arisen.
5. Indicate the reasons why it is necessary for the cost and financial accounts organization to be reconciled and explain the main sources of difference, which would enter into such a reconciliation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A lodging home is being run in a small hill station with 50 single rooms. The home offers concessional rates during six off- season months in a year. During this period, half of the full room rent is charged. The management’s profit margin is targeted at 20% of the room rent. The following are the cost estimates and other details for the year ending on 31st March 2006. [Assume a month to be of 30 days].
I] Occupancy during the season is 80% while in the off- season it is 40% only.
II] Expenses:
o Staff salary [Excluding room attendants] Rs.2, 75, 000
o Repairs to building Rs.1, 30, 500
o Laundry and linen: Rs.40, 000
o Interior and tapestry: Rs.87, 500
o Sundry expenses: Rs.95, 400
III] Annual depreciation is to be provided for buildings @ 5% and on furniture and equipments
@ 15% on straight-line basis.
IV] Room attendants are paid Rs.5 per room day on the basis of occupancy of the rooms in a month.
V] Monthly lighting charges are Rs.120 per room, except in four months in winter when it is Rs.30 per room and this cost is on the basis of full occupancy for a month.
VI] Total investment in the home is Rs.100 lakhs of which Rs.80 lakhs relate to buildings and balance for furniture and equipments.
You are required to work out the room rent chargeable per day both during the season and the off-season months on the basis of the foregoing information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
This problem involves using a work sheet for Green Hills Riding Stable, Incorporated, for the month ended 2010 July 31, and performing the closing process. The trial balance for Green Hills Riding Stable, Incorporated, as of 2010 July 31, was as follows:
|
GREEN HILLS RIDING STABLE, INCORPORATED Trial Balance 2010 July 31
|
|
Acct. No.
|
Account Title
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
100
|
Cash
|
$10,700
|
|
|
103
|
Accounts Receivable
|
8,100
|
|
|
130
|
Land
|
40,000
|
|
|
140
|
Buildings
|
24,000
|
|
|
200
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$1,100
|
|
201
|
Notes Payable
|
|
40,000
|
|
300
|
Capital Stock
|
|
35,000
|
|
310
|
Retained Earnings, 2010 July 1
|
|
3,100
|
|
320
|
Dividends
|
1,000
|
|
|
402
|
Horse Boarding Fees Revenue
|
|
4,500
|
|
404
|
Riding Lesson Fees Revenue
|
|
3,600
|
|
507
|
Salaries Expense
|
1,400
|
|
|
513
|
Feed Expense
|
1,100
|
|
|
540
|
Interest Expense
|
200
|
|
|
568
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
800
|
|
| |
|
$87,300
|
$87,300
|
Depreciation expense for the month is USD 200. Accrued salaries on July 31 are USD 300.
a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the month ended 2010 July 31.
b. Journalize the adjusting entries.
c. Journalize the closing entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Three of the major column headings on a work sheet are Trial Balance, Income
Statement, and Balance Sheet. Determine under which major column headings each of the following items would appear and whether it would be a debit or credit. (For example, Cash would appear on the debit side of the Trial Balance and Balance Sheet columns.)
| |
Account Titles
|
Trial Balance Debit
|
Credit
|
Income Statement Debit
|
Credit
|
Statement of Retained Earnings Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance Sheet Debit
|
Credit
|
|
a.
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b.
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
c.
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
d.
|
Advertising Expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
e.
|
Capital Stock
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
f.
|
Retained Earnings (Beg.)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
g.
|
Net income for the month
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
h.
|
Retained Earnings (End)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Trial Balance of the Printer Repair Company at 2010 December 31, contains the following account balances listed in alphabetical order to increase your skill in sorting amounts to the proper work sheet columns.
|
Printer Repair Company Trial Balance Account Balances 2010 December 31
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$41,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
92,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
25,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
9,000
|
|
Buildings
|
140,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
65,000
|
|
Cash
|
60,000
|
|
Equipment
|
36,000
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,600
|
|
Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1
|
4,800
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
96,000
|
|
Service Revenue
|
290,000
|
|
Supplies on Hand
|
4,000
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
3,200
|
Using these account balances and the following additional information, prepare a work sheet for Printer Repair Company. Arrange the accounts in their approximate usual order.
Supplies on hand at 2010 December 31, have a cost of USD 2,400.
The balance in the Prepaid Insurance account represents the cost of a two-year insurance policy covering the period from 2010 January 1, through 2011 December 31.
The estimated lives of depreciable assets are buildings, 40 years, and equipment, 20 years.
No salvage values are anticipated.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare necessary accounts from the following details.
|
Particulars
|
Process I
|
Process II
|
|
Materials – Rs.
|
30,000
|
3,000
|
|
Labor – Rs.
|
10,000
|
12,000
|
|
Overheads – Rs.
|
7,000
|
8,600
|
|
Input [Units]
|
20,000
|
—
|
|
Transfer from Process I [Units]
|
–
|
17,500
|
|
Normal loss
|
10%
|
4%
|
|
Sales value of wastage per unit – Rs.
|
Re.1
|
Rs.2
|
There was no opening or closing stock or work in progress
The final output from Process II was 17, 000 units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
AB Ltd is engaged in the process engineering industry. During the month, October 2007, 2000 units were introduced in process ‘X’. The normal loss is estimated at 5% of input. At the end of the month, 1400 units had been produced and transferred to process ‘Y’, 460 were incomplete units, and 140 units had to be scrapped at the end of the process. The incomplete units reached the following degree of completion:
Material: 75%, Labor: 50%, overheads: 50%
Following are the further details regarding process X.
Cost of 2000 units introduced: Rs. 58,000
Additional material consumed Rs. 14,400
Direct labor: Rs. 33,400
Allocated overheads: Rs. 16,700
Note: The scrapped units fetched Rs.10 each.
Required: [As per First In First Out Method]
A] Statement of equivalent production
B] Statement of cost
C] Statement of evaluation
D] Process ‘X’ Account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vinal Ltd. produces Article B from a material, which passes through two processes, namely P and Q.
The details relating to a month are as under,
|
Particulars
|
Process P
|
Process Q
|
|
Materials introduced- units
|
10,000
|
|
|
Transferred to next process
|
9,000
|
|
|
Work in progress: At the beginning of the month- units
|
|
600
|
|
At the end of the month- units
|
|
400
|
|
Expenses: Work in progress – beginning of the month Materials introduced at the beginning of the month
|
Rs. 1,20,000
|
Rs. 9,400
|
|
Labor and overheads:
|
Rs. 27,600
|
Rs. 18,200
|
Stage of completion of work in progress:
Process P: Closing work in progress 20% complete in respect of labor and overheads
Process Q: Opening work in progress 331/3% complete in respect of labor and overheads
Closing work in progress 25% complete in respect of labor and overheads
The finished output B, emerging out of Process Q is sold for Rs. 20 per unit
The management is considering an alternative by which the finished output B could be further processed by installing a new machine at a capital cost of Rs. 8 lakhs. In such an event, the final product known as article N produced by this operation could be sold at Rs. 25 per unit. The operating expenses of the aforesaid further treatment are estimated at Rs. 23, 000. The company desires a return on investment of 25%
Required:
I] Prepare the process cost accounts for Process P and Q [Show the working of equivalent units and cost per equivalent unit in each process according to FIFO method]
II] Prepare a statement of profitability of Product B as it emerges from Process Q
III] Advise the management whether further treatment of Product B by installing the new machine should be taken up or not.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following information is available regarding Process A for the month of August 2007
Production Record:
- Units in process as on 1st August: 4,000 [All materials used, 25% complete for labor and overheads]
- New units introduced: 16, 000
- Units completed: 14, 000
- Units in process as on 31st August 2007: 6,000 [All materials used, 331/3% complete for labor and overheads]
Cost Records:
- Work in process as on 1st August 2007
- Materials: Rs.6,000
- Labor: Rs.1,000
- Overheads: Rs.1,000
Cost during the month:
- Materials: Rs. 25, 600
- Labor: Rs.15, 000
- Overheads: Rs.15, 000
Presuming that Average Method of inventory is used, prepare,
I] Statement of equivalent production
II] Statement showing cost for each element
III] Statement of apportionment of cost
IV] Process Account
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is given in respect of Process No.3 for the month of January 2001.
Opening stock: 2000 units made of,
Direct Material I: Rs.12, 350
Direct Material II: Rs.13, 200
Direct Labor: Rs.17, 500
Overheads: Rs.11, 000
Transferred from Process No.2: 20, 000 units @ Rs.6 per unit
Transferred to Process No.4: 17, 000 units
Expenditure incurred in Process No.3:
Direct Materials: Rs.30, 000
Direct Labor: Rs.60, 000
Overheads: Rs.60, 000
Scrap: 1, 000 units: Degree of completion: Direct Materials. 100%, Direct Labor: 60%, Overheads. 40%, normal loss 10% of production
Scrapped units realized @ Rs. 4 per unit.
Closing stock: 4,000 units, degree of completion: Direct Materials 80%, Direct Labor 60% and overheads 40%
Prepare Process 3 A/c using average price method, along with necessary supporting statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A certain product passes through three processes before it is completed. The output of each process is charged to next process at a price calculated to give a profit of 20% on transfer price.[i.e. 25% on the cost price] The output of Process III is charged to finished goods stock account on a similar basis. There was no work in progress at the beginning of the year and overheads had been ignored. Stocks in each process have been valued at prime cost of the processes.
The following data are obtained at the end of December 2007
|
Particulars
|
Process I Rs.
|
Process II Rs.
|
Process III Rs.
|
Finished Stock Rs
|
|
Direct Material
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
40,000
|
|
|
Direct Wages
|
20,000
|
30,000
|
10,000
|
|
|
Stock as on 31st December
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
30,000
|
30,000
|
|
Sales during the year
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
1,70,000
|
From the above information prepare,
[a] Process cost accounts showing the profit element at each stage
[b] Actual realized profit
[c] Stock valuation as would appear in the Balance Sheet
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
X Ltd. manufactures Product A, which yields two by-products B and C. The actual joint expenses of manufacture for a period were Rs.8, 000. It was estimated that the profits on each product as a percentage of sales would be 30%, 25% and 15% respectively. Subsequent expenses were as follows:
|
Particulars
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Product C
|
|
Materials
|
Rs.100
|
Rs.75
|
Rs.25
|
|
Direct wages
|
200
|
125
|
50
|
|
Overheads
|
150
|
125
|
75
|
|
Total
|
450
|
325
|
150
|
|
Sales
|
Rs. 6,000
|
Rs. 4,000
|
Rs. 2,500
|
Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of the joint expenses of manufacture over the different products. Also presume that selling expenses are apportioned over the products as a percentage to sales.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the course of manufacture of the main product ‘P’, A and B also emerge. The joint expenses of manufacture amount to Rs.1, 19, 550. All the products are processed further after separation and sold as per details given below.
|
Particulars
|
Main Product P Rs.
|
By-Product A Rs.
|
By – Product B Rs.
|
|
Sales
|
90,000
|
60,000
|
40,000
|
|
Cost beyond split off point
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
4,000
|
|
Profit as percentage of sales
|
25%
|
20%
|
15%
|
Selling and administration overheads are absorbed as a percentage of cost of sales. Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of joint cost to the main product and by-products. Also prepare main product ‘P’ account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a concern engaged in process industry, four products emerge from a particular process of operation. The total cost of input for the period ended 30th September 2002 is Rs.2, 53, 500. The details of output, additional cost after ‘split off point’ and sales value of the products are appended below.
|
Product
|
Output – kg
|
Additional processing cost after split-off point – Rs.
|
Sales value Rs.
|
|
A
|
8, 000
|
60, 000
|
1,68,000
|
|
B
|
5, 000
|
10, 000
|
1,10,000
|
|
C
|
3, 000
|
—
|
60,000
|
|
D
|
4, 000
|
20, 000
|
90,000
|
If the products are sold at ‘split off point’ without further processing, the sales value would have been,
A: Rs.1, 15, 000
B: Rs.90, 000
C: Rs.55, 000
D: Rs.80, 000
You are required to prepare a statement of profitability based on the products being sold:
I] After further processing, and
II] At the split off point.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JB Ltd. produces four joint products, A, B, C and D, all of which emerge from the processing of one raw material. The following are the relevant data:
Production for the period:
|
Joint Product
|
Number of Units
|
Selling Price per Unit Rs.
|
|
A
|
500
|
18.00
|
|
B
|
900
|
8.00
|
|
C
|
400
|
4.00
|
|
D
|
200
|
11.00
|
The company budgets for a profit of 10% on sales value. The other estimated costs are:
Carriage inwards: Rs.1, 000
Direct wages: Rs.3, 000
Manufacturing overheads: Rs.2, 000
Administration overheads: 10% of the sales value
You are required to,
I] Calculate the maximum price that may be paid for the raw material
II] Prepare a comprehensive cost statement for each of the products allocating the materials and other costs based up on: Number of units and Sales value.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company purchases raw materials worth Rs.11.04 lakhs and processes them into four products, P,
Q, R and S, which have a unit sales value of Rs.3, Rs.9, Rs.16 and Rs.60 respectively at split-off point, as they could be sold as such to other processors. However, during a year, the company decided to further process and sell products P, Q and S while R was not be processed further but sold at split off point to other processors. The processing of raw materials into the four products cost Rs.28 lakhs to the company. The other data for the year were as under:
|
Product
|
Output -Units
|
Sales Rs. in lakhs
|
Additional processing costs after split off [All variable costs] Rs. in lakhs
|
|
P
|
10,00,000
|
46.00
|
12.00
|
|
Q
|
20,000
|
4.00
|
2.40
|
|
R
|
10,000
|
1.60
|
——
|
|
S
|
18,000
|
12.00
|
.40
|
You are required to work out the following information for managerial decision- making.
I] If the joint costs are allocated amongst the four products on the basis of ‘Net Realizable Value’ at split off point, what would be the company’s annual income?
II] If the company had sold off all other three products at split off stage, identify the increase/ decrease in the company’s annual income as compared to I above.
III] What sales strategy could the company have planned to maximize its profit in the year?
IV] Identify the net increase in income if the strategy at III is adopted, as compared to I above?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
XYZ Ltd. is maintaining separate set of books for financial accounts and cost accounts. You are required to prepare accounts in cost books and trial balance for the year ended 31st March 2006.
Information Available From Financial Accounts:
- Sales: Rs.6, 30, 000
- Indirect wages: Production Rs.38, 000, Administration Rs.22, 000, Sales and distribution
Rs. 30, 000
- Materials purchased: Rs.1, 50, 000
- Direct factory wages: Rs.2, 30, 000
- Production overheads: Rs.70, 000
- Selling and distribution overheads: Rs.60, 000
- Administration overheads: Rs.48, 000
The data available from cost accounts for the period include the following:
- Raw materials issued to production as indirect material Rs.20, 000
- Stores issued to production as direct materials Rs.1, 15, 000
- Raw materials of finished production Rs.4, 05, 000
- Cost of goods sold at finished goods stock valuation Rs.4, 00, 000
- Standard rate of production overhead absorption Re.0.50 per operating hour
- Rate of administration overhead absorption 20% of cost of production
- Rate of sales and distribution overhead absorption 10% of sales
- Actual operating hours worked 2, 40, 000
- There is no balance of stock on 1-4-2005
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Profit and Loss Accounts is shown in the financial books of a company for the year ended 30th September, 2002 together with a statement of reconciliation between the profit as per financial and cost accounts is given below.
Profit and Loss Account for the Year Ended 30/9/2002
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Opening Stock –R.M.
|
90, 000
|
Sales
|
15, 00, 000
|
|
Opening Stock – WIP
|
50, 000
|
Closing Stock – R.M.
|
98, 000
|
|
Opening Stock – FG
|
70, 000
|
Closing Stock – WIP
|
53, 000
|
|
Raw material purchases
|
5, 00, 000
|
Closing Stock – F.G.
|
72, 000
|
|
Direct wages
|
2, 00, 000
|
Miscellaneous receipts
|
45, 000
|
|
Factory overheads
|
2, 00, 000
|
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
1, 70, 000
|
|
|
|
Selling and Distribution expenses
|
2, 20, 000
|
|
|
|
Preliminary expenses written off
|
75, 000
|
|
|
|
Debenture interest
|
30, 000
|
|
|
|
Net profit
|
1, 63, 000
|
|
|
|
Total
|
17, 68, 000
|
Total
|
17, 68, 000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Statement of Reconciliation of Profit as per Financial and Cost Accounts
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Profit as per financial accounts
|
|
1, 63, 000
|
|
I] Difference in valuation of stock
|
|
|
|
Add: Raw materials –closing stock
|
1, 200
|
|
|
Work-in-progress –opening stock
|
1, 300
|
|
|
Finished goods – opening stock
|
2, 000
|
|
|
Closing stock
|
1, 500
|
|
|
Total [A]
|
5, 500
|
|
|
Less: Raw materials – opening stock
|
1, 650
|
|
|
Work – in –progress –closing stock
|
750
|
|
|
Total [B]
|
2, 400
|
|
|
A – B
|
|
3, 100
|
|
II] Other items
|
|
|
|
Add: Preliminary expenses written off
|
75, 000
|
|
|
Debenture interest
|
30, 000
|
|
|
Less: Miscellaneous receipts
|
45, 000
|
60, 000
|
|
Profit as per Cost Accounts
|
|
2, 26, 100
|
You are required to prepare the following accounts as they would appear in the Costing Ledger
i. Raw Material Control A/c
ii. Work –in – progress Control A/c
iii. Finished Goods Control A/c
iv. Cost of Sales A/c
v. Costing Profit and Loss A/c
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What do you understand by integral and non-integral system of accounting? What is a general ledger adjustment account?
2. What procedure you would adopt in order to reconcile, at the end of an accounting period, the overheads charged in cost accounts with that shown in the financial accounting?
3. Explain a] General ledger adjustment account. b] Stores ledger control account. c] Work in progress ledger control account. d] Finished goods ledger control account.
4. What are the advantages of control accounts?
5. A] State the advantages of maintaining a cost ledger.
B] Insert specimen entries in the following accounts of a cost ledger, explaining from what sources such entries are normally obtained, stores ledger control account, work in progress ledger control account, finished stock ledger control account, cost of sales account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalize the following transactions in the integrated books of account in the books of XYZ Ltd.
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Credit purchases
|
12, 00, 000
|
|
Production wages paid
|
7, 00, 000
|
|
Stocks issued to production orders
|
8, 00, 000
|
|
Work expenses charged to production
|
4, 50, 000
|
|
Finished goods transferred from production orders
|
18, 00, 000
|
|
Administration expenses charged to production
|
1, 50, 000
|
|
Work expenses outstanding
|
1, 20, 000
|
|
Work expenses paid
|
4, 60, 000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a Reconciliation Statement from the following particulars:
|
Particulars
|
Amount – Rs.
|
|
Profit as per cost accounts
|
2, 91, 000
|
|
Works overheads under-recovered
|
19, 000
|
|
Administration overheads under – recovered
|
45, 500
|
|
Selling overheads over – recovered
|
39, 000
|
|
Overvaluation of opening stock in cost accounts
|
30, 000
|
|
Overvaluation of closing stock in cost accounts
|
15, 000
|
|
Interest earned during the year
|
7, 500
|
|
Rent received during the year
|
54, 000
|
|
Bad debts written off during the year
|
18, 000
|
|
Preliminary expenses written off during the year
|
36, 000
|
|
Profit as per financial accounts
|
2,88,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available from the financial books of a company having a normal production capacity of 60, 000 units for the year ended 31st March 2007.
a) Sales Rs.10, 00, 000 [50, 000 units]
b) There was no opening and closing of finished units.
c) Direct material and direct wages cost were Rs.5, 00, 000 and Rs.2, 50, 000 respectively
d) Actual factory expenses were Rs.1, 50, 000 of which 60% are fixed
e) Actual administration expenses were Rs.45, 000, which are completely fixed.
f) Actual selling and distribution expenses were Rs.30, 000 out of which, 40% are fixed.
g) Interest and dividends received Rs.15, 000.
You are required to,
A. Find out profits as per financial books for the year ended 31st March 2007.
B. Prepare cost sheet and ascertain the profit as per the cost accounts for the year ended 31st
March 2007.
C. Prepare a statement reconciling profits shown by financial and cost books.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following particulars, prepare
a] A statement of cost of manufacture for the year,
b] A statement of profit as per cost accounts
c] Profit and Loss Accounts in financial books and,
d] Reconciliation of the difference in the profits as shown by b] and c] above,
Opening stock of raw materials: Rs.1, 00, 000
Closing stock of raw materials: Rs.1, 50, 000
Opening stock of finished product: Rs.2, 00, 000
Closing stock of finished product: Rs.50, 000
Purchases of raw materials: Rs.6, 00, 000
Wages: Rs.2, 50, 000
Charge factory overhead at 25% on prime cost. Office overheads will be levied at 75% on factory overheads. Actual works expenditure amounted to Rs.1, 93, 750 and actual office expenses amounted to Rs.1, 52, 500. The selling price was fixed at 25% above cost price.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following Profit and Loss A/c, prepare a Memorandum Reconciliation Account, showing the profit as per the Cost Accounts.
Profit And Loss A/c
|
Particulars
|
Amount – Rs.
|
Particulars
|
Amount – Rs.
|
|
To office salaries
|
11, 282
|
By gross profit
|
54, 648
|
|
To office expenses
|
6, 514
|
By dividends received
|
400
|
|
To salesmen’s salaries
|
4, 922
|
By interest received
|
150
|
|
To sales expenses
|
9, 304
|
|
|
|
To distribution expenses
|
2, 990
|
|
|
|
To loss on sale of machinery
|
1, 950
|
|
|
|
To fines
|
200
|
|
|
|
To discount on debentures
|
100
|
|
|
|
To net profit
|
17, 936
|
|
|
|
Total
|
55, 198
|
Total
|
55, 198
|
|
To income tax
|
8, 000
|
By net profit
|
17, 936
|
|
To reserve
|
1, 000
|
|
|
|
To dividend
|
4, 000
|
|
|
|
To balance c/d
|
4, 936
|
|
|
|
Total
|
17, 936
|
Total
|
17, 936
|
The Cost Accountant of the company has ascertained a profit of Rs.19, 636 as per his books.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the year ended, 31st March 2007, the profit of a company as per financial Profit and Loss A/c was Rs.33, 248 as given below. Prepare a reconciliation statement and arrive at a profit as per cost accounts using the additional information given.
Profit and Loss Account
Debit Credit
|
Particulars
|
Amount- Rs.
|
Particulars
|
Amount – Rs.
|
|
To opening stock
|
4, 94, 358
|
By sales
|
6, 93, 000
|
|
To purchases
|
1, 64, 308
|
By sundry income
|
632
|
|
Less: Closing stock
|
1, 50, 242
|
|
|
|
5, 08, 424
|
|
|
|
To direct wages
|
46, 266
|
|
|
|
To factory overheads
|
41, 652
|
|
|
|
To administrative overheads
|
19, 690
|
|
|
|
To selling expenses
|
44, 352
|
|
|
|
To net profit
|
33, 248
|
|
|
|
Total
|
6, 93, 632
|
Total
|
6, 93, 632
|
The costing records show:
A. Closing stock Rs.1, 56, 394
B. Direct wages absorbed Rs.49, 734
C. Factory overheads absorbed Rs.39, 428
D. Administration expenses calculated @ 3% of sales
E. Selling expenses absorbed @ 5% of sales
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What do you understand by ‘Material Control’? What are the essentials of an efficient material control system?
2. Explain the role played by ‘Material Control’ in cost control and cost reduction.
3. Describe briefly the functions of each of the following departments with regard to material control.
A] Stores Purchase B] Stores receiving and inspection department C] Store keeping department
D] Production department and E] Stock control department
4. Indicate the reasons why the purchase department should function as a separate department and state the advantages of a centralized purchase function.
5. What is a purchase requisition? Give a specimen form of purchase requisition and state the information contained therein.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The existing incentive system of a certain factory is, Normal working week: 5 days of 9 hours each plus 3 late shifts of 3 hours each Rate of payment: Day work – Rs.10 per hour, late shift – Rs.15 per hour
Additional hours payable: Rs.25 per day shift, Rs.15 per late shift Average output per operative for 54 hours week, i.e. including 3 late shifts: 120 articles In order to increase output and eliminate overtime it was decided to switch on to a system of payment by results. The following information is obtained.
Time rate [as usual] Rs.10 per hour
Basic time allowed for 15 articles: 5 hours
Piecework rate: Add 20% to price
Premium bonus: Add 50% to time
You are required to work out,
[I] Hours worked
[II] Weekly earnings
[III] Number of articles produced and
[IV] Labor cost per article for an operative under the following systems
- Existing time rate
- Straight piece rate
- Rowan plan
- Halsey plan
Assume that 135 articles are produced in a 45 hours week under straight piece rate, Rowan plan and Halsey plan. The additional bonus under the existing system will be discontinued in the proposed incentive scheme.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a factory bonus system, bonus hours are credited to the employees in the proportion of time taken which time saved bears to time allowed. Jobs are carried forward from one week to another. No overtime worked and payment is made in full for all units worked on, including those subsequently rejected. From the following information you are required to calculate for each employee –
[a] The bonus hours and amount of bonus earned.
[b] The total wage costs and
[c] The wages cost of each good unit produced.
|
Particulars
|
Worker A
|
Worker B
|
Worker C
|
|
Z
|
Rs.10
|
Rs.16
|
Rs.12
|
|
Units produced for production
|
2500
|
2200
|
3600
|
|
Time allowed for 100 units
|
2 hrs. 35 minutes
|
3 hours
|
1 hour 30 minutes
|
|
Time taken
|
52 hours
|
75 hours
|
48 hours
|
|
Rejects
|
100 units
|
40 units
|
400 units
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
XYZ Ltd. has introduced a Scanlon plan of incentive bonus for its employees from the year 2006 -07.The relevant information for three previous years is as follows.
|
Year
|
Sales Revenue Rs.
|
Total Salaries and Wages Rs
|
|
2003-04
|
2,40,000
|
72,000
|
|
2004-05
|
2,50,000
|
70,000
|
|
2005-06
|
2,70,000
|
86,400
|
For the year 2006-07, the sales revenue has been Rs.3, 25, 000 and the total salaries and wages paid Rs.90, 000. What is the amount due to employees under Scanlon Plan? If 50% is set-aside in the bonus equalization reserve fund, how much money is to be paid out for 2006-07 as Scanlon Bonus?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your organization is experiencing a high labor turnover in recent years, and management would like you to submit a report on the loss suffered by the company due to such labor turnover. Following figures are available for your consideration.
Sales: Rs.600 lakhs
Direct materials: Rs.150 lakhs
Direct labor: Rs.48 lakhs on 4, 80, 000 man hours
Other variable expenses: Rs.60 lakhs
Fixed overheads: Rs.80 lakhs
The direct man hours include 9000 man hours spent on trainees and replacements, only 50% of which were productive. Further, during the year 12, 000 man-hours of potential work could not be availed of because of delayed replacement. The cost incurred due to separation and replacements amounted to Rs.1 lakh. On the basis of the above data, prepare a comparative statement showing actual profit vis-à-vis the profit which would have been realized had there been no labor turnover.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company uses an old method of machining a part manufactured for sale. The estimates of operating details for the year 2005-06 are given below.
Number of parts to be manufactured and sold: 30, 000
Raw materials required per part: 10 kg @ Rs.2 per kg
Average wage rate per worker: Rs.40 per day of 8 hours
Average labor efficiency: 60%
Standard time required to manufacture one part: 2 hours
Overhead rate: Rs.10 per clock hour
Material handling expenses: 2% of the value of raw material.
The company has a suggestion box scheme and an award equivalent to three months saving in labor cost is passed on to the employee whose suggestion is accepted. In response to this scheme suggestion has been received from an employee to use a special Jig in the manufacture of the aforesaid part. The cost of the Jig, which has life of one year is Rs.30, 000 and the use of the Jig will reduce the standard time by 12 minutes.
Required:
[a] Compute the amount of award payable to the employee who has given the suggestion.
[b] Prepare a statement showing the annual cost of production before and after the implementation of the suggestion to use the Jig and indicate the annual saving.
[c] State the assumptions on which your calculations are based.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management of a manufacturing unit is considering extensive modernization of the factory through progressive mechanization, which would result in improved productivity and reduced strength. Through negotiations with the union, it was agreed that for every 1% increase in productivity, workers would be paid 0.5% incentive wages. It was also agreed that through voluntary retirement the staff strength would be reduced to 300 from the present level of 400. The following further comparative data are available before and after the proposed mechanization.
|
Particulars
|
Before mechanization
|
After mechanization
|
|
Number of articles produced per month
|
50,000
|
48,000
|
|
Fringe benefits: 50% of wages
|
|
|
|
Wages paid per month: Rs.4,00,000
|
|
|
|
Sales per month: [value] Rs.24,00,000
|
|
|
|
Profit/volume ratio: 25%
|
|
|
Based on the above data, you are required to work out the annual financial implications of the
proposal.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has three production departments A, B and C and two service departments, X and Y.
The following data are extracted from the records of the company for a particular period.
|
Sr. No.
|
Particulars
|
Amount (Rs.)
|
|
01
|
Rent and Taxes
|
25,000
|
|
02
|
General lighting
|
3,000
|
|
03
|
Indirect Wages
|
7,500
|
|
04
|
Power
|
7,500
|
|
05
|
Depreciation of Machinery
|
50,000
|
|
06
|
Sundries
|
50,000
|
Additional Data
|
Particulars
|
Total
|
Dept. A
|
Dept. C
|
Dept. X
|
Dept. Y
|
|
Direct Wages (Rs.)
|
50,000
|
15,000
|
15,000
|
7,500
|
2,500
|
|
Horsepower of Machines
|
150
|
60
|
50
|
10
|
–
|
|
Cost of Machinery (Rs.)
|
12,50,000
|
3,00,000
|
5,00,000
|
25,000
|
25,000
|
|
Production has worked
|
—
|
6226
|
4066
|
—
|
–
|
|
Floor space (sq.mtrs)
|
10,000
|
2,000
|
3,000
|
2,000
|
500
|
|
Lighting points ( Nos.)
|
60
|
10
|
20
|
10
|
05
|
Service Departments’ Expenses Allocation:-
|
Department
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
X
|
Y
|
|
X (%)
|
20
|
30
|
40
|
–
|
10
|
|
Y (%)
|
40
|
30
|
20
|
10
|
–
|
You are required to,
A. Prepare primary and secondary distribution summary according to repeated distribution System.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has three production departments, A, B and C and two service departments, P and Q. The following figures are available from the primary distribution summary.
|
Department
|
Dept A
|
Dept B
|
Dept C
|
Dept P
|
Dept Q
|
|
From Primary Distribution (Rs.)
|
3,150
|
3,700
|
1,400
|
2,250
|
1,000
|
The expenses of the service departments are to be apportioned on a percentage basis as follows.
|
Department
|
Dept A
|
Dept B
|
Dept C
|
Dept P
|
Dept Q
|
|
P (%)
|
40
|
30
|
20
|
–
|
10
|
|
Q (%)
|
30
|
30
|
20
|
20
|
–
|
Prepare Secondary Distribution Summary as per the Simultaneous Equations Method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has two production departments and two service departments. The data relating to a kperiod are as follows.
|
Particulars
|
Prod. Dept. I
|
Prod. Dept. II
|
Service Dept I
|
Service Dept II
|
|
Direct Materials
|
80,000
|
40,000
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
|
Direct Wages
|
95,000
|
50,000
|
20,000
|
10,000
|
|
Overheads
|
80,000
|
50,000
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
|
Power requirement at normal capacity operation (Kwh)
|
20,000
|
35,000
|
12,500
|
17,500
|
|
Actual power consumption (Kwh)
|
13,000
|
23,000
|
10,250
|
10,000
|
The power requirement of these departments are met by a power generation plant. The said plant incurred an expenditure which is not included above, of Rs.1,21,875 out of which a sum of Rs. 84,375 was variable and the rest fixed.
After apportionment of power generation plant costs to the four departments, the service department overheads are to be redistributed on the following basis.
|
Departments
|
Prod. Dept I
|
Prod. Dept II
|
Service Dept I
|
Service Dept II
|
|
Service Dept I (%)
|
50
|
40
|
–
|
10
|
|
Service Dpet II
|
60
|
20
|
20
|
–
|
You are required to,
i. Apportion the power generation plant costs to the four departments
ii. Reapportion service department cost to production departments
iii. Calculate the overhead rate per direct labor hour of production departments, given that the direct wages rates of Production Dept I, II are Rs. 5 and Rs. 4 per hour respectively.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A machine was purchased on 1st January, 2007 for Rs. 5 lakhs. The total cost of all machinery inclusive of the new machine was Rs. 75 lakhs. The following further particulars were available.
Expected life of the machine – 10 years
Scrap value at the end of the life – Rs. 5,000
Repairs and maintenance for the machine during the year Rs. 2,000
Expected number of working hours of the machine per year 4,000
Insurance premium annually for all machines Rs. 4,00
Power consumption for the machine per hour @ Rs. 5 @ per unit = 25 units
Area occupied by the machine – 100 sq feet
Area occupied by other machines – 1,500 sq. feet
Rent per month of the department Rs. 800
Lighting charges for 20 points for the whole department out of which three points are for the new
machine – Rs.120 per month
Compute the machine hour rate for the machine.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cost accounts of ABC Chemicals Ltd., determined the overhead recovery rate for the year 2006
–07 (based on direct labor hours) with the following estimates.
Indirect labor Rs. 1,15,000
Inspection Rs. 70,000
Factory supervision Rs. 50,000
Depreciation and maintenance Rs. 1,25,000
Total Factory Overheads Rs. 3,60,000
Direct labor hours – 75,000
Hourly wages rate – Rs. 15
The actual results for the year are as follows
|
Particulars
|
Amount in Rupees
|
|
Indirect labor
|
99,000
|
|
Inspection
|
73,000
|
|
Factory supervision
|
51,000
|
|
Depreciation and maintenance
|
1,15,000
|
|
Total actual factory overheads
|
3,38,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
Hrs 67,600
|
|
Hourly wage rate
|
Rs. 16
|
Calculate the predetermined overhead recovery rate and find out the amount of over/under absorptionif any.
How will you treat the over/under absorption amounts in Cost Accounts?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a manufacturing unit, overhead was recovered at a predetermined rate of Rs. 20 per labor hour. The total factory overhead incurred and the labor hours actually worked were Rs. 45,00,000 and2,00,000 respectively. During this period, 30,000 units were sold. At the end of the period 5,000 units were held in stock while there was no opening stock of finished goods. Similarly though there was no stock of uncompleted units at the beginning of the period, at the end of the period there were 10,000 incomplete units which may be reckoned as 50% complete. On analyzing the reasons, it was found that 60% of the unabsorbed overheads were due to defective planning and rest were attributed to increase in overhead costs.
How would unabsorbed overheads be treated in cost accounts?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What do you understand by ‘overheads’? How will you classify them?
2. Write a detailed note on ‘Collection and Codification of Overheads.’
3. Distinguish between ‘Primary and Secondary Distribution of Overheads.’
4. What do you understand by ‘Secondary Distribution Summary’? What are the methods of the same?
5. Distinguish between ‘allocation and apportionment’ of overheads.
6. Describe the different bases on which factory overheads can be apportioned.
7. What is ‘absorption of overheads’? What are the methods used for absorption of overheads?
8. Explain a] Direct Material Cost and b] Prime Cost Method of absorption of overheads.
9. Discuss fully ‘machine hour rate method’ of absorption of overheads. How will you compute the machine hour rate?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
M/s New Century Builders have entered into a contract to build an office building complex for Rs.480 lakhs. The work started in April 1997 and it is estimated that the contract will take 15 months to be completed. Work has progressed as per schedule and the actual costs charged till March 1998 was as follows.
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.in lakhs
|
|
Materials
|
112.20
|
|
Labor
|
162.00
|
|
Hire charges for equipment and other expenses
|
36.00
|
|
Establishment charges
|
32.40
|
The following information are available:
|
Particulars
|
Amount- Rs.in lakhs
|
|
Material in hand 31st March 1998
|
10.50
|
|
Work certified [of which Rs.324 lakhs have been paid] as on 31st March 1998
|
400.00
|
|
Work not certified as on 31st March 1998
|
7.50
|
As per Management estimates, the following further expenditure will be incurred to complete the work.
Materials: Rs.10.50 lakhs
Labor: Rs.16.00 lakhs
Sub-contractor: Rs.20.00 lakhs
Equipments hire and other charges: Rs.3.00 lakhs
Establishment charges: Rs.6.90 lakhs
You are required to compute the value of work-in-progress as on March 31st, 1998 after considering a reasonable margin of profit and show the appropriate accounts. Make a provision for contingencies amounting to 5% of the total costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Construction Ltd. is engaged in two contracts, A and B during the year. Following information is available at the year- end.
|
Particulars
|
Contract A Rs.
|
Contract B Rs.
|
|
Date of commencement
|
April 1st
|
September 1st
|
|
Contract price
|
6,00,000
|
5,00,000
|
|
Materials delivered direct to site
|
1,20,000
|
50,000
|
|
Materials issued from store
|
40,000
|
10,000
|
|
Materials returned to store
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
Material on site on December 31st
|
22,000
|
8,000
|
|
Direct labor payments
|
1,40,000
|
35,000
|
|
Direct expenses
|
60,000
|
30,000
|
|
Architect’s fees
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
|
Establishment charges
|
25,000
|
7,000
|
|
Plant installed at cost
|
80,000
|
70,000
|
|
Value of plant on 31st December
|
65,000
|
64,000
|
|
Accrued wages 31st December
|
10,000
|
7,000
|
|
Accrued expenses 31st December
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
|
Cost of contract not certified by architect
|
23,000
|
10,000
|
|
Value of contract certified by architect
|
4,20,000
|
1,35,000
|
|
Cash received from contractor
|
3,78,000
|
1,25,000
|
During the period, materials amounting to Rs.9, 000 have been transferred from contract A to contract
B. You are required to show,
[a] Contract A/c, Contractee A/c and
[b] Extract from the Balance Sheet as on 31st December showing the calculation of WIP
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company undertook a contract for construction of a large building complex. The construction work commenced on 1st April 2005 and the following data are available for the year ended on 31st March 2006.
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.000s
|
|
Contract price
|
35,000
|
|
Work certified
|
20,000
|
|
Progress payment received
|
15,000
|
|
Materials issued to site
|
7,500
|
|
Planning and estimating costs
|
1,000
|
|
Direct wages paid
|
4,000
|
|
Materials returned from site
|
250
|
|
Plant hire charges
|
1,750
|
|
Wages related costs
|
500
|
|
Site office costs
|
678
|
|
Head office expenses apportioned
|
375
|
|
Direct expenses incurred
|
902
|
|
Work not certified
|
149
|
The contractors own a plant which originally cost Rs.20 lakhs has been continuously in use in this contract throughout the year. The residual value of the plant after 5 years of life is expected to be Rs.5 lakhs. Straight-line method of depreciation is in use. As on 31st March 2006, the direct wages due and payable amounted to Rs.2, 70, 000 and the materials at site were estimated at Rs.2, 00,000.
Required:
[a] Prepare the contract account for the year ended 31st March 2006
[b] Show the calculation of profits to be taken to the Profit and Loss A/c of the year
[c] Show the relevant Balance Sheet entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prabhu Builders Ltd. commenced work on 1st April 2005 on a contract of which the agreed price was Rs. 5 lakhs. The following expenditure was incurred during the year up to 31st March 2006.
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Wages
|
1, 40, 000
|
|
Plant
|
35, 000
|
|
Materials
|
1, 05, 000
|
|
Head office expenses
|
12, 500
|
Materials costing Rs.10, 000 proved unsuitable and were sold for Rs.11, 500 and a part of plant was scrapped and sold for Rs.1, 700. Of the contract price Rs.2, 40, 000 representing 80% of work certified had been received by 31st March 2006 and on that date the value of the plant on the job was Rs.8, 000 and the value of materials was Rs. 3, 000. The cost of work done but not certified was Rs.25, 000. It was decided to [a] Estimate what further expenditure would be incurred in completing the contract.
[b] Compute from the estimate and the expenditure already incurred, the total profit that would be made on the contract and [c] Ascertain the amount of profit to be taken to the credit of Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on 31st March 2006. While taking profit to the credit of Profit and Loss A/c, that portion of the total profit should be taken which the value of work certified bears to the contract price. Details of the estimates are given below.
i. That the contract would be completed by 30th September 2006
ii. The wages to complete would amount Rs.84, 750
iii. That materials in addition to those in stock on 31st March 2006 would cost Rs.50, 000
iv. That further Rs.15, 000 would have to be spent on plant and the residual value of the plant on 30th
September 2006 would be Rs.6, 000
v. The head office expenses to the contract would be at the same annual rate as in 2005-06.
vi. That claims, temporary maintenance and contingencies would require Rs.9, 000
Prepare contract account for the year ended 31st March 2006 and show your calculations of the sum to be credited to Profit and Loss A/c for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through two processes A and B. Prepare the process accounts from the following details.
|
Particulars
|
Process A
|
Process B
|
|
10, 000 units introduced at a cost Rs.
|
20,000
|
—
|
|
Materials consumed Rs.
|
24,000
|
12,000
|
|
Direct labor Rs.
|
28,000
|
16,000
|
|
Manufacturing expenses Rs.
|
8,000
|
8,566
|
|
Normal wastages on input
|
5%
|
10%
|
|
Scrap value of normal wastage Rs. Per 100 units
|
40
|
50
|
|
Output [units]
|
9,400
|
8,500
|
Also prepare the abnormal wastage/effective account as the case may be with each process account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A material used for building is produced in three grades. The following information is available.
|
Particulars
|
Process I – Rs.
|
Process II – Rs.
|
Process III – Rs.
|
|
Raw material used [1000 tons]
|
1, 00, 000
|
—
|
—
|
|
Wages
|
87, 500
|
39, 500
|
10, 710
|
|
Weight lost [% of input]
|
5%
|
10%
|
20%
|
|
Scrap [sales price of Rs.50 per ton]
|
50 tons
|
30 tons
|
51 tons
|
|
Sale price per ton of finished goods
|
Rs.350
|
Rs.500
|
Rs.800
|
Management expenses were Rs.17,500 and selling expenses Rs.10,000. 2/3rd of output of process and 50% of the output of process II is passed to the next process and remaining is sold. The entire output of process III is sold. Prepare Process Accounts and Statement of Profit.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For the year ended December 31, 2007, Ajax Corporation had net income per books of $1,200,000. Included in the determination of net income were the following items:
|
Interest income on municipal bonds
|
$ 40,000
|
|
Damages received from settlement of patent infringement lawsuit
|
200,000
|
|
Interest paid on loan to purchase municipal bonds
|
8,000
|
|
Provision for federal income tax
|
524,000
|
What should Ajax report as its taxable income for 2007?
- $1,492,000
- $1,524,000
- $1,684,000
- $1,692,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Olex Corporation’s books disclosed the following data for the calendar year 2007:
|
Retained earnings at beginning of year
|
$50,000
|
|
Net income for year
|
70,000
|
|
Contingency reserve established at end of year
|
10,000
|
|
Cash dividends paid during year
|
8,000
|
What amount should appear on the last line of reconciliation Schedule M-2 of Form 1120?
- $102,000
- $120,000
- $128,000
- $138,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bank Corp. owns 80% of Shore Corp.’s outstanding capital stock. Shore’s capital stock consists of 50,000 shares of common stock issued and outstanding. Shore’s 2007 net income was $140,000. During 2007, Shore declared and paid dividends of $60,000. In conformity with generally accepted accounting principles, Bank recorded the following entries in 2007:
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Investment in Shore Corp. common stock
|
$112,000
|
|
|
|
Equity in earnings of subsidiary
|
|
$112,000
|
|
Cash
|
48,000
|
|
|
|
Investment in Shore Corp. common
|
|
|
|
|
stock
|
|
48,000
|
In its 2007 consolidated tax return, Bank should report dividend revenue of
- $48,000
- $14,400
- $ 9,600
- $0
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Potter Corp. and Sly Corp. file consolidated tax returns. In January 2006, Potter sold land, with a basis of $60,000 and a fair value of $100,000, to Sly for $100,000. Sly sold the land in June 2007 for $125,000. In its 2007 and 2006 tax returns, what amount of gain should be reported for these transactions in the consolidated return?
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
a.
|
$25,000
|
$40,000
|
|
b.
|
$25,000
|
$0
|
|
c.
|
$40,000
|
$25,000
|
|
d.
|
$65,000
|
$0
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dana Corp. owns stock in Seco Corp. For Dana and Seco to qualify for the filing of consolidated returns, at least what percentage of Seco’s total voting power and total value of stock must be directly owned by Dana?
|
|
Total voting power
|
Total value of stock
|
|
a.
|
51%
|
51%
|
|
b.
|
51%
|
80%
|
|
c.
|
80%
|
51%
|
|
d.
|
80%
|
80%
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Salon, Inc. distributed cash and personal property to its sole shareholder. Using the following facts, determine the amount of gain that would be recognized by Salon, Inc. as the result of making the distribution to its shareholder?
|
Item
|
Amount
|
|
Cash
|
$20,000
|
|
Personal property:
|
|
|
|
Fair market value
|
6,000
|
|
|
Adjusted basis
|
3,000
|
|
|
Liability on property assumed by shareholder
|
10,000
|
- $ 3,000
- $ 4,000
- $ 7,000
- $23,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kent Corp. is a calendar-year, accrual-basis C corporation. In 2007, Kent made a nonliquidating distribution of property with an adjusted basis of $150,000 and a fair market value of $200,000 to Reed, its sole shareholder. The following information pertains to Kent:
|
Reed’s basis in Kent stock at January 1, 2007
|
$500,000
|
|
Accumulated earnings and profits at January 1, 2007
|
125,000
|
|
Current earnings and profits for 2007
|
60,000
|
What was taxable as dividend income to Reed for 2007?
- $ 60,000
- $150,000
- $185,000
- $200,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 1, 2007, Gelt Corporation declared a dividend and distributed to its sole shareholder, as a dividend in kind, a parcel of land that was not an inventory asset. On the date of the distribution, the following data were available:
|
Adjusted basis of land
|
$ 6,500
|
|
Fair market value of land
|
14,000
|
|
Mortgage on land
|
5,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In 2007, Kara Corp. incurred the following expenditures in connection with the repurchase of its stock from shareholders to avert a hostile takeover:
|
Interest on borrowings used to repurchase stock
|
$100,000
|
|
Legal and accounting fees in connection with the repurchase
|
400,000
|
The total of the above expenditures deductible in 2007 is
- $0
- $100,000
- $400,000
- $500,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Par Corp. acquired the assets of its wholly owned subsidiary, Sub Corp., under a plan that qualified as a tax-free complete liquidation of Sub. Which of the following of Sub’s unused carryovers may be transferred to Par?
|
|
Excess charitable contributions
|
Net operating loss
|
|
a.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 1, 2007, Green Corp. adopted a plan of complete liquidation. The liquidation was completed within a twelve-month period. On August 1, 2007, Green distributed to its stockholders installment notes receivable that Green had acquired in connection with the sale of land in 2006. The following information pertains to these notes:
|
Green’s basis
|
$ 90,000
|
|
Fair market value
|
162,000
|
|
Face amount
|
185,000
|
How much gain must Green recognize in 2007 as a result of this distribution?
- $0
- $23,000
- $72,000
- $95,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carmela Corporation had the following assets on January 2, 2007, the date on which it adopted a plan of complete liquidation:
|
|
Adjusted basis
|
Fair market value
|
|
Land
|
$ 75,000
|
$150,000
|
|
Inventory
|
43,500
|
66,000
|
|
Totals
|
$118,500
|
$216,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Hull, Inc., a personal holding company, for the year ended December 31, 2007:
|
Undistributed personal holding company income
|
$100,000
|
|
Dividends paid during 2007
|
20,000
|
|
Consent dividends reported in the 2007 individual income tax returns of the holders of Hull’s common stock, but not paid by Hull to its stockholders
|
10,000
|
In computing its 2007 personal holding company tax, what amount should Hull deduct for dividends paid?
- $0
- $10,000
- $20,000
- $30,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kee Holding Corp. has eighty unrelated equal stockholders. For the year ended December 31, 2007, Kee’s income comprised the following:
|
Net rental income
|
$ 1,000
|
|
Commissions earned on sales of franchises
|
3,000
|
|
Dividends from taxable domestic corporations
|
90,000
|
Deductible expenses for 2007 totaled $10,000. Kee paid no dividends for the past three years. Kee’s liability for personal holding company tax for 2007 will be based on
- $12,000
- $11,000
- $ 9,000
- $0
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following figures relating to two components X and Y, compute Reorder Level, Minimum Level, Maximum Level and Average Stock Level.
|
Particulars
|
Component X
|
Component Y
|
|
Maximum consumption per week
|
75 units
|
75 units
|
|
Average consumption per week
|
50 units
|
50 units
|
|
Minimum consumption per week
|
25 units
|
25 units
|
|
Reorder period
|
4 to 6 weeks
|
2 to 4 weeks
|
|
Reorder quantity
|
400 units
|
600 units
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following particulars in respect of a material, compute the Economic Ordering Quantity by preparing a table.
|
Ordering Quantities
|
Price Per Kg.
|
|
Less than 250
|
6.00
|
|
250 and less than
|
5.90
|
|
800 and less than
|
5.80
|
|
2000 and less than
|
5.70
|
|
4000 and above
|
5.60
|
The annual demand for the material is 4000 kg. Stock holding costs are 20% of the material cost per Annum. The ordering and receiving costs are Rs.10 per order.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the summary of the receipts and issues of material in a factory during December
2007. Prepare Store Ledger according to First in First Out Method. December 2007
1. Opening balance 500 units @ Rs.25 per unit
3. Issue 70 units
4. Issue 100 units
8. Issue 80 units
13. Received from supplier 200 units @ Rs.24.50 per unit
14. Returned to store 15 units @ Rs.24 per unit
16. Issue 180 units.
20. Received from supplier 240 units @ Rs.24.75 per unit
24. Issue 304 units.
25. Received from supplier 320 units @ Rs.24.50 per unit
26. Issue 112 units
27. Returned to store 12 units @ Rs.24.50 per unit
28. Received from supplier 100 units @ Rs.25 per unit
It was revealed that on 15th there was a shortage of five units and another on 27th of 8 units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Store Ledger Account for Material X in a manufacturing concern reveals the following data for the quarter ended on 30th September
|
Date
|
Particulars
|
Receipts
|
Issue
|
|
|
|
Quantity
|
Price Rs.
|
Quantity
|
Price Rs.
|
|
July1
|
Balance b / d
|
1,600
|
2.00
|
|
|
|
July 9
|
Receipts
|
3,000
|
2.20
|
|
|
|
July13
|
Issue
|
|
|
1,200
|
2.556
|
|
Aug.5
|
Issue
|
|
|
900
|
1.917
|
|
Aug.17
|
Receipts
|
3,600
|
2.40
|
|
|
|
Aug.24
|
Issue
|
|
|
1,800
|
4.122
|
|
Sept.11
|
Receipts
|
2,500
|
2.50
|
|
|
|
Sept.27
|
Issue
|
|
|
2,100
|
4.971
|
|
Sept.29
|
Issue
|
|
|
700
|
1.656
|
Physical verification on September 30th revealed an actual stock of 3, 800 units. You are required to,
[a] Indicate the method of pricing employed above.
[b] Complete the above account by making entries you would consider necessary including adjustments, if any, and giving explanations for such adjustments.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following transactions in respect of Material Y occurred during the six months ended 30th June 2007.
|
Month
|
Purchased [Units]
|
Price Per Unit Rs.
|
Issued [Units]
|
|
January
|
200
|
25
|
Nil
|
|
February
|
300
|
24
|
250
|
|
March
|
425
|
26
|
300
|
|
April
|
475
|
23
|
550
|
|
May
|
500
|
25
|
800
|
|
June
|
600
|
20
|
400
|
Required: The Chief Accountant argues that the value of closing stock remains the same, no matter which method of pricing of material issues is used. Do you agree? Why or why not? Detailed Stores Ledgers are not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Ltd. provides you the following information. Calculate the cost of goods sold and ending inventory applying the Last in First Out method of pricing raw materials under the Perpetual Inventory and Periodic Inventory Control System.
|
Date
|
Particulars
|
Units
|
Per Unit Cost Rs.
|
|
January 1
|
Opening Stock
|
200
|
10
|
|
January 10
|
Purchases
|
400
|
12
|
|
January 12
|
Withdrawals
|
500
|
—
|
|
January 16
|
Purchases
|
300
|
11
|
|
January 19
|
Issues
|
200
|
—
|
|
January 30
|
Receipts
|
100
|
15
|
Also explain the difference in profits if any.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hart’s adjusted basis in Best Partnership was $9,000 at the time he received the following nonliquidating distribution of partnership property:
|
Cash
|
$ 5,000
|
|
Land
|
|
|
|
Adjusted basis
|
7,000
|
|
|
Fair market value
|
10,000
|
What was the amount of Hart’s basis in the land?
- $0
- $ 4,000
- $ 7,000
- $10,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 30, 2006, Berk retired from his partnership. At that time, his capital account was $50,000 and his share of the partnership’s liabilities was $30,000. Berk’s retirement payments consisted of being relieved of his share of the partnership liabilities and receipt of cash payments of $5,000 per month for eighteen months, commencing July 1, 2006. Assuming Berk makes no election with regard to the recognition of gain from the retirement payments, he should report income of
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
a.
|
$13,333
|
$26,667
|
|
b.
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
c.
|
40,000
|
—
|
|
d.
|
—
|
40,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Items 1 and 2 are based on the following data:
Mike Reed, a partner in Post Co., received the following distribution from Post:
|
|
Post’s basis
|
Fair market value
|
|
Cash
|
$11,000
|
$11,000
|
|
Inventory
|
5,000
|
12,500
|
Before this distribution, Reed’s basis in Post was $25,000.
If this distribution were nonliquidating, Reed’s basis for the inventory would be
- $14,000
- $12,500
- $ 5,000
- $ 1,500
If this distribution were in complete liquidation of Reed’s interest in Post, Reed’s recognized gain or loss resulting from the distribution would be
- $7,500 gain.
- $9,000 loss
- $1,500 loss.
- $0
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adams, Beck, and Carr organized Flexo Corp. with authorized voting common stock of $100,000. Adams received 10% of the capital stock in payment for the organizational services that he rendered for the benefit of the newly formed corporation. Adams did not contribute property to Flexo and was under no obligation to be paid by Beck or Carr. Beck and Carr transferred property in exchange for stock as follows:
|
|
Adjusted basis
|
Fair market value
|
Percentage of Flexo stock acquired
|
|
Beck
|
5,000
|
20,000
|
20%
|
|
Carr
|
60,000
|
70,000
|
70%
|
What amount of gain did Carr recognize from this transaction?
- $40,000
- $15,000
- $10,000
- $0
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bass Corp., a calendar-year C corporation, made qualifying 2006 estimated tax deposits based on its actual 2005 tax liability. On March 15, 2007, Bass filed a timely automatic extension request for its 2006 corporate income tax return. Estimated tax deposits and the extension payment totaled $7,600. This amount was 95% of the total tax shown on Bass’ final 2006 corporate income tax return. Bass paid $400 additional tax on the final 2006 corporate income tax return filed before the extended due date. For the 2006 calendar year, Bass was subject to pay
- I. Interest on the $400 tax payment made in 2007.
- II. A tax delinquency penalty.
- a. I only.
- b. II only.
- c. Both I and II.
- d. Neither I nor II.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Edge Corp., a calendar-year C corporation, had a net operating loss and zero tax liability for its 2006 tax year. To avoid the penalty for underpayment of estimated taxes, Edge could compute its first quarter 2007 estimated income tax payment using the
|
|
Annualized income method
|
Preceding year method
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kisco Corp.’s taxable income for 2006 before taking the dividends received deduction was $70,000. This includes $10,000 in dividends from a 15%-owned taxable domestic corporation. Given the following tax rates, what would Kisco’s income tax be before any credits?
|
Taxable income partial rate table
|
Tax rate
|
|
Up to $50,000
|
15%
|
|
Over $50,000 but not over $75,000
|
25%
|
- $10,000
- $10,750
- $12,500
- $15,750
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eastern Corp., a calendar-year corporation, was formed during 2006. On January 3, 2007, Eastern placed five-year property in service. The property was depreciated under the general MACRS system. Eastern did not elect to use the straight-line method. The following information pertains to Eastern:
|
Eastern’s 2007 taxable income
|
$300,000
|
|
Adjustment for the accelerated depreciation taken on 2007 5-year property
|
1,000
|
|
2007 tax-exempt interest from private activity bonds
|
5,000
|
What was Eastern’s 2007 alternative minimum taxable income before the adjusted current earnings (ACE) adjustment?
- $306,000
- $305,000
- $304,000
- $301,000